Planet Technology Ip Dslam Idl 2400 Users Manual EM IDLv1

IDL-2401 to the manual 8631192e-a466-4cc6-bcec-484f23328d9b

2015-02-06

: Planet-Technology Planet-Technology-Ip-Dslam-Idl-2400-Users-Manual-519024 planet-technology-ip-dslam-idl-2400-users-manual-519024 planet-technology pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 707 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

IP DSLAM
IDL-2400 / IDL-2401
IDL-4800 / IDL-4801
User’s Manual
IDL series User Guide
2
Copyright
Copyright (C) 2007 PLANET Technology Corp. All rights reserved.
The products and programs described in this User’s Manual are licensed products of PLANET
Technology, This User’s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright, and this
User’s Manual and all accompanying hardware, software, and documentation are copyrighted.
No part of this User’s Manual may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to
any electronic medium or machine-readable form by any means by electronic or mechanical.
Including photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose
other than the purchaser's personal use, and without the prior express written permission of
PLANET Technology.
Disclaimer
PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and
applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect
to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose.
PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User’s Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims
liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.
Information in this User’s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that
may be contained in this User’s Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current
the information in this User’s Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User’s
Manual and/or to the products described in this User’s Manual, at any time without notice.
If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would
appreciate your comments and suggestions.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE mark Warning
The is a class A device, In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Trademarks
The PLANET logo is a trademark of PLANET Technology. This documentation may refer to
numerous hardware and software products by their trade names. In most, if not all cases, these
designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies.
WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of
the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end
users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the
crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal
waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Revision
User’s Manual for PLANET IP DSLAM
Model: IDL-2400/2401/4800/4801
Rev: 1.0
Part No.: EM-IDLv1
IP DSLAM
3
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................................................................................................ 24
1.1 Package Contents................................................................................................. 24
1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 25
1.3 Application............................................................................................................. 25
1.4 Outlook.................................................................................................................. 26
1.4.1 Front Panel............................................................................................... 27
1.4.2 Rear Panel................................................................................................ 28
1.5 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................ 29
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications ........................................................................... 29
1.5.2 Software Specifications............................................................................. 30
2. Installation.................................................................................................................. 32
2.1 Safety Instruction .................................................................................................. 32
2.2 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................ 33
2.2.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 33
2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection ............................................................................ 33
2.2.3 Front Panel Connection............................................................................ 34
2.3 IDL Manager Installation ....................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 35
2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager.............................................................................. 35
2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager................................................................................ 37
2.4 IDL Manager Functions......................................................................................... 38
2.4.1 Session..................................................................................................... 38
2.4.1.1 Logout...........................................................................................................38
2.4.1.2 Exit ................................................................................................................38
2.4.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 39
2.4.2.1 Environment Options.....................................................................................39
2.4.2.2 Territory Manager..........................................................................................42
2.4.2.3 Agent Manager..............................................................................................44
2.4.2.4 Telnet.............................................................................................................46
2.4.2.5 PING .............................................................................................................47
2.4.2.6 User Manager ...............................................................................................48
2.4.3 Windows................................................................................................... 51
2.4.3.1 Cascade........................................................................................................51
2.4.3.2 Next Window.................................................................................................51
2.4.3.3 Previous Window ..........................................................................................51
2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons................................................................................................52
2.4.4 Help .......................................................................................................... 52
2.4.4.1 About.............................................................................................................52
3. IDL Manager Management ........................................................................................ 53
3.1 Agent Desktop....................................................................................................... 53
3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window ............................................................................ 53
IDL series User Guide
4
3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop ........................................................................... 54
3.2 Active Function Management Windows ................................................................ 55
3.2.1 Function List Window ............................................................................... 55
3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window ...................................................................... 56
3.3 Default Setting ...................................................................................................... 56
3.4 System Information ............................................................................................... 57
3.5 Current Event........................................................................................................ 58
3.5.1 Outstanding Event .................................................................................... 58
3.5.2 Closed Event ............................................................................................ 59
3.5.3 Archived.................................................................................................... 60
3.6 System.................................................................................................................. 61
3.6.1 Commit and Reboot.................................................................................. 61
3.7 Configuration......................................................................................................... 62
3.7.1 VLAN ........................................................................................................ 62
3.7.2 Ethernet.................................................................................................... 63
3.8 DSL....................................................................................................................... 65
3.8.1 Profile ....................................................................................................... 65
3.8.1.1 Line Profile....................................................................................................65
3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile..................................................................................................66
3.8.1.3 All Line Profile ...............................................................................................67
3.8.2 Port Config................................................................................................ 67
3.9 DSL PM................................................................................................................. 70
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info ................................................................................... 70
3.9.2 Channel Layer Info ................................................................................... 71
4. Application Note ........................................................................................................ 72
4.1 Basic Configuration............................................................................................... 72
4.1.1 Create a new user .................................................................................... 72
4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration................................................................................. 72
4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg ........................................................................................73
4.1.2.2 Download procedure.....................................................................................74
4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg ...................................................................... 78
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration ...........................................................................78
4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration............................................................................79
4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg..................................................................................80
4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration............................................................................ 81
4.1.4.1 Configuration.................................................................................................82
4.1.5 Set System Time ...................................................................................... 87
4.1.5.1 Configuration.................................................................................................87
4.1.6 VLAN Configuration.................................................................................. 91
4.1.6.1 Configuration.................................................................................................91
4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate................................................... 98
IP DSLAM
5
4.1.7.1 Configuration.................................................................................................98
4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function .......................................................................... 105
4.1.8.1 Configuration...............................................................................................105
5. System Administration with CLI............................................................................. 106
5.1 About CLI Administration..................................................................................... 106
5.1.1 Notation Conventions ............................................................................. 106
5.1.2 Command Structure................................................................................ 106
5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms ........................................................... 107
5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description ............................................................. 108
5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands ........................................................... 109
5.2 802.1p commands................................................................................................114
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands..........................................................114
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio.......................................................................... 114
5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands...............................................................115
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo ............................................................................... 115
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo........................................................................... 115
5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands ........................................................117
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap......................................................................... 117
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap.................................................................... 117
5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands..............................................................119
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap .............................................................................. 119
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap ......................................................................... 119
5.3 ABOND Commands ............................................................................................ 121
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands................................................................ 121
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf ...................................................................................121
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf ..............................................................................121
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf...............................................................................121
5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf...............................................................................122
5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands ............................................................. 126
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats.................................................................................126
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats.............................................................................126
5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands ................................................................ 128
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry....................................................................................128
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry...............................................................................128
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry ...............................................................................128
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry ...............................................................................128
5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands................................................................. 131
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats ....................................................................................131
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats.................................................................................131
5.4 Aggregation commands ...................................................................................... 132
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands...................................................... 132
IDL series User Guide
6
5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info.................................................................................132
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info ............................................................................132
5.4.2 Aggr info Commands .............................................................................. 134
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf ................................................................................................134
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf ...........................................................................................134
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf............................................................................................134
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf............................................................................................134
5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands........................................................................... 138
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr ..............................................................................................138
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr .........................................................................................138
5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139
5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands .......................................................... 142
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info .........................................................................................142
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info.............................................................................142
5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands .......................................................... 146
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list...................................................................................146
5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands ........................................................ 147
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats................................................................................147
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats ............................................................................147
5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands ......................................................... 148
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info .....................................................................................148
5.4.7.2 Create rdncy aggr info ................................................................................149
5.4.7.3 Delete rdncy aggr info.................................................................................149
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info.................................................................................149
5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands .................................................... 151
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list ..........................................................................................151
5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands........................................................ 152
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats....................................................................................152
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats ................................................................................152
5.5 ATM commands .................................................................................................. 154
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands............................................................... 154
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats.......................................................................................154
5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands...................................................................... 155
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc .............................................................................................155
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc ........................................................................................155
5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands ........................................................... 157
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc ..........................................................................................157
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc .....................................................................................157
5.5.4 ATM Port Commands.............................................................................. 158
5.5.4.1 Get atm port ................................................................................................158
IP DSLAM
7
5.5.4.2 Create atm port ...........................................................................................158
5.5.4.3 Delete atm port ...........................................................................................159
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port ...........................................................................................159
5.5.5 ATM VC Commands ............................................................................... 163
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf........................................................................................163
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf ........................................................................................163
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf.............................................................................................163
5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf ........................................................................................164
5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands ................................................................ 171
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats ..........................................................................................171
5.6 Bridging Commands............................................................................................ 173
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands ................................................................ 173
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding .................................................................................173
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding.............................................................................173
5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands........................................................................ 175
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode .........................................................................................175
5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands................................................................... 176
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap .....................................................................................176
5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands......................................................... 177
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding ..........................................................................177
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding......................................................................177
5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands .................................................................. 179
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map ....................................................................................179
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map ...............................................................................179
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map ...............................................................................179
5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands....................................................... 181
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats....................................................................................181
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats................................................................................181
5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands................................................................. 182
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf .................................................................................182
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf..................................................................................182
5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf ......................................................................................183
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf..................................................................................183
5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands .............................................................. 189
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................189
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................189
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................189
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................189
5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands............................................................... 192
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast ................................................................................192
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast ...........................................................................192
IDL series User Guide
8
5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast............................................................................192
5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast............................................................................193
5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands................................................................. 195
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps ..................................................................................195
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps..............................................................................195
5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands.................................................................. 197
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info ......................................................................................197
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info..................................................................................197
5.6.12 STP Group Commands ........................................................................ 198
5.6.12.1 Get stp info................................................................................................198
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info...........................................................................................198
5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats ..........................................................................................199
5.6.13 STP Port Commands............................................................................ 202
5.6.13.1 Get stp port ...............................................................................................202
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port ..........................................................................................202
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats ...................................................................................202
5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands................................................ 205
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info................................................................................205
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info ....................................................................................205
5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands ............................................................................... 210
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 210
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding.......................................................................210
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall..........................................................................210
5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 212
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding.......................................................................212
5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands........................................................ 214
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg.........................................................................214
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg ....................................................................214
5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands......................................................... 216
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................216
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................216
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................216
5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................217
5.8 DHCP Commands............................................................................................... 220
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands........................................................................ 220
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info .....................................................................................220
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats....................................................................................221
5.9 DSL Commands.................................................................................................. 223
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands.............................................................. 223
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile..................................................................................223
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile .............................................................................223
IP DSLAM
9
5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands ........................................................... 229
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext ...............................................................................229
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext ..........................................................................229
5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands........................................................... 236
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel .................................................................................236
5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands ......................................................... 238
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf................................................................................238
5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands......................................................... 241
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl................................................................................241
5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands ............................................................ 242
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval ..................................................................................242
5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands ................................................................. 244
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf........................................................................................244
5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands........................................................... 247
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical.................................................................................247
5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands................................................................. 254
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps......................................................................................254
5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 255
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext ...............................................................................255
5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands ...................................................... 256
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl.............................................................................256
5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands......................................................... 257
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel................................................................................257
5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands ....................................................... 260
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf ..............................................................................260
5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands .......................................................... 263
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval.................................................................................263
5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands........................................................... 264
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext ............................................................................264
5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands ............................................................... 265
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf ......................................................................................265
5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands ................................................................ 266
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext .................................................................................266
5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands......................................................... 268
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical................................................................................268
5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands ............................................................. 272
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps.....................................................................................272
5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 273
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext................................................................................273
5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands.......................................................................... 275
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap..............................................................................................275
IDL series User Guide
10
5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands.................................................................... 276
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf ........................................................................................276
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf....................................................................................276
5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands .............................................................. 280
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile ...................................................................................280
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile...............................................................................280
5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands ............................................................................. 303
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip .............................................................................................303
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip..........................................................................................303
5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip ..........................................................................................304
5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands....................................................................... 306
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip ........................................................................................306
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip.....................................................................................306
5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands ....................................................................... 307
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port.........................................................................................307
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port .....................................................................................307
5.9.27 Dsl system Commands......................................................................... 308
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system ..........................................................................................308
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system .....................................................................................308
5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system......................................................................................309
5.10 EHDLC Commands............................................................................................311
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands.............................................................................311
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf............................................................................................. 311
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf........................................................................................ 311
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311
5.11 Ethemet Commands.......................................................................................... 313
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands .......................................................................... 313
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats............................................................................................313
5.11.2 Ethernet Commands............................................................................. 318
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf....................................................................................318
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf....................................................................................318
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf.........................................................................................318
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf....................................................................................318
5.12 EOA Commands ............................................................................................... 328
5.12.1 EOA Commands................................................................................... 328
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf...........................................................................................328
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf...........................................................................................328
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf................................................................................................328
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf...........................................................................................328
5.13 Filtering Commands.......................................................................................... 332
IP DSLAM
11
5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands......................................................... 332
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry ............................................................................332
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry .......................................................................332
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry........................................................................332
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry........................................................................332
5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands ................................................................. 334
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry ..................................................................................334
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry .............................................................................334
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry............................................................................334
5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands ............................................................ 336
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry................................................................................336
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry...........................................................................336
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry ...........................................................................336
5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands ..................................................... 337
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry.............................................................................337
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................337
5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................338
5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands.............................................................. 339
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info ...............................................................................339
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info ..........................................................................339
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339
5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands ............................................................ 341
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map ..............................................................................341
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map .........................................................................341
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map .........................................................................341
5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands.............................................................. 342
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch................................................................................342
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch...........................................................................342
5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch ...........................................................................343
5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands ................................................................... 344
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info.....................................................................................344
5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info................................................................................345
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info ................................................................................345
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info ................................................................................345
5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands................................................................. 347
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node...................................................................................347
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node..............................................................................347
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node ..............................................................................347
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node..............................................................................347
5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands................................................................ 355
IDL series User Guide
12
5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch .................................................................................355
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch ............................................................................355
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch.............................................................................355
5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands..................................................................... 358
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info.......................................................................................358
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info..................................................................................358
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info ..................................................................................358
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info..................................................................................358
5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands.................................................................... 360
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map .....................................................................................360
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map ................................................................................360
5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map.................................................................................360
5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands................................................................... 361
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node ....................................................................................361
5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node................................................................................362
5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands................................................................. 367
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile...................................................................................367
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile..............................................................................367
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile..............................................................................367
5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile..............................................................................368
5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands ............................................................... 369
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry .................................................................................369
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry ............................................................................369
5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry.............................................................................370
5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands............................................................ 371
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry ..............................................................................371
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry .........................................................................371
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry..........................................................................371
5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands ................................................. 373
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry ...................................................................373
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry ..............................................................373
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry...............................................................373
5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands ......................................................... 375
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info ...........................................................................375
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info ......................................................................375
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info.......................................................................375
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info.......................................................................375
5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands........................................................ 377
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map ..........................................................................377
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map .....................................................................377
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map......................................................................377
IP DSLAM
13
5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands........................................................ 379
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap.........................................................................379
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap.....................................................................379
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap .....................................................................379
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap .....................................................................379
5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands ................................................................ 383
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry .................................................................................383
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry..............................................................................383
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry..............................................................................383
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry..............................................................................383
5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands ................................................................. 389
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map ..................................................................................389
5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map ..............................................................................390
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map...............................................................................390
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map...............................................................................390
5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands................................................................. 392
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats..................................................................................392
5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands................................................................. 393
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry .................................................................................393
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry..............................................................................393
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry ..............................................................................393
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry..............................................................................393
5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands................................................................... 395
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info....................................................................................395
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info................................................................................395
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info ................................................................................395
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info ................................................................................395
5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands ............................................................. 397
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp ..............................................................................397
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp ..........................................................................397
5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp...........................................................................398
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp...........................................................................398
5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands........................................................ 404
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree.........................................................................404
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree.....................................................................404
5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree .....................................................................405
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree.....................................................................405
5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands .......................................................... 407
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether ...........................................................................407
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether........................................................................407
5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether........................................................................408
IDL series User Guide
14
5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether........................................................................408
5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands....................................................... 418
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic........................................................................418
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic....................................................................418
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic ....................................................................418
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic ....................................................................418
5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands.......................................................... 422
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp............................................................................422
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp ........................................................................422
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp.........................................................................422
5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp ........................................................................423
5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands.......................................................... 425
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp............................................................................425
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp........................................................................425
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp ........................................................................426
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp ........................................................................426
5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands ............................................................... 429
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip.................................................................................429
5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip.............................................................................430
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip .............................................................................430
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip .............................................................................430
5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands ........................................................... 436
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp..............................................................................436
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp..........................................................................436
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp ..........................................................................436
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp..........................................................................437
5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands............................................................ 439
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp...............................................................................439
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp...........................................................................439
5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp ...........................................................................440
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp ...........................................................................440
5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands ........................................................... 443
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp..............................................................................443
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp..........................................................................443
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp ..........................................................................443
5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp..........................................................................444
5.14 IGMP Commands.............................................................................................. 447
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands............................................................ 447
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info .............................................................................447
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info ........................................................................447
5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands.................................................... 451
IP DSLAM
15
5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config.....................................................................451
5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452
5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands........................................................... 455
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info............................................................................455
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info.......................................................................455
5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands......................................................... 459
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats..........................................................................459
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats ......................................................................459
5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands...................................................... 461
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info.......................................................................461
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info..................................................................461
5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info ..................................................................462
5.15 Interface Commands......................................................................................... 464
5.15.1 Interface Commands ............................................................................ 464
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats.....................................................................................464
5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats .................................................................................467
5.15.1.3 Get interface config...................................................................................467
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config ..............................................................................467
5.16 IP Commands ................................................................................................... 469
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands ........................................................ 469
5.16.1.1 Get arp ......................................................................................................469
5.16.1.2 Create arp .................................................................................................469
5.16.1.3 Delete arp .................................................................................................469
5.16.2 IP Route Commands ............................................................................ 471
5.16.2.1 Get ip route ...............................................................................................471
5.16.2.2 Create up route .........................................................................................472
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route...........................................................................................472
5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands.............................................................................. 475
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf...............................................................................................475
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf..........................................................................................475
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf..........................................................................................476
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf..........................................................................................476
5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands.............................................................................. 478
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf...............................................................................................478
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf..........................................................................................478
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf..........................................................................................478
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf..........................................................................................478
5.16.5 Rid static Commands............................................................................ 481
5.16.5.1 Create rid static.........................................................................................481
IDL series User Guide
16
5.16.5.2 Delete rid static .........................................................................................481
5.17 MacProfile Commands...................................................................................... 484
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands ............................................................... 484
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global ................................................................................484
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global ...........................................................................484
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global ...........................................................................484
5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands........................................................ 485
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info ..........................................................................485
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info .....................................................................485
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info......................................................................485
5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands.................................................... 486
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param......................................................................486
5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param.................................................................487
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param .................................................................487
5.18 Management Traffic Commands ....................................................................... 489
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands ................................................................ 489
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info..................................................................................489
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info.............................................................................489
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info .............................................................................489
5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands............................................................ 490
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info..............................................................................490
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info.........................................................................490
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info.........................................................................491
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info.........................................................................491
5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands................................................................ 492
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info .................................................................................492
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info ............................................................................492
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info.............................................................................493
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info.............................................................................493
5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands........................................................................... 495
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands.................................................... 495
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile........................................................................495
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile ...................................................................495
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile ...................................................................495
5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands........................................................ 496
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config............................................................................496
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config .......................................................................496
5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands............................................. 499
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile.................................................................499
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile............................................................499
5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile............................................................499
IP DSLAM
17
5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands .......................................................... 500
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats ..............................................................................500
5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands .......................................................................... 501
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf............................................................................................501
5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf.......................................................................................502
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf.......................................................................................502
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf.......................................................................................502
5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands ........................................................ 506
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats............................................................................506
5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands ............................................................... 508
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf ..............................................................................................508
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf .........................................................................................508
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf..........................................................................................508
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf..........................................................................................508
5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands ..................................................................... 512
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands ................................................................. 512
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats...................................................................................512
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats ...............................................................................512
5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands ............................................................. 513
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry...............................................................................513
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry..........................................................................513
5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry ..........................................................................514
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry..........................................................................514
5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands ................................................................... 519
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry.....................................................................................519
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry.................................................................................519
5.20.4 Dra global config Commands ............................................................... 520
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config.................................................................................520
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config ............................................................................520
5.20.5 la profile entry Commands.................................................................... 521
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry.....................................................................................521
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry................................................................................521
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry ................................................................................522
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry................................................................................522
5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands.............................................................. 525
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry ...............................................................................525
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry ..........................................................................525
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry...........................................................................526
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry ..........................................................................526
5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands.................................................................... 531
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry.....................................................................................531
IDL series User Guide
18
5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry .................................................................................531
5.20.8 Pia global config Commands................................................................ 532
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config .................................................................................532
5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config.............................................................................533
5.21 QoS Commands................................................................................................ 534
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands............................................................................. 534
5.21.1.1 Get irl map ................................................................................................534
5.21.1.2 Create irl map ...........................................................................................534
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map............................................................................................534
5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands.......................................................................... 535
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile..............................................................................................535
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile.........................................................................................535
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile.........................................................................................536
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile.........................................................................................536
5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands............................................................................ 539
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats................................................................................................539
5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands....................................................... 540
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map.........................................................................540
5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map....................................................................540
5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map ....................................................................540
5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map ....................................................................540
5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands............................................................ 542
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info..............................................................................542
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info.........................................................................542
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info .........................................................................542
5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info .........................................................................543
5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands.................................................................. 546
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info ....................................................................................546
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info...............................................................................546
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info................................................................................546
5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands ..................................................................... 548
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info........................................................................................548
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info...................................................................................548
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info...................................................................................548
5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info...................................................................................549
5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands..................................................... 552
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class..............................................................................552
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class.........................................................................552
5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands....................................................... 555
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info ................................................................................555
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info...........................................................................555
IP DSLAM
19
5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info ...........................................................................556
5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands........................................................ 557
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class..........................................................................557
5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class .....................................................................558
5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands........................................................... 559
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info.............................................................................559
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info........................................................................559
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info........................................................................559
5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands ................................................................... 560
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats .....................................................................................560
5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats..................................................................................561
5.22 RMON Commands............................................................................................ 562
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands ..................................................... 562
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe ..................................................................................562
5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe ..................................................................................562
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe .......................................................................................562
5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands................................................................ 564
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task............................................................................................564
5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands .................................................. 566
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool ........................................................................................566
5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold.........................................................................570
5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool.....................................................................................572
5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands............................................................. 572
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue ........................................................................................572
5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold ........................................................................575
5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue ....................................................................................576
5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands...................................................... 576
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf ........................................................................................576
5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold ........................................................................578
5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf ....................................................................................579
5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands..................................................... 579
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore ................................................................................579
5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands ................................................... 580
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp ....................................................................................580
5.23 SNMP Commands ............................................................................................ 582
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands .................................................................... 582
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm........................................................................................582
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm...................................................................................582
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm ...................................................................................582
5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands........................................................................ 583
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host...........................................................................................583
IDL series User Guide
20
5.23.2.2 Create snmp host......................................................................................583
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host ......................................................................................584
5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands ....................................................................... 585
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats ................................................................................................585
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats .....................................................................................585
5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands ................................................................. 588
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost ....................................................................................588
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost................................................................................588
5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost................................................................................589
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost................................................................................589
5.24 SNTP Commands ............................................................................................. 591
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands .......................................................................... 591
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg...............................................................................................591
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg..........................................................................................591
5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands.................................................................. 592
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr .....................................................................................592
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr ................................................................................592
5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands........................................................................ 593
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats............................................................................................593
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats ........................................................................................593
5.25 System Commands........................................................................................... 594
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands..................................................................... 594
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg.......................................................................................594
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg ...................................................................................594
5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands .......................... 595
5.25.2.1 Commit......................................................................................................595
5.25.2.2 Reboot ......................................................................................................595
5.25.3 System Control Table Commands ........................................................ 597
5.25.3.1 Create user ...............................................................................................597
5.25.3.2 Delete user................................................................................................597
5.25.3.3 Get user ....................................................................................................597
5.25.3.4 Passwd .....................................................................................................599
5.25.4 System crash info Commands.............................................................. 600
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info ...............................................................................600
5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo......................................................................608
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo.................................................................608
5.25.5 System info Commands........................................................................ 609
5.25.5.1 Get system info .........................................................................................609
5.25.5.2 Modify system info ....................................................................................609
5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime......................................................................................613
5.25.6 System manuf info Commands............................................................. 614
IP DSLAM
21
5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info ..............................................................................614
5.25.7 System reboot info Commands ............................................................ 616
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info..............................................................................616
5.25.8 Nbize Commands ................................................................................. 618
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize.................................................................................................618
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize ............................................................................................618
5.25.9 System Stats Commands ..................................................................... 627
5.25.9.1 Get system stats .......................................................................................627
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats....................................................................................627
5.25.10 System Traps Commands .................................................................. 629
5.25.10.1 Reset traps..............................................................................................629
5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands .................................................. 629
5.25.11.1 Get traps..................................................................................................629
5.25.12 System Version Commands ............................................................... 637
5.25.12.1 Get system version .................................................................................637
5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands .................................................. 638
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg ...........................................................................................638
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg.......................................................................................638
5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands ......................................................... 640
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats.........................................................................................640
5.26 VC Aggregation Commands.............................................................................. 642
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands................................................................... 642
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf....................................................................................642
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf...............................................................................642
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf ...............................................................................642
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf...............................................................................642
5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands ................................................................ 644
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map .................................................................................644
5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map ............................................................................645
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map.............................................................................645
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map.............................................................................645
5.27 VLAN Commands ............................................................................................. 648
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands ......................................................................... 648
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info .............................................................................................648
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info.........................................................................................648
5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands.................................................................. 649
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info ......................................................................................649
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info..................................................................................649
5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands................................................................ 654
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats.....................................................................................654
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats.................................................................................654
IDL series User Guide
22
5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands ..................................................................... 655
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info.......................................................................................655
5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands ........................................................ 657
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info ............................................................................657
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info .......................................................................658
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info .......................................................................658
5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands ...................................................... 659
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param........................................................................659
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param...................................................................659
5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param ...................................................................659
5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands ....................................................................... 661
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static ...........................................................................................661
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static ......................................................................................661
5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static.......................................................................................662
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static.......................................................................................662
5.28 Miscelleneous Commands ................................................................................ 672
5.28.1 File Commands .................................................................................... 672
5.28.1.1 Apply .........................................................................................................672
5.28.1.2 Download ..................................................................................................674
5.28.1.3 List ............................................................................................................676
5.28.1.4 Permission ................................................................................................681
5.28.1.5 Ping...........................................................................................................682
5.28.1.6 Remove.....................................................................................................683
5.28.1.7 Upgrade ....................................................................................................684
5.28.1.8 Upload.......................................................................................................685
5.28.2 Other Commands ................................................................................. 687
5.28.2.1 Unalias ......................................................................................................688
5.28.2.2 Help...........................................................................................................689
5.28.2.3 Logout.......................................................................................................690
5.28.2.4 Prompt ......................................................................................................690
5.28.2.5 Traceroute.................................................................................................691
5.28.2.6 Verbose.....................................................................................................692
Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail.................................................................................... 693
Appendix B --- Supported mibs.................................................................................. 698
PropMib (Conexant).................................................................................................. 698
StdMib (Standard) ..................................................................................................... 699
Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM ............................................... 700
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works.................................................... 700
Device Roles ................................................................................................... 701
Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange .......................................... 702
802.1X CLI commands.............................................................................................. 703
Specifying RADIUS Servers ............................................................................ 703
IP DSLAM
23
Specifying the RADIUS Key ............................................................................ 703
Configuring 802.1X Authentication .................................................................. 703
Enabling 802.1X globally ........................................................................................704
Disabling 802.1X globally........................................................................................704
Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports.............................704
Enabling Multiple Hosts...........................................................................................705
Disabling Multiple Hosts..........................................................................................705
802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM ..................................................................... 705
Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM................................................................................ 706
IDL series User Guide
24
1. Introduction
With built-in POTS splitter 24 / 48 ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Subscriber ports, the PLANET
IDL series are advanced IP based DSLAM which is designed for Network Service Provider
to offer excellent services to multiple subscribers. The replaceable 1000Base-T or
1000Base-LX uplink interfaces, and stackable support other units that provide the flexibility
of the network implementation.
The PLANET IDL series support local and remote management capabilities of CLI, SNMP
and Telnet via RS-232 CID and Ethernet MGNT ports, Microsoft Windows based GUI
Management system provides Network Service Provider a centrally management
capability.
The PLANET IP DSLAM provides many features such as QoS, VLAN, Bandwidth
Management, Traffic Prioritization, and Data Flow Security Control. The IDL series offer
Network Service Provider the most suitable solution and makes subscribers an efficient
way to meet triple play (data, voice, and video).
1.1 Package Contents
Please inspect your package. The following items should be included in the package:
IDL-2400/2401
z IDL-2400/2401 unit x 1
z AC Power Cord x 1
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1
z Quick Installation Guide x 1
z RJ-45 Cable x 1
z RS-232 Cable x 1
z Telco-50 Cable x 1
IDL-4800/4801
z IDL-4800/4801 unit x 1
z AC Power Cord x 1
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1
z Quick Installation Guide x 1
z RJ-45 Cable x 1
z RS-232 Cable x 1
z Telco-50 Cable x 2
IP DSLAM
25
1.2 Features
z 24-Port or 48-Port ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ subscriber interface with build-in POTS splitter
z DMT data rate: Downstream 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps / Upstream 32 kbps up to 1Mbps
z 1000Base-T (IDL-2400/IDL-4800) or 1000Base-LX (IDL-2401/IDL-4801) uplink interface
z Stackable support
z Microsoft Windows based GUI management
z Local RS-232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP/Telnet management
z Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP
z 6K MAC address & 256 Multicast MAC address support
z Static VLAN and Port based VLAN
z VLAN / MAC / IP filtering
z Access Control List by MAC and IP address
z Traffic prioritization (802.1p)
z Traffic bandwidth management by MAC and IP address
1.3 Application
The PLANET IDL series offer the benefit of high performance to central office co-location
and MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) / MDU (Multi-Dwelling Unit) markets. It provides broadband
data service over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service by
24/48 subscriber ports with built-in POTS splitter. A PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect
solution for NSP a cost-effective but high-value centrally management capability.
IDL series User Guide
26
1.4 Outlook
IDL-2400
IDL-4800
IDL-2401 / IDL-4801 with 1000Base-LX UPLINK
1 x 1000Base-LX UPLINK1
1 x 1000Base-T UPLINK2
1 x 1000Base-T MGNT
IP DSLAM
27
1.4.1 Front Panel
The front panels of IDL series are shown below.
IDL-2400
IDL-2401
IDL-4800
IDL-4801
LED Definition
LED Color LED Description
POWER Green Lit when power on
MAINT Yellow Lit when maintenance commands were issued
ALARM Red Lit when MJ/MN events happen
MASTER Green Lit when system was acted as management master for
stacking application ( * Future feature )
ADSL 1~24
or
ADSL 1~48
Green
Orange
No Light
Red
Lit when ADSL link is in a active state
When the specified ADSL link is in connection training stat
When ADSL link is not in service
Lit when loss of signal occurs
1000/ACT Green Blinking when information action is transmitted
100/ACT Green Blinking when information is transmitted
GIGA Green Blinking when information is transmitted
( * IDL-2401/4801 )
ACT Green When uplink is activated
( * IDL-2401/4801 )
IDL series User Guide
28
1.4.2 Rear Panel
The rear panels of IDL series are shown below.
IDL-2400/2401
IDL-4800/4801
Port Definition
Port Port Description
AC IN AC Power cord in
POWER Power switch
PHONE 1
LINE 1 24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS
PHONE 2
LINE 2
24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS
( * IDL-4800/4801 )
IP DSLAM
29
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications
Model IDL-2400 IDL-2401
Uplink 1 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T) 1 x SC (1000Base-LX)
Uplink 2 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
MGNT 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
Console 1 x RS-232
Line 1 x Telco-50
Ports
Phone 1 x Telco-50
LED Indicators
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
24 x ADSL LEDs
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs
3 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
24 x ADSL LEDs
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs
2 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x GIGA LED
1 x ACT LED
Model IDL-4800 IDL-4801
Uplink 1 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T) 1 x SC (1000Base-LX)
Uplink 2 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
MGNT 1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
Console 1 x RS-232
Line 2 x Telco-50
Ports
Phone 2 x Telco-50
LED Indicators
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
48 x ADSL LEDs
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs
3 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x POWER LED
1 x MAINT LED
1 x ALARM LED
1 x MASTER LED
48 x ADSL LEDs
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs
2 x 100/ACT LEDs
1 x GIGA LED
1 x ACT LED
IDL series User Guide
30
1.5.2 Software Specifications
Standard
Compliant with ADSL standard
- ANSI T1.413 issue 2
- G.dmt (ITU G.992.1)
- G.lite (ITU G.992.2)
- G.hs (ITU G.994.1)
Capable of ADSL2 standard
- G.dmt.bis (ITU G.992.3)
Capable of ADSL2+ standard
- G.dmt.bisplus (ITU G.992.5)
Protocol
STP
IGMP snooping
GMRP
GVRP
LACP
SNMP / UDP / IP / MAC / Ethernet
Multicast
Up to 256 multicast addresses
IGMP v1, v2, v3
Multicast VLAN mapping: Independent VLAN multicast (IVM)
Multicast VLAN mapping: Shared VLAN Multicast (SVM)
Handle PPPoE Encapsulated IGMP packets
System
Subscriber interface with built-in POTS splitter
Downstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps
Upstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 1Mbps
Extended power management capabilities to optimize power
consumption for each application
Distance up to 18 kft
1000Base-T / 1000Base-LX uplink interface via model
Stackable support
Centronic 50 pin connector for Telco line in and out
8 VCs per xDSL port
128 MAC address per x DSL port
6K MAC address
Ethernet Bridging: Broadcast, Flooding / Dropping
VLAN Bridging: 512 VLAN, Static VLAN, VLAN Stacking / Trunking
Packet size 64 byte to 1522byte
PPPoE Intermediate Agent
DHCP Relay Agent
IPOA to IPOE Tunneling
PPPoA to PPPoE inter-working
IP DSLAM
31
Input Rate Limiting (IRL) on a per-AAL5 interface
Output Rate Limiting (ORL) on a per ATM-port and Ethernet basis
Rate Limiting
Multiple mechanisms of prioritizing traffic
Security
VLAN filtering
MAC filtering
IP filtering
Access Control List by MAC address
Access Control List by IP address
Throttling Control
Sticky Bridge Ports
Management
Microsoft Windows based GUI management
Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet SNMP / Telnet management
Remote in-band SNMP / Telnet management
Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP
SNMP v1, v2c
IDL series User Guide
32
2. Installation
The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL series IP DSLAM. Refer to the
illustration and follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM.
2.1 Safety Instruction
The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing.
>> The maximum recommended operating temperature is 50ºC. Care must be taken to
allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is installed
inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the combined weight of all
IP DSLAM.
>> The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be capable
of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM. In the event
of a power overload, the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become hazardous.
>> The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage. Make sure that the supplied
AC voltage is correct and stable. If the input AC voltage is over 10% lower than the
standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction.
>> Generally, when installed after the final configuration, the product must comply with the
applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is
installed. If necessary, consult for technical support.
>> A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or
more buildings. If products installed in separate building are interconnected, the voltage
potential can cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to
determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective
action before interconnecting the products. If the equipment is to be used with
telecommunications circuit, take the following precautions:
- Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
- Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially - designed for
wet location.
- Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
- Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines (other than a cordless
telephone) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
- Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report a
gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
IP DSLAM
33
2.2 Hardware Installation
The PLANET IDL series can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack by using the mounting
brackets provided. Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided. The
procedure to connect and wire the system is as follows.
2.2.1 System Requirements
z Workstation with Windows NT/2000/XP
z RJ-45 cables
z RJ-11 cables
z Telco-50 cables
z RS-232 cables
z <Optional> MDF Patch Panel (Model No.: IDL-PAN-48).
2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection
The following figure shows the rear panel connection of IDL series:
Step 1: Ground the IP DSLAM by connecting a grounded wire (Optional).
Step 2: Connect the ADSL line connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to
CPE by using telco cable. Each line connector supports 24 ports of
ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ for Data path from MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
IDL series User Guide
34
Step 3: Connect the Phone connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to
Exchange/PBX by using telco cable. Phone connector is an optional module
supporting Voic path to Exchange/PBX; it must be along with Line Connector.
Note:
1. The MDF Patch panel is optional to standard package.
Step 4: Hook power cord and apply the power.
2.2.3 Front Panel Connection
The following figure shows the front panel connection of IDL series:
UPLINK: Connect to Internet or downlink to the other IDL-series for stacking by RJ-45
cable.
MGNT: Connect to PC by RJ-45 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through IDL
Manager.
CID: Connect to PC by RS-232 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through CLI.
IP DSLAM
35
2.3 IDL Manager Installation
This following shows how to prepare the system to perform basic communication functions
through IDL Manager.
2.3.1 System Requirements
z Windows NT/2000/XP
z CD-ROM
z Ethernet card
z 2GB Hard disk with a minimum of 650MB of free space
z Super VGA (800x600 resolution) or higher with 256 colors
z Manual CD
2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager
Perform initial configuration procedures as follows:
1. Insert CD into CD-ROM.
2. From the autorun screen, click the “IDL Manager” hyperlink to download the file. And
then click “setup.exe” to start the installation process.
3. The welcome window appears. Click on “Next” to continue.
IDL series User Guide
36
4. When the Start Copying Files window appears, you can confirm the current settings.
Click on “Next” to start copying files.
5. When Setup Process Status window appears, the installation process is now in
progress. This window display a bar indicating the percentage of completion for the
current installation. In addition, the names of the files being installed appear above the
bar until the installation is complete.
6. At the end of the installation process, the following Setup Complete window presents.
Simply click on “Finish” to complete setup. Now the installation of IDL Manager is
completed.
IP DSLAM
37
2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager
Perform basic communication functions through IDL Manager, procedures as follows:
1. Users can activate the IDL Manager either from Program manager or clicking the
shortcut icon on the desktop as below.
2. Before starting to IDL Manager, it is necessary that your PC’s IP and IP DSLAM’s IP
are in the same subnet.
Note:
Default IP address of Management port is 192.168.200.111.
3. To enable SNMP for accessing, one needs to issue commands below to IDL series by
Telnet to management port or connecting to console port (9600, N, 8,1) and then log in
with default username and password that both are “admin”.
a. “$create snmp comm community public rw”.
b. “$create snmp host ip 192.168.200. xxx community public”, where 192.168.200.xxx
is the IP of your PC.
c. “$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.200.xxx community public version v1”, where
192.168.200.xxx is the IP of your PC.
4. Launch the IDL Manager and then log in with the user name and password.
Click on “OK” to enter the IDL Manager system.
Note:
Default Username is “Supervisor” and password is blank.
5. After launching IDL Manager and logging in, the main window appears as below.
IDL series User Guide
38
2.4 IDL Manager Functions
IDL Manager is divided into the task-oriented functional groups as follows.
2.4.1 Session
Allow you to start and to terminate a session as well as to shutdown the system.
2.4.1.1 Logout
To terminate the current session, choose Logout command from Session Menu. The
user account, then, is logged out and Login window prompts for a new login. Normally,
this is used when a user wants to re-login in order to gain a higher level of authority for
certain operations.
2.4.1.2 Exit
To terminate the system at any time, simply choose the Exit command from Session
Menu. The system then terminates.
IP DSLAM
39
2.4.2 Tools
This chapter describes how to use tools in the IDL Manager, including Environmental
options, Territory manager, Agent manager, User Manager and Telnet, which are detailed
in the following sections.
2.4.2.1 Environment Options
Choose Environmental Options from Tools Menu, user can define SNMP, Desktop
and Surveillance respectively.
1. SNMP Configuration
The SNMP Time-out Period and Retransmission times can be configured as shown in
the following steps:
a. Click on the TabControl of “SNMP” that will bring SNMP dialogue box to front.
b. Click on / to change the Time-out Period seconds and Retransmission
times.
c. Click on to submit your changes.
2. Desktop Configuration
IDL series User Guide
40
The Desktop is user for setting the map of a required territory.
a. Click on the tab of “Desktop” that will bring Desktop dialogue box to front.
b. Click on to quick start territory manager in which users can
define a desired territory. Please refer to “Territory Manager Configuration” for
more details.
c. Click on to load the map of a territory or click on to clear a
loaded map.
Note:
The format of map is limited to *.bmp, *.emf and *.wmf.
d. Click on to submit your setting, and then the map will apply to the
Mounted Agent.
3. Surveillance Configuration
IP DSLAM
41
a. Click on the tab of “Surveillance” that will bring the Surveillance dialogue box to
front.
b. Click on or to change the monitor period.
c. Select the checkbox of Save expired records to save surveillance archive,
which can be browsed by clicking on the tab of Achieved in the Event Log
window as shown in the following figure.
d. Clicking on to choose the directory to record surveillance data and
press or to define expired period.
e. Click on to submit your settings.
IDL series User Guide
42
2.4.2.2 Territory Manager
Territory manager help users to build up monitoring territories and agents could be
categorized into different territories by users. Territory manager can be activated
either from menu bar or from environmental options.
Territory Manager Window
Choose Territory Manager via Tools Menu, or Environmental option, and then the Territory
Management window appears.
If to add a territory to the system,
a. Click on , the Territory Name fields then cleared to blank for entering
the data.
b. Enter Territory Name and then become enable.
c. Click on to apply the territory to the system. After that, you can proceed to
group management by Territory Management dialog box.
As the following figure shown, the agent, 192.168.100.176 is available in the territory named
ALL on the left. Users can shift the monitoring territory from ALL to Taipei simply by selecting
Taipei in the Drop-down list on the right.
IP DSLAM
43
d. Choose the agent, 192.168.100.176 on the left and then click on . The agent IP
will appear on the right and will be mornitored under the territory, Taipei.
e. If users want to move the agent IP from Taipei to other territory, select a desired agent
IP and click on to shift it to the left.
f. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations in the
same window.
Correspondently, the Agent Desktop displays that Agent IP 192.168.100.176 has been
monitored under the territory, Taipei.
IDL series User Guide
44
2.4.2.3 Agent Manager
All of the IP DSLAM agents that are to be managed by the IDL Manager must be
“registered” to the system. The “registration” process is to make the system aware of
agent’s IP address and alias name. Once an agent is registered, it is put into the
“demount” agent pool, which is still “inactive” for the network monitor. You then have
to activate it if you want it to be monitored. An active agent can also be deactivated
from the monitor for certain operational purpose when necessary. Agent Manager is
designed for you to perform these operations.
Agent Manager Window
Choose Agent Manager from Tools Menu, this window then appears.
Field Definition
IP Address ***.***.***.***
Alias name Name of IP DSLAM
Description Note
If to add an agent to the system,
a. Select a territory that a new agent belongs to. Click on to
activate territory manager.
b. Click on , the data fields then cleared to blank for entering the data.
Enter values in fields, IP Address, Alias Name and Description. The Apply
buttons to the left of these fields then become enable.
c. Click on to apply the agent to the system.
d. If to activate (so-called “Mount”) the system’s monitoring of an agent, click on
the required agent entry in the Demount agent list, then click on . The
agent will appear on the Mount agent list on the right.
e. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.
IP DSLAM
45
If to remove an agent to the system,
a. Click the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on .
The agent will disappear.
b. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations
in the same window.
If to change the information of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list. The information of the
selected agent will then presented on the data fields.
b. Click on to Change IP, Alias Name, and Description and then
becomes enable.
c. Click on to apply the change to the system.
d. Click on to exit the window.
Note:
User can only change alias and description of the agent in the Mount agent list and
changing IP is prohibited.
If to activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on the Mount
button . The agent will appear on the Mount agent list.
b. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations
in the same window.
If to de-activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,
a. Select the required agent in the Mount agent list, and then click on the Demount
button . The agent will then disappears from the Mount agent list and
appears on the Demount agent list on the left.
b. Click on to exit the window.
IDL series User Guide
46
2.4.2.4 Telnet
Users can use the Telnet to connect to a specific IP DSLAM, and then monitor and
interact with the system.
How to activate Telnet from Agent Desktop?
a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Telnet or choose Telnet from
tool menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Then Telnet screen will
come up immediately.
c. Enter user name and password to access the CID screen.
Note:
The default login and password are admin.
IP DSLAM
47
2.4.2.5 PING
Ping is a command used to determine whether a particular IP DSLAM is currently
connected to the agent. It works by sending a packet to the specific IP address and
waiting for reply.
How to activate PING from Agent Desktop?
a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Ping or choose it from tool
menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Ping screen will come up
immediately and then starts to send packets to check the connection with the IP
DSLAM.
c. After showing the connection status, the screen will be closed automatically.
IDL series User Guide
48
2.4.2.6 User Manager
The IDL Manager uses user accounts, password as well as power level (system
privileges) to control access and log in. There are three types of privileges, Supervisor,
Constructor and Tester.
Supervisor:
The highest level user with this privilege can access ANY functions and data.
Constructor:
User can set and modify the configuration of network equipments.
Tester:
User can run maintenance test, such as loop back function.
To perform user manager, proceed as follows,
Choose User Manager from Tools Menu to access this window. From the following
window, User Manager, you can add and remove users as well as change passwords,
which are used to control the login.
Field Definition
User Account an ID to be used for login
User Name The full name of a user
Description Remarks for note purpose
Power Level Privileges; Administrator and Tester
IP DSLAM
49
If to add a User Account to the system,
a. Click on , the Security window then prompts.
b. Enter the account information as described in Security window below.
c. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.
If to remove a User Account from the system,
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.
b. Click on to delete it.
c. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.
If to change User Account information,
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.
b. Click on button, the Security window then prompts.
c. Change the account information as described in Security window below.
d. Click on button to exit the window or continue to perform other
operations. Or click on button, the Security window then prompts.
IDL series User Guide
50
Field Definition
User Account An ID to be used for login
User Name The full name of a user
Description Remark for note purpose
Password Any character string, including blank
Verify Password Re-enter the password as a confirmation
To change password
when next login If this is checked, the associated user needs to change
their password at the next login.
Account Suspended Suspend the account.
Power Level Privileges; Administrator and tester
This window is a daughter window of User Manager Window, and is used when
adding a user account or changing account information.
a. Either or is selected, this window appears.
b. Enter data in the fields, User Account, User Name, Description, and Password
as required. Re-enter the password in field, Verify Password, for purpose of
verification.
c. If to force the user to change their password at the next login, click on the
checkbox to the left of the field, To Change Password When Login Next Time.
d. If to suspend a user account, click on the checkbox to the left of the field,
Account Suspended.
e. If to assign a new Power Level to the user, click on the desired entry in the
Demount list, then click on the Mount button, . The selected Power
Level entry will then be added to the Mount list on the right.
f. If to remove a Power Level from the user, click on the desired entry in the Mount
list on the right, then click on the Demount button, . The selected
Power Level entry will then be removed.
g. Click on to complete the operation or to abort the
change. Either one is selected; the window is exited to User Manager Window.
IP DSLAM
51
2.4.3 Windows
Users may open many daughter windows in the IDL Manager. To benefit user’s viewing
every Window, Commands of the Windows menu is designed to arrange daughter windows.
Those commands will be introduced separately.
2.4.3.1 Cascade
Choose Cascade from Windows menu in the IDL Manager menu bar. The cascade
command can cascade those opened windows as follows. User can select a window
to perform operations or view status simply by clicking on a specified window.
2.4.3.2 Next Window
Next Window helps user to view next window so that it will bring the window in the
second layer to front.
2.4.3.3 Previous Window
Previous Window command can help user to bring the previous window to front.
IDL series User Guide
52
2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons
By selecting Arrange Icons of Windows Menu in the menu bar, it will locate those
minimized daughter windows in the bottom left of IDL Manager Window as the
following figure shown. User can select a required icon to perform IDL Manager
Management.
2.4.4 Help
Allow users to view the software version.
2.4.4.1 About
To view the version of IDL Manager, choose “About” command via Help menu, as
shown in the following figure. Click on to exit the window.
IP DSLAM
53
3. IDL Manager Management
After successfully setting up the environment of IDL Manager, you can manage different IP
DSLAM via your IDL Manager remotely. This chapter will tell you how to interact with a
specified IP DSLAM.
3.1 Agent Desktop
Agent Desktop is the main window for the network administrators in performing their
day-to-day network monitoring jobs. Like the standard desktop of MS Windows, Agent
Desktop appears once the system is started. First appears on the Agent Desktop is the
status of agents by an array of colors. By which you may monitor the status of agents, and
judge if they are normal or in situations of alarms. You may then double click on the
required agent IP to activate the event log window. Similarly, the Mounted Agents Desktop
can be started up by double clicking on the icon of territory.
3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window
In the Agents Desktop, press to refresh the status of all agents.
Gray icon indicates that the agent is disconnected.
Green icon indicates that the agent is in normal condition.
Red icon indicates that “Major Alarm” is occurred to the
agent and requires network administrator’s attention.
Network administrator pays attention to alarms by looking
into the alarms using Event Log – Outstanding.
The red icon will turn into a yellow icon after the network
administrator has looked into the alarms. However, this
does not mean the situation is released. If any new alarm
happens, yellow will turn red.
Black icon indicated that the agent is demounted.
IDL series User Guide
54
3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop
Mounted agent desktop provides users with flexibility in viewing your network using
graphical presentation of network elements. Mounted agent desktop can be easily activated
by double clicking the icon of territory in the agent desktop and appears promptly as shown
in the following figure. By the mounted agent desktop, the location of agents and overall
network status of a specific territory is presented.
: This icon can be moved to where the agent is located in the map. In addition, its
color also changes with the status of the agent. For example, the icon in red means that
alarm is occurred to the agent and requires network administrator’s attention.
IP DSLAM
55
3.2 Active Function Management Windows
Via IDL Manager, users can remotely monitor the current status of a specified IP DSLAM,
and then proceeding advanced configuration. To activate the function management
windows, choose a specified agent that you want to manage, and then double click the
agent. After that, the function management windows, including Function window and Front
panel status window, will prompt as shown in the following figure.
The Function management windows include Function List Window and Front Panel Status
Window which are provided to monitor the status in real time and configure related settings.
3.2.1 Function List Window
From the Function List Window, users can activate a specified function
immediately by double clicking a specified item.
IDL series User Guide
56
3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window
After choosing a specified agent, the Front Panel Status Window, together with the
Function Window, will come out immediately to present the current status of front panel of
the IP DSLAM.
3.3 Default Setting
This section describes how to get the information of the default setting of the IP DSLAM.
Click on “Default Setting” from the Function List window. The window appears as follows.
In the default setting window, the status of, IP, System, VCC connection, DSL line profile
and Alarm profile are displayed clearly. How to modify them will be introduced in the
following sections.
IP DSLAM
57
3.4 System Information
This section describes how to get and input the information of the IP DSLAM. Double Click
on “System Information” from the Function List Window. The window appears as follows.
Field Definition
Name Alias name of the IP DSLAM
Location Location of the IP DSLAM
Contact The contact person of the IP DSLAM
Vendor The vendor of the IP DSLAM
Object ID Vendor ID
DST Daylight Savings Time has been enabled or not.
UpTime System up time
HwVersion Hardware version of the IP DSLAM.
CPSwVersion Control plant version
Log Threshold The severity level of the trap equal to or lower than that shall be logged.
0 represents log threshold is disabled. 1 is the lowest and represents critical
traps. Valid values: 0-4
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values, followed by their descriptions.
Time Zone
IDLW - International Date Line West
NT - Nome
HST - Hawaii Standard
CAT - Central Alaska
AHST- Alaska-Hawaii Standard
YST - Yukon Standard
PST- US Pacific Standard
MST- US Mountain Standard
CST- US Central Standard
EST- US Eastern Standard
AST- Atlantic Standard
NFST- Newfoundland Standard
NFT- Newfoundland
BRST-Brazil Standard
AT- Azores
WAT - West Africa
GMT - Greenwich Mean
UTC - Universal (Coordinated)
WET - Western European
CET - Central European
FWT - French Winter
MET - Middle European
MEWT - Middle European Winter
SWT - Swedish Winter
EET - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1
IST - Israeli Standard
BT - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2
IT - Iran
ZP4 - "Russia Zone 3"
ZP5 - "Russia Zone 4"
INST - "Indian Standard"
ZP6 - "Russia Zone 5"
NST - "North Sumatra"
WAST - West Australian Standard
SSMT - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6
JT- Java
CCT - China Coast, Russia Zone 7
ROK - Korean Standard
KST - Korean Standard
JST - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8
CAST - Central Australian Standard
EAST - Eastern Australian Standard
GST - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9
IDLE - International Date Line East
NZST - New Zealand Standard
NZT - New Zealand
Example: IDLW , that stands for
International Date Line West
Current Time The current time.
IDL series User Guide
58
3.5 Current Event
Describes the facility for the network administrators to track and trace the history of events
happened and released. Current Event window can be activated from Function List Window.
There are three daughter windows provided to accomplish above tasks.
3.5.1 Outstanding Event
Allow you to view the outstanding events or status and system information. If to view the
event log of a specific agent, click “Current Event” from Function List Window. The Event
Log window appears as follow.
Field Description
Happen Time The date/time when the event is occurred.
Agent The IP address of the agent associated
Grade Severity level of event or status.
DSL DSL Port
Site Down stream or upstream
Description The description of the event or status.
IP DSLAM
59
3.5.2 Closed Event
This window allows you to browse the closed alarms and events of specified agents. Click
on the tab of “Closed“, that will bring the closed screen to front as the following figure
shown. Click on to clear all records or to exit the window.
Field Description
Happen Time The date/time when the event is occurred.
Release Time The date/time when the event is closed.
Agent The IP address of the agent associated
Grade Severity level of event or status.
DSL DSL Port
Site Down stream or upstream
Description The description of the event or status.
IDL series User Guide
60
3.5.3 Archived
This window allows you to browse the expired records, which can be configured in the
Environment window. Click on the tab of “Archived“, that will bring the archived screen to
front as the following figure shown. Click on to clear all records or to
exit the window.
Field Description
Happen Time The date/time when the event is occurred.
Release Time The date/time when the event is closed.
Agent The IP address of the agent associated
Grade Severity level of event or status.
DSL DSL Port
Site Down stream or upstream
Description The description of the event or status.
IP DSLAM
61
3.6 System
This section allows users to perform commit and reboot that will be introduced as follows.
3.6.1 Commit and Reboot
This section describes how to commit the current configuration to flash or reboot the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Commit and Reboot” from the Function List Window. The
System Information screen appears as follows.
a. If to commit the active configuration to the flash, click on .
b. If to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration, click on .
c. Click on to close the window.
IDL series User Guide
62
3.7 Configuration
This section describes how to configure the IP DSLAM by selecting Configuration from
Function List window.
3.7.1 VLAN
Allow user to view and modify VLAN configuration. Double Click on “VLAN” from the
Function List Window. The VLAN configuration window appears as follows.
Field Definition
VLAN ID
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for
a multicast mac addr is shared across vlans hence vlan id
is an optional parameter. In devices supporting
"Independent Vlan for multicast" capability each vlan can
have its own information for a multicast mac addr hence
vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the commands
other than - get. For No Vlan case vlan id is not required.
VLAN Name Name of the VLAN
Egress PVC The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by management.
Untagged PVC The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for
this VLAN, as untagged.
IP DSLAM
63
a. Select the VLAN to view or modify by using the VLAN ID drop-down list.
b. Use Egress PVC and Untagged PVC drop-down list to set the specified DSL port’s
Egress PVC and Untagged PVC.
c. Click on to submit your settings or click on to close the VLAN
Configuration window.
3.7.2 Ethernet
Allow user to view and modify Ethernet configuration. Double Click on “Ethernet” from the
Function List Window. The Ethernet Configuration window appears as follows.
Field Definition
DHCP DHCP client enabled or disabled
Type Uplink or Downlink
Admin Status The desired state of UPLINK (enable/disable)
Operation Status System is enabled or not.
IP address IP address of the UPLINK
Mask The network mask of the UPLINK.
Gateway Gateway IP
Mgmt Vlan Index
VLAN for management traffic on this interface. Nonzero value
of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is
zero) doesn't exist on the system then management shall not
happen on this interface till the corresponding VLAN is created
with the Net side port as its member.
IDL series User Guide
64
a. To view the Ethernet Configuration of UPLINK1, UPLINK2, or MGNT by using the
Select Ethernet drop-down list.
b. If to modify the Ethernet Configuration, click on first and then proceeding
advanced configurations as shown in the following figure.
c. If to create a new Ethernet configuration, click on and then select a new
Ethernet configuration by using Select Ethernet drop-down list. After that, users can
set related parameters as follows.
d. Click on to submit your settings or click on to close the Ethernet
Configuration window.
IP DSLAM
65
3.8 DSL
This section describes how to configure DSL settings by selecting DSL from Function List
Window.
3.8.1 Profile
Allow users to configure Line Profile and Alarm Profile.
3.8.1.1 Line Profile
If to configure Line Profile, double click on “Line Profile” from the Function List
Window. The Line Profile configuration window appears.
Field Definition
Line Type The ADSL line type, Fast or Interleaved.
Transmit Rate Mode Defines what form of transmitting rate, Fixed or adaptAtStartup.
Target SNR (dB/10) Target Signal / Noise Margin. (0-310).
Min Tx Rate(bps) The minimum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.
Down Shift SNR (dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its transmit
rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.
IntCorrectionUP Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can also
be disabled.
Preferred Standard Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is dependent
upon standard support of the remote unit. GlobespanVirata High Speed
ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.
Maximum Transmit Rate The maximum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.
Interleave Delay (ms) The value of Interleave Delay for this channel.
UP Shift SNR (dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin rises
above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its transmit rate.
In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
IntCorrectionDown This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved
buffer. RS can also be disabled.
Annex Type This parameter is set as per Annex compliance of the code release.
GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.
IDL series User Guide
66
a. To create up a new line profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then
select the blank.
b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then
name the new line profile.
c. Click on to submit your setting or click on to delete a line
profile.
3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile
If to configure Alarm Profile, double click on “Alarm Profile” from the Function List
Window. The Alarm Profile Configuration window appears.
IP DSLAM
67
Field Definition
Loss of frame within 15 minutes The threshold of the number of “Loss of Frame Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
Loss of signal within 15 minutes The threshold of the number of “Loss of Signal Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
Loss of link within 15 minutes The threshold of the number of “Loss of Link Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
(But only ATU-C side)
Loss of power within 15 minutes The threshold of the number of “Loss of Power Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.
Errored seconds The threshold of the number of “Errored Seconds” within
15 minutes performance data collection period.
a. To create a new alarm profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then
select the blank.
b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then
name the new alarm profile.
c. Click on to submit or click on to delete a alarm profile.
3.8.1.3 All Line Profile
Display all the Line Profile Configuration.
3.8.2 Port Config
Allow users to configure port configuration. Double Click on “Port Config” from the
Function List Window. The Port Configuration window appears.
IDL series User Guide
68
Field Definition
DSL Port Port No. of the IP DSLAM
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
Learning Status
The state of learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the
value disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is
disabled on this bridge port.
Sticky Status
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable (1)
indicates that the entries learned on this port will not be aged out.
It also indicates that the entries learned on this port shall not be
learned on any other port. The entries learned on this port can
only be removed by management action or by making the value
as disable (2), so that the entries can be aged out.
Pvid Port VID
Accepted Frame Type Used to up/down connection.
Ingress Filter When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for
VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set. When
false, the port will accept all incoming frames.
Priority Optional Connection priority. No VLAN tag, no priority.
a. Choose the port to configure from the DSL Port drop-down list.
b. Configure the Administration status as “Up” or “Down”.
c. Choose a Line Profile from the Line Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure a
Line Profile, Click on to activate the Line Profile Configuration window.
d. Choose an Alarm Profile from the Alarm Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure
an Alarm Profile, Click on to activate the Alarm Profile Configuration window.
If necessary, modify values of specified PVC, including VPI, VCI, Admin Status, Learning
Status, Sticky Status, Pvid, Accepted Frame Type and Ingress Filter, and priority.
e. Click on to submit or click on to close the fmBridgeport window.
f. If to create new PVC, click on and then PVC2 appears and then users can
set perimeters via PVC2. after that, click on to submit your setting.
IP DSLAM
69
IDL series User Guide
70
3.9 DSL PM
This section describes how to utilize DSL Performance Management by selecting “DSL
PM” from Function List window.
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info
Allow users to view the physical layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Physical Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Physical Layer Info window appears.
Field Definition
SNR margin Noise margin value. (dB)
Attenuation Difference in the total power transmitted and the total power received by the peer
atu. (db)
Status Current status of the ATU line.
output power Total output power transmitted by atu. (dBm)
attainable rate The maximum currently attainable data rate by the atu. (kbps)
ActualStandard Actual standard used for connection, based on the outcome of the negotiation
with the Remote Unit.
Bert Error Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.
TxAtm CellCt Provides Tx ATM cell counter.
RxAtm CellCt Provides Rx ATM cell counter.
Start Progress
Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr.
0x0 – startup not in progress; 0x0 – 0x0FFF Handshake/Training/ Profile
Management/ Fast Retrain in progress; 0x8000 – 0x8FFF DSP firmware Down-
Load in progress; 0xF000 – 0xFFFF illegal Parameter
Idle Bert Error Number of bit errors.
Idle Bert Cells Number of idle cells.
IP DSLAM
71
Bert Sync Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.
Select Information Valid Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation conducted on the Xcvr.
Select Loop Length Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT information is valid on
the Xcvr.
Select Loop End Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the SELT information is
valid on the Xcvr.
Select Loop Gauge Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when the SELT information is
valid on the Xcvr.
Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list to view a specified DSL’s physical Layer
Info. Click on to close the window.
3.9.2 Channel Layer Info
Allow users to view the Channel layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP
DSLAM. Double Click on “Channel Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Channel Layer Info window appears.
Field Definition
Interleave delay Interleave delay for this channel. (milli-seconds)
Previous TX rate Previous actual transmit rate on this channel if ADSL loop retain. (kbps)
Current TX rate Actual transmit rate on this channel. (kbps)
CRC block length The length of the channel data-block on which the CRC operates.
Current Atm Status Indicates the current ATM Status.
Rs Symbols Indicates the number of DMT symbols per Reed-Solomon code word (S),
in the downstream direction.
Rs Depth Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream direction.
Rs Redundency Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per Reed-Solomon code in
the downstream direction
Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list view a specified DSL’s channel Layer
Info. Click on to close the window.
IDL series User Guide
72
4. Application Note
4.1 Basic Configuration
The IP DSLAM provides multiple services to users according to the demand of application
scenarios. To reduce time consuming in deployment, this document provides simple and
easy configuration procedure according different applications.
4.1.1 Create a new user
Users can create a root user whose user name and password are “admin” as follow.
$create user name admin passwd admin root
Entry Created
Privilege UserName
-----------------------------------
admin admin
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created
$
4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration
Fd.cfg is a useful tool that contains a set of default configuration commands for IP DSLAM.
Using FD.cfg, you can do as follow.
z Restore the default configuration
z Modify FD.cfg
z Upload FD.cfg
z Create new services
IP DSLAM
73
4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg
Use WordPad or Word to open FD.cfg. (See the following figure)
The default configuration in FD.cfg summarized as follows.
z Default IP: 192.168.100.111
z SNTP: disable
z RFC-1483 Bridge mode only
z One PVC (8/81) for each ADSL port
z Bridge port numbering 1 to 48 mapping to PVC 8/81 for ADSL port1 to port 48/24
z VLAN feature Disable
z Eth0 enable (for uplink), its bridge port number is 385
z Eth1 disable (for downlink)
z MGMT interface disable
Note:
To view the detailed contents, please refer to the Appendix A.
IDL series User Guide
74
4.1.2.2 Download procedure
This section describes how to upload FD.cfg to IP DSLAM by tftp server. The
configuration procedure is shown as follows.
Step 1:
Prepare FD.cfg and tftp server. (Including file_id.diz, tftpd32.exe;TFTPD32.HLP
and uninst.exe)
Step 2:
Put the “FD.cfg” and “tftpd32” at the same folder on your PC.
Step 3:
Activate tftpd32 and then tftp32 window appears.
Step 4:
Click on to set the current directory where FD.cfg located.
Step 5:
Click Sever interface drop-down list to select the DHCP Server‘s IP.
IP DSLAM
75
Step 6:
Assign an IP pool starting address.
Step 7:
Rename the boot file as FD.cfg.
Step 8:
Input the mask
Step 9:
Save the configuration.
Step 10:
If needed, click the settings button to re-configure your setting.
Step 11:
Activate Telnet and login IP DSLAM.
IDL series User Guide
76
Step 12:
Input ‘list’ to show the path and s/w information
$list
Name Ver Time Size
Acc State
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/nvram/bin/bootptftp/
TftpBootp.bin 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 111064 RO active
/nvram/bin/control/
CP.bin.gz 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 1280744 RW active
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
DP.bin.gz 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 231572 RW active
/nvram/bin/decompressor/
Decompressor.bin 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 81928 RO active
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 155220 RW active
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
FD.cfg 1 Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 19136 RW active
$
Step 13:
Input ‘remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1’ to remove the
obsolete FD.cfg file.
$remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1
FLASH program starts at ADDR 20008
File Removed
$
Step 14:
Input ‘download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66’ to
download config file “fd.cfg” from Server PC to IP DSLAM.
Note:
The file name to download could be different from FD.cfg but do not change the path.
dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg is the path of firmware file located on IP DSLAM.
IP DSLAM
77
$download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66
Downloading the File...
......................................
Block 1 erase in progress
........Flash block 1 erase successful...
FLASH program starts at ADDR 20000
###############
Step 15:
Input ‘upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg’ to upgrade and activate the
access state.
$upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 2
FLASH program starts at ADDR 2000c
$
Step 16:
Input ‘commit’ to store your new configuration before rebooting.
$commit
Step 17:
Input ‘reboot config default’ to let your new configuration take effect.
$reboot config default
IDL series User Guide
78
4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg
z myconfig.cfg is a txt file that ensures all commands be executed at once.
z 4.1.3.3 shows the format of myconfig.cfg.
z If there are many configurations you would like to execute then you can write all
commands into myconfig.cfg and then execute it at once.
z Be note to save ($commit) to IP DSLAM if this would be executed after rebooting.
z Required of equipment: TFTP Server (Tftpd32).
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration
Step Image Usage
1 1. Click “Browse” bottom to indicate current
directory of firmware.
2. Click down-arrow bottom to indicate IP of
DHCP Server.
3. Assign starting address for IP pool.
4. Input subnet mask
5. Save input parameters.
6. Press “Setting” bottom to configure more
details
(option)
2 7. After assigned this parameter and reboot
Tftpd32 that “Current Directory” at previous
step will follow it.
IP DSLAM
79
4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration
Step Image Usage
1 Enable TFTP server (tftpd32) 1. Enable TFTP Server
and direct the
myconfig.cfg path for it.
2 $list
Name Ver Time Size
Acc State
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
/nvram/bin/bootptftp/
TftpBootp.bin 1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 111064
RO active
/nvram/bin/control/
CP.bin.gz 1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 1293028
RW active
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
DP.bin.gz 1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 231572
RW active
/nvram/bin/decompressor/
Decompressor.bin 1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 81928
RO active
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 155220
RW active
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
FD.cfg 1 Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 18973
RW active
2. List the table and verify
that myconfig.cfg had not
created.
3 $download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip
192.168.100.188
Downloading the File...
....................................
Block 30 erase in progress
........Flash block 30 erase successful...
FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000
###############
FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000
Download session Completed,Bytes received 18180...
$
3. Download myconfig.cfg to
NVRAM.
4. 192.168.100.188 is the
PC of TFTP Server..
4 $apply fname /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-71 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 82
Entry Created
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-71 lowif aal5-71
:
:
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83
Entry Created
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145
Entry Created
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status
enable
Entry Created
$
5. Apply to execute the
commands step by step.
5 $commit 6. If this myconfig.cfg will be
running after
7. It will be disappear after
“reboot config default”.
IDL series User Guide
80
4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg
verbose off
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-49 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-49 lowif aal5-49
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-49 portid 50 learning enable status enable
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-94 lowif atm-46 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-94 lowif aal5-94
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-94 portid 95 learning enable status enable
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-95 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 82
create eoa intf ifname eoa-95 lowif aal5-95
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-95 portid 96 learning enable status enable
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-96 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-96 lowif aal5-96
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-96 portid 97 learning enable status enable
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-97 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-97 lowif aal5-97
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-97 portid 98 learning enable status enable
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83
create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status enable
IP DSLAM
81
4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration
This section describes how to configure the transmission rate manually via CLI. Before
configuration, see follows.
1. Input the line rate by using hexadecimal values. Following tables shows the
hexadecimal values that are frequently used.
Hexadecimal 0x1f38300 0x177000 0x109a00 0x7d000 0x1f400 0xfa00 0x7d00
Decimal 32M 1.5M 1M 512K 128K 64K 32K
2. Be noted that GsStandard, GsTxPowerAtten and GsAnnexType must be modified
at the same time.
3. Frequently used commands are listed below for your reference:
z aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype adsl2 atucgsstandard adsl2plus
atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1
z atucfastmintxrate 0xfa00 aturfastmintxrate 0x7d00 atucgsannextype annexa
atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 type fastonly atucrateadaptation fixed
RATE type Standard Annex type
ATUC Fixed/ Adaptive Interleaved / fast
only
Adsl2+ / G.dmt /
G.lite / T1.413
Adsl2 / annex A
ATUR Fixed/ Adaptive Interleaved / fast
only
Adsl2+ / G.dmt /
G.lite / T1.413
Adsl2 / annex A
IDL series User Guide
82
4.1.4.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Disable the DSL port that you want to re-configure its transmission rate.
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 disable
IfName : dsl-0
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
Trans Atuc Config : q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsOverlapped
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
PM Conf PMSF : -
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Set Done
IfName : dsl-0
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
Trans Atuc Config : q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : -
IP DSLAM
83
PM Conf PMSF : -
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
$
Thu Jan 01 00:01:49 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ADSL ATUC Up : Interface - dsl-1
Step 2:
Set the line rate you need.
$modify adsl line profile ifname dsl-0 atucintlmaxtxrate 0x177000 aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype
annexa atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1
IfName : dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 63
GsTxStartBin : 0x6 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : adsl2PlusAuto
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : 0
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : Disable
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : Disable
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode : ecMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
IDL series User Guide
84
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode :
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 60 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps) : 0xfa000
MSG Min Ds : 4000 Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0
FrontEnd H/W Design : El1508
H/W Pwr Reduction : Disable
GsUsBitSwap : Enable Minimum INP : InpAuto
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate : 0x3e800 PML2 Exit Thresh Rate : 0x7d000
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 30
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 90 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 30
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 30 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
MSG Min Us : 4000 Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
________________________________________________________________________
Set Done
IfName : dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x177000 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 1
GsTxStartBin : 0x6 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
IP DSLAM
85
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : gLite
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : 0
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : Disable
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : Disable
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : AnnexA GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode : ecMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode :
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 60 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps) : 0xfa000
MSG Min Ds : 4000 Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0
FrontEnd H/W Design : El1508
H/W Pwr Reduction : Disable
GsUsBitSwap : Enable Minimum INP : InpAuto
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate : 0x3e800 PML2 Exit Thresh Rate : 0x7d000
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 30
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 90 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 30
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 30 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d000 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
MSG Min Us : 4000 Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
IDL series User Guide
86
Step 3:
Enable the port
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 enable
IfName : dsl-0
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
Trans Atuc Config : q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : -
PM Conf PMSF : -
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Set Done
IfName : dsl-0
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P
otsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
Trans Atuc Config : q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOff
Trans Atur Cap : -
PM Conf PMSF : -
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
IP DSLAM
87
4.1.5 Set System Time
IDL series support SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), used to synchronize its clocks in
the Internet. IP DSLAM will get the system time via SNTP server while a SNTP sever is
created.
4.1.5.1 Configuration
Follow the steps below to set the SNTP server.
Note:
System time will lost while the system is powered off.
Step 1:
Set the IP DSLAM as the SNTP client
$create sntp?
Command Description
------- -----------
servaddr SNTP Server address
$create sntp servaddr 192.168.100.253
Entry Created
Server Addr : 192.168.100.253 Status : active
Step 2:
Enable SNTP client
$modify sntp cfg enable
Status : Disable
Set Done
Status : Enable
$
IDL series User Guide
88
Step 3:
Confirm the status of SNTP client
$get sntp stats
Requests count : 1 Response count : 1
Invalid Response count : 0 Lost Response count : 0
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Apr 29 10:24:36 2004
Option 2: Set up the system time manually.
Step 1:
View the system information
$get system info
Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold : 0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:4:46
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Thu Jan 01 00:04:46 1970
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications
$
IP DSLAM
89
Step 2:
Get SNTP parameter definitions
$modify system info?
Parameter Description
--------- -----------
[ contact "<name>" ] Identification of the contact person
[ name "<name>" ] Name of the system
[ location "<name>" ] The physical location of this node
[ vendor "<name>" ] Vendor-specific information
[ logthresh <decvalue> ] The severity level of trap
[ systime "<sys-time>" ] SysTime in format mon dd hh:mm:ss year
[ dst <on | off> ] Daylight Saving Time
[ timezone "<timezone>" ] Time Zone
______________________________________________________________
Valid System Time Zone : IDLW|NT|HST|CAT|AHST|YST|PST|MST|CST|EST|AST|NFST|
NFT|BRST|AT|WAT|GMT|UTC|WET|CET|FWT|MET|MEWT|SWT|
EET|IST|BT|IT|ZP4|ZP5|INST|ZP6|NST|WAST|SSMT|JT|
CCT|ROK|KST|JST|CAST|EAST|GST|IDLE|NZST|NZT
Step 3:
Set up system time and time zone
$modify system info systime " May 10 10:17:00 2004" timezone "CCT"
Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold : 0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build): 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Mon May 10 10:17:23 2004
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications
IDL series User Guide
90
Set Done
Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold : 0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Mon May 10 10:17:00 2004
Time Zone : CCT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications
IP DSLAM
91
4.1.6 VLAN Configuration
IP series support port-based VLAN, and Group VLAN. This section describes how to create
two VLAN groups (VLAN ID = 2, and 3). ADSL ports 1 & 2 (PVC 8/81) will join in VLAN
group 2, and create new PVC (8/82) for ADSL1, and assign this PVC to VLAN group 3.
Besides, uplink interface ETH-0 will join VLAN group 2 & 3 as trunk interface.
4.1.6.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Create a VLAN group No.2, and assign to Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81),
and 385(Eth-0)
$create vlan static vlanname vlan2 vlanid 2 egressports 1 385 untaggedports 1
Entry Created
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index : 2
Egress ports : 1 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
$
Step 2:
Set Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81) as PVID 2
$modify gvrp port info portid 1 portvlanid 2 acceptframetypes all ingressfilteri ng true
Port Id : 1
Port VLAN Index : 1 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : False Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations : 0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration : False
Set Done
Port Id : 1
Port VLAN Index : 2 Accept Frame Types: All
IDL series User Guide
92
Ingress Filtering : True Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations : 0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration : False
$
Step 3:
Show current VLAN status
$get vlan curr info
VLAN Index : 1
VLAN Status : Other
Egress ports : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
4
7 48 385
Untagged Ports : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
4
7 48 385
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
VLAN Index : 2
VLAN Status : permanent
Egress ports : 1 385
Untagged Ports : 1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
VLAN Index : 3
VLAN Status : permanent
Egress ports : 2 385
Untagged Ports : 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
IP DSLAM
93
Step 4:
Create new PVC (8/82) in ADSL port 1
z Create atm vc and aal5 interface
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82
Entry Created
VC IfName : aal5-48 Low IfName : atm-0
VPI : 8 VCI : 82
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Up
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
z Create eoa interface
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-48 LowIfName : aal5-48
FCS : False
Pkt Type : ALL
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Up
Step 5:
Create a new bridge port 49, and maps to new created PVC 8/82 in ADSL port 1.
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable
Entry Created
Port Id : 49 IfName : eoa-48
Max Unicast Addresses : 16 Learning Status : Enable
Port Oper Status : Enable Port Admin Status: Enable
Sticky Status : Disable FDB Modify : Enable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Enable
Acl Global Track Apply: Enable
IDL series User Guide
94
Step 6:
Create a new VLAN group No.3, and assign to Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC
8/82), and 385(Eth-0)
$create vlan static vlanname vlan3 vlanid 3 egressports 49 385 untaggedports 49
Entry Created
VLAN Name : vlan3
VLAN Index : 3
Egress ports : 49 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 49
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Step 7:
Set Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/82) as PVID 3
$modify gvrp port info portid 49 portvlanid 3 acceptframetypes all ingressfiltering true
Port Id : 49
Port VLAN Index : 1 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : False Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations : 0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration: False
Set Done
Port Id : 49
Port VLAN Index : 3 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : True Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations : 0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration: False
IP DSLAM
95
Step 8:
Modify the VLAN group 2, and add Bridge port 2 (ADSL port 2 PVC 8/81)
$modify vlan static vlanname vlan2 egressports 1 2 385 untaggedports 1 2
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index : 2
Egress ports : 1 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Set Done
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index : 2
Egress ports : 1 2 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 1 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Step 9:
Add port3 to vlan2 use vlanid index
$modify vlan static vlanid 2 egressports 1 2 3 385 untaggedports 1 2 3
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index : 2
Egress ports : 1 2 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 1 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Set Done
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index : 2
IDL series User Guide
96
Egress ports : 1 2 3 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 1 2 3
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Step 10:
Modify the VLAN from 8/81 to 0/35
z Set the AAL5 strat number is 0
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 disable
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
Set Done
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
z (Set VPI / VCI is 0 / 35)
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 vpi 0 vci 35
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
IP DSLAM
97
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
Set Done
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
Step 11:
Set AAL5 as enable
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 enable
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
Set Done
VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to P
IDL series User Guide
98
4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate
4.1.7.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Set ADSL port12 disable
$modify adsl line intf disable ifname dsl-11
IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Up
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Adsl2PlusPotsOverlappe
d q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Set Done
Thu Jan 01 07:19:36 1970 : MAJOR ALARM : ADSL ATUC Down : Interface - dsl-11
IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : -
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
IP DSLAM
99
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Step 2:
Set ADSL port 12 interleave mode Downstream 512K. The value is hex so you
must conversion to decimal.
$modify adsl line profile atucintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11
IfName : dsl-11
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : adsl2Plus
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : -
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : 1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : - DmtConfMode : fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
IDL series User Guide
100
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
______________________________________________________________
Set Done
IfName : dsl-11
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d000 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : adsl2Plus
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : -
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : 1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : - DmtConfMode : fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
IP DSLAM
101
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
Step 3:
Set ADSL port12 interleave mode upstream 512K. The value is hex so you must
conversion to decimal.
$modify adsl line profile aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11
IfName : dsl-11
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
IDL series User Guide
102
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : adsl2Plus
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : -
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : 1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : - DmtConfMode : fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
______________________________________________________________
Set Done
IfName : dsl-11
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
IP DSLAM
103
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin : 0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard : adsl2Plus
GsInitiate : - GsTxPowerAtten : -
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : 1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : - DmtConfMode : fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart: 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd: 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities: AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage : 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD : Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
IDL series User Guide
104
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d000 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
Step 4:
Set ADSL port12 enable.
$modify adsl line intf enable ifname dsl-11
IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : -
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Set Done
IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : -
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
IP DSLAM
105
4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function
4.1.8.1 Configuration
Step 1:
Create SNMP community
$create snmp comm community public rw
Entry Created
Community Access
-------------------------
public RW
Setp 2:
Create SNMP host
$create snmp host ip 192.168.100.55 community public
Entry Created
Host Address Community
-----------------------------------
192.168.100.55 public
$
Setp 3:
Create SNMP traphost
$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.100.55 community public
Entry Created
Ip Address : 192.168.100.55
Community : public
Port : 162 Version : v2c
IDL series User Guide
106
5. System Administration with CLI
5.1 About CLI Administration
Command Line Interface (CLI) is the primary user interface to administrate the system. CLI
can be accessed either from the CID port or telnet session. All CLI commands are simple
strings designed for the Administrator to manage your IP DSLAM easily.
5.1.1 Notation Conventions
z Keywords in a command that you must enter exactly as shown are presented in bold.
z User specified values in a command are presented in regular typeface, i.e., not bold or
italic.
z Parameter values enclosed in < > must be specified.
z Parameters enclosed in [ ] are optional. All modify parameters are shown as optional in
CLI commands even if there exists only a single parameter.
z Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar ì|î only when one of the specified
values can be used.
z Parameter values are enclosed in { } when you must use one of the values specified.
z Parameters are enclosed in [ ] + when you can specify the parameter one or more
times, in the command line.
5.1.2 Command Structure
CLI commands conform to the following structure except for some basic service
com-mands such as ping, traceroute etc.
<Action>:
This is the first keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the type of operation to be
performed. "create" is an example of this keyword. However, if no action is specified it
will mean ìmodifyî. For example, modify bridge port intf portid portid status enable and
bridge port intf portid portid status enable ì mean the same.
<Group>:
This is the second keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the group of a CLI
command. "Bridge" is an example of this keyword.
IP DSLAM
107
<Sub group>:
This is the third keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI
command. "Port" is an example of this keyword.
<Sub sub group>:
This is the fourth keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI
command. "intf" is an example of this keyword.
<tag1 value1> <tagN valueN>:
These are <tag value> pairs and can vary from 0 to N. They indicate the parameter
values passed to a CLI command. "ifname aal5-0", "portid 20", are examples of tag
value pairs.
5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms
This section contains a brief list of selected acronyms.
Abbreviation Description
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer 5
ACL Access Control list
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
Attribute An element of an MO
ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode
CLI Command Line Interface
CP Control Plane
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DP Data Plane
DRA DHCP Relay Agent
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
EOA Ethernet over ATM
GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GVRP GARP VLAN Regenration Protocol
IGMP InternetGroup Management Protocol
Index An element of a tabular MO that uniquely identifies an entry
IP Internet protocol
IRL Input Rate Limiting
IVL Individual VLAN Learning
IVM Individual VLAN for Multicast
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network
ME - Management Entity The entity, modified, controlled and monitored through MOs.
MO ID - MO Identifier A unique number that identifies an MO. Interpretation of the
information passed to GenAg for an MO depends upon this
identifier
MO - Managed Object Logical unit of manageable information. It is similar to a MIB. An ME
is visible to the outside world in the form of one or more MOs that
constitute it.
Operations GAG supports five operations - Create, Delete, Modify, Get,
Get-Next
ORL Output Rate Limiting
IDL series User Guide
108
OAM Operations Administration and Management
PIA PPPoE Intermediate Agent
RMON Remote Monitoring
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SVL Shared VLAN Learning
SVM Shared VLAN for Multicast
Specific Agent Entities that use GenAg interfaces to manage the system
TEA Target Engine Agent
VC Virtual Channel
VLAN Virtual LAN
5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description
CLI Command - Action List
<action> Description
alias Used to create an alias for any CLI command.
apply Used to apply a configuration file stored on the system
climode Modes of cli/Prio change of CLI task
commit Used to commit the active configuration to the flash.
Create Used to create configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.
delete Used to delete configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.
If the delete action is confirmed, the configuration of objects will no longer exist.
defragment Defragment the compact blocks in flash
download Used to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from theremote host.
get Used to view information of the selected identifier and parameters.
help Used to view the detailed usage of CLI commands.
list Used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit
logout Used to terminate the CLI.
memset Specify the length of memory set
modify Used to set or modify existing configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier
and parameters.
passwd Used to change the password associated with a user login.
permission Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash
Ping Used to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.
prompt Used to set the new CLI prompt.
rdf Used to read Flash
rdm Used to read Memory
reboot Used to restart the system.
remove Used to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit
reset Used to reset a port of system.
save Used to save the configuration to Flash RAM.
Sync Used to Sync
traceroute Used to trace the route to the specified destination.
unalias Used to delete an alias.
upgrade Used to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.
verbose Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the
execution of a command (create, delete, modify, get).
wrm Used to write Memory
IP DSLAM
109
5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands
Command Implemented by Recommend for end-users
802.1p Commands
Bridge port accessprio Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge port prioinfo Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge port trfclassmap Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge port priomap commands Conexant Yes
ABOND
ABOND group intf Commands Conexant Yes, but this is a legacy
command and you should
contact KEYMILE support
personal when you plan to
use.
ABOND group stats Commands Conexant Yes
Abond link entry Commands Conexant Yes
Abond link stats Commands Conexant Yes
Aggregation Commands
Active Standby aggr info Commands Conexant Yes
Aggr intf Commands Conexant Yes
LACP Aggr Commands Conexant Yes
LACP AGGRPort Info Commands Conexant Yes
LACP AGGRPort List Command Conexant Yes
LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands Conexant Yes
Redundancy aggr info Commands Conexant Yes
Redundancy aggrport list Commands Conexant Yes
Redundancy aggr stats Commands Conexant Yes
ATM Commands
AAL5 VC Statistics Commands Conexant Yes
ATM OAM CC Commands Conexant Yes
ATM OAM Loopback Commands Conexant Yes
ATM Port Commands Conexant Yes
ATM VC Commands Conexant Yes
ATM VC Statistics Commands Conexant Yes
Bridging Commands
Bridge forwarding Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Mode Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Port Cap Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge port forwarding Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Port Map Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Port Stats Table Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Port Table Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge static mcast Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge static ucast Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge tbg traps Commands Conexant Yes
GARP Port Info Commands Conexant Yes
STP Group Commands Conexant Yes
STP Port Commands Conexant Yes
Transparent Bridging Table Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Multicast Commands
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands Conexant Yes
Bridge Static Multicast Commands Conexant Yes
DHCP Commands
DHCP Client Commands Conexant Yes
DSL Commands
ADSL Alarm Profile Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Channel Commands Conexant Yes
IDL series User Guide
110
ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC ChanIntvl Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Interval Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Perf Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Physical Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Trap Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR ChanIntrvl Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Channel Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Interval Commands Conexant Yes
Adsl atur intervalext Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Perf Commands Conexant Yes
Adsl atur perfext Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Physical Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL ATUR Traps Commands Conexant Yes
DSL ATUR Trapsext Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL Cap Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL Line Intf Commands Conexant Yes
ADSL Line Profile Commands Conexant Yes
Dsl chip Commands Conexant Yes
Dsl dsp chip Commands Conexant Yes
Dsl dsp port Commands Conexant Yes
Dsl system Commands Conexant Yes
EHDLC Commands
Ehdlc intf Commands Conexant Yes
Ethernet Commands
Dot3 stats Commands Conexant Yes
Ethernet Commands Conexant Yes
Filtering Commands
ACL Global Macentry Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr list genentry commands Conexant Yes
ACL Port Macentry Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr namedlist genentry Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr namedlist info Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr namedlist map Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr profile branch Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr profile info Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr profile node Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree branch Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree info Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree map Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree node Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree profile Commands Conexant Yes
Filter expr entry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter list genentry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter namedlist genentry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter namedlist info Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree node Commands Conexant Yes
Clfr tree profile Commands Conexant Yes
Filter expr entry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter list genentry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter namedlist genentry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter namedlist info Commands Conexant Yes
Filter namedlist map Commands Conexant Yes
Create filter namedlist map Conexant Yes
Filter rule actionmap Commands Conexant Yes
Filter rule entry Commands Conexant Yes
Filter rule map Commands Conexant Yes
Filter rule stats Commands Conexant Yes
Filter seq entry Commands Conexant Yes
IP DSLAM
111
Filter seq info Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule arp Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule clfrtree Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule ether Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule generic Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule ICMP Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule IGMP Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule IP Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule PPP Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule TCP Commands Conexant Yes
Filter subrule UDP Commands Conexant Yes
EOA Commands
EOA Commands Conexant Yes
IGMP Commands
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands Conexant Yes
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands Conexant Yes
Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands Conexant Yes
Igmpsnoop port info Commands Conexant Yes
Igmpsnoop port stats Commands Conexant Yes
Igmpsnoop querier info Commands Conexant Yes
Interface Commands
Interface Commands Conexant Yes
IP Commands
IP Net to Media Table Commands Conexant Yes
IP Route Commands Conexant Yes
Ipoa intf Commands Conexant Yes
ipoe intf Commands Conexant Yes
Rid static Commands Conexant Yes
MacProfile Commands
Macprofile global Commands Conexant Yes
Resvdmac profile info Commands Conexant Yes
Resvdmac profile param Commands Conexant Yes
Management Traffic Commands
Ctlpkt group info Commands Conexant Yes
Ctlpkt instance info Commands Conexant Yes
Ctlpkt profile info Commands Conexant Yes
PPPoE Tunneling Commands
PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands
PPPoE Global Config Commands
PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands
PPPoE Global Stats Commands
Pppoe intf Commands
PPPoE Session Stats Commands
PPPR Interface Commands
IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands
Dra global stats Commands
Dra instance entry Commands
Dra stats entry Commands
Dra global config Commands
Ia profile entry Commands
Pia instance entry Commands
Pia stats entry Commands
Pia global config Commands
QoS Commands
IRL Map Commands
IRL Profile Commands
IRL Stats Commands
Bridge rlinstance map Commands
Rl actionprofile info Commands
Rl instance info Commands
Rl profile info Commands
IDL series User Guide
112
Scheduling profile class Commands
Scheduling profile info Commands
Trfclass profile class Commands
Trfclass profile info Commands
Trfclass stats Commands
RMON Commands
RMON Statistics Group Commands
RMON Task Info Commands
RMON Memory Pool info Commands
RMON Queue info Commands
RMON Net buffers info Commands
RMON Semaphore info Commands
RMON Event Group info Commands
SNMP Commands
SNMP Comm Commands
SNMP Host Commands
SNMP Stats Commands
SNMP Traphost Commands
SNTP Commands
SNTP Cfg Commands
SNTP servaddr Commands
SNTP Stats Commands
System Commands
Cbuftrace cfg Commands
System Configuration Save and Restore
Commands
System Control Table Commands
System crash info commands
System Info Commands
System manuf info Commands
System reboot info command
Nbize Commands
System Stats Commands
System Traps Commands
System Trap Log Table Commands
System version commands
Trace Log Configuration Commands
Trace Log Statistics Commands
VC Aggregation Commands
Atm vcaggr intf Commands
Atm vcaggr map Commands
VLAN Commands
GVRP Info Commands
GVRP Port Info Commands
GVRP Port Stats Commands
Vlan curr info Commands
VLAN mapprofile info Commands
Vlan mapprofile param Commands
VLAN Static Commands
Miscelleneous Commands
File Commands
Other Commands
PLANET CLI Commands
System ADSL Port Operation Status
Commands
System Alarm Commands
System Control Commands
System Hardware Inventory Commands
System ivmconfig Commands
System SFP Commands
System Version Commands
System Debug Commands
IP DSLAM
113
Configuration FD Commands
Configuration USER Commands
Temperature Configuration Commands
Temperature State Commands
Temperature Supervision Commands
Temperature Configuration Commands
Temperature State Commands
Temperature Supervision Commands
System Commands
System Hardware Inventory Commands PLANET Yes
System ivmconfig Commands PLANET Yes
System Debug Commands PLANET No, for KEYMILE and
PLANET support personal
only
IDL series User Guide
114
5.2 802.1p commands
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port accessprio [portid <portid-val>] [regenprio <regenprio-val >]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val > Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type : Get-—Optional
Valid values: 1-386
regenprio <regenprio-val > Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is
mapped.
Type : Get —Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Example:
$ get bridge port accessprio portid 1 regenPrio 1
Output:
PortId : 1 regenPrio : 1
AcessPriority : 0
Output field:
Field Description
PortId Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
regenPrio Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is mapped.
AcessPriority The Outbound Access Priority the received frame is mapped to.
References:
Bridge port commands
IP DSLAM
115
5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port prioinfo [portid <portid-val >]
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port prioinfo portid portid [defprio <defprio-val>] [numtrfclass
<numtrfclass-val>] [defsvprio <defsvprio-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid> Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386
defprio <defprio-val> The default ingress User Priority which can be configured by
the user.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
numtrfclass
<numtrfclass-val>
The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
defsvprio
<defsvprio-val>
Not supported
Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Example:
$ get bridge port prioinfo portid 1
IDL series User Guide
116
Output:
PortId : 1
DefaultPriority : 1 NumTrafficClass : 3
DefaultSVPriority : 1
Output field:
Field Description
PortId Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
DefaultPriority The default ingress User Priority which can be configured
by the user. The default value of this attribute can be 0 or 0
depending on interface over which the bridge port is
created. The default value is 0 for bridge port created over
ethernet or aggregator interface. And the default value is 0
if the interface over which the bridge port has been created
is one of EOA, PPPoE and IPoE.
NumTrafficClass The number of egress traffic classes supported on this
port. It depends on whether bridge port is over EOA, in
which case, the max number of queues is value of
maxnumeoaprioQs in gsvSystemSizingGroup and default
value is also value of maxnumeoaprioQs in nbsize or over
Ethernet / aggregated interface, in which case, the max
number of queues is value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in nbsize
and default value is also value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in
nbsize. It is modifiable only when the bridge port is in
disabled state.
DefaultSVPriority Not supported
References:
Bridge port commands
IP DSLAM
117
5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port trfclassmap [portid <portid-val >] [regenprio <regenprio-val >]
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port trfclassmap portid <portid-val > regenprio <regenprio-val >
[trfclass <trfclass-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val > Port number of the port for which this entry contains
bridge management information.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1-386
regenprio
<regenprio-val >
The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In
our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that
order. It lies in the range 0-7
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
trfclass <trfclass-val > The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The
maximum value of trafficClass is defined by numTrfClass
parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The default value of
this field shall be determined according to table 7-2
described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition
IDL series User Guide
118
Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the
bridge port is in disabled state.
Type: Modify － Optional
Example:
$ get bridge port trfclassmap portid 1 regenPrio 1
Output:
PortId : 1 regenPrio : 1
TrafficClass : 2
Output field:
Field Description
PortId Port number of the port for which this entry contains
bridge management information.
regenPrio The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In
our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that
order. It lies in the range 0-7
TrafficClass The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The
maximum value of trafficClass is defined by
numTrfClass parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The
default value of this field shall be determined according to
table 7-2 described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition
Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the
bridge port is in disabled state.
References:
Bridge port commands
IP DSLAM
119
5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port priomap [portid <portid-val >] [usrprio <usrprio-val >]
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port priomap portid <portid-val > usrprio <usrprio-val>
[regenprio <regenprio-val >]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val > Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1-386
usrprio <usrprio-val > The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it
can arrive in a tag header, it can have range 0-7.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
regenprio
<regenprio-val >
The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped
for this port.
Type: Modify --Optional
alid values: 0 - 7
Example:
$ get bridge port priomap portid 1 usrPrio 1
IDL series User Guide
120
Output:
PortId : 1 UserPriority : 1
RegenUserPrio : 1
Output field:
Field Description
PortId Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge
management information.
UserPriority The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it can arrive in
a tag header, it can have range 0-7.
RegenUserPrio The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped for this port.
References:
Bridge port commands
IP DSLAM
121
5.3 ABOND Commands
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond group intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create abond group intf ifname<interface-name> groupid <groupid-val>
[ minaggrrateupstrm <minaggrrateupstrm-val> ] [ minaggrratednstrm
<minaggrratednstrm-val> ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm <diffdelaytolupstrm-val> ]
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm <diffdelaytoldnstrm-val> ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio
<maxrxbitrateratio-val> ] [ linkhecthrshld <linkhecthrshld-val> ]
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold <asmirlthreshold-val> ]
[ maxatmportusrate <maxatmportusrate-val> ]
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete abond group intf ifname <interface-name>
IDL series User Guide
122
5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify abond group intf ifname <interface-name> [ groupid <groupid-val> ]
[ minaggrrateupstrm <minaggrrateupstrm-val> ] [ minaggrratednstrm
<minaggrratednstrm-val> ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm <diffdelaytolupstrm-val> ]
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm <diffdelaytoldnstrm-val> ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio
<maxrxbitrateratio-val> ] [ linkhecthrshld <linkhecthrshld-val> ]
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold <asmirlthreshold-val> ]
[ maxatmportusrate <maxatmportusrate-val> ] [ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding
type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not
possible if interface is enabled
Type: Create－ Mandatory
Delete --－Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 31
groupid <groupid-val> This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is
configured statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be
changed while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an
operator to help identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or
debugging of the link.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
minaggrrateupstrm
<minaggrrateupstrm-val>
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0
minaggrratednstrm
<minaggrratednstrm-val>
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream
direction.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0
IP DSLAM
123
diffdelaytolupstrm
<diffdelaytolupstrm-val>
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
Upstream direction. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -4
Default value: 4
diffdelaytoldnstrm
<diffdelaytoldnstrm-val>
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
downstream direction. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -24
Default value: 4
asmprotocol Enable
|Disable
This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be
exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the
links participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable
sidformat EightBitSid
|TwelveBitSid
SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1
maxrxbitrateratio
<maxrxbitrateratio-val>
The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in
upstream direction.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4
Default value: 4
linkhecthrshld
<linkhecthrshld-val>
HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold
for link to be part of group in Rx direction
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -10
Default value: 2
numoflinksupforgrpup
One | All
This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start
ASM protocol
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0
IDL series User Guide
124
asmirlthreshold
<asmirlthreshold-val>
IRL Threshold for ASM messages
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 8
maxatmportusrate
<maxatmportusrate-val>
Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -8000
Default value: 4000
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create abond group intf ifname abond-0 groupid 1 minaggrrateupstrm 5
minaggrratednstrm 5 diffdelaytolupstrm 0 diffdelaytoldnstrm 0 asmprotocol Disable
sidformat EightBitSID maxrxbitrateratio 2 linkhecthrshld 1 numoflinksupforgrpup
One asmirlthreshold 0 maxatmportusrate 0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ifname : abond-0 GroupId : 1
MinAggrRateUpstrm : 5 MinAggrRateDnstrm : 5
DiffDelayTolUpstrm : 4 DiffDelayTolDnstrm : 4
AsmProtocol : Disable SidFormat : EightBitSID
MaxRxBitRateRatio : 2 LinkHecThreshold : 1
CtrlVpi : 0 CtrlVci : 0
NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp : One AsmIrlThreshold : 0
MaxAtmPortUsRate : 0
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
IP DSLAM
125
Output Fields:
Field Description
ifname This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding
type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not
possible if interface is enabled
GroupId This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is configured
statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be changed
while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an operator to help
identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or debugging of the link.
MinAggrRateUpstrm Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.
MinAggrRateDnstrm Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream direction.
DiffDelayTolUpstrm The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
Upstream direction.
DiffDelayTolDnstrm The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in
downstream direction.
AsmProtocol This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be
exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the links
participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.
SidFormat SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported
MaxRxBitRateRatio The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in
upstream direction.
LinkHecThreshold HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold for
link to be part of group in Rx direction
CtrlVpi Control Channel VPI: VPI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM
Messages
CtrlVci Control Channel VCI: VCI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM
Messages
NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start
ASM protocol
AsmIrlThreshold IRL Threshold for ASM messages
MaxAtmPortUsRate Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.
IDL series User Guide
126
5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond group stats [ifname <interface-name>]
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset abond group stats ifname <interface-name>
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM based Multi pair Bonding
type of interfaces. Valid value is abond-X
Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1
Example:
$ get abond group stats ifname abond-0
Output:
ifname : abond-0
AchievedAggrRateUpstrm : 10 AchievedAggrRateDnstrm : 12
CellLossUpstrmCurrent : 12 CellLossDnstrmCurrent : 20
CellLossUpstrmPrv15min : 12 CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min : 20
CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay : 12 CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay : 20
CellLossUpstrmPrevDay : 12 CellLossDnstrmPrevDay : 20
GroupFailureCntCurrent : 15 GroupFailureCntPrev15Min : 15
GrpFailureCntCurrentDay : 15 GrpFailureCntPrevDay : 15
GrpUnavailableSecCurrent : 15 GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min : 15
GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay : 15 GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay : 15
ASMTxCnt : 10 ASMRxCnt : 10
IP DSLAM
127
GrpFailureReason : MinRateNotAchievedUpAndDn
AsmRxCrcErrorCount : 10
Output Fields:
Field Description
ifname This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based
Multi pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X
AchievedAggrRateUpstrm Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in upstream
direction.
AchievedAggrRateDnstrm Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in downstream
direction.
CellLossUpstrmCurrent Group cell loss count upstream for current 15 minutes.
CellLossDnstrmCurrent Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current 15 minutes.
CellLossUpstrmPrv15min Group cell loss count upstream for Last 15 minutes.
CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min Group cell loss count downstream for Last 15 minutes.
CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay Group cell loss count upstream for current Day.
CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current Day.
CellLossUpstrmPrevDay Group Rx cell loss count upstream for previous Day.
CellLossDnstrmPrevDay Group Rx cell loss count downstream for Previous Day.
GroupFailureCntCurrent Group failure count for current 15 minutes.
GroupFailureCntPrev15Min Group failure count for previous 15 minutes.
GrpFailureCntCurrentDay Group failure count for current Day.
GrpFailureCntPrevDay Group failure count for previous Day.
GrpUnavailableSecCurrent Group unavailable second current.
GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min Group unavailable second previous 15 Min.
GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay Group unavailable second current Day.
GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay Group unavailable second for previous Day.
ASMTxCnt Group ASM Tx count.
ASMRxCnt Group ASM Rx count.
GrpFailureReason Failure reason for the abond Group.
AsmRxCrcErrorCount group Asm Rx crc error count.
IDL series User Guide
128
5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond link entry [ifname <interface-name>] [lowif <lowif-val>]
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]
[asmrxgroupintf <asmrxgroupintf>] [asmrxlinkindex <asmrxlinkindex>]
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]
IP DSLAM
129
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi
pair Bonding type of interfaces. ValidValue is abond-X. Link
can not be created, deleted or modified if associated abond
group interface is enabled.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
entry. Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify －Mandatory
Get － Optional
txlinkadminstatus
Enable | Disable
This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group. Type:
Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable
rxlinkadminstatus
Enable | Disable
This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group. Type:
Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: enable
asmrxgroupintf
<asmrxgroupintf>
Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.
Type: Create -- Optional
Valid values: abond-0_ABONDGR_MAX_IFINDEX
Default value: 0xffffffff
asmrxlinkindex
<asmrxlinkindex>
Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: 0xffffffff
Example:
$ create abond link entry ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0 txlinkadminstatus enable
rxLinkadminstatus enable asmrxgroupintf abond-0 asmrxlinkindex dsl-0
IDL series User Guide
130
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ifname : abond-0 lowif : dsl-0
AsmRxGroupIntf : abond-0 AsmRxLinkIndex : dsl-0
TxLinkAdminStatus : enable RxLinkAdminStatus : enable
TxLinkOperStatus : Disable RxLinkOperStatus : Disable
AsmTxLinkStatus : SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic
AsmRxLinkStatus : SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
ifname This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair
Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Link can not be
created , deleted or modified if associated abond group interface is
enabled.
lowif This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL) entry.
Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X
AsmRxGroupIntf Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.
AsmRxLinkIndex Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.
TxLinkAdminStatus This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group.
RxLinkAdminStatus This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group.
TxLinkOperStatus The current operational status of the abond link in Tx direction.
RxLinkOperStatus This specifies the rx operational Status for the link in a Group.
AsmTxLinkStatus The current Tx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM
Messages.
AsmRxLinkStatus The current Rx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM
Messages.
IP DSLAM
131
5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get abond link stats [ifname <interface-name>] [lowif <lowif-val>]
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset abond link stats ifname<interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi
pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X
Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 30
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X
Type: Reset － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Example:
$ get abond link stats ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0
Output
ifname : abond-0 lowif : dsl-0
ASMTxCount : 10 ASMRxCount : 10
TxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded
RxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded
IDL series User Guide
132
Output Fields:
Field Description
ifname This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi
pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X
lowif This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X
ASMTxCount Per-link ASM Tx count. These are not exact counts and have
been kept for debugging.
ASMRxCount Per-link ASM Rx count. These are not exact counts and have
been kept for debugging.
TxLinkFailureReason Failure reason for the abond link in Tx direction.
RxLinkFailureReason Failure reason for the abond link in Rx direction.
5.4 Aggregation commands
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands
5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get actstdby aggr info [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify actstdby aggr info ifname <interface-name> [status Enable | Disable]
IP DSLAM
133
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname ifname This specifies the aggregator interface index on which active standby is to be
enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: aggr-0
Status
enable | disable
This specifies whether active standby mode is to be enabled or not.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ get actstdby aggr info IfName aggr-0
Output:
Interface Index : aggr-0
Status : Enable
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface Index This specifies the aggregator interface index on which
active standby is to be enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.
Status This specifies whether active standby mode is to be
enabled or not.
Caution:
z Active Standby mode shall not be enabled, if aggregator interface and
redundancy aggregator are not created, or if LACP aggregator is created for the
aggregator interface.
z If only Active Standby is desired and no load sharing is expected then bridge
port shall be created over the aggregator only after Active Standby has been
enabled for redundancy aggregator. If the bridge port is created over aggregator
before enabling Active Standby for it, the load sharing shall start and continue till
Active Standby is enabled.
z
References:
Redundancy commands.
IDL series User Guide
134
5.4.2 Aggr info Commands
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get aggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create aggr intf ifname <interface-name> [ ip <ip-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ]
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val> ] [ mgmtsvlanid
<mgmtsvlanid-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ enable | disable ]
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get aggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create aggr intf ifname <interface-name> [ ip <ip-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ]
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val> ] [ mgmtsvlanid
<mgmtsvlanid-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ enable | disable ]
IP DSLAM
135
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type
of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0 Type: Create －
Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0
ip <ip-val> This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
mask <mask-val> This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If
either of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also
be non-null and vice versa. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
usedhcp False | True This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to
obtain an IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True
Default value: false
mgmtvlanid
<mgmtvlanid-val>
VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface.
Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management Vlanid is
specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use
the value of 'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created
on this interface as the Management Vlan Index. In case the
management vlan (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) doesn't exist on the system
then IP based management on this management VLAN shall
not happen on the interface till the corresponding VLAN is
created with the Net side port as its member.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 4095
Default value: 0
IDL series User Guide
136
mgmtsvlanid
<mgmtsvlanid-val>
Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for
management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field
is true. If no management Svlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
management vlan id. In case the management vlan (virtual
vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the
associated ' psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system
then IP based management shall not happen on the interface
till the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side
port as its member.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 4095
Default value: 0
priority <priority-val> Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on
Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native
Vlan mode this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in
stacked vlan mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7
enable | disable
Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create aggr intf IfName aggr-0 ip 172.25.100.100 mask 255.255.0.0 usedhcp
False mgmtvlanid 2 mgmtsvlanid 2 priority 2 enable
IP DSLAM
137
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Index : aggr-0
IP Address : 172.25.100.100 Mask : 255.255.0.0
UseDhcp : False
Mgmt VLAN Index : 2
Mgmt S-VLAN Index : 2
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio : 2
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface Index This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type of
interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0
IP Address This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.
Mask This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If either
of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also be non-null
and vice versa.
UseDhcp This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to obtain an
IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.
Mgmt VLAN Index VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface. Non-zero
value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero)
doesn't exist on the system then IP based management on this
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.
Mgmt S-VLAN Index Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for management
traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no management
Svlanid is specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use the
value of 'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this
IDL series User Guide
138
interface as the management vlan id. In case the management vlan
(virtual vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated '
psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system then IP based
management shall not happen on the interface till the corresponding
virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on Management
VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native Vlan mode this priority
shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in stacked vlan mode it shall be
used for S-Vlan tag.
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.
Cautions:
z If an aggregator interface is being created, all configurations of aggregated
links (layer2 Ethernet interfaces), should be same.
5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
gets lacp aggr [aggrifname <aggrifname-val >]
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val> [actorsystemprio
<actorsystemprio-val>] [actoradminkey <actoradminkey-val>]
[collectormaxdelay <collectormaxdelay-val>] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]
IP DSLAM
139
5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val>
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val> [actorsystemprio
<actorsystemprio-val>] [actoradminkey <actoradminkey-val>]
[collectormaxdelay <collectormaxdelay-val>] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]
Parameters:
Name Description
aggrifname
<aggrifname-val>
The Aggregator interface name.
Type: Create ---－ Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: aggr-0
actorsystemprio
<actorsystemprio-val>
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority
value associated with the Actor's System ID.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
Default value: 10
actoradminkey
<actoradminkey-val>
The current administrative value of the Key for
the Aggregator
Type: Create Optional
Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535
Default value: 0
collectormaxdelay
<collectormaxdelay-val>
The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute
defines the maximum delay,in tens of
microseconds,that may be imposed by the
IDL series User Guide
140
Frame Collector between receiving a frame from
an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the
frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535
Default value: 0
aggrtype Static | Lacp Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Static
Example:
$ create lacp aggr aggrifname aggr-0 actorsystemprio 2 actoradminkey 1000
collectormaxdelay 2 aggrtype Static
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Aggr IfName : aggr-0
Mac Address : 23:45:67:89:00:01 Aggregate : true
Actor Sys Priority : 2 Partner Sys Priority : 2
Actor Sys ID : 23:45:67:89:00:01
Partner Sys ID : 23:45:67:89:00:01
Actor Oper Key : 10 Partner Oper Key : 2
Actor Admin Key : 1000 Collector Max Delay : 2
Aggregation Type : Static
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
Aggr IfName The Aggregator interface name.
Mac Address A 6-octet read-only value carrying the individual MAC
address assigned to the Aggregator.
Aggregate A read-only Boolean value indicating whether the
Aggregator represents an Aggregate (TRUE) or an
Individual link (FALSE).
Actor Sys Priority A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority value
IP DSLAM
141
associated with the Actor's System ID.
Partner Sys Priority A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value
associated with the Partners SystemID.
Actor Sys ID A 6-octet read only MAC address value used as a unique
identifier for the System that contains this Aggregator.
Partner Sys ID A 6-octet read-only MAC address value consisting of the
unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this
Aggregator.A value of zero indicates that there is no known
Partner.
Actor Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the
Aggregator.
Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator
is current protocol Partner.
Actor Admin Key The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregator
Collector Max Delay The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute defines the
maximum delay,in tens of microseconds,that may be
imposed by the Frame Collector between receiving a frame
from an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the frame
to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.
Aggregation Type Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp
Cautions:
z LACP aggregator creation shall fail, if aggregator interface is not created.
z LACP aggregator shall not be created, if Redundancy aggregator is created
for an aggregator interface.
References:
z create aggr intf
z get aggr intf
IDL series User Guide
142
5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info
Description:
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port information.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport info [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info
Description:
Use this command to modify LACP aggregator port information.
Command Syntax:
modify lacp aggrport info ifname <interface-name> [actoradminkey
<actoradminkey-val>] [partadminkey <partadminkey-val>] [actorportprio
<actorportprio-val>] [partadminportprio <partadminportprio-val>] [actorsysprio
<actorsysprio-val>] [partadminsysprio <partadminsysprio-val>] [partadminsysid
<partadminsysid-val>] [partadminport <partadminport-val>] [actoradminstate
activity | timeout | aggr] [partadminstate activity | timeout | aggr] [aggrstatus
enable|disable] [pktpriority <pktpriority-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the
aggregator.
Type : Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*
actoradminkey
<actoradminkey-val>
The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregator.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1
partadminkey
<partadminkey-val>
The current administrative value of the Key for the
Aggregator's current protocol Partner.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1
actorportprio The priority value assigned to this Aggregation
IP DSLAM
143
<actorportprio-val> Port Type : Optional
Valid values : 0 - 2^8 – 1
partadminportprio
<partadminportprio-val
>
The current administrative value of the port priority,
for the protocol Partner.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 – 255
actorsysprio
<actorsysprio-val>
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority
value associated with the Actor's System ID.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 – 255
partadminsysprio
<partadminsysprio-val>
A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority
value associated with the Partner's System ID.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
partadminsysid
<partadminsysid-val>
A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value
representing the administrative value of the
Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's SystemID
Type : Optional
Valid values: 00:00:00:00:00:00 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
partadminport
<partadminport-val>
The current administrative value of the port
number for the protocol Partner.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535
actoradminstate
activity | timeout |
aggr
Administrative state of actor
Type: Optional
partadminstate
activity | timeout |
aggr
Administrative state of Partner.
Type: Optional
aggrstatus
enable|disable
Specifies whether aggregation(bonding) is to be
enabled over this Aggregation Port.
Type : Optional
Valid values: enable|disable
pktpriority
<pktpriority-val>
For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for
choice of traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface.
Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
IDL series User Guide
144
Example:
$ get lacp aggrport info ifname eth-0
Output:
Interface : eth-0 Port Is Aggregate : true
Actor Oper Key : 10 Partner Oper Key : 2
Actor Admin Key : 1000 Partner Admin Key : 2
Actor Port Priority : 1 Partner Admin Port Priority : 1
Actor System Priority : 2 Partner Oper Port Priority : 1
Actor System ID : 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Admin Sys Priority : 2
Actor Port : 2 Partner Oper Sys Priority : 2
Partner Admin Sys Id : 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Admin Port : 1
Partner Oper Sys Id : 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Oper Port : 1
Port Actor Admin State : distrib
Port Partner Admin State : activity
Port Actor Oper State : default
Port Partner Oper State : default
Attached Agg ID : aggr-0 Selected Agg ID : aggr-0
Aggregation Status : Enable LACP PacketsPrio :2
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.
Port Is Aggregate Boolean value indicating whether the Aggregation Port is able to
Aggregate ('TRUE'), or is only able to operate as an Individual link
('FALSE').
Actor Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator.
Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator's current
protocol Partner.
Actor Admin Key The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator.
Partner Admin Key The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator's current
protocol Partner.
Actor Port Priority The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port.
Partner Admin Port
Priority
The current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol
Partner.
Actor System Priority A 2-octet, read-write value indicating the priority value associated with
the Actor's System ID.
Partner Oper Port Priority The current operational value of the port priority for the protocol Partner.
Actor System ID A 6-octet, read-write MAC address value, used as a unique identifier for
the System that contains this Aggregator.
IP DSLAM
145
Partner Admin Sys
Priority
A 2-octet, read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with
the Partner's System ID.
Actor Port The port number locally assigned to the Aggregation Port.
Partner Oper Sys Priority A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with
the PartnerÌs System ID.
Partner Admin Sys Id A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the administrative
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.
Partner Admin Port The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol
Partner.
Partner Oper Sys Id A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the operational
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.
Partner Oper Port The current operational value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Port Actor Admin State Administrative state of Actor.
Port Partner Admin State Administrative state of Partner.
Port Actor Oper State Operational state of Actor.
Port Partner Oper State Operational state of Partner.
Attached Agg ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has
currently selected.
Selected Agg ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has
currently selected.
Aggregation Status Whether or not aggregation(bonding) is to be enabled over this
Aggregation Port..
LACP PacketsPrio For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic
class/Queue on outgoing interface.
References:
z lacp aggrport list
z lacp aggrport stats
IDL series User Guide
146
5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list
Description:
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port list.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport list [aggrifname <aggrifname-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Aggrifname
<aggrifname-val>
The Aggregator interface name.
Type : Optional
Valid values: aggr-*
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get lacp aggrport list
Output:
Aggr IfName : aggr-0
Port List : eth-0 eth-1
Output Fields:
Field Description
Aggr IfName The Aggregator interface name.
Port List List of the ports corresponding to given aggregator index.
References:
z lacp aggr
z lacp aggrport info
z lacp aggrport stats.
IP DSLAM
147
5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats
Description:
Use this command to get LACP aggregator port statistics.
Command Syntax:
get lacp aggrport stats [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats
Description:
Use this command to reset LACP aggregator port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset lacp aggrport stats ifname <interface-name>
Note:
This command is not supported in this release.
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the
aggregator.
Type : Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*
Example :
$ get lacp aggrport stats ifname eth-0
Output:
Interface : eth-0
LACPDUs Rx : 1 LACPDUs Tx : 1
MarkerPDUs Rx : 1 MarkerPDUs Tx : 1
Marker Response PDUs Rx : 1 Marker Response PDUs Tx : 1
Unknown Rx : 1 Illegal Rx : 1
IDL series User Guide
148
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface The Interface name of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.
LACPDUs Rx The number of valid LACP PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.
LACPDUs Tx The number of LACP PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.
MarkerPDUs Rx The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.
MarkerPDUs Tx The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.
Marker Response
PDUs Rx
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this
Aggregation Port.
Marker Response
PDUs Tx
The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this
Aggregation Port.
Unknown Rx The number of frames received, that either carry the Slow Protocols
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or, are addressed
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type.
Illegal Rx The number of frames received, that carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain a badly
formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
References:
z lacp aggr
z lacp aggrport list
z lacp aggrport info.
5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggr info [ifname <interface-name]
IP DSLAM
149
5.4.7.2 Create rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rdncy aggr info ifname ifname [revdistrib Enable | Disable] [fallback
Enable | Disable]
5.4.7.3 Delete rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to delete
Command Syntax:
delete rdncy aggr info ifname <interface-name>
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify rdncy aggr info ifname <interface-name> [revdistrib Enable | Disable]
[fallback Enable | Disable]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy
Aggregator type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: aggr-0
revdistrib Enable |
Disable
It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced
for traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are
active, for this aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are
expected on the redundant links (if uplink aggregating device is
layer2 switch), Reverse distribution filtering may be enabled.
IDL series User Guide
150
But if there is no chance of such duplicate packets, or the
duplicate packets need not have a special handling, reverse
distribution filtering may be disabled.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
fallback Enable |
Disable
This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator
interface, when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to
re-propagation of protocol PDUs to the links based on the state
of the links, this may be enabled if re-propagation of protocol
PDUs is required for immediate restoration of peer protocol
state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is not required and
Protocol time out may only be triggered for re-propagation,
Fallback trigger should be disabled.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create rdncy aggr info IfName aggr-0 revdistrib disable fallback disable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Index : aggr-0
Reverse Distribution : disable FallBack : disable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface Index This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy Aggregator
type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0
Reverse Distribution It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced for
traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are active, for this
aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are expected on the redundant
links (if uplink aggregating device is layer2 switch) Reverse distribution
filtering may be enabled. But if there is no chance of such duplicate
packets or the duplicate packets need not have a special handling
reverse distribution filtering may be disabled.
IP DSLAM
151
FallBack This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator interface,
when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to re-propagation of
protocol PDUs to the links based on the state of the links, this may be
enabled if re-propagation of protocol PDUs is required for immediate
restore of peer protocol state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is
not required and Protocol time out may only be trigger for
re-propagation, Fallback trigger should be disabled.
Caution:
z Redundancy aggregator shall not be created, if aggregator interface is not
created or if LACP aggregator is created for the aggregator interface.
References:
z create aggr intf command
z get aggr intf command
5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggrport list [aggrifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
aggrifname
<interface-name>
Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2
interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: aggr-0
Example:
$ get rdncy aggrport list aggrifname aggr-0
IDL series User Guide
152
Output:
Aggr IfName : aggr-0
PortList : eth-0 eth-1
Port List Interface type : None
Output Fields:
Field Description
Aggr IfName Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2
interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0
PortList The complete list of active layer2 interfaces associated
with the aggregator interface by virtue of redundancy.
Each bit set represents the Ethernet interface, that is
actively associated with redundancy based
aggregation. An interface is actively associated with
aggregator interface, if data for the aggregator interface
can be transmitted/received over it.
Port List Interface type It denotes what type of interfaces (Physical ethernet)
are present in Port List. If no interface are present in
port list the value shall be None
5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rdncy aggr stats [ifname <interface-name>]
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset rdncy aggr stats ifname <interface-name>
IP DSLAM
153
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are
desired. Valid Value is aggr-0
Type: Reset -- Optional
Get -- Optional
Valid values: aggr-0
Example:
$ get rdncy aggr stats IfName aggr-0
Output:
Interface Index : aggr-0
Collapse Count : 1
DeCollapse Count : 1
Last Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : 04/21/2003:12:23:34
Last De-Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : 04/21/2003:12:23:34
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface Index This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are desired.
Valid Value is aggr-0
Collapse Count This specifies the number of times one of the redundant
interfaces has gone down and the traffic had to be moved on
to the other redundant interface, which is up.
DeCollapse Count This specifies the number of times one of the failed
redundant interfaces has come up and the traffic had to be
redistributed among mutually redundant interfaces.
Last Collapse Time
[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]
This specifies time at which the last collapse (one of the
redundant interface has gone down) occurred. The display
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.
Last De-Collapse Time
[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]
This specifies time at which the last de-collapse (one of the
failed redundant interface has come up) occured. The display
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.
IDL series User Guide
154
5.5 ATM commands
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats
Description:
Use this command to get AAL5 VC statistics.
Command Syntax:
get atm aal5 stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
This parameter specifies the interface for which
information is desired
Type : Get - Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 -
Example:
$ get atm aal5 stats ifname aal5-0
Output:
Low IfName : atm-0 VC IfName : aal5-0
VPI : 0 VCI : 1
Tx Frames count : 100 Rx Frames count : 85
Tx Bytes count : 1535 Rx Bytes count : 1200
CRC Errors count : 0 Oversized SDU : 0
Output Fields:
Field Description
VC IfName The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics needs to be
retrieved.
Low IfName This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0
VPI This is the Virtual Port Identifier.
VCI This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
Tx Frames count The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs transmitted on this AAL5 VCC.
Rx Frames count The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.
Tx Bytes count The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.
Rx Bytes count The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.
IP DSLAM
155
CRC Errors count This specifies the number of CRC errors encountered.
Oversized SDU This specifies the number of oversized SDUs received.
References:
z atm vc related commands
z atm port and statistics related commands
z atm vc statistics commands.
5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get oam cc vc [ifname <interface-name>]
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify oam cc vc ifname <interface-name> [action act | deact] [dir sink | src |
both] [mode auto | manual]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired.
In case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid
interfaces should be displayed.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
action act | deact This field specifies the CC action to be taken. This is used along with
CC direction field.
Type: Modify -- Optional
dir sink | src | both This field specifies the direction for CC
activation/Deactivation.Direction could be source (src), sink or both.
IDL series User Guide
156
Type: Modify -- Optional
mode auto | manual This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ get oam cc vc ifname aal5-0
Output:
ifName Mode SourceOperStatus SinkOperStatus Initiator
------------------------------------------------------------
aal5-0 Manual activated LOC Self
Output Fields:
Field Description
ifName This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired. In
case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid interfaces
should be displayed.
Mode This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.
SourceOperStatus This field specifies the current operational state of source point of the VCC.
SinkOperStatus This field specifies the current operational state of sink point of the VCC.
Initiator This field is valid only in auto mode and it specifies the current initiator of CC
Activation/Deactivation.
References:
z atm vc related commands.
z atm port and statistics related commands.
z atm oam loopback commands.
IP DSLAM
157
5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get oam lpbk vc [ifname <interface-name>]
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify oam lpbk vc ifname <interface-name> [e2e | seg] [lbid <lbid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting
configured.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Mandatory
e2e | seg This specifies the loop back type used. It may be: e2e or segment.
Type: Modify － Optional
Lbid < lbid-val> This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.
Type: Modify － Optional
Example:
$ get oam lpbk vc ifname aal5-0
Output:
IfName : aal5-0 VPI : 1 VCI : 1
LB Type : e2e
OAM Location Id : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
OAM LB Result : E2e Succeeded
IDL series User Guide
158
Output Fields:
Field Description
IfName Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.
VPI This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
VCI This is the Virtual Port Identifier.
LB Type This specifies the loop back type used. It may be:e2e or segment.
OAM Location Id This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.
OAM LB Result This specifies the result of the loop back test. It may be Result
Unavailable, Seg Succeeded, Seg Failed, E2e Succeeded, E2e Failed,
Test Aborted, or Test In Progress.
References:
z atm vc related commands.
z atm port and statistics related commands.
5.5.4 ATM Port Commands
5.5.4.1 Get atm port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm port [ifname <interface-name>]
5.5.4.2 Create atm port
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm port ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> [ maxvc <maxvc-val> ]
[ maxvpibits <maxvpibits-val> ] [ maxvcibits <maxvcibits-val> ] [ oamsrc
<oamsrc-val> ] [ orl <orl-val> ] [ trfclassprofileid <trfclassprofileid-val> ]
[ profilename <profilename-val> ] [ ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val> ]
[ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ mirrormode data | mirror ] [ enable |
disable ]
IP DSLAM
159
5.5.4.3 Delete atm port
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm port ifname <interface-name>
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm port ifname <interface-name>[ maxvc <maxvc-val> ] [ maxvpibits
<maxvpibits-val> ] [ maxvcibits <maxvcibits-val> ] [ oamsrc <oamsrc-val> ] [ orl
<orl-val> ] [ trfclassprofileid <trfclassprofileid-val> ] [ profilename
<profilename-val> ] [ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
Physical interface index
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
lowif <lowif-val> This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is
configured. Lower interface can be of type dsl-* or dsli-* or dslf-* or
abond-*
Type: Create － Mandatory
maxvc <maxvc-val> This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at
this ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the
value packet
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 8
maxvpibits
<maxvpibits-val>
The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM
interface.
Type: Create － Optional
IDL series User Guide
160
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
Default value: 8
maxvcibits
<maxvcibits-val>
This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use
at this ATM interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 16
Default value: 16
oamsrc <oamsrc-val> Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will
respond to all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not
valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
orl <orl-val> This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be
applied on this interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 64 - 6000
Default value: 54000
trfclassprofileid
<trfclassprofileid-val>
This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
Default value: 1
profilename
<profilename-val>
This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "SPPROFILE"
ctlpktinstid
<ctlpktinstid-val>
This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while
creating an interface an instance is created internally from the default
profile governed by the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.
The default instance is governed by macro 0. Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 1 -146
Default value: 0
atmtransporttype cell
|packet
This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either
Cell which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the
IP DSLAM
161
UTOPIA interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells
corresponding to Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM
interface. This is not modifiable if any ATM VC is created on top of this
ATM port.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1
mirrormode data |
mirror
This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror
mode, only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and
regular customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in
mirror mode.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: data
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0 maxvc 5 maxvpibits 6 maxvcibits 12S
oamsrc 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff orl 3000 trfclassprofileid 3 profilename gold
ctlpktinstid 1 atmtransporttype Cell mirrormode mirror enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : atm-0 LowIfName : dsl-0
MaxVccs : 5
MaxVpiBits : 6
MaxVciBits : 12
OAMSrc : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
ORL(kbps) : 3000
UnknownVPI : 35 UnknownVCI : 35
ProfileName : gold
Current Output Rate : 64
trfclassprofileid : 3
Ctl Pkts Instance Id : 1
ATM Transport Type : Cell
Mirror Mode : mirror
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
IDL series User Guide
162
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
IfName Physical interface index
LowIfName This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is configured.
Lower interface can be of type 94 or 124 or 125 or 0xfffffff9
MaxVccs This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at this
ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value
packet
MaxConfVccs This specifies the current number of VCCs configured on this port.
MaxVpiBits The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM
interface.
MaxVciBits This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use at
this ATM interface.
OAMSrc Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will respond to
all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not valid if the
atmtransporttype has the value packet.
ORL(kbps) This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be applied
on this interface.
UnknownVPI This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VPI on this ATM interface.
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.
UnknownVCI This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VCI on this ATM interface.
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.
ProfileName This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.
Current Output Rate This parameter specifies the current output rate value in KBPS that is
available on this interface, based on the minimum of DSL trained rate and
OutPut Rate limit configured for the ATM port.
trfclassprofileid This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.
Ctl Pkts Instance Id This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while creating an
interface an instance is created internally from the default profile governed by
the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will reduce the total number
to instances that can be now created by one. The default instance is
governed by macro 0.
ATM Transport Type This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either Cell
which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the UTOPIA
interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells corresponding to
Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM interface. This is not modifiable
IP DSLAM
163
if any ATM VC is created on top of this ATM port.
Mirror Mode This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror mode,
only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and regular
customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in mirror mode.
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.
5.5.5 ATM VC Commands
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to create a new ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).
Command Syntax :
create atm vc intf ifname <interface-name> vpi <vpi-val> vci <vci-val> lowif
<atm-port-interface-name> [enable | disable] [aal5] [a5txsize
<aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size>] [a5rxsize <aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size>] [vcmux | llcmux | auto
| ethernet] [pvc] [channel fast|interleaved] [ mgmtmode
data|mgmt|DataAndMgmt| raw] [ maxnumproto <maxnumproto-val> ]
[ autostatus Enable|Disable ] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype
dynamic | opstatechange ] [ ctlpktgroupid <ctlpktgroupid> | none ]
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to delete an existing ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).
Command Syntax:
delete atm vc intf ifname <interface-name>
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to display information corresponding to a single VC, or for all
VCs.
Command Syntax: get atm vc intf [ifname <interface-name>]
IDL series User Guide
164
5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf
Description:
Use this command to modify ATM VC parameters.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vc intf ifname <interface-name> [vpi <vpi-val>] [vci <vci-val>]
{enable | disable} [a5txsize <aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size>] [a5rxsize
<aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size>] [vcmux | llcmux | auto | ethernet] [ mgmtmode data |
mgmt | DataAndMgmt | raw] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype
dynamic | opstatechange ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies name of VC Interface.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : aal5-0 - *
lowif
<atm-port-interfacenam
e>
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values : atm-0 - *
vpi <vpi-val> Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also,
the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in
one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be
0.
Type : Create – Mandatory
Modify – Optional
Valid values : 0-2^8
vci <vci-val> Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the
new VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled.
Also, the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status
in one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to
be 0.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1-2^16
IP DSLAM
165
mgmtmode Data |
Mgmt | DataAndMgmt
| Raw
It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only
data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of
remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that
ATM VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode,
data transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on
the same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the acceptable
values for atmVCCAAL5EncapType are llcmux and auto. In Mgmt
mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM VC and both
Ethernet as well as non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be
received at the Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created,
then only non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be received at the
Control Plane. However, if EoA is not created then all the packets on
that ATM VC shall be received at the Control Plane. However, to
configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, a good practice is to to
create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to prevent
flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the
ATM VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode
cannot be changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Data
enable|disable This specifies the Admin Status of the VC.
Type: Optional
Default Value: enable
aal5 This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.
Type: Create Optional
Default value: aal5
a5txsize
<aal5-cpcs-txsdu-size >
This specifies the maximum transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.
Type: Optional
Valid values : 1-1536
Default Value: 1536
a5rxsize
<aal5-cpcs-rxsdu-size>
This specifies the maximum receive CPCS SDU size to be used
Type: Optional
Valid values : 1-1536
Default Value: 1536
vcmux|llcmux|auto|
ethernet
This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5
SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode
IDL series User Guide
166
is only used to sense the llc/vcmux. Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet
can be created only over an ATM port which has value of
atmtransporttype as packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be
0/0. aaltype, mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for
an ATM VC with encaptype as Ethernet.
Type: Optional
Default Value: llcmux
Pvc This specifies the type of VC. The only value supported is PVC.
Type: Optional
Default Value: pvc
channel
fast|interleaved
This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's
cells have to be transmitted/ received. This field is deprecated and
currently not in use.
Type: Optional
Default Value: Interleaved
Maxnumproto
<maxnumproto-val>
This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active
protocol stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol
stack is supported.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: 1
Autostatus
Enable|Disable
This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In
the Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and
created based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For
example, if the protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA
packet, then the corresponding EoA stack will be created above this
interface. However, the corresponding EoA interface must have been
created with the config status field set as config mode. This field is not
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: disable
autosupportedprot
none|{pppoa | eoa |
ipoa}+
This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto
detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols
mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 1
autovcmuxforcedprot
None | pppoa | eoa |
ipoa
This field specifies that if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user
can configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. It can only
be present with the autostatus flag as enable. In case of a conflict with
IP DSLAM
167
autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: none
autosensetriggertype
dynamic |
opstatechange
This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or
higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when
Operational Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is
'dynamic', then detection can happen anytime a packet is received. If its
value is 'opstatechange', then autodetection happens only when
Operational status of ATM VC changes to UP. This field is not valid if
encaptype is Ethernet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: dynamic
ctlpktgroupid
ctlpktgroupid | none
The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows
for this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt
group info command. If this group does not have entries for some of the
flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port,
for which this VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows
shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being
created.
Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 0 -50
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create atm vc intf ifname aal5-0 lowif atm-0 vpi 10 vci 10 enable aal5 pvc
a5txsize 1536 a5rxsize 1536 llcmux mgmtmode data autosupportedprot pppoa
eoa autovcmuxforcedprot pppoa autosensetriggertype dynamic ctlpktgroupid none
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VC IfName : aal5-0 Low IfName : atm-0
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : llcmux
channel : Interleaved Last Change(sec) : 0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
IDL series User Guide
168
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
Max simultaneous protocol : 1
Auto Status : Disable
Auto Supported Protocol : pppoa eoa
Auto VC Mux Forced Protocol : None
Auto Sense Trigger Type : dynamic
Auto Curr Sensed Encaps Typee : none
Ctl Pkts Group Id : none
Auto Supported Protocol : pppoa eoa
Output Fields:
Field Description
VC IfName VC Interface Name. It can be : aal5-0 - *
Low IfName Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.
VPI Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.
VCI Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the new
VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.
Oper Status This specifies the actual/current state of the interface. It can be either Up
or Down
Admin Status This specifies the desired state of the interface. It may be either Up/Down.
Aal5 Tx Size This specifies the transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.
Aal5 Rx Size This specifies the receive CPCS SDU size to be used.
Aal Type This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.
Aal5 Encap This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5
SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode is
only used to sense the llc/vcmux . Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet can
be created only over an ATM port which has value of atmtransporttype as
packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be 0/0. aaltype,
mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for an ATM VC with
encaptype as Ethernet.
channel This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's cells
have to be transmitted/received. This field is deprecated and currently
not in use.
IP DSLAM
169
Last Change The value of sysUpTime at the time this VC entered its current operational
state.
MgmtMode It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only
data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of
remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that ATM
VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, data
transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on the
same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the only acceptable
value for atmVCCAAL5EncapType is llc. In Mgmt mode, EoA interface
can't be created on the ATM VC and both Ethernet as well as non-Ethernet
packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. In
DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created then only non-Ethernet packets on
that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. However, if EoA is not
created then all the packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control
Plane. However, to configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, good
practice is to create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to
prevent flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM
VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode cannot be
changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not valid if
encaptype is Ethernet.
RowStatus This defines the row-status of the interface entry
VC Type This field specifies whether VC type is PVC or SVC.
VC Topology This field specifies the VC connection topology type.
Max simultaneous
protocol
This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active protocol
stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol stack is
supported.
Auto Status This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In the
Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and created
based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For example, if the
protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA packet, then the
corresponding EoA stack will be created above this interface. However,
the corresponding EoA interface must have been created with the
gsvEoaConfigMode field's bit corresponding to the 'Auto' set.
Auto Supported
Protocol
This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto
detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols
mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is meaningful
only when autostatus flag is enable.
Auto VC Mux Forced This field specifies if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user can
IDL series User Guide
170
Protocol configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. This field is
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable. In case of conflict with
autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.
Auto Sense Trigger
Type
This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or
higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when Operational
Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is 'dynamic', then detection
can happen anytime a packet is received. If its value is 'opstatechange',
then autodetection happens only when Operational status of ATM VC
changes to UP. This field is not valid if encaptype is Ethernet.
Auto Curr Sensed
Encaps Type
This field specifies the current sensed Encapsulation type in case the
Encapsulation type is being autodetected. The value of this field will be the
same as the field 'AAL5 Encapsulation Type' if the Encapsulation type is
preconfigured. This is a read only field for all agents, except for the Auto
Sense Agent.
Ctl Pkts Group Id The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows for
this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as mapped for
the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt group info
command. If this group does not have entries for some of the flows, then
those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this
VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped
to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being created.
Caution:
The specified lower interface should exist. Please refer to the create atm port
command.
References:
z ATM interface commands
z ATM statistics commands
z ATM OAM commands
z ATM VC statistics commands.
IP DSLAM
171
5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats
Description:
Use this command to get statistical information about a specific or all ATM virtual
circuits.
Command Syntax:
get atm vc stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the Virtual Circuit. If this is not specified,
then information for all VCs is displayed.
Type : Get – Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 - *
Example:
$ get atm vc stats ifname aal5-0
Output:
Low IfName : atm-0 VC IfName : aal5-0
VPI : 1 VCI : 1
Total Tx Cells count : 250 Total Rx Cells count : 20
CLPI 0 Rx Cells count : 10 Rx Pkts Rejected count : 0
Output Fields:
Field Description
LowIf This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0
VPI It is the Virtual Port Identifier.
VCI It is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
VC IfName The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics
needs to be retrieved.
Total Tx Cells count The total number of valid ATM cells transmitted by this interface.
Total Rx Cells count The total number of valid ATM cells received by this interface.
CLPI 0 Rx Cells The number of valid ATM cells received by this interface with
CLP=0.
Rx Pkts Rejected count The total number of valid ATM cells discarded by the interface.
IDL series User Guide
172
References:
z Other atm vc related commands
z oam lpbk command
z atm port related commands
z atm statistics related commands
IP DSLAM
173
5.6 Bridging Commands
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id
used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor
learnt in the system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid
range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
macaddr
<macaddr-val>
A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an
individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional
IDL series User Guide
174
Example:
$ get bridge forwarding vlanid 10 macaddr 02:2e:22:3d:44:56
Output:
MAC Addr PortId VlanId Status
-----------------------------------------------------------
02:2e:22:3d:44:56 10 10 learned
Output Fields:
Field Description
MAC Addr A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual
entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.
VlanId Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id used
for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor learnt in the
system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
PortId Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the
value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This
may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.
Status The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that the value of the
corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was learned, and is being used. mgmt
(5) - the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value internal (6) indicates
that the entry is an internal entry and cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets
created for the IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address in this entry shall be
the one specified in the mac address profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of
the Bridge Port.The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky
port.
IP DSLAM
175
References:
z bridge port related commands
z bridge port stats command
z bridge static related commands
z bridge mode related commands.
5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode
Description:
Use this command to get the current bridging mode.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mode
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get bridge mode
Output:
Bridging Mode is Enabled
Output Fields:
None
References:
z modify bridge mode command
z bridge port command
z bridge port stats command
z bridge static command
z bridge forwarding command
z DHCP Client commands.
IDL series User Guide
176
5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap
Description:
Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port cap [portid <portid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> The index of base port
Type :Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386
Default value: None
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get bridge port cap
Output:
Portid : 45
Port Capabilities : Tagging FrameTypes IngressFiltering
Output Fields:
Field Description
portid The index of base port.
Port Capabilites Capabilities that are allowed on a per-port basis.
IP DSLAM
177
5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port forwarding [portid <portid-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr
<macaddr-val>]
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port forwarding portid <portid-val> [vlanid <vlanid-val>]
[macaddr <macaddr-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been
seen. This may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a
dynamic port binding and the port has not been learnt yet.
Type: Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386
vlanid <vlanid-val> Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding
and/or filtering information. To delete an individual learned entry or all
learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In
SVL case, this value is ignored except when the value is 4097, which is the
value of a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that
are neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan transparency
feature is supported, the valid range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here
means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case
of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional
IDL series User Guide
178
Valid values: 0 -4096
macaddr
<macaddr-val>
In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a given FDB; the
MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To
delete an individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.
Type: Delete － Optional
Get － Optional
Example:
$ get bridge port forwarding portid 10 vlanid 10 macaddr 02:03: ee: 34:55:66
Output :
Port Id : 10 vlan id : 10
Mac Addr : 02:03:ee:34:55:66
Status : Mgmt
Output Fields:
Field Description
Port Id Port number of the port on which a frame having a source
address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of
dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This may have a value of
"0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.
vlan id Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has
forwarding and/or filtering information. To delete an individual
learned entry or all learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a
valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is ignored
except when the value is 4097, which is the value of a special
Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are
neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan
Mode.
Mac Addr In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a
given FDB; the MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by
FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual entry, valid
value of Mac address has to be specified.
Status The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was
learned, and is being used. mgmt (5) - the value of the
IP DSLAM
179
corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value
internal (6) indicates that the entry is a internal entry and
cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets created for the
IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address
in this entry shall be the one specified in the mac address
profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of the Bridge Port.
The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky
port.
5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port map [portid <portid-val>] [ifname <interface-name>]
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge port map portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name>
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port map portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name>
IDL series User Guide
180
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> The bridge port with which a lower interface is being associated in the
autosensing scenario.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*
ifname
<interface-name>
'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces
belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for this
interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*
Example:
$ create bridge port map portid 2 ifname eoa-0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id : 2 Interface Index : eoa-0
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
Port Id The bridge port with which a lower interface is being
associated in the autosensing scenario.
Interface Index 'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces
belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for
this interface..
IP DSLAM
181
5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats
Description:
Use this command to get the statistics of a single port, or all the ports.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port stats [portid <portid-val>]
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset bridge port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset bridge port stats portid <portid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
portid
<portid-val>
This is the bridge port identifier. If this is not specified in
the get command, then information for all ports is
displayed.
Type : Get － Optional
Reset － Mandatory
Valid values : 1- 578
Example:
$ get bridge port stats portid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
PortId : 1 Max Info Size : 1500
Out Frames : 138 In Frames : 129
In Discards : 3
HC In Frames : 300
HC Out Frames : 350
HC In Discards : 400
IDL series User Guide
182
Output Fields:
Field Description
PortId This is the bridge port identifier. It can be : 1- 386
Max Info Size The maximum size of the INFO (non-MAC) field that this port will
receive or transmit.
Out Frames The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its
segment.
In Frames The number of frames that have been received by this port from its
segment.
In Discards Count of valid frames received, which were discarded (i.e., filtered)
by the Forwarding Process.
HC In Frames Number of frames that have been received by this port from its
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.
HC Out Frames Number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.
HC In Discards Count of valid frames received and discarded (i.e filtered) by the
Forwarding Process. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.
5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to create a new bridge port.
Command Syntax:
create bridge port intf portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name> [maxucast
<max-ucast-addresses> ] [learning enable|disable][status enable|disable]
[stickystatus enable | disable] [FdbModify enable | disable][ aclglbdenyapply
Enable | Disable ] [ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable |
disable ] [ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype
trusted | untrusted ]
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf
Description:
This command is used to delete an existing bridge port.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge port intf portid <portid-val>
IP DSLAM
183
5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge port intf [portid <portid-val>]
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge port intf portid <portid-val> [ maxucast <maxucast-val> ]
[ learning enable | disable ] [ status enable | disable ] [ stickystatus enable |
disable ] [ fdbmodify enable | disable ] [ aclglbdenyapply Enable | Disable ]
[ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable | disable ]
[ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype trusted |
untrusted ]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> The bridge port id
Type: Modify －Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 578
ifname
<interface-name>
Interface name associated with the Port,
Type: mandatory,
Values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*, ipoe-*, vir-*
maxucast
<maxucast-val>
This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can be
learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of bridge
port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 128. The default value
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a CPE
side bridge port is 16. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The default value
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a bridge
port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256. The default
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a
IDL series User Guide
184
bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
learning enable |
disable
The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1) indicates
that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value disable
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this bridge port.
The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side bridge ports
shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value shall be enable.
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
status enable | disable The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall be
created in enabled AdminStatus by default.
Type: Modify － Optional
stickystatus enable
|disable
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1) indicates
that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also indicates that
the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any other port. The
entries learnt on this port can only be removed by management action or
by making the value as disable (2) so that the entries can be aged out.
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an PPPOE/ IPOE
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
fdbmodify enable |
disable
This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding
database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
aclglbdenyapply
Enable |Disable
This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value
of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
aclglbtrackapply
Enable |Disable
This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value
IP DSLAM
185
of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
proxyarpstatus enable
|disable
The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field
indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port. This
field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a filter
rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user
wants to receive proxy arp requests.
Type: Modify － Optional
arptstatus Enable |
Disable
This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP packets
received/transmitted on this port. When enabled, ARP source MAC
address of the incoming ARP packets (both request/reply) will be changed
to virtual MAC address (if applicable) and the ARP target MAC address of
the outgoing ARP reply packets will be changed to the original host MAC
address (if applicable).
Type: Modify -- Optional
darpstatus Enable |
Disable
This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port are to
be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port
mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only on the NET
side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute
'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of 'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP
packets are to be directed as mentioned above, only if both the flags are
enabled. If any of the two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded
as per the normal bridging flow.
Type: Modify -- Optional
porttype trusted |
untrusted
This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information is
used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on trusted
ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ create bridge port intf ifname eth-0 portid 10 maxucast 10 learning enable
stickystatus enable status enable fdbmodify disable aclglbdenyapply Disable
aclglbtrackapply Disable proxyarpstatus enable arptstatus enable darpstatus
enable porttype trusted
IDL series User Guide
186
Output:
Port Id : 10
Max Unicast Addresses : 10 Learning Status : enable
Port Oper Status : Disable Port Admin Status : Disable
Sticky Status : enable FDB Modify : Disable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Disable
Acl Global Track Apply : Disable
ProxyArpStatus : enable Sensed IfIndex : eoa-1
ArpTStatus : enable Directed ARP status : enable
Port Type : trusted
Output Fields:
Field Description
Port Id The bridge port id
If Name The interface name associated with the given port.
Max Unicast Addresses This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can
be learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of
bridge port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 4096. The default
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on
a CPE side bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that
can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The
default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or
configured on a bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries
that can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256.
The default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or
configured on a bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge
port is created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is
sensed. Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port
created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Learning Status The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value
disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this
bridge port. The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side
bridge ports shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value
shall be disable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over
an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of
this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface.
Port Oper Status The current operational state of the bridge port. If AdminStatus of the
IP DSLAM
187
bridge port is disable (2), then OperStatus of the port should be disable
(2). If AdminStatus of the bridge port is changed to enable(1), then
OperStatus of the port should change to enable(1) if the bridge port is
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. The bridge port will have
the OperStatus value as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the bridge
port is 'config' and it is waiting for a packet to be sensed, on its lower
interface index, to get activated.
Port Admin Status The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall
be created in enabled AdminStatus by default.
Sticky Status Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1)
indicates that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also
indicates that the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any
other port. The entries learnt on this port can only be removed by
management action or by making the value as disable (2) so that the
entries can be aged out. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
FDB Modify This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding
database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this
field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE
interface.
Acl Global Deny Apply This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Acl Global Track Apply This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed.
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
ProxyArpStatus The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field
IDL series User Guide
188
indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port.
This field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a
filter rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user
wants to receive proxy arp requests.
Sensed IfIndex This specifies the sensed interface index corresponding to the bridge
port. This field is used to determine the stack sensed for this bridge
port in the auto sensing scenario. This field cannot be modified. If the
oper status of the bridge port is 'enable' or 'disable' then the value of
this field gives the interface index on which the bridge port is currently
stacked. If the oper status is 'dormant' and the value of this field is
other than '-', then it represents the last interface index on which the
bridge port had been stacked.
ArpTStatus This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP
packets received/transmitted on this port. When enabled, ARP
source MAC address of the incoming ARP packets (both
request/reply) will be changed to virtual MAC address (if applicable)
and the ARP target MAC address of the outgoing ARP reply packets
will be changed to the original host MAC address (if applicable).
Directed ARP status This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port
are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only
on the NET side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction
with the attribute 'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of
'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the two is disabled,
the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the normal bridging flow.
Port Type This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information
is used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on
trusted ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.
IP DSLAM
189
5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
[egressports egressports | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> |
none]
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
[egressports <egressports-val> | none | none] [forbidegressports
<forbidegressports-val>> | none]
IDL series User Guide
190
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast"
capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is shared across VLANS.
Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can
have its own information for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a
mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with
vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the filtering
information of this entry applies.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
egressports
<egressports-val>
|none
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a
specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A port may not be added in
this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
Default value: 0
Forbidegressports
<forbidegressports-val>
| none
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a
specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded, regardless of any
dynamic information. A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member
of the set of ports in EgressPorts.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
Default value: 0
IP DSLAM
191
Example:
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 recvport 0
egressports 10 forbidegressports 20 SKIP 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLan Index : 7 Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01
Egress ports : 10
Forbidden Egress ports : 20
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
VLan Index The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed
as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent
Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable"
has value "none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not
supported for VLAN with vlanid as
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan
Mode.
Mcast Address The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the
filtering information of this entry applies.
Egress ports The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A
port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of
ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.
Forbidden Egress ports The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded,
regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not be added in
this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in EgressPorts.
IDL series User Guide
192
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z Bridge Commands
5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static ucast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>]
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>
[portid <portid-val>]
5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>
IP DSLAM
193
5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>
[portid <portid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of device
capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is a valid value.
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
ucastaddr
<ucastaddr-val>
The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering info applies.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
portid <portid-val> The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific unicast
address will be flooded in the event that it has not been
learned. It also specifies the set of ports a specific unicast
address may be dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only
the CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set in this
list. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values:1-386
Example:
$create bridge static ucast vlanid 1 ucastaddr 1:1:1:1:1:1 recvport 0 portid 2 status
1 cfgmode Config
IDL series User Guide
194
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Vlan Index : 1 Ucast Address : 1:1:1:1:1:1
Port Id : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
Vlan Index The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of
device capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is
a valid value. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case
of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Ucast Address The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering
info applies.
Port Id The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific
unicast address will be flooded in the event that it
has not been learned. It also specifies the set of
ports a specific unicast address may be
dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only the
CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set
in this list. Type - optional, Valid values:1-386
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z Bridge Commands.
IP DSLAM
195
5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge tbg traps
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge tbg traps [bindingstatus enable | disable] [fdbtrapstatus enable |
disable] [vmactrapstatus enable | disable] [traploss Ok | Notok]
Parameters:
Name Description
bindingstatus enable
|disable
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding
status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same
Forwarding Database.
Type: Modify － Optional
fdbtrapstatus enable
|disable
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of
forwarding table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is
learnt/ created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by
the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.
Type: Modify － Optional
vmactrapstatus
enable |disable
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap
when MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the
M2VMac database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps
shall be given by the packet filter module to the applications registered for
these traps.
Type: Modify － Optional
traploss Ok | Notok This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table
trap is acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability
of resources. ‘OK’ means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap
is lost an indication shall be given to the application, which can then
IDL series User Guide
196
synchronize its database with the forwarding table. ‘NotOK’ means trap loss is
not acceptable. In this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any
forwarding table entry getting learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get
learnt/modified/delete.
Type: Modify － Optional
Example:
$ get bridge tbg traps
Output:
Binding Status Changed Trap : enable Forwarding Table Trap : enable
Virtual Mac Trap : enable
Forwarding Table Trap Loss : OK
Output Fields:
Field Description
Binding Status
Changed Trap
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding
status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same Forwarding
Database.
Forwarding Table
Trap
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of forwarding
table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is learnt/
created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by the packet
filter module to the applications registered for these traps.
Virtual Mac Trap This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap when
MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the M2VMac
database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps shall be given
by the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.
Forwarding Table
Trap Loss
This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table trap is
acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability of
resources. OK means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap is lost an
indication shall be given to the application, which can then synchronize its
database with the forwarding table. NotOK means trap loss is not acceptable. In
this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any forwarding table entry getting
learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get learnt/modified/delete.
References:
z Bridge Commands
IP DSLAM
197
5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get garp port info [portid <portid-val>]
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify garp port info portid <portid-val> [jointimer <jointimer-val>] [leavetimer
<leavetimer-val>] [leavealltimer <leavealltimer-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Index of the Bridge Port
Type : Get - Optional
Modify - Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 386
jointimer
<jointimer-val>
The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be
less than half the Leave time value
Type :Optional
Valid values: 10-255
leavetimer
<leavetimer-val>
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value should
be greater than 2 times Join time value.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 10-255
leavealltimer
<leavealltimer-val>
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value
should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time value.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 10-65535
Example:
$ get garp port info
IDL series User Guide
198
Output:
PortId Join Timer Leave Timer LeaveAll Timer
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 30 90 5000
Output Fields:
Field Description
PortId Index of the Bridge Port.
Join Timer The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be
less than half the Leave time value.
Leave Timer The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value
should be greater than 2 times Join time value.
LeaveAll Timer The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value
should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time
value.
References:
z GVRP Commands
5.6.12 STP Group Commands
5.6.12.1 Get stp info
Description:
Use this command to display the current status of the Spanning Tree Protocol
Group.
Command Syntax:
get stp info
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info
Description:
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol group.
Command Syntax:
modify stp info [priority <priority-val>] [maxage <maximum-age>] [htime
<hello-time>] [fdelay <forward-delay>] [enable|disable]
IP DSLAM
199
5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats
Description:
Use this command to reset STP global statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset stp stats
Parameters:
Name Description
Priority <priority-val> The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the
first two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other
(last) 6 octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65535.
Maxage
<maximum-age>
The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information
learned from the network on any port before it is discarded,
in units of seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge
is currently using.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 6 - 40.
htime <hello-time> The amount of time between the transmission of
Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it
is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in
units of second. This is the actual value that this bridge is
currently using.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 10
Fdelay <forward-delay> This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when
moving towards the Forwarding state. The value
determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening
and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state.
This value is also used, when a topology change has been
detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in the
Forwarding Database.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 4 - 30
Enable|disable Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan
IDL series User Guide
200
mode.
Type : Optional
Valid values: disable | enable
Example:
$ modify stp info priority 0x20 maxage 25 htime 5 fdelay 20 enable
Output:
Protocol Spec. : IEEE 8021D Priority : 0x20
Top. Changes : 1 Curr Top. Age(sec) : 35.0
Desig Root : 00:30:4F:10:5A:6C:DB:20 Root Cost : 0
Root Port : None Hold Time (sec) : 1.0
Br Max Age(sec) : 25 Curr Max Age (sec) : 20.0
Br Hello Time(sec) : 5 Curr Hello Time(sec) :2.0
Br Fwd Delay(sec) : 20 Curr Fwd Delay (sec) :15.0
STP status : enable
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
Output Fields:
Field Description
Protocol Spec An indication of what version of the Spanning Tree Protocol is
being run.
Priority The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the first
two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other (last) 6
octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.
Top. Changes The total number of topology changes detected by this bridge
since the management entity was last reset or initialized.
Curr Top. Age(Sec) The time (in second) since the last time a topology change was
detected by the bridge entity.
Desig Root The bridge identifier of the root of the spanning tree as
determined by the Spanning Tree Protocol as executed by this
node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node.
Root Cost The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.
Root Port The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path from
this bridge to the root bridge.
Hold Time (Sec) This time value determines the interval length during which no
more than two Configuration bridge PDUs shall be transmitted by
IP DSLAM
201
this node, in units of seconds.
Br Max Age(Sec) The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of
seconds, when this bridge is the root of the spanning tree. Note
that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the range for this parameter is
related to the value of dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime.
Curr Max Age (Sec) The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of
seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge is currently
using.
Br Hello Time(Sec) The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge is
acting as the root.
Curr Hello Time(Sec) The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration
bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the
spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of second. This is
the actual value that this bridge is currently using.
Br Fwd Delay(Sec) The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge
is acting as the root. Note that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the
range for this parameter is related to the value of
dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge.
Curr Fwd Delay (Sec) This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving
towards the Forwarding state. The value determines how long the
port stays in each of the Listening and Learning states, which
precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when a
topology change has been detected and is underway, to age all
dynamic entries in the Forwarding Database.
STP status Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan
mode.
References:
z get stp info command
z stp port related commands.
IDL series User Guide
202
5.6.13 STP Port Commands
5.6.13.1 Get stp port
Description:
Use this command to display port specific information for the Spanning Tree
Protocol, for all ports, or for the specified port.
Command Syntax:
get stp port info portid <portid-val>
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port
Description:
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol.
Command Syntax:
modify stp port info portid <portid-val> [enable|disable] [pcost <pcost-val>]
[priority <priority-val>] [pktpriority <pktpriority-val>]
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset the STP port stats for a specific interface.
Command Syntax:
reset stp port stats portid <portid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning
Tree Protocol management information.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: 1 to 386;
enable|disable Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Port or not
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
pcost <pcost-val> The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the
spanning tree root, which include this port.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
priority <priority-val> The value of the priority field which is contained in the most
IP DSLAM
203
significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given
by the value of dot1dStpPort.
Type: Optional
Valid values: 0 -255.
pktpriority
<pktpriority-val>
For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic
class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the
VC, on which the packet is to be sent.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Example:
$ modify stp port portid 1 disable pcost 1000 priority 0x10
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Port ID : 1 Priority : 0x0
State : Forwarding PortStatus : Enable
Path Cost : 100 Desig Cost : 0
Desig Root:00:30:4F0:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C
Desig Port : 0x8000 Fwd Transitions : 1
STP Status : Enable
Set Done
Port ID : 1 Priority : 0x0
State : Forwarding PortStatus : Enable
Path Cost : 100 Desig Cost : 0
Desig Root:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C
Desig Port : 0x8000 Fwd Transitions : 1
STP Status : Enable STP PacketsPrio : 2
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
IDL series User Guide
204
Output Fields:
Field Description
Port Id The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning
Tree Protocol management information.
Priority The value of the priority field which is contained in the most
significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given
by the value of dot1dStpPort.
State The port's current state as defined by application of the Spanning
Tree Protocol. This state controls what action a port takes on
reception of a frame.
Port Status The enabled/disabled status of the port.
Path Cost The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the
spanning tree root which include this port.
Desig Cost The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to
this port. This value is compared to the Root Path Cost field in
received bridge PDUs.
Desig Root The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root in
the Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Designated Bridge
for the segment to which the port is attached.
Desig Bridge The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be
the Designated Bridge for this port's segment.
Desig Port The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this
port's segment.
Fwd Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning
state to the Forwarding state.
STP status Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.
STP PacketsPrio For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic
class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the
VC, on which the packet is to be sent
Caution:
z The specified interface should be an existing bridge interface.
References:
z bridge port intf command.
IP DSLAM
205
5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntac:
modify bridge tbg info [aging <aging-timeout> ] [slaveaging <aging-timeout> ]
[netaging <aging-timeout> ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable] [ mcastsupport enable | disable ] [ mcastdrop enable | disable ]
[ dropiffdbfull <dropiffdbfull-val> ] [ resnetlearning <resnetlearning-val> ]
[resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ]
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info
Description:
Use this command to get bridging related global information.
Command Syntax:
get bridge tbg info
Parameters:
Name Description
Aging <aging-timeout> The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned
forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can be configured
when aging is to be stopped.
Type: Modify Optional
Valid values: 10 -1000000
slaveaging
<aging–timeout>
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned
forwarding information learned from the slave device. The
recommended value for this is more than or equal to the value for
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be configured when aging is to
be stopped.
Valid values: 10 -1000000
netaging <aging –
timeout>
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned
forwarding information from NET side port. This is used only for full
bridge configuration. The recommended value of net aging timeout
should be greater than that of the ìAgingî parameter. The value 0 can
be configured when aging is to be stopped.
Valid values: 10 -1000000
IDL series User Guide
206
floodsupport enable |
disable
This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets are to be
flooded or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan
configuration for flood support to determine if flooding has to be done
for unknown unicast packet.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable | disable
bcastsupport
enable|disable
This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported or not.
The value for this is used along with per vlan configuration broadcast
support, to determine if broadcasting has to be done for the broadcast
packet.
mcastsupport
enable|disable
Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable| disable
mcastdrop
enable|disable
Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be dropped, or to
be forwarded, if multicast is not supported. This is only valid if
dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable|disable
dropiffdbfull enable |
disable
This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be done
because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be dropped. If this
is enabled the frame for which learning could not be done because of
limit exceeded shall be dropped, else forwarded based on bridge
forwarding logic.This being enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a
response to such a frame from which learning could not be done shall
come the frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,
shall not be found in forwarding table.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: enable
resnetlearning enable
| disable
This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for residential
bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in case of vlan with
residential bridging if 'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of vlan with
'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is governed only by per
port configuration i.e. 'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification
of this parameter is not supported.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: enable
resvmacprofileid The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved Mac
IP DSLAM
207
<resvmacprofileid-val> destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses are the
multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE
802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid value then the behavior for
Reserved Mac destined frames is determined based on Resvd Mac
profile associated with the VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN
here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual
Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4
Example:
$ modify bridge tbg info aging 20 slaveaging 100
Output:
Verbose Mode On
MacAddress : 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
No. of Ports : 0
Base Type : Transparent
Aging Timeout(sec) : 300 Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 600
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600 Flood Support : Disable
BroadCast Support : Enable MultiCast Support : Enable
MultiCast Drop : Disable Full Bridging Status :
Unrestricted
Drop If FDB full status: Enable ResidentialNetLearning : Enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1
Set Done
MacAddress : 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
No. of Ports : 0
Base Type : Transparent
Aging Timeout(sec) : 20 Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 100
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600 Flood Support : Disable
BroadCast Support : Enable MultiCast Support : Enable
MultiCast Drop : Disable Full Bridging Status :
Unrestricted
Drop If FDB full status: Enable ResidentialNetLearning : Enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1
IDL series User Guide
208
Output Fields:
Field Description
MacAddress The MAC address used by this bridge, when it must be
referred to, in a unique fashion. It is the address of one of the
Ethernet ports.
No. of Ports The maximum number of ports that can be controlled by this
bridge.
Base Type Indicates what type of bridging this bridge can perform. It is
always Transparent Bridging or STP.
Aging TimeOut The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can
be configured when aging is to be stopped.
Slaveaging TimeOut The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information learned from the slave device.
The recommended value for this is more than or equal to the
value for dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be
configured when aging is to be stopped.
Floodsupport This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets
are to be flooded or not. The value for this is used along with
per vlan configuration for flood support to determine if
flooding has to be done for unknown unicast packet.
Bcastsupport This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported
or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan
configuration broadcast support, to determine if broadcasting
has to be done for the broadcast packet.
Mcastsupport Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.
Mcastdrop Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be
dropped, or to be forwarded, if multicast is not supported.
This is only valid if dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.
NetAgingTimeout The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from NET side port. This is
used only for full bridge configuration. The recommended
value of net aging timeout should be greater than that of
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut.
Full Bridging Status This specifies the current state of full bridging on the bridge.
Thebridge can be set to residential bridging, restricted full
bridging or unrestricted full bridging. In residential bridging, all
packets from a CPE side port are sent to Net side port without
doing a lookup in the forwarding table. In restricted full
bridging, there is a lookup and a packet coming from a CPE
IP DSLAM
209
port destined for another CPE port is dropped. Hence,
CPE-CPE switching is not permitted. In unrestricted full
bridging, all traffic is forwarded based on lookup.
Drop If FDB full status This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be
done because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be
dropped. If this is enabled the frame for which learning could
not be done because of limit exceeded shall be dropped, else
forwarded based on bridge forwarding logic.This being
enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a response to such a
frame from which learning could not be done shall come the
frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,
shall not be found in forwarding table.
ResidentialNetLearning This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for
residential bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in
case of vlan with residential bridging if
'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of
vlan with 'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is
governed only by per port configuration i.e.
'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification of this
parameter is not supported.
Reserved Mac Profile Id The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved
Mac destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses
are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE
802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid
value then the behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames is
determined based on Resvd Mac profile associated with the
VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN here means the
802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in
case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
References:
z Bridge Port commands
z Bridge Port stats commands
z Ethernet commands
IDL series User Guide
210
5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid <vlanid-val>]
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [egressports
<egressports-val> | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> | none]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan
case, vlan id is not required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked
Vlan Mode.
Type: Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
egressports
<egressports-val> | none
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to
which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be
forwarded. More than one value can be given, separated by
spaces.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0
forbidegressports The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for
IP DSLAM
211
<forbidegressports-val> |
none
which the Service Requirement attributes Forward All Multicast
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0
Example:
$ get bridge mcast fwdall vlanid 1
Output:
VLAN Index : 1
Forward All Ports : 34
Forward All Static Ports : 1 2 3 5
Forward All Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10 11
Output Fields:
Field Description
Vlan Index The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Forward All Ports The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which all multicast
group-addressed frames are to be forwarded. This includes ports
for which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP,
or configured statically by management.
Forward All Static Ports The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to
which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be forwarded.
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Forward All Forbidden
Ports
The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for
which the Service Requirement attribute Forward All Multicast
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than
one value can be given, separated by spaces.
IDL series User Guide
212
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z bridge static multicast
5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability.
Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid
must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also
includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is created.
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
macaddr
<macaddr-val>
The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this entry's
filtering information applies
Type: Get -- Optional
IP DSLAM
213
Example:
$ get bridge mcast forwarding vlanid 1 macaddr 00:30:4F:00:08:01
Output:
Vlan Index : 1 Mac Address : 00:30:4F:00:08:01
Egress ports : 1 2
Group Learnt : 1
Output Fields:
Field Description
VLAN Index The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed
as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast
MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a
valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is
not required. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the
valid range for vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan
Multicast also there shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the
VLAN with that VLAN Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q
Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of
Stacked Vlan Mode.
Mac Address The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this
entry's filtering information applies
Egress ports The complete set of bridge ports, in this VLAN, to which frames
destined for this Group MAC address are currently being explicitly
forwarded. This does not include ports for which this address is
only implicitly forwarded, in the dot1qForwardAllPorts list.
Group Learnt The subset of bridge ports in EgressPorts, which were learned by
GMRP or some other dynamic mechanism, in this Filtering
database.
References:
z bridge static multicast
IDL series User Guide
214
5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid <vlanid-val>]
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg
Description Syntax:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [egressports
<egressports-val> | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> | none]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required
and is passed as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan
for multicast" capability. Each vlan can have its own information
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No
Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan transparency
feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also includes
4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is
created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Modify － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
egressports
<egressports-val> | none
The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to
which multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no
more specific forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
IP DSLAM
215
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
forbidegressports
<forbidegressports-val> |
none
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for
which the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered
Multicast Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP.
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0
Example:
$ get bridge mcast fwdunreg vlanid 1
Output:
VLAN Index : 1
Forward Unregistered Ports : 45
Forward Unregistered Static Ports : 1 2 3 6
Forward Unregistered Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10
Output Fields:
Field Description
VLAN Index The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value
of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required.
When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for
vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there
shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN
Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Forward Unregistered
Ports
The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which multicast
group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific
forwarding information, will be forwarded. This includes ports, for
which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP, or
configured statically by management.
Forward Unregistered
Static Ports
The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to which
multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific
forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More than one value can
IDL series User Guide
216
be given, separated by spaces.
Forward Unregistered
Forbidden Ports
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for which
the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered Multicast
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than one
value can be given, separated by spaces.
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z Bridge commands.
5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to create.
Command Syntax:
create bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
[egressports <egressports-val>] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val>]
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]
IP DSLAM
217
5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast
Description:
Use this command is used to modify
Command Syntax:
modify bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>
[egressports <egressports-val>] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANs. Hence vlan id is an optional
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan
case, vlan id is not required. This feature is not supported for
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.
Type: Optional for all commands
Valid values: 0 - 4095
Default value:
mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which this
entry's filtering information applies. Bit 0 of the first octet of the
MAC address indicates a group (multicast) MAC address, if the
bit is SET. For example, 01:00:00:00:00:00,03:FF:FF:FF:FF.
Addresses in the range 01:80:C2:00:00:00 -01:80:C2:00:00:0f
and 01:80:C2:00:00:20 -01:80:C2:00:00:2f have been blocked
as value of this index, as these are reserved GARP addresses.
Type : Create － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Default value:
egressports
<egressports-val>|none
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port
and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be
forwarded. A port may not be added in this set, if it is already a
member of the set of ports in ForbidEgressPorts. More than
one value can be given, separated by spaces.
Type :Optional for all commands
IDL series User Guide
218
Valid values: 1 – 386
Default value: none
forbidegressports
<forbidegressports-val>
|none
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port
and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be
forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may
not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of
ports in EgressPorts. Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values : 1 – 386
Default value: none
Example:
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 egressports 10
forbidegressports 20
Output:
Verbose Mode On:
Entry Created
VLan Index : 7 Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01
Egress ports : 10
Forbidden Egress ports : 20
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
VLan Index The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with vlanid as
4097
Mcast Address The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the
filtering information of this entry applies.
Egress ports The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded.
A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the
set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.
IP DSLAM
219
Forbidden Egress ports The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be
forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not
be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in
EgressPorts.
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
References:
z Bridge commands.
IDL series User Guide
220
5.8 DHCP Commands
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info
Description:
Use this command to get DHCP client information for clients, on the specified
interface, or for all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get dhcp client info [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-namef>
This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this
is not specified, then information for clients on all such interfaces will
be displayed.
Type : Optional
Valid values : eth-*, aggr-*
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get dhcp client info ifname eth-0
Output:
If-name Server Status Lease Start Date Lease Time (sec)
------------------------------------------------------------
eth-0 1.1.1.1 Bound Thu Jan 01 00:00:38 1970 500
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
If-Name This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be :
eth-*, aggr-*
Server
This specifies the address of the DHCP server with whom
the client has obtained the IP address and other
configuratio.s
Status This specifies the current state of the client. It may be:Init,
IP DSLAM
221
Selecting, Bound, Requesting, Renew or Bind.
Lease Start Date This signifies the date on which the DHCP server leased
out the IP address to the client.
Lease Time
This specifies the time period, (in seconds), for which an IP
address was leased out by the server.
The client is expected to renew the lease before the expiry
of this timer or release the IP Address.
References:
z dhcp client stats related commands
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats
Description:
Use this command to get DHCP client statistics on an interface on which the DHCP
client is running, or on all such interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get dhcp client stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
FIELD Description
Ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this is
not specified then information for clients on all such interfaces will be
displayed.
Type: Optional
Valid values : eth-0- *
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$get dhcp client stats ifname eth-0
Output:
If-name : eth-0
Msgs Sent : 4 Msgs Rcvd : 0
Decline Sent : 0 Offer Msgs Rcvd : 0
Discover Msgs Sent : 4
Req Sent : 0 Acks Rcvd : 0
IDL series User Guide
222
Rel Sent : 0 Nacks Rcvd : 0
Inform Sent : 0 Invalid Rcvd : 0
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
If-Name This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be : eth-0
Msgs Sent This specifies number of DHCP messages received sent on this
interface.
Msgs Rcvd This specifies number of DHCP messages sent received on this
interface.
Decline Sent This specifies number of DHCP decline messages sent on this interface.
Offer Msgs Rcvd This specifies number of DHCP offer messages received on this
interface.
Discover Msgs Sent This specifies number of DHCP discover messages sent on this
interface.
Req Sent This specifies number of DHCP request messages sent on this interface.
Acks Rcvd This specifies number of DHCP acks received on this interface.
Rel Sent This specifies number of DHCP release messages sent on this interface.
Nacks Rcvd This specifies number of DHCP nacks received on this interface.
Inform Sent This specifies number of DHCP inform messages sent on this interface.
Invalid Rcvd This specifies number of invalid dhcp messages received on this
interface.
References:
z dhcp client info related commands
IP DSLAM
223
5.9 DSL Commands
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl alarm profile [ifname <interface-name>]
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl alarm profile ifname <interface-name> [ atucthresh15minlofs
<atucthresh15minlofs-val> ] [ atucthresh15minloss <atucthresh15minloss-val> ]
[ atucthresh15minlols <atucthresh15minlols-val> ] [ atucthresh15minlprs
<atucthresh15minlprs-val> ] [ atucthresh15miness <atucthresh15miness-val> ]
[ atucthreshfastrateup <atucthreshfastrateup-val> ] [ atucthreshintlrateup
<atucthreshintlrateup-val> ] [ atucthreshfastratedn <atucthreshfastratedn-val> ]
[ atucthreshintlratedn <atucthreshintlratedn-val> ] [ atucinitfailtrap False | True ]
[ atucoptrapenable False | True ] [ aturthresh15minlofs
<aturthresh15minlofs-val> ] [ aturthresh15minloss <aturthresh15minloss-val> ]
[ aturthresh15minlprs <aturthresh15minlprs-val> ] [ aturthresh15miness
<aturthresh15miness-val> ] [ aturthreshfastrateup <aturthreshfastrateup-val> ]
[ aturthreshintlrateup <aturthreshintlrateup-val> ] [ aturthreshfastratedn
<aturthreshfastratedn-val> ] [ aturthreshintlratedn <aturthreshintlratedn-val> ]
[ atucgspmstatetrapenable False | True ] [ linealarmgscntrsreset False | True ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <fname-val> The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
atucthresh15minlofs
<atucthresh15minlofs-val>
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
IDL series User Guide
224
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minloss
<atucthresh15minloss-val>
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minlols
<atucthresh15minlols-val>
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minlprs
<atucthresh15minlprs-val>
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15miness
<atucthresh15miness-val>
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface
within any given 15 minute performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthreshfastrateup
<atucthreshfastrateup-val>
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing
an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucthreshintlrateup
<atucthreshintlrateup-val>
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucthreshfastratedn
<atucthreshfastratedn-val>
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing
an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
IP DSLAM
225
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucthreshintlratedn
<atucthreshintlratedn-val>
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucinitfailtrap False | True Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted
disable.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: False, True
atucoptrapenable False |
True
Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: False, True
aturthresh15minlofs
<aturthresh15minlofs-val>
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minloss
<aturthresh15minloss-val>
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minlprs
<aturthresh15minlprs-val>
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15miness
<aturthresh15miness-val>
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface
within any given 15 minutes performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthreshfastrateup
<aturthreshfastrateup-val>
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing
an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
IDL series User Guide
226
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturthreshintlrateup
<aturthreshintlrateup-val>
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturthreshfastratedn
<aturthreshfastratedn-val>
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing
an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturthreshintlratedn
<aturthreshintlratedn-val>
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgspmstatetrapenable
False | True
This indicates change in power mangement state
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: False, True
linealarmgscntrsreset False
| True
This parameter resets performance counters at runtime
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: False, True
Example:
$ get adsl alarm profile ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName : dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
------------------------------
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) : 10 Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 20
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec) : 30 Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 50
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) : 40 Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps): 70
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) : 30 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 30 Init Fail Trap : true
OpStateTrapEnable : false PowerMgmtTrapEnable : True
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
------------------------------
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) : 10
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 10 Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 10
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) : 10 Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps: 10
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) : 10 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 10
IP DSLAM
227
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified
or viewed
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data
collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec) The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps) Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this
object.
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this
object.
Thresh Fast Rate
Down(bps)
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
Thresh Intl Rate
Down(bps)
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
IDL series User Guide
228
Init Fail Trap Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted
disable.
OpStateTrapEnable Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap
PowerMgmtTrapEnable This indicates change in power mangement state
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps) Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Thresh Fast Rate
Down(bps)
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
Thresh Intl Rate
Down(bps)
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this
object.
References:
z ADSL Commands
IP DSLAM
229
5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl alarm profilext [ifname <interface-name>]
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl alarm profilext ifname <interface-name> [ atucthresh15minffstr
<atucthresh15minffstr-val> ] [ atucthresh15minsesl <atucthresh15minsesl-val> ]
[atucthresh15minuasl <atucthresh15minuasl-val> ] [atucthresh15minfecsl
<atucthresh15minfecsl-val>] [ atucthresh1daylofs <atucthresh1daylofs-val> ]
[atucthresh1dayloss <atucthresh1dayloss-val> ] [ atucthresh1daylols
<atucthresh1daylols-val> ][ atucthresh1daylprs <atucthresh1daylprs-val> ]
[ atucthresh1dayess <atucthresh1dayess-val> ][ atucthresh1daysesl
<atucthresh1daysesl-val> ] [ atucthresh1dayuasl <atucthresh1dayuasl-val>]
[atucthresh1dayfecsl <atucthresh1dayfecsl-val> ] [ aturthresh15minsesl
<aturthresh15minsesl-val> ] [ aturthresh15minuasl
<aturthresh15minuasl-val> ][aturthresh15minfecsl <aturthresh15minfecsl-val>]
[ aturthresh1daylofs <aturthresh1daylofs-val> ] [ aturthresh1dayloss
<aturthresh1dayloss-val> ] [aturthresh1daylprs <aturthresh1daylprs-val> ]
[ aturthresh1dayess <aturthresh1dayess-val> ] [aturthresh1daysesl
<aturthresh1daysesl-val> ] [ aturthresh1dayuasl
<aturthresh1dayuasl-val> ][aturthresh1dayfecsl <aturthresh1dayfecsl-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <fname-val> The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
atucthresh15minffstr
<atucthresh15minffstr-val>
The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL interface within
any giving 15 minute performance data collection period, which cause the
IDL series User Guide
230
SNMP agent to send an adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minsesl
<atucthresh15minsesl-val>
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAtucSesLTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minuasl
<atucthresh15minuasl-val>
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 15 minutes performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucUasLThreshTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh15minfecsl
<atucthresh15minfecsl-val>
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection
period, which causes adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
atucthresh1daylofs
<atucthresh1daylofs-val>
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1dayloss
<atucthresh1dayloss-val>
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1daylols
<atucthresh1daylols-val>
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1daylprs
<atucthresh1daylprs-val>
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
IP DSLAM
231
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1dayess
<atucthresh1dayess-val>
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1daysesl
<atucthresh1daysesl-val>
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1dayuasl
<atucthresh1dayuasl-val>
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
atucthresh1dayfecsl
<atucthresh1dayfecsl-val>
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection
period, which causes atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh15minsesl
<aturthresh15minsesl>
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minuasl
<aturthresh15minuasl>
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh15minfecsl
<aturthresh15minfecs-val>
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection
period, which causes adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
aturthresh1daylofs The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL
IDL series User Guide
232
<aturthresh1daylofs-val> interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1dayloss
<aturthresh1dayloss-val>
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1daylprs
<aturthresh1daylprs-val>
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1dayess
<aturthresh1dayess-val>
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1daysesl
<aturthresh1daysesl-val>
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1dayuasl
<aturthresh1dayuasl-val>
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,
which cause the SNMP agent to send an
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
aturthresh1dayfecsl
<aturthresh1dayfecsl-val>
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance data collection period,
which causes aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 86400
IP DSLAM
233
Example:
$ get adsl alarm profilext ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName : dsl-0
Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec) : 14
Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec) : 10
Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec) : 10
Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec) : 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be
modified or viewed
Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec) The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL
interface within any given 15 minute performance data
collection period, which causes adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.
Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec) The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance
data collection period, which causes adslAtucSesLTrap.
Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec) The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute
IDL series User Guide
234
performance data collection period, which causes
adslAtucUasLThreshTrap.
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec) The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15
Minute performance data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec) The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec) The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec) The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec) The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec) The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec) The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.
Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec) The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day
performance data collection period, which causes
atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec) The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.
Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec) The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute
IP DSLAM
235
performance data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec) The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15
Minute performance data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec) The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec) The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec) The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec) The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL
interface, within any given 1 day performance data
collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec) The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec) The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance
data collection period, which causes
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.
Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec) The number of Forward error correction seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day
performance data collection period, which causes
aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.
References:
z ADSL Commands
IDL series User Guide
236
5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc channel [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <fname-val> The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Type: Get – Optional
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23
Example:
$ get adsl atuc channel ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname : dsli-0
Interleave Delay(ms) : 20 Curr Tx Rate(bps) : 80
Prev Tx Rate(bps) : 40 Crc Block Length(byte) : 90
Gs Curr Atm Status : NoAtmDefect GsSymbolsPerRsWord : 10
GsRsDepth : 20 GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode: 100
AtucChanPerfAtmCD : 10 AtucChanPerfAtmCU : 10
AtucChanGsINPdn : 10 AtucChanGsL0dn : 10
AtucChanGsM0dn : 10 AtucChanGsT0dn : 10
AtucChanGsB0dn : 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Interleave Delay(ms) Interleave delay for this channel.
Curr Tx Rate(bps) Actual transmit rate on this channel.
Prev Tx Rate(bps) The rate at the time of the last adslAtucRateChangeTrap
event.
Crc Block Length(byte) Indicates the length of the channel data-block, on which
the CRC operates.
Gs Curr Atm Status Indicates the current ATM Status.
IP DSLAM
237
GsSymbolsPerRsWord Indicates the number of DMT symbols per
Reed-Solomon code word (S), in the downstream
direction.
GsRsDepth Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream
direction.
GsRedundantBytesPer
RsCode
Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per
Reed-Solomon code in the downstream direction.
AtucChanPerfAtmCD Provides a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC
state.(length = 4 bytes).
AtucChanPerfAtmCU Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM
Data Path delivered at the logical interface between the
ATU-C and a digital network element, such as one or
more switching systems.
AtucChanGsINPdn The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)
symbols for the downstream interleaved channel. One
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a
correction time of 250 µs.
AtucChanGsL0dn The number of bits from the upstream latency path
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes).
It is not available for ADSL.
AtucChanGsM0dn The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is
not available for ADSL.
AtucChanGsT0dn The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for
ADSL.
AtucChanGsB0dn The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not
available for ADSL.
IDL series User Guide
238
5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc chanperf [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <fname-val> The ADSL ATUC channel interface name, for which
performance is to be viewed.
Type : Get － Optional
Valid values : dsli-0 - *, dslf-0 - *
Example:
$ get adsl atuc chanperf ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname : dsli-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 20
Perf Invalid Intervals : 30
Perf Valid 1Day Intvl : 20
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl : 20
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec) 15 10 20 45
Rx Blocks 10 45 30 89
Tx Blocks 20 65 70 48
Corrected Blocks 25 35 35 25
Uncorrected Blocks 30 95 80 30
NCD Count 90 86 35 20
OCD Count 60 42 15 20
HEC Count 45 21 75 35
NCD Failure Count 20 20 20 20
LCD Failure Count 20 20 20 20
IP DSLAM
239
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname IfIndex of the interface of type adslfast and adslInterleave.
Perf Valid Intervals The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for which
data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)
Perf Invalid Intervals The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
"adslAtucChanPerfValidIntervals" for which no data is available. This object
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals are
not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length = 4 bytes)
Perf Valid 1Day Intvl The number of previous 1-Day intervals in the interval table for which data
was collected.(length = 4 bytes)
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
adslAtucChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no data is available. This
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some
intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes)
Time
Elapsed/Monitored(se
c)
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day and
Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.
Rx Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel since agent was
reset .
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in the current 15
minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
Tx Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel in the current
15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
Corrected Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel,
in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
Uncorrected Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this
channel since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this
IDL series User Guide
240
channel in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Count Performance Data :
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation) error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with NCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
OCD Count Performance Data :
Number of packets with OCD (Out of Cell Delineation) error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with OCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
HEC Count Performance Data :
Number of packets with HEC error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with HEC error received in the current 15 minute/
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Failure Count Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures since
agent reset. An NCD failure is declared when an NCD defect is present for
2-3 seconds after SHOWTIME. (length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1
day interval.
LCD Failure Count Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures since
agent reset. An LCD failure is declared when an LCD defect persists for
more than 2 - 3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures in
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1
day interval.
IP DSLAM
241
5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc chanintvl [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <fname-val> The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23
nintrvl <nintrvl-val> Performance Data Interval number.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 96
Example:
$ get adsl atuc chanintvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 1
Output:
Ifname : dsli-0 IntervalNumber : 1
Rx Blocks : 10 Tx Blocks : 45
Corrected Blocks : 20 Uncorrected Blocks : 1
Gs Time Elapsed(sec) : 30 Valid Data : true
GsNoCellDelineation : 20 GsHeaderErrorCheck : 0
GsOutOfCellDelineation : 0 AtucChanIntvlNcds : 20
AtucChanIntvlLcds : 20
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
IntervalNumber Performance Data Interval number.
Rx Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel during this interval.
Tx Blocks Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel during this
interval.
Corrected Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on
this channel during this interval.
IDL series User Guide
242
Uncorrected Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this
channel during this interval.
Gs Time Elapsed(sec) Total time elapsed (in seconds) in this interval.
Valid Data Indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
GsNoCellDelineation Count of no cell delineation on this channel for this interval.
GsHeaderErrorCheck GlobespanVirata parameter. Header error check counter (hec) on this
channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).
GsOutOfCellDelineatio
n
GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of out of cell delineation (ocd) on this
channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).
AtucChanIntvlNcds Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).
AtucChanIntvlLcds Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).
5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc interval ifname <interface-name> [nintrvl <num-of-intervals>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Type: Get -- Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
nintrvl
<num-of-intervals>
Number of intervals.
Type: Get – Optional
Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 12
Example:
$ get adsl atuc interval ifname dsl-0 sintrvl 1 nintrvl 1
IP DSLAM
243
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
IntervalNumber : 12 IntervalValidData : False
IntervalLofs(sec) : 83 IntervalLoss(sec) : 84
IntervalLols(sec) : 85 IntervalLprs(sec) : 86
IntervalESs(sec) : 87 IntervalInits : 88
IntervalFastR : 191 IntervalFailedFastR : 192
IntervalSesL(sec) : 193 IntervalUasL(sec) : 194
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 15 GsTimeElapsed(sec) : 1001
IntervalInitsFailed : 15
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
IntervalNumber Count from 1 through 96 of 15-minute intervals. Performance
Data Interval number 1 is the most recent previous interval;
interval 96 is 24 hours ago (length = 4 bytes).
IntervalValidData This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
IntervalLofs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.
IntervalLoss(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.
IntervalLols(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Link.
IntervalLprs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.
IntervalESs(sec) Count of Errored Seconds in the interval.
IntervalInits Count of the line initialization attempts during the interval.
IntervalFastR Count of seconds in the interval when there was Fast Retrains.
IntervalFailedFastR Count of seconds in the interval when there was Failed Fast
Retrains.
IntervalSesL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored
seconds.
IntervalUasL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable
errored seconds.
IntervalFecsL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error
correction seconds (length = 4 bytes).
GsTimeElapsed(sec) Total elapsed seconds in this interval.
IntervalInitsFailed Count of the failed full line initialization attempts during the
interval (length = 4 bytes).
IDL series User Guide
244
5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf
Description:
Use this command to get ADSL ATUC interface performance.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc perf [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL ATUC interface name, for which performance is to
be viewed.
Type : Get – Optional
Valid values : dsl-0 - dsl-*
Example:
$ get adsl atuc perf ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 20
Perf Invalid Intervals : 30
AtucPerfStatLossL : 10
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec) 30 10 20 30
LOFS (sec) 40 45 35 50
LOSS (sec) 30 65 75 20
LOLS (sec) 30 35 65 10
LPRS (sec) 10 95 30 80
ES (sec) 90 85 32 90
INITS 60 42 15 20
Perf Stat FastR 45 21 75 35
Perf Stat Failed FastR 43 46 40 45
Perf Stat SESL 41 48 67 65
Perf Stat UASL 37 49 90 50
Perf Stat FecsL 10 16 11 11
Perf Stat InitsFailed 10 16 11 11
IP DSLAM
245
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname Ifindex of the type Adsl port Count of the number of Loss of
Framing failures since agent reset.
Perf Valid Intervals The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table,
for which data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)
Perf Invalid Intervals The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
"adslAtucPerfValid-Intervals", for which no data is available. This
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for
some intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length
= 4 bytes)
AtucPerfStatLossL Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more loss of signal
(LOS) defects. (Not available for ADSL)
Time
Elapsed/Monitored(se
c)
Performance Data : Total time elapsed in seconds
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day
and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day
LOFS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of Framing failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of Framing.
LOSS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of signal failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of signals.
LOLS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of link failures
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of link.
LPRS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of power failures
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of power.
ES (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in
the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
IDL series User Guide
246
INITS Performance Data : Count of line initialization attempts since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of line initialization
attempts in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
Includes both successful and failed attempts.
Perf Stat FastR Performance Data : Count of fast retrain.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Fast Retrain.
Perf Stat Failed FastR Performance Data : Count of failed fast retrain.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was Failed Fast Retrain.
Perf Stat SESL Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was severely errored second.
Perf Stat UASL Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when
there was unavailable errored seconds.
Perf Stat FecsL Performance Data:
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for
ADSL)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)
Perf Stat InitsFailed Performance Data:
Count of the failed full initialization attempts in current
15-minute/current 1-day/previous 1-day interval. A failed full
initialization is when showtime is not reached at the end of the full
initialization procedure.
IP DSLAM
247
5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc physical [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.
Type: Get – Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atuc physical ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Serial Number : Conexant 1.0
Vendor ID : 0039
Version Number : 1.0
Curr Status : NoDefect
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20 Curr Atn(dB/10) : 80
CurrAttainable Rate(bps) : 40 Curr Output Pwr(dB/10):90
GsOpState : Data
GsActualStandard : T1_413
GsTxAtmCellCounter : 214 GsRxAtmCellCounter : 215
GsStartProgress : 213
GsIdleBertError : 200 GsIdleBertCells : 100
GsBertSync : BertOutOfSync
GsBertError : 0
Data Boost Status : Enable Chan Perf CD : 2
IDL series User Guide
248
Chan Perf BE : 5
PM State : L2 Chan Perf Cu : 10
Extended PSD Status : True Chip Version : 2
Pilot Tone : 21 Overhead Channel :4000
Psd Mask : FlatMsk
System Vendor ID : 12345678
ATU-C Self Test Result : 10 Atuc G9941 Vendor ID:12345678
Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10) : 90 AtucStartBin(GSpan++):90
StartUp Error Code : StartupErrorCodeMAXNOMATPus
BitSwapCount : 90
ModPhase : FlatRateCheck
Transmit Spectrum Shaping info
-----------------------------------
[ 0] 90
UpStream Gains per bin
---------------------------
[ 0] 15
GsSeltInfoValid : NotConnected
GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet) : 20
GsSeltLoopEnd : open
GsSeltLoopGauge : greater_26awg
GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps) : 10
GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps) : 20
Selt InbandNoise Len (dBM/Hz)
----------------------------------
[ 0] 0110030607
Selt Termination Resp (0-18Kft ms)
---------------------------------------
[ 0] 0110030607
Selt UpMgnAtRate (dB/10)
-----------------------------
[ 0] 0110030607
IP DSLAM
249
Selt DownMgnAtRate (dB/10)
-------------------------------
[ 0] 0110030607
Delt HLINSCus : 2
Delt HLOGMTus : 2 Delt LNMTus : 2
DELT Last Tx State : dmtatucg9941
Delt SnrmtUs : 100 DELT Curr Status: FailedUnknown
Delt HLINpsus
------------------
[ 0] 5
Delt HLOGpsus
------------------
[ 0] 20
Delt QLNpsus
-----------------
[ 0] 12
Delt DMT Bin SNR
---------------------
[ 0] 16
Signal Atn(dB/10) : 40
GsParametricTestResult : Ok
Parametric Info
--------------------
Bin Number Number of bits/bin
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.
Serial Number The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor
equipment.
Vendor ID Vendor ID Code.
Version Number The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU as
part of the initialization messages.
IDL series User Guide
250
Curr Status Indicates current state of the ATUC line. This is a bit-map
of possible conditions.
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10) Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its
received signal in tenth dB.
Curr Atn(dB/10) Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the
peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU.
CurrAttainable Rate(bps) Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by
the ATU. This value will be equal to, or greater than the
current line rate.
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This
is the measurement that was reported during the last
activation sequence.
GsOpState Operational state of the Xcvr.
GsActualStandard Actual standard used for connection, based on the
outcome of the negotiation with the Remote Unit.
GsTxAtmCellCounter Provides Tx ATM cell counter.
GsRxAtmCellCounter Provides Rx ATM cell counter.
GsStartProgress Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr. 0x0ñ
startup not in progress; 0x0 ñ 0x0FFF
Handshake/Training/ Profile Management/ Fast Retrain
inprogress; 0x8000 ñ 0x8FFF DSP firmware DownLoad in
progress; 0xF000 ñ 0xFFFF illegal Parameter
GsIdleBertError Number of bit errors.
GsIdleBertCells Number of idle cells.
GsBertSync Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.
GsBertError Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.
Data Boost Status Conexant parameter that indicates whether DataBoost is
utilized for the connection.
Chan Perf CD The near-end delineated total cell count performance
parameter is a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process,
operating on the ATM Data Path, while in the SYNC state.
(Not available for ADSL)
Chan Perf BE The near-end idle bit error count performance parameter is
a count of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload
received in the ATM Data Path at the near-end. (Not
available for ADSL)
PM State The Line Power Management state. (Not available for
ADSL)
Chan Perf Cu The total number of data-only cells received by ATUC.
IP DSLAM
251
Extended PSD Status Conexant parameter that indicates whether an extended
upstream PSD is used - for G.Span Plus mode of
operation only. Only supported for G.Span Plus, therefore
this parameter is not valid for ADSL2/ADSL2plus modes of
operation.
Chip Version The DSP version number.
Pilot Tone Conexant parameter that indicates the Pilot Tone Index.
Overhead Channel Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not
supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Psd Mask Conexant parameter that indicates the actual Psd Mask
currently being used.
System Vendor ID Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the
Overhead Messages(ADSL2). Typically identifies the
ATU-C system integrator which usually refers to the
vendor of the smallest field-replaceable unit. ATU-C
System Vendor ID may not be the same as ATU-C Vendor
ID. It is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2
octet vendor revision number.
ATU-C Self Test Result Defines the ATU-C selftest result. The most significant
octet is: 00 hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the
self-test failed. Interpretation of the other octets is vendor
discretionary and can be interpreted in combination with
G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.
Atuc G.994.1 Vendor ID Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the
G.994.1 CL message. Typically identifies the vendor of the
ATU-C G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2
octet vendor revision number.
Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10) This parameter defines the average upstream transmit
power spectrum density over the used subcarriers
delivered by the ATU-C at the U-C reference point, at the
instant of measurement. It's value ranges from -90 to 0, in
0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.
AtucStartBin (GSpan++) This Gspan++ parameter indicates the start bin of the bit
loading up array.
StartUp Error Code Conexant parameter which indicates the startup error
code.
BitSwapCount This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It
can read only in data mode
IDL series User Guide
252
ModPhase Conexant parameter to monitor the status of MoD
Atuc TSSpsUs This parameter provides the Upstream Transmit Spectrum
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points
exchanged during G994.1. Each breakpoint consists in a
subcarrier index and the associated shaping parameter.
Value of this parameter is in range 0 - 127, in multiples of
-0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the subcarrier is
not transmitted. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.
GainspsUs This parameter defines the upstream gains allocation table
per subcarrier. It is an array of integer values in the 0 to
4093 range for subcarriers 0 to NSCus-1. The gain value
is represented as a multiple of 1/512 on linear scale. It is
supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.
GsSeltInfoValid Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation
conducted on the Xcvr.
GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet) Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT
information is valid on the Xcvr.
GsSeltLoopEnd Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
GsSeltLoopGauge Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps) Indicates the upstream shannon capacity once, when the
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps) Indicates the downstream shannon capacity once, when
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
AtucGsSeltInbandNoise 512 values that indicate inband noise length in dBM/Hz,
covering both bands from 0 to 1.1 MHz.
AtucGsSeltTerminationResp 180 discrete values that indicate termination response
magnitude from 0 to 18Kft.
AtucGsSeltUpMgnAtRate 300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15
Mbps.
AtucGsSeltDownMgnAtRate 300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15
Mbps.
Delt HLINSCus The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor
to be applied to the upstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt HLOGMTus The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstream Hlog (f). (Not
IP DSLAM
253
available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt QLNMTus The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstreamQLN (f) values.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
DELT Last Tx State The DELT-related parameter that provides the last
successful transmitted initialization state by the ATUC.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt SnrmtUs DELT-related parameter that provides the number of
symbols used to measure the upstream SNR(f) values.
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus).
DELT Curr Status Current Status of Atuc Line in DELT Mode
Delt HLINpsus The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
complex upstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not
available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt HLOGpsus The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt QLNpsus The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Delt DMT Bin SNR The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of
real upstream SNR (f) values in dB. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Signal Atn(dB/10) DELT-related parameter that provides the upstream signal
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus).
GsParametricTestResult Indicates the Result of the Parametric Test conducted on
the Xcvr.
Parametric Info Conexant parameter that indicates the Parametric Test
Array.
AtucDMTBinBits Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element
of the string. The 0th element contains the number of bits
for bin 0 through to the 31st element, which contains the
number of bits for bin 31. The range of expected values is
from 0 to 15 bits per bin.
IDL series User Guide
254
5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc traps [ifname <interface-name>
Example:
$ get adsl atuc traps ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Lofs Thresh Trap : 0 Loss Thresh Trap : 1
Lols Thresh Trap : 0 Lprs Thresh Trap : 1
ESs Thresh Trap : 1 Init Failure Trap : 1
Rate Change Trap : 0 Gs OpState Trap : 1
PM State Trap : 2 Command Failure Trap : 2
Output Fields :
FIELD Description
Ifname The IfIndex of DSL port.
Lofs Thresh Trap Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).
Loss Thresh Trap Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).
Lols Thresh Trap Loss of Link 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).
Lprs Thresh Trap Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).
ESs Thresh Trap Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).
Init Failure Trap ATU-C initialization failed. Refer to adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons
(length = 4 bytes).
Rate Change Trap The ATU-Cs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only) (length = 4 bytes).
Gs OpState Trap Op State change (length = 4 bytes).
PM State Trap PM state change trap used for ADSL2/ADSL2plus PM operation. This trap is not
valid for ADSL mode.
Command Failure Trap When the APIs fail to send a customer command to the DSP, the customer is
notified by a new trap and they need to re-issue the command.
IP DSLAM
255
5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atuc trapsext [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The IfIndex of DSL port.
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atuc trapsext ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Failed FastR Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 SesL Thresh 15Min Trap:1
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap:0
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 0 Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap: 1
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap : 0 SesL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The IfIndex of DSL port.
Failed FastR Thresh
15Min Trap
Failed retrains 15-minute interval threshold reached.
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap Severely Errored Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.
IDL series User Guide
256
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Link 1-day interval threshold reached.
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap Severely Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap Unavailable Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.
5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur chanintrvl [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23
nintrvl <nintrvl-val> Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 96
Example:
$ get adsl atur chanintrvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 2
Output:
Ifname : dsli-0 IntervalNumber : 2
Rx Blocks : 10 Tx Blocks : 10
Corrected Blocks : 10 Uncorrected Blocks : 10
GsNoCellDelineation : 10 GsHeaderErrorCheck : 10
Valid Data : true AturChanIntvlNcds : 20
AturChanIntvlLcds : 20
IP DSLAM
257
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL interface name
IntervalNumber Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
Rx Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel, during this interval.
Tx Blocks Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel, during this interval.
Corrected Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on this
channel, during this interval.
Uncorrected Blocks Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that cannot be corrected,
on this channel, during this interval.
GsNoCellDelineation GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of no cell delineation (ncd) on this
channel during this interval.
GsHeaderErrorCheck Conexant parameter. Header error check counter (HEC) on this channel,
during this interval.
Valid Data This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
AturChanIntvlNcds Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).
AturChanIntvlLcds Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this
interval.(length = 4 bytes).
References:
z atur interval related commands
5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur channel [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name
Type: Get － Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23
IDL series User Guide
258
Example:
$ get adsl atur channel ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname : dslf-0
Interleave Delay(ms) : 10 Curr Tx Rate(bps) : 10
Prev Tx Rate(bps) : 10 Crc Block Length(byte) : 10
Gs Curr Atm Status : 1 GsSymbolsPerRsWord : 10
GsRsDepth : 10 GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode : 10
AturChanPerfAtmCD : 10 AturChanPerfAtmCU : 10
AturChanGsINPup : 10 AturChanGsL0up : 10
AturChanGsM0up : 10 AturChanGsT0up : 10
AturChanGsB0up : 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL Interface Name
Interleave Delay(ms) Interleave delay for this channel. Interleave delay
applies only to the interleave channel and defines the
mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input
bytes at the interleaver input and their placement in the bit
stream at the interleaver output. Larger numbers provide
greater separation between consecutive input bytes in the
output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency.
Curr Tx Rate(bps) Actual transmit rate on this channel
Prev Tx Rate(bps) The rate at the time of the last adslAturRateChangeTrap
event.
Crc Block Length(byte) Indicates the length of the channel data-block on which
the CRC operates.
Gs Curr Atm Status Indicates an ncd or lcd failure if the counter surpasses
127. If neither ATM counter surpasses 127, the return
value will be NoAtmDefect.
GsSymbolsPerRsWord Indicates number of DMT symbols per Reed- Solomon
code word (S) in the upstream direction Note that S is not
restricted to interleaved mode only. Even in fast mode, S
is a valid constant value and is equal to 1.
GsRsDepth Indicates interleaving depth (D) in the upstream direction
Note that D is not restricted to interleaved mode only.
Even in fast mode, D is a valid constant value and is
IP DSLAM
259
equal to 1.
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode Indicates number of redundant bytes (R) per
Reed-Solomon code in the upstream direction
AturChanPerfAtmCD Provides a count of the total number of cells passed
through the cell delineation and HEC function process
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC
state.(length = 4 bytes).
AturChanPerfAtmCU Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM
Data Path delivered at the interface(s) between ATU-R
and ATM switching layer.(length = 4 bytes).
AturChanGsINPup The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)
symbols for the upstream interleaved channel. One
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a
correction time of 250 µs.
AturChanGsL0up The number of bits from the upstream latency path
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes). It
is not available for ADSL.
AturChanGsM0up The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is
not available for ADSL.
AturChanGsT0up The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for ADSL.
AturChanGsB0up The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not
available for ADSL.
References:
z ADSL commands
IDL series User Guide
260
5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur chanperf [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Optional
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23
Example:
$ get adsl atur chanperf ifname dsli-0
Output:
Ifname : dsli-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 10
Perf Invalid Intervals : 10
Perf valid 1Day Intvl : 20
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl : 20
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed
/Monitored(sec) - 10 10 10
Rx Blocks 10 10 10 10
Tx Blocks 10 10 10 10
Corrected Blocks 10 10 10 10
Uncorrected Blocks 10 10 10 10
NCD Count 10 10 10 10
HEC Count 10 10 10 10
NCD Failure Count 20 20 20 20
LCD Failure Count 20 20 20 20
IP DSLAM
261
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL interface name.
Perf Valid Intervals Number of previous 15-minute intervals, for which the
data was collected.
Perf Invalid Intervals Number of previous 15- minute intervals, for which no
data is available.
Perf valid 1Day Intvl The number of previous 1-day intervals in the interval
table for which data was collected.(length = 4 bytes).
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value
of adslAturChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no
data is available. This object will typically be zero except
in cases where the data for some intervals are not
available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes).
Time
Elapsed/Monitored(sec)
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,
Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.
Rx Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel,
since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day
interval.
Tx Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this Channel,
since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
Corrected Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected
errors on this channel, since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
Uncorrected Blocks Performance Data :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected
errors on this channel, since agent was reset.
IDL series User Guide
262
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Count Performance Data :
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation)
errors.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with NCD error, received in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
HEC Count Performance Data :
Number of packets with HEC error.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Number of packets with HEC error received in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
NCD Failure Count Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation
(NCD) failures since agent reset. An NCD failure is
declared when an NCD defect is present for 2-3
seconds after SHOWTIME.(length = 4 bytes).
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with no cell
delineation(NCD) failures in the current 15 minute/
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.
LCD Failure Count Performance Data :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation
(LCD) failures since agent reset. An LCD failure is
declared when an LCD defect persists for more than 2 -
3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation
(LCD) failures in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/
previous 1 day interval.
References:
z ADSL commands
IP DSLAM
263
5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur interval ifname <interface-name> [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
nintrvl <nintrvl-val> Number of 15 minutes intervals.
Type: Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 96
Example:
$ get adsl atur interval ifname dsl-0 nintrvl 1
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
IntervalNumber : 1 IntervalValidData : true
IntervalLofs(sec) : 10 IntervalLoss(sec) : 10
IntervalLprs(sec) : 10
IntervalLESs(sec) : 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The IfIndex of DSL port
IntervalNumber Count from 1 through 96 of 15 minute intervals. Performance Data Interval number 1 is the
most recent previous interval; interval 96 is 24 hours ago.
IntervalValidData This variable indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
IntervalLofs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.
IntervalLoss(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.
IntervalLprs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.
IntervalESs(sec) Count of Errored Seconds in the interval. The errored second parameter is a count of
one-second intervals containing one or more crc anomalies, or one or more los or sef defects.
IDL series User Guide
264
5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur intervalext [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Mandator
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
nintrvl <nintrvl-val> Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
Type: Get -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 96
Example:
$ get adsl atur intervalext IFNAME dsl-0 NINTRVL 1
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
IntervalNumber : 1
IntervalSesl(sec) : 10 IntervalUasL(sec) : 10
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL interface name.
IntervalNumber Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
IntervalSesl(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored seconds.
IntervalUasL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable errored seconds.
IntervalFecsL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error correction seconds.
References
z atur interval related commands
IP DSLAM
265
5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur perf [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23.
Example:
$ get adsl atur perf ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 10
Perf Invalid Intervals : 10
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed/Monitored(sec) - 10 10 10
LOFS (sec) 10 10 10 10
LOSS (sec) 10 10 10 10
LPRS (sec) 10 10 10 10
ES (sec) 10 10 10 10
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname Ifindex of the type Adsl port
Perf Valid Intervals The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for
which data was collected.
Perf Invalid Intervals The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of
'adslAturPerfValid-Intervals' for which no data is available. This object
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals
are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).
Time Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,
IDL series User Guide
266
Elapsed/Monitored(sec) Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.
LOFS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of
Framing failures since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of Framing.
LOSS (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of
signal failures since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when
there was Loss of signals.
LPRS (sec) Performance Data: Count of number of Loss of power failures, since
agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval, when
there was Loss of power.
ES (sec) Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since agent
was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur perfext [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> Ifindex of the type Adsl port
Type: Get -- Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atur perfext ifname dsl-0
IP DSLAM
267
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
AturPerfStatLossL : 14
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Perf Stat SESL 10 10 10 10
Perf Stat UASL 10 10 10 10
Perf Stat FecsL 11 13 19 21
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname Ifindex of the type Adsl port
AturPerfStatLossL Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more far end loss of
signal (LOS) defects (Not available for ADSL)
Perf Stat SESL Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,
when there was severely errored second.
Perf Stat UASL Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,
when there was unavailable errored seconds.
Perf Stat FecsL Performance Data:
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for
ADSL)
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)
References:
z atur perfdata related commands
IDL series User Guide
268
5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur physical [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atur physical ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Serial Number : CO123456
Vendor ID : Vendor123
Version Number : VerNo98114
Curr Status : LossOfFraming
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10) : 10 Curr
Atn(dB/10) : 10
CurrAttainable Rate(bps) : 10 Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) :
10
AturGsConfig : 0x0121020203
Chan Perf CD : 5 Chan Perf
CU : 5
Chan Perf BE : 5
Overhead Channel : 4000 System Vendor
ID : 12345678
ATU-R Self Test Result : 0x10 ATUR G9941 Vendor
ID : 12345678
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10) : 90
BitSwapCount : 90
PSDMaskMode : CoMsk2
IP DSLAM
269
DownStream Gains per bin
-----------------------------
[ 0] 15
Transmit Spectrum Shaping info
-----------------------------------
[ 0] 90
Delt HLINSCds : 2
Delt HLOGMTds : 8 Delt
QLNMTds : 5
DELT Last Tx State : dmtaturg9941 Delt
SnrmtDs : 100
Delt HLINpsds
------------------
[ 0] 18
Delt HLOGpsds
------------------
[ 0] 20
Delt QLNpsds
-----------------
[ 0] 22
Delt DMT Bin SNR
---------------------
[ 0] 22
Signal Atn(dB/10) : 40
Bin Number Number of bits/bin
-------------------------------------
[ 0] 0110030607
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL Interface Name
Serial Number The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor equipment
(EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).
Vendor ID Vendor ID code (EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).
Version Number The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU,as part of
the initialization messages (EOC - read 5 seconds after data
mode).
Curr Status Indicates current State of ATUR Line. This is a bitmap of possible
conditions. Due to the isolation of the ATU-R when line problems
occur, many state conditions such as loss of power, loss of quality
IDL series User Guide
270
signal, and initialization errors, cannot be determined.
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10) Noise Margin as seen by this ATU, with respect to its received
signal, in tenth dB.
Curr Atn(dB/10) Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the peer
ATU, and the total power received by this ATU.
CurrAttainable Rate(bps) Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by the ATU.
This value will be equal to, or greater than, the current line rate.
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This is the
measurement that was reported during the last activation
sequence.
AturGsConfig The upstream and downstream ATU-R configuration data (EOC -
read 5 sec after data mode).
Chan Perf CD The far-end delineated total cell count performance parameter is a
count of the total number of cells passed through the cell
delineation and HEC function process, operating on the ATM Data
Path, while in the SYNC state. (Not available for ADSL)
Chan Perf CU The far-end user total cell count performance parameter is a count
of the total number of cells in the ATM Data Path delivered at the
V-C (for ATU-C) or TR (for ATUR) interface. (Not available for
ADSL)
Chan Perf BE The far-end idle bit error count performance parameter is a count
of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload received in the
ATM Data Path at the far-end. (Not available for ADSL)
Overhead Channel Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not supported by
DSLPHY as yet.
System Vendor ID Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Embedded
Operations Channel(ADSL). Typically identiies the ATU-R system
integrator which usually refers to the vendor of the smallest
field-replaceable unit. ATU-R System Vendor ID may not be the
same as ATU-R G.994.1 Vendor ID. For ADSL2, provides the
Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Overhead Messages. It
is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets containing 2
octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet vendor revision
number.
ATU-R Self Test Result Defines the ATU-R selftest result. The most significant octet is: 00
hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the self-test failed.
Interpretation of the other octets is vendor discretionary and can be
interpreted in combination with G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.
ATUR G9941 Vendor ID Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the G.994.1
CLR message.The G.994.1 Vendor ID typically identifies the
IP DSLAM
271
vendor of the ATU-R G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet
vendor revision number.
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10) This parameter defines the average downstream transmit power
spectrum density over the used subcarriers delivered by the ATU-C
at the U-C reference point, at the instant of measurement. It's value
ranges from -90 to 0, in 0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.
BitSwapCount This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It can read
only in data mode
PSDMaskMode This conexant parameter that indicates the actual PSD Mask
currently being used by ATU-R
Gain Spsds This parameter defines the downstream gains allocation table per
bin. It is supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.
Atur TSSpsds This parameter provides the Downstream Transmit Spectrum
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points
exchanged during G994.1. Value of this parameter is in range 0 -
127, in multiples of -0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the
subcarrier is not transmitted. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.
Delt HLINSCds The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor to be
applied to the downstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)
Delt HLOGMTds The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols
used to measure the downstream Hlog (f). (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)
Delt QLNMTds The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols
used to measure the downstream QLN (f) values. (Not available for
ADSL and ADSL2plus)
DELT Last Tx State The DELT-related parameter that provides the last successful
transmitted initialization state by ATU-R. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)
Delt SnrmtDs DELT-number of symbols to measure DS SNR
Delt HLINpsds The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of complex
downstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not available for ADSL
and ADSL2plus)
Delt HLOGpsds The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real
downstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)
Delt QLNpsds The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real
IDL series User Guide
272
downstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)
DMT Bin SNR The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real
downstream SNR (f) values in dB (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)
Signal Atn(dB/10) DELT-related parameter that provides the downtream signal
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus).
AturDMTBinBits Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element of the
string. The 0th element contains the number of bits for bin 0
through to the 255th element, which contains the number of bits for
bin 255. The range of expected values is from 0 to 15 bits per bin
(256 bytes for Annex A and Annex B, 512 bytes for G.Span/Adsl+,
1024 bytes for G.Span Plus).
References:
z ADSL commands
5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps
Description:
This command is used to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur traps [ifname <interface-name]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL interface name.
Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atur traps ifname dsl-0
IP DSLAM
273
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
Lofs Thresh Trap : 1 Loss Thresh Trap : 1
Lprs Thresh Trap : 1 ESs Thresh Trap : 0
Rate Change Trap : 0
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL Interface Name
Lofs Thresh Trap Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached
Loss Thresh Trap Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached
Lprs Thresh Trap Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached
ESs Thresh Trap Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached
Rate Change Trap The ATU-Rs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only).
References
z ADSL Commands
5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl atur trapsext [ifname <interface-name]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The ADSL Interface Name
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get adsl atur trapsext ifname dsl-0
IDL series User Guide
274
Output:
Ifname : dsl-0
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 0
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap: 0
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 ESs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL Interface Name.
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap Severely Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold
reached.
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval
threshold reached.
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap Severely Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap Unavailable Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold
reached.
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval
threshold reached.
References:
z ADSL Commands
IP DSLAM
275
5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap
Description:
Use this command to view DSL transmission capability.
Command Syntax:
get adsl cap
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get adsl cap
Output:
Tx Capability : q9921potsOverlapped q9921potsNonOverlapped
Output Fields:
Field Description
Tx Capability
This bitmap specifies which all transmission modes, which the
ATU-C is capable of supporting. Right now support for Annex A,
Annex B, G.Span/ADSL+ and G.Span Plus is present. This value
depends on the DSL PHY firmware present on Columbia MxU.
References:
z create dsl system
z get dsl system
IDL series User Guide
276
5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf
Description:
Use this command to view ADSL line configuration.
Command Syntax:
get adsl line intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl line intf ifname <interface-name> [ lineconfgsaction startup |
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb | atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr | hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest | rcvFilterTest
| rcvPowerPerBinTest | idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest | selt | shutdown |
wakeup | AbortReq ] [ linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce | L0ToL2StateForce |
L3StateForce | L2ToL0StateForce ] [ linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force ]
[ linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921isdnOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922potsNonOverlapeed | q9922potsOverlapped | q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped
| q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped | q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ] [ dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable ]
[ enable | disable ]
IP DSLAM
277
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> The interface name of the DSL port.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
lineconfgsaction startup |
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb |
atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr |
hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest |
rcvFilterTest | rcvPowerPerBinTest |
idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest
| selt | shutdown | wakeup | AbortReq
Allows action on per-line basis.
Type: Modify -- Optional
linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce |
L0ToL2StateForce | L3StateForce |
L2ToL0StateForce
PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a
change in the line state. (Not available for
ADSL/ADSL2Plus)
Type: Modify -- Optional
linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force
the line into the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)
Type: Modify -- Optional
linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi |
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped |
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921isdnOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922potsNonOverlapeed |
q9922potsOverlapped |
q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |
The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of
supporting. The modes available are limited by the
design of the equipment. REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2
ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).
Type: Modify -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
278
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe
d | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped |
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
| q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
| q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of
downstream SNR bin status
Type: Modify -- Optional
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ get adsl line intf ifname dsl-0
Output:
IfName : dsl-0
Line Type : noChannel Coding Type :
dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 23 GsUtopia
L2RxAddr : 10
GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd : 11 GsUtopia
L2TxAddr2nd : 11
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action :
analoglb
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413
Trans Atuc Actual : q9921PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Config : ansit1413
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap : ansit1413
IP DSLAM
279
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit
Curr Output Pwr(dBm/10) : 10 DS Bin SNR Update :
Enable
Bin Number SNR Margin/bin
---------------------------------
[ 0] 16
Oper Status : Up Admin Status :
Enable
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName The interface name of the DSL port.
Line Type Line type used by the DSL port.
Coding Type Line coding type used by the port.
GsUtopia L2TxAddr UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for a line.
GsUtopia L2RxAddr UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address.
GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address for the
secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4
bytes)
GsUtopia
L2TxAddr2nd
Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for the
secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4
bytes)
Gs Clock Type Indicates use of crystal or oscillator.
Gs Action Allows action on per-line basis.
Trans Atuc Cap Transmission modes that ATU-C is capable of.
Trans Atuc Actual Transmission modes
Trans Atuc Config The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of supporting.
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment.
REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2 ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).
GsDmtTrellis Indicates whether trellis coding has been enabled or not.
Trans Atur Cap The transmission modes that the ATU-R is capable of supporting.
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment
(length = 4 bytes).
PM Conf PMSF PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a change in the
line state. (Not available for ADSL/ADSL2Plus)
Line DELT Conf LDSF The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force the line into
the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available for ADSL and
ADSL2plus)
IDL series User Guide
280
Curr Output
Pwr(dBm/10)
This conexant parameter indicates the measure of total output
power transmitted by this ATU. The value of this parameter is
dynamic and will also show the change in Tx power due to Power
Management. For example, the value will decrease in L2 low
power mode. This value can be negative.
DS Bin SNR Update Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of
downstream SNR bin status
Bin SNR Margin(dB/10) Bin SNR margin for particular sub carrier
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or
down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.
5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get adsl line profile [ifname <interface-name>]
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify adsl line profile ifname <interface-name> [ atucrateadaptation fixed |
adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ gsparamtestinputfile
<gsparamtestinputfile-val> ] [ atuctargetsnr <atuctargetsnr-val> ]
[ atucmaxsnrmargin <atucmaxsnrmargin-val> ] [ atucgsrsintcorrectionup
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms | 2ms | 4ms | disable ] [ atucdnshiftsnrmargin
<atucdnshiftsnrmargin-val> ] [ atucupshiftsnrmargin <atucupshiftsnrmargin-val> ]
[ atucminupshifttime <atucminupshifttime-val> ] [ atucmindnshifttime
<atucmindnshifttime-val> ] [ atucfastmintxrate <atucfastmintxrate-val> ]
[ atucintlmintxrate <atucintlmintxrate-val> ] [ atucfastmaxtxrate
<atucfastmaxtxrate-val> ] [ atucintlmaxtxrate <atucintlmaxtxrate-val> ]
[ atucmaxintldelay <atucmaxintldelay-val> ] [ type noChannel | fastOnly |
interleavedOnly | fastOrInterleaved | fastAndInterleaved ] [ atucgstxendbin
<atucgstxendbin-val> ] [ atucgstxstartbin <atucgstxstartbin-val> ]
IP DSLAM
281
[ atucgsmaxbitsperbin <atucgsmaxbitsperbin-val> ] [ atucgsrxstartbin
<atucgsrxstartbin-val> ] [ atucgsrxendbin <atucgsrxendbin-val> ]
[ atucgsrxbinadjust disable ] [ atucgsltriggermode locCrc | rmtCrc | snrInc |
snrDec | disable ] [ atucgsadi2x standard ] [ atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone |
initiatePn ] [ atucgstxpoweratten 0 | point1 | point2 | point3 | point4 | point5 |
point6 | point7 | point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15
| 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 ] [ atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256 ]
[ atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ]
[ atucgsrsintcorrectiondn 125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms | 2Ms | 4Ms | Disable ]
[ atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ] [ atucgsdrstby Disable |
Enable ] [ atucgsexpexch Expanded | Short ] [ atucgsescfastretrain Enable |
Disable ] [ atucgsfastretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsbitswap Disable | Enable ]
[ atucgsntr LocalOcs | Refck8K ] [ atucgsalctlusver Unknown ]
[ atucgsusecustombin Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsdnbinusage
<atucgsdnbinusage-val> ] [ atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256 | 511 ]
[ atucgsfullretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgspsdmasktype CoMsk2 | FlatMsk |
CabMsk2 | CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi | CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 | Adsl2NonovlpM1
| Adsl2NonovlpM2 | Adsl2NonovlpFlat ] [ atucgseraseprofs enable | disable ]
[ atucgsextrsmemory notpresent | present ] [ paramhybridlossteststart
<paramhybridlossteststart-val> ] [ paramhybridlosstestend
<paramhybridlosstestend-val> ] [ dmttrellis on | off ] [ aturtargetsnrmargin
<aturtargetsnrmargin-val> ] [ aturdnshiftsnrmargin <aturdnshiftsnrmargin-val> ]
[ aturupshiftsnrmargin <aturupshiftsnrmargin-val> ] [ aturminupshifttime
<aturminupshifttime-val> ] [ aturmindnshifttime <aturmindnshifttime-val> ]
[ aturfastmintxrate <aturfastmintxrate-val> ] [ aturintlmintxrate
<aturintlmintxrate-val> ] [ aturfastmaxtxrate <aturfastmaxtxrate-val> ]
[ aturintlmaxtxrate <aturintlmaxtxrate-val> ] [ aturmaxintldelay
<aturmaxintldelay-val> ] [ databoost Enable | Disable ] [ upstreampsd Extended |
Standard | Jj100 ] [ atucconfpmmode pmstatel3enable | pmstatel2enable |
disable ] [ atucconfpml0time <atucconfpml0time-val> ] [ atucconfpml2time
<atucconfpml2time-val> ] [ atucconfpml2atpr <atucconfpml2atpr-val> ]
[ atucconfpml2minrate <atucconfpml2minrate-val> ] [ atucconfmsgminds
<atucconfmsgminds-val> ] [ aturconfmsgminus <aturconfmsgminus-val> ]
[ atucminsnrmgn <atucminsnrmgn-val> ] [ aturminsnrmgn
<aturminsnrmgn-val> ] [ atucfrontenddesigntype El1508 | El1528 | Le87213 ]
[ atuchwpwrreduction Disable | Enable ] [ atucgsusbitswap Disable | Enable ]
[ aturmaxsnrmgn <aturmaxsnrmgn-val> ] [ atucconfmininp Inp0 | InpPoint5 |
Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ atucpml2entrythreshrate
atucpml2entrythreshrate ] [ atucpml2exitthreshrate
<atucpml2exitthreshrate-val> ] [ atucpml2entryratemintime
IDL series User Guide
282
<atucpml2entryratemintime-val> ] [ atucgscabinethsenable Disable | Enable ]
[ atucgsseltlooptype RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400 ] [ atucgsrxstartbinu1
<atucgsrxstartbinu1-val> ] [ atucgsrxendbinu1 <atucgsrxendbinu1-val> ]
[ gspsdmaskdsenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]
[ gspsdmaskusenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]
[ psdmaskdsfallbackenable False | True ] [ psdmaskusfallbackenable False |
True ] [ atucconfmaxnompsdds <atucconfmaxnompsdds-val> ]
[ aturconfmaxnompsdus <aturconfmaxnompsdus-val> ]
[ atucconfmaxnomatpds <atucconfmaxnomatpds-val> ]
[ aturconfmaxnomatpus <aturconfmaxnomatpus-val> ] [ atucconfpsdmaskds
<atucconfpsdmaskds-val> ] [ aturconfpsdmaskus <aturconfpsdmaskus-val> ]
[ aturratemode fixed | adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ aturconfmininp Inp0 |
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ gsannexcoltocxswitch
CxSwitch19DB | CxSwitch20DB | CxSwitch21DB | CxSwitch22DB | CxSwitch23DB
| CxSwitch24DB | CxSwitch25DB | CxSwitch26DB | CxSwitch27DB |
CxSwitch28DB | CxSwitch29DB | CxSwitch30DB ] [ atucconfgsannexcswitch
Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB | Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB | Gspan23DB |
Gspan24DB | Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB | GspanPlus8DB | GspanPlus9DB |
GspanPlus10DB | GspanPlus11DB | GspanPlus12DB | GspanPlus13DB |
GspanPlus14DB | GspanPlus15DB ] [ gsannexctouqswitch CUqSwitch6DB |
CUqSwitch6_5DB | CUqSwitch7DB | CUqSwitch8DB | CUqSwitch9DB |
CUqSwitch10DB | CUqSwitch11DB | CUqSwitch12DB | CUqSwitch13DB |
CUqSwitch14DB | CUqSwitch15DB ] [ atucminsnrmgntime
<atucminsnrmgntime-val> ] [ atuccustomerid WorldWide | France | China |
Portugal ] [ atucmpsdmasktype Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 | Adsl2MEu56 |
Adsl2MEu52 | Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 | Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll ] [ atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg | 24awg ]
[ atucconfrateratio <atucconfrateratio-val> ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname<interface-name> The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to bemodified or viewed
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
atucrateadaptation fixed |
adaptAtStartup |
adaptAtRuntime
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this
modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.
Type: Modify -- Optional
gsparamtestinputfile
<gsparamtestinputfile-val>
Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array Size,
lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is specified
Type: Modify -- Optional
IP DSLAM
283
atuctargetsnr
<atuctargetsnr-val>
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin the
modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or better, to
successfully complete initialization.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucmaxsnrmargin
<atucmaxsnrmargin-val>
Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the Noise
Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its power
output to optimize its operation.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucgsrsintcorrectionup
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms |
2ms | 4ms | disable
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can
also be disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucdnshiftsnrmargin
<atucdnshiftsnrmargin-val>
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value
will be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucupshiftsnrmargin
<atucupshiftsnrmargin-val>
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin
rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its
transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucminupshifttime
<atucminupshifttime-val>
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
atucmindnshifttime
<atucmindnshifttime-val>
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
atucfastmintxrate
<atucfastmintxrate-val>
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucintlmintxrate Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
IDL series User Guide
284
<atucintlmintxrate-val> Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucfastmaxtxrate
<atucfastmaxtxrate-val>
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucintlmaxtxrate
<atucintlmaxtxrate-val>
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucmaxintldelay
<atucmaxintldelay-val>
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
type noChannel | fastOnly |
interleavedOnly |
fastOrInterleaved |
fastAndInterleaved
This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgstxendbin
<atucgstxendbin-val>
The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff
atucgstxstartbin
<atucgstxstartbin-val>
The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff
atucgsmaxbitsperbin
<atucgsmaxbitsperbin-val>
The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 15
atucgsrxstartbin
<atucgsrxstartbin-val>
The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x01 - 0x1ff
atucgsrxendbin The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
IP DSLAM
285
<atucgsrxendbin-val> Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x06 - 0x1ff
atucgsrxbinadjust disable This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsltriggermode locCrc |
rmtCrc | snrInc | snrDec |
disable
The type of event that triggers a fast retrain
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsadi2x standard For non-standard compliant ADI CPE
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone
| initiatePn
Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a C-tone to
the remote unit.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgstxpoweratten 0 |
point1 | point2 | point3 | point4
| point5 | point6 | point7 |
point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 |
14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |
21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 |
28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40
The value in dB of Tx power attenuation
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 |
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256
Sets the coding gain in dB increments
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25
| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream fast
buffer. RS can also be disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsrsintcorrectiondn
125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms |
2Ms | 4Ms | Disable
This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved
buffer.RS can also be disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25
| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream fast
buffer.RS can also be disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsdrstby Disable |
Enable
This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line driver
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsexpexch Expanded |
Short
T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsescfastretrain Enable
| Disable
This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain capability
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsfastretrain Enable |
Disable
This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability. Currently
supported only in G.lite mode.
IDL series User Guide
286
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsbitswap Disable |
Enable
This parameter enables/disables bit swapping
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsntr LocalOcs |
Refck8K
This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsalctlusver Unknown For T1.413 demo purposes only
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsusecustombin Enable
| Disable
This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511 bins
will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsdnbinusage
<atucgsdnbinusage-val>
'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a '0'
disables usage of corresponding bin.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256
| 511
Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's hardware
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsfullretrain Enable |
Disable
Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgspsdmasktype
CoMsk2 | FlatMsk | CabMsk2
| CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi |
CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 |
Adsl2NonovlpM1 |
Adsl2NonovlpM2 |
Adsl2NonovlpFlat
This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgseraseprofs enable |
disable
This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain
profiles at startup
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsextrsmemory
notpresent | present
Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM
Type: Modify -- Optional
paramhybridlossteststart
<paramhybridlossteststart-val
>
Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value mentioned
is an indicative value only, for exact value refer to document number
DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff
paramhybridlosstestend
<paramhybridlosstestend-val
>
End bin for range of bins to be measured.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff
dmttrellis on | off This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding should
always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.
Type: Modify -- Optional
IP DSLAM
287
aturtargetsnrmargin
<aturtargetsnrmargin-val>
Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power
7 or better to successfully complete initialization
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturdnshiftsnrmargin
<aturdnshiftsnrmargin-val>
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value
will be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturupshiftsnrmargin
<aturupshiftsnrmargin-val>
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin
rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase itís
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturminupshifttime
<aturminupshifttime-val>
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn, before
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturmindnshifttime
<aturmindnshifttime-val>
Minimum time that the current margin is below DownshiftSnrMgn,
before a downshift occurs. In the case that RADSL mode is not present,
the value will be 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturfastmintxrate
<aturfastmintxrate-val>
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturintlmintxrate
<aturintlmintxrate-val>
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturfastmaxtxrate
<aturfastmaxtxrate-val>
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL
mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
IDL series User Guide
288
aturintlmaxtxrate
<aturintlmaxtxrate-val>
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
aturmaxintldelay
<aturmaxintldelay-val>
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
databoost Enable | Disable Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.
Type: Modify -- Optional
upstreampsd Extended |
Standard | Jj100
Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucconfpmmode
pmstatel3enable |
pmstatel2enable | disable
PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link states.
Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input. Additional
value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucconfpml0time
<atucconfpml0time-val>
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an exit
from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state. It ranges from 0 to
255 seconds.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpml2time
<atucconfpml2time-val>
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an Entry
into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the L2 state and between
two consecutive Power Trims in the L2 State. It ranges from 0 to 255
seconds.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpml2atpr
<atucconfpml2atpr-val>
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit power
reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single Power Trim in
the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.
IP DSLAM
289
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucconfpml2minrate
<atucconfpml2minrate-val>
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This
parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low power
state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range from 0x1F40
(8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0x1F40 - 0xFA000
atucconfmsgminds
<atucconfmsgminds-val>
Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This feature is
not supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 4000 - 64000
aturconfmsgminus
<aturconfmsgminus-val>
Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature is not
supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 4000 - 64000
atucminsnrmgn
<atucminsnrmgn-val>
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
aturminsnrmgn
<aturminsnrmgn-val>
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucfrontenddesigntype
El1508 | El1528 | Le87213
Front end hardware reference design
Type: Modify -- Optional
atuchwpwrreduction Disable
| Enable
Hardware configuration parameter
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsusbitswap Disable |
Enable
This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturmaxsnrmgn
<aturmaxsnrmgn-val>
Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise Margin. If
the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to reduce its power
output to optimize its operation. The value set by the user is in dB/10,
and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
IDL series User Guide
290
atucconfmininp Inp0 |
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |
InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for
the downstream bearer channel.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucpml2entrythreshrate
<atucpml2entrythreshrate-val
>
PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucpml2exitthreshrate
<atucpml2exitthreshrate-val>
PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
atucpml2entryratemintime
<atucpml2entryratemintime-v
al>
PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 900 - 65535
atucgscabinethsenable
Disable | Enable
Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsseltlooptype
RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400
Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for SELT. The
default value mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsrxstartbinu1
<atucgsrxstartbinu1-val>
Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for Rx
signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsrxendbinu1
<atucgsrxendbinu1-val>
Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for Rx
signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
gspsdmaskdsenable
PsdMaskDisable |
PsdMaskEnable |
PsdMaskEnableMod
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
gspsdmaskusenable
PsdMaskDisable |
PsdMaskEnable |
PsdMaskEnableMod
Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)
feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2 Annex A
ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
psdmaskdsfallbackenable
False | True
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback
mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2
depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2
Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
IP DSLAM
291
Valid values: False, True
psdmaskusfallbackenable
False | True
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback
mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2
depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2 Annex
A.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: False, True
atucconfmaxnompsdds
<atucconfmaxnompsdds-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -40 in steps of 0.1
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: (-600) - (-400)
aturconfmaxnompsdus
<aturconfmaxnompsdus-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -38 in steps of 0.1
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: (-600) - (-380)
atucconfmaxnomatpds
<atucconfmaxnomatpds-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit
power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
aturconfmaxnomatpus
<aturconfmaxnomatpus-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit
power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
atucconfpsdmaskds This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD mask
IDL series User Guide
292
<atucconfpsdmaskds-val> applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length = 4 bytes).
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturconfpsdmaskus
<aturconfpsdmaskus-val>
This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask
applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available only for
Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturratemode fixed |
adaptAtStartup |
adaptAtRuntime
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this
modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.
Type: Modify -- Optional
aturconfmininp Inp0 |
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |
InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for
the upstream bearer channel. Supported for ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY
Type: Modify -- Optional
gsannexcoltocxswitch
CxSwitch19DB |
CxSwitch20DB |
CxSwitch21DB |
CxSwitch22DB |
CxSwitch23DB |
CxSwitch24DB |
CxSwitch25DB |
CxSwitch26DB |
CxSwitch27DB |
CxSwitch28DB |
CxSwitch29DB |
CxSwitch30DB
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucconfgsannexcswitch
Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB |
Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB |
Gspan23DB | Gspan24DB |
Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB
| GspanPlus8DB |
GspanPlus9DB |
GspanPlus10DB |
GspanPlus11DB |
GspanPlus12DB |
GspanPlus13DB |
GspanPlus14DB |
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and
G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
IP DSLAM
293
GspanPlus15DB
gsannexctouqswitch
CUqSwitch6DB |
CUqSwitch6_5DB |
CUqSwitch7DB |
CUqSwitch8DB |
CUqSwitch9DB |
CUqSwitch10DB |
CUqSwitch11DB |
CUqSwitch12DB |
CUqSwitch13DB |
CUqSwitch14DB |
CUqSwitch15DB
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucminsnrmgntime
<atucminsnrmgntime-val>
This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is
allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min snr, the
DSL line is dropped by the APIs.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
atuccustomerid WorldWide |
France | China | Portugal
This parameter indicates the customer ID.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucmpsdmasktype
Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 |
Adsl2MEu56 | Adsl2MEu52 |
Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 |
Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll
Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used for
Adsl2M.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg
| 24awg
This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.
Type: Modify -- Optional
atucconfrateratio
<atucconfrateratio-val>
This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a dual
latency configuration. This parameter must be set the parameter to a
value greater than 0 and less than 100.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 100
Example:
$ get adsl line profile ifname dsl-0
IDL series User Guide
294
Output:
IfName : dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
------------------------------
Rate Adaptation : fixed
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20 Max Snr Mgn(dB/10) : 40
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 1ms Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 70
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 10 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x20
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x40 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x50
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x60 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 10
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin : 0x06
GsRxStartBin : 0x06 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo : 64
GsRxBinAdjust : enable GsAdi2x : standard
GsInitiate : waitPn GsTxPowerAtten : point6
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown : 1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 125Us GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 50
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange : Short
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Enable GsFastRetrain : Enable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr : LocalOcs
GsAlctlUsVer : Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Enable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType : FlatMsk GsEraseProfiles : enable
GsExtRsMemory : ExtRsMemory ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x10
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x23 GsDmtTrellis : on
GslTriggerMode : rmtCrc
Type : noChannel
GsDnBinUsage : 0xff
ParametricTestInputFile : TestFile
Data Boost : Enable
Upstream PSD : Extended
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel3disable
IP DSLAM
295
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 120 Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 255
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30 Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps) : 0xFA00
MSG Min Ds : 4000 Min Snr Mrg(dB/10) : 20
FrontEnd H/W Design : El1508
H/W Pwr Reduction : Enable
GsUsBitSwap : Enable Minimum INP : Inp0
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate : 0x1000 PML2 Exit Thresh Rate : 0x1000
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800 CabinetHsEnable : Disable
GsSeltLoopType : Real Cable
GsRxStartBinU1 : 0x3aa
GsRxEndBinU1 : 0x4a6 PSD MoD Enable :
PsdMaskEnable
PsdMod FallBackEnable : Enable Max Nom PSD(dB/10) : -40
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10) : 204
Downstream PSD Mask :
--------------------------
[ 0] 0
GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch : CxSwitch19DB
GsAnnexCSwitch : Gspan19DB GsAnnexCToUqSwitch :
CUqSwitch6_5DB
Min SnrMgnTime(sec) : 20
Customer ID : WorldWide
GsMPsdMaskType : Adsl2MEu32 GsSeltLoopGauge : 26awg
Rate Ratio : 30
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
------------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 70
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 10 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x20
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x10 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x40
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x60 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 10
MSG Min Us : 4000 Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20
PSD MoD Enable : Enable
PsdMod FallBackEnable : PSDFallbackEnable Max Nom PSD(dB/10) : -38
IDL series User Guide
296
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10) : 125 Rate Adaptation : fixed
Min INP : Inp0
Upstream PSD Mask :
------------------------
[ 0] 0
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to be modified or
viewed
Rate Adaptation Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on
this modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin
the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or
better, to successfully complete initialization.
Max Snr Mgn(dB/10) Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the
Noise Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its
power output to optimize its operation.
GsRsIntCorrectionUp Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS
can also be disabled.
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to
decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not
present, the value will be 0.
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to
increase its transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.
Min Upshift Time(sec) Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.
Min Dnshift Time(sec) Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for
ATU-C receive rates.
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
IP DSLAM
297
bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for
ATU-C receive rates.
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C
receive rates.
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C
receive rates.
Max Intl Delay(ms) Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload
latency.
GsTxStartBin The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
GsTxEndBin The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
GsRxStartBin The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
GsRxEndBin The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
GsMaxBitsPerBin The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.
GsMaxDCo Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's
hardware
GsRxBinAdjust This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings
GsAdi2x For non-standard compliant ADI CPE
GsInitiate Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a
C-tone to the remote unit.
GsTxPowerAtten The value in dB of Tx power attenuation
GsCodingGain Sets the coding gain in dB increments
GsRsFastOvrhdDown This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream
fast buffer. RS can also be disabled.
GsRsIntCorrectionDown This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream
interleaved buffer.RS can also be disabled.
GsRsFastOvrhdUp This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream
fast buffer.RS can also be disabled.
GsDrStby This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line
driver
IDL series User Guide
298
GsExpandedExchange T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES
GsEscapeFastRetrain This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain
capability
GsFastRetrain This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability.
Currently supported only in G.lite mode.
GsBitSwap This parameter enables/disables bit swapping
GsNtr This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis
GsAlctlUsVer For T1.413 demo purposes only
GsUseCustomBin This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511
bins will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.
GsFullRetrain Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability
GsPsdMaskType This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used
GsEraseProfiles This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain
profiles at startup
GsExtRsMemory Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM
ParamHybridLossTestStart Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only, for exact value refer to
document number DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd End bin for range of bins to be measured.
GsDmtTrellis This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding
should always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.
GslTriggerMode The type of event that triggers a fast retrain
Type This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.
GsDnBinUsage '1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a
'0' disables usage of corresponding bin.
ParametricTestInputFile Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array
Size, lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is
specified
Data Boost Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.
Upstream PSD Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.
Conf PM Mode PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link
states. Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input.
Additional value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.
Conf PML0 Time(sec) PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)
between an exit from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2
state. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.
Conf PML2 Time(sec) PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)
IP DSLAM
299
between an Entry into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the
L2 state and between two consecutive Power Trims in the L2
State. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit
power reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single
Power Trim in the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps) PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.
This parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low
power state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range
from 0x1F40 (8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.
MSG Min Ds Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This
feature is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Min Snr Mrg(dB/10) Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7
or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
FrontEnd H/W Design Front end hardware reference design
H/W Pwr Reduction Hardware configuration parameter
GsUsBitSwap This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping
Minimum INP Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection
for the downstream bearer channel.
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time
CabinetHsEnable Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode
GsSeltLoopType Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for
SELT. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.
GsRxStartBinU1 Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
GsRxEndBinU1 Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)
PSD MoD Enable Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)
PsdMod FallBackEnable Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the
IDL series User Guide
300
base ADSL2 depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable
only for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)
Max Nom PSD(dB/10) This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to
-40 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10) This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
DS PSD Mask This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD
mask applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask
may impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask
defined in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length =
4 bytes).
GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)
GsAnnexCSwitch Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and
G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)
GsAnnexCToUqSwitch Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point
between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)
Min SnrMgnTime(sec) This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is
allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min
snr, the DSL line is dropped by the APIs.
Customer ID This parameter indicates the customer ID.
GsMPsdMaskType Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used
for Adsl2M.
GsSeltLoopGauge This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.
Rate Ratio This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a
dual latency configuration. This parameter must be set the
parameter to a value greater than 0 and less than 100.
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the
power 7 or better to successfully complete initialization
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to
IP DSLAM
301
decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not
present, the value will be 0.
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to
increase itís transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.
Min Upshift Time(sec) Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn,
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,
the value will be 0.
Min Dnshift Time(sec) Minimum time that the current margin is below
DownshiftSnrMgn, before a downshift occurs. In the case that
RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R
receive rates.
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR
receive rates.
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR
receive rates.
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R
receive rates.
Max Intl Delay(ms) Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload
latency
MSG Min Us Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature
is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7
IDL series User Guide
302
or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value
mentioned is an indicative value only.
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise
Margin. If the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to
reduce its power output to optimize its operation. The value set by
the user is in dB/10, and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.
PSD MoD Enable Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)
feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2
Annex A ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)
PsdMod FallBackEnable Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the
base ADSL2 depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only
for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)
Max Nom PSD(dB/10) This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to
-38 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10) This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)
Rate Adaptation Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this
modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.
Min INP Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection
for the upstream bearer channel. Supported for
ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY
US PSD Mask This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask
applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined
in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available
only for Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)
References:
z ADSL Commands
IP DSLAM
303
5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl chip [chipid <chipid-val>]
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create dsl chip chipid <chipid-val> [ dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl ]
[ linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm ] [ adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |
q9921PotsNonOverlapped | q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921IsdnOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped | q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]
IDL series User Guide
304
5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delet dsl chip chipid <chipid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
chipid <chipid-val> Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 9
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Type: Create -- Optional
linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap |
Qam | Mcm | Scm
ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create -- Optional
adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped |
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921IsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped |
q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverla
pped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped
| q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlap
ped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system
is configured. Its default value depends on the Annex
Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create -- Optional
IP DSLAM
305
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlappe
d | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOv
erlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverla
pped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped
| q9923IsdnOverlapped |
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve
rlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap
ped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve
rlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap
ped
shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create -- Optional
Example:
$ create dsl chip chipid 1 dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped shdsltxmode region1 Region2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Chip Id : 1
DSL Type : Adsl
Line coding : Dmt
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413 q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
306
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Chip Id Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.
DSL Type Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Line coding ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.
Adsl Tx Config Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system is configured. Its default value
depends on the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.
Shdsl Tx Mode Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl dsp chip [chipid <chipid-val>]
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset dsl dsp chip
Parameters:
Name Description
chipid chipid This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 9
Example:
$ get dsl dsp chip chipid 1
IP DSLAM
307
Output:
ChipId
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
ChipId This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.
5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl dsp port [ifname <interface-name>]
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset dsl dsp port ifname <interface-name>
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
Example:
$ get dsl dsp port ifname dsl-0
Output:
Ifname
------------------------------------------------------------------------
dsl-0
IDL series User Guide
308
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.
5.9.27 Dsl system Commands
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dsl system
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create dsl system [dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl] [linecoding Other | Dmt |
Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm] [adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921IsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]
IP DSLAM
309
5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delet dsl system
Parameters:
Name Description
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl |Shdsl | Vdsl Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Adsl
linecoding Other | Dmt |Cap | Qam |
Mcm | Scm
ADSL line code type.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Dmt
adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi|
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped
|q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
|q9921IsdnOverlapped
|q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9922PotsNonOverlapped
|q9922PotsOverlapped
|q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric
|adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped|q9921Gspa
nPlusPotsNonOverlapped
|q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped|q9923Adsl2
PotsNonOverlapped
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
|q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped
|q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped
|adslPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe
d |q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped
|q9923IsdnNonOverlapped
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL
system is configured. Its default value depends on the
Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create － Optional
IDL series User Guide
310
|q9923IsdnOverlapped
|q9925IsdnNonOverlapped
|q9925IsdnOverlapped
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped
shdsltxmode Region1 |Region2 Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for the
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: Region1 |Region2
Example:
$ create dsl system dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413 shdsltxmode
region1 Region2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
DSL Type : Adsl
Line coding : Dmt
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
DSL Type Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
Line coding ADSL line code type.
Adsl Tx Config Transmission capabilities with which the DSL
system is configured. Its default value depends on
the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.
Shdsl Tx Mode Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for
the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.
IP DSLAM
311
5.10 EHDLC Commands
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ehdlc intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ehdlc intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [sarstatus Enable |
Disable] [enable | disable]
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to delete
Command Syntax:
delete ehdlc intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify ehdlc intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [sarstatus Enable |
Disable] [enable | disable]
IDL series User Guide
312
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.
Valid Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: IAD_MIN_EHDLC_IFINDEX -
IAD_MAX_EHDLC_IFINDEX
lowif<lowif-val> This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of
the DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values
start from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23
sarstatus Enable |
Disable
This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the
hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to
support longer snmp messages, it should be turn off. By
default, the option taken is 'disable'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: disable
enable | disable Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface
Type: Optional
Example:
$ create ehdlc intf ifname ehdlc-0 lowif dsl-0 SarStatus Enable enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : ehdlc-0 LowIfName : dsl-0
EHDLC Sar Status : enable Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
313
Output field:
Field Description
IfName This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface. Valid
Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*
LowIfName This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of the
DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values start
from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*
EHDLC Sar Status This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the
hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to
support longer snmp messages, it should be turned off. By
default, the option taken is 'disable'.
Admin Status Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface
5.11 Ethemet Commands
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dot3 stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to
an ethernet-like medium.
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values:eth-0 – eth01
Example
$ get dot3 stats Ifname eth-0
Output
IfName : eth-0
Alignment Errors : 11 FCS Errors : 12
Single Collision Frames : 13 Multiple Collision Frames : 14
Deferred Tx Frames : 15 Late Collisions : 16
Excess Collisions Frames : 17 Mac Tx Errors Frames : 18
IDL series User Guide
314
Carrier Sense Errors : 18 Too Long Frames : 19
Mac Rx Error Frames : 20 Duplex Status :
FullDuplex
Output field:
Field Description
IfName An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to an
ethernet-like medium.
Alignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not
an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS
check. The count represented by an instance of this object is
incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the
MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames
for which multiple error conditions pertain are, according to the
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted
exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.
This counter does not increment for group encoding schemes
greater than 4 bits per group. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s,
this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsAlignmentErrors object for 10
Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check. This count does not include frames received with
frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. The count represented
by an instance of this object is incremented when the
frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple
error conditions pertain are, according to the conventions of IEEE
802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the
error status presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
IP DSLAM
315
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsFCSErrors object for 10 Gb/s or
faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can
occur at e-initialization of the management system, and at other
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Single Collision
Frames
A count of frames that are involved in a single collision, and are
subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is counted by
an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or
ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding
instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames object. This
counter does not increment when the interface is operating in
full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can
occur at re-initialization of the management system, and at other
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Multiple Collision
Frames
A count of frames that are involved in more than one collision and
are subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is
counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by
the corresponding instance of the
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. This counter does not
increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Deferred Tx Frames A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a
particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The
count represented by an instance of this object does not include
frames involved in collisions. This counter does not increment
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular
interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a
packet. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an
instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision
for purposes of other collision-related statistics. This counter does
not increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
IDL series User Guide
316
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Excess Collisions
Frames
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface
fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Mac Tx Errors Frames A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error. A frame is
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by
the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions
object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. The precise meaning of the
count represented by an instance of this object is
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object
may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular
interface that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating
at 10 Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacTransmitErrors object
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or
never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a
particular interface. The count represented by an instance of this
object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt,
even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a
transmission attempt. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the
management system, and at other times as indicated by the value
of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Too Long Frames A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed
the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an
instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong
status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC
IP DSLAM
317
user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions pertain
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s, this
counter can roll over in less than 80 minutes if it is incrementing
at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time could be less
than management station's poll cycle time, in order to avoid a loss
of information, a management station is advised to poll the
dot3HCStatsFrameTooLongs object for 10 Gb/s or faster
interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Mac Rx Error Frames A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. A frame is
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by
the corresponding instance of either the
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors
object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. The precise meaning of
the count represented by an instance of this object is
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object
may represent a count of receive errors on a particular interface
that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating at 10
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacReceiveErrors object
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management
system, and at other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Duplex Status The current mode of operation of the MAC entity.'unknown'
indicates that the current duplex mode could not be determined.
Management control of the duplex mode is accomplished thrugh
'duplexmode' in ethernet command. Note that this object provides
redundant information with etherActualDuplexMode
inetherIfTable.
IDL series User Guide
318
5.11.2 Ethernet Commands
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to create a physical Ethernet interface.
Command Syntax:
create ethernet intf ifname <interface-name> [ip <ip-address>] [mask
<net-mask>][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename <profilename-val>]
[mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val>] [priority <priority-val>] [trfclassprofileid
<trfclassprofileid-val> ] [Ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val>] [ ctlpktgroupid
<ctlpktgroupid-val> | none ] [mgmtsvlanid <mgmtsvlanid-val>] [m2vmacdbid
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [ mgmttvlanid <mgmttvlanid-val> ]
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to delete a physical Ethernet interface.
Command Syntax:
delete ethernet intf ifname <interface-name>
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to get information about a particular physical Ethernet interface,
or about all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get ethernet intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf
Description:
Use this command to modify physical Ethernet interface configuration.
Command Syntax:
modify ethernet intf ifname <interface-name> [ip <ip-address>] [mask
<net-mask>][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename <profilename-val>]
IP DSLAM
319
[mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val>] [priority <priority-val>] [trfclassprofileid
<trfclassprofileid-val> ] [Ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val>] [ ctlpktgroupid
<ctlpktgroupid-val> | none ] [mgmtsvlanid <mgmtsvlanid-val>] [m2vmacdbid
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [ mgmttvlanid <mgmttvlanid-val> ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
This parameter specifies the interface index used for the Ethernet type of
interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0 and continues to eth-*
Type : Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : eth-0 - *
ip <ip-address> This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the interface. This
is required to be configured only if this interface is used for management
IP traffic. If it is not configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow through this
interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet interface shall be
supported only if some IP address is configured on the interface or
'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp field shall be
set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this field shall not be specified
together.
Type : Create - Optional.
Modify - Optional
Valid Values: Any valid class A/B/C / Classless IP address.
Default Value: None
IDL series User Guide
320
Mask <net-mask> This parameter specifies the network mask configured for the interface.
This is given in conjunction with IP Address configured and shall be
given only if IP address has been given. This shall be removed whenever
IP Address is removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on the
interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If
Usedhcp is GS_TRUE and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not be
specified together.
Type : This field is not allowed when a physical interface is specified and
IP is 0.0.0.0. In all other cases the field is mandatory.
Valid Values : 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Default Value: None
usedhcp true | false This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to
obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is configured as GS_FALSE
and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not configured, then management IP traffic will
not flow through the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’
is done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and ‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields
shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall
not be specified together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not
be set to GS_TRUE.
Type : Optional
Valid value : true or false
Default value: false
speed {auto |100 BT|
1000BT}+
The Ethernet speed for the net-side interfaces.
Type : Optional.
Valid Values : auto, 100BT, 1000BT.
Default Value : auto.
type uplink|downink This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces. The Net is
towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave means the physical interface
connected to the slave device.
Type : Optional.
Valid Values : uplink, downlink.
Default Value : uplink.
enable|disable Administrative status of the Ethernet interface.
Type : Modify - Mandatory
Valid values : enable or disable
Default value: enable
IP DSLAM
321
Duplex auto|half|full This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet Interface can
come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’, ‘full duplex’ or a
combination of these. Based on the values configured, the Ethernet
interface negotiates with the peer entity.
Type : optional
Valid values: auto, half, full
Default value: auto
Pkttype
Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUc
ast | All|None
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.
‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every Ethernet
interface. By default, all packets will be transmitted. The interface shall
not transmit any other packet type than that configured.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values : Mcast, Ucast, UnknownUcast, All
Default Value: All
Orl decvalue This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be applied on
this Interface. The unit for the same is in Mbits/sec.
Type: Create - Optional
Modify - Optional
Valid Values: 1 -100
Default Value: 100
ProfileName
<profilename-val>
This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the
Ethernet interface.
Type : Optional.
Default Value : SPROFILE
mgmtvlanid
<mgmtvlanid>
This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for management traffic on
this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management VLAN id is
specified (in the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in
create or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this interface as
the Management VLAN Index. In case the management VLAN (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does
not exist on the system, then IP-based management on this
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its member. In
stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering mentioned above is based on
virtual-VLAN mapped to C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.
Type : Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 -4095
IDL series User Guide
322
priority <priority-val> This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs
sent on Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN
mode, this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN
mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 -7
trfclassprofileid This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to be
associated with the Ethernet interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values:1 to 10
Default Value: 1
Ctlpktinstid This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while
creating an interface, an instance is created internally from the default
profile governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface. This will
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.
The default instance is governed by the macro 0.
TYPE: Create -- Optional
Valid Values:1 - 26
Default Value: 0
ctlpktgroupid
<ctlpktgroupid-val> |
none
This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group associated
with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this interface shall be mapped
to control packet instances as mapped for the flows corresponding to the
groupid configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does not
have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the
ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped to
ctlpktinstid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Valid values: 0 -50
Default value: 0
IP DSLAM
323
mgmtsvlanid This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management traffic on this
interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN Mode. Non-zero value of
this field is valid only if either 'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or
'etherUseDhcp' field is true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in
the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify
operation), then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid' associated
with the bridge port created on this interface as the management VLAN
id. In case the management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN mapped to
'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the
system, then IP-based management shall not happen on the interface till
the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its
member.
Type : Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
m2vmacdbid This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this
interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this
interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.
Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_M2VMAC_DATABASES
mgmttvlanid
<mgmttvlanid-val>
This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or vlan id of
the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet frames and that is expected
in received frames over this interface. Currently this is configurable and
supported only for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used from the
system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id configured on a
management Ethernet interface is zero then third vlan tag shall not be
added neither shall it be supported in received frames. This attribute is
applicable only in stacked-VLAN mode.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
Default value: 0
Example:
create ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0 speed 100bt
profilename sprofile mgmtvlanid 2 priority 2 trfclassprofileid 1 Ctlpktinstid 1
ctlpktgroupid 1
IDL series User Guide
324
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.1.1 Mask : 255.255.0.0
Pkt Type : Mcast
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : None
Configured Speed : Auto
Profile Name : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index : 2
Mgmt S-VLAN Index : 2
Mgmt T-VLAN Index : 2
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 2
trfclassprofileid : 1
Ctl Pkts Instance Id:1 Ctl Pkts Group Id : 1
Speed : -
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Up
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
If-Name This parameter specifies the interface index used for the
Ethernet type of interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0
and continues to eth-*
Type This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces.
The Net is towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave
means the physical interface connected to the slave device.
UseDhcp This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be
triggered to obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is
configured as GS_FALSE and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not
configured, then management IP traffic will not flow through
the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’ is
done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and
‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both
Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall not be specified
IP DSLAM
325
together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not be
set to GS_TRUE.
Ip Address This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the
interface. This is required to be configured only if this
interface is used for management IP traffic. If it is not
configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow
through this interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is
configured on the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was
configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this
field shall not be specified together.
Mask This parameter specifies the network mask configured for
the interface. This is given in conjunction with IP Address
configured and shall be given only if IP address has been
given. This shall be removed whenever IP Address is
removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet interface
shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on
the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to
"GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp field shall
be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not
be specified together.
pkttype This parameter defines the packet type supported by the
interface. ‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for
every Ethernet interface. By default, all packets will be
transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any other
packet type than that configured.
Orl This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be
applied on this Interface.The units for the same is in
Mbits/sec
Configured Duplex The duplex mode to be used by the interface, as configured
by the user.
Duplex This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet
Interface can come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’,
‘full duplex’ or a combination of these. Based on the values
configured, the Ethernet interface negotiates with the peer
entity.
IDL series User Guide
326
Configured Speed The Ethernet speed for the net-side interfaces.
Mgmt VLAN Index This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for
management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true. If no Management VLAN id is specified (in the
create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create
or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this
interface as the Management VLAN Index. In case the
management VLAN (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does not exist on the
system, then IP-based management on this management
VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its
member. In stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering
mentioned above is based on virtual-VLAN mapped to
C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.
Mgmt S-VLAN Index This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management
traffic on this interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN
Mode. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either
'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or 'etherUseDhcp' field is
true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in the create
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or
modify operation), then the system shall use the value of
'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this
interface as the management VLAN id. In case the
management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN
mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if
'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system, then IP-based
management shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side
port as its member.
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged
Ethernet PDUs sent on Management VLAN over this
interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero
or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN mode, this priority
shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN mode it
shall be used for S-Vlan tag.
ProfileName This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be
associated with the Ethernet interface.
IP DSLAM
327
Speed The actual speed of the interface.
Operational Status The operational status of the interface.
Admin Status The administrative status of the interface.
trfclassprofileid This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to
be associated with the Ethernet interface.
Ctl Pkts Instance Id This specifies the control packet instance identifier
associated with this interface. If the user does not provide
any instance identifier while creating an interface, an
instance is created internally from the default profile
governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface.
This will reduce the total number to instances that can be
now created by one. The default instance is governed by
the macro 0.
Ctl Pkts Group Id This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group
associated with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this
interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid
configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does
not have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall
be mapped to the ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the
flows shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid.
M2VMacDbId This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature
is disabled on this interface. This field can be modified only
when the interface is disabled.
Mgmt T-VLAN Index This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or
vlan id of the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet
frames and that is expected in received frames over this
interface. Currently this is configurable and supported only
for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used
from the system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id
configured on a management Ethernet interface is zero
then third vlan tag shall not be added neither shall it be
supported in received frames. This attribute is applicable
only in stacked-VLAN mode.
References:
z Ethernet stats command.
IDL series User Guide
328
5.12 EOA Commands
5.12.1 EOA Commands
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to create an EoA interface towards the CPE side.
Command Syntax:
create eoa intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <low-interface-name> [pkttype
{multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast} + | all|None] [fcs false | true]
[enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl <inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [m2vmacdbid
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [configstatus normal | config]
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf
Description:
Use this command to delete an EoA interface.
Command Syntax:
delete eoa intf ifname <interface-name>
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to get information on a particular EoA interface, or on all the
EoA interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get eoa intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf
Description:
Use this command to modify the properties of an eoa interface.
Command Syntax:
modify eoa intf ifname <interface-name> [pkttype {multicast |broadcast
|unknown- unicast} + | all| none] [fcs false | true] [m2vmacdbid
<m2vmacdbid-val> | none] [enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl
<inactivitytmrintrvl>]
IP DSLAM
329
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname<interface-name
>
This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Modify － Mandatory
Valid values: eoa-0,eoa-1….
lowif
<low-interface-name>
This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It contains ifindex of
the AAL5 or VC Aggregation interface.
Type: Mandatory
Valid Values : aal5-0 - *
pkttype {multicast
|broadcast
|unknownunicast}+ |
all|none
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.
‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every CPE side
Ethernet interface. By default, the option taken is 'ALL' and it means that
all packets will be transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal
Ucast packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any
other packet type than the ones configured.
Type: Optional.
Valid Values: {multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast}+ | all
Default Value: all.
fcs false | true This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be computed for the CPE
side Ethernet interfaces. This can be set to true only if encaptype of the
lower interface is Ethernet.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: false or true
Default Value: false.
Enable|disable Administrative status of the interface
Type: Optional
Valid values : enable or disable
Default Values: enable
inactivitytmrintrvl
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>
This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which interfaces shall be
marked inactive if there is no data activity on this interface during this
interval. This is used only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is
set for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is not
running. In Aautosensing scenario, an inactive interface is a candidate
to deletion in case another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on
which this interface is created.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: 0 to 0xffffffff
IDL series User Guide
330
Default Value: 0
configstatus normal |
config
This parameter describes the configuration mode for this interface.The
value of this parameter can be normal or config. If the value is config,
then this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant status. Only
after the receipt of an EoA packet from the CPE side, this interface shall
become active.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: normal | config
Default Value: normal
m2vmacdbid
<m2vmacdbid-val> |
none
This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this
interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this
interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 1154
Default value: 0
Example:
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-0 lowif aal5-0 m2vmacdbid 1 enable fcs false
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-0 LowIfName : aal5-0
FCS : False
Pkt Type : ALL
InActivity Tmr Interval : 3
M2VMac Database Id : 1
Config Status : Normal
Oper Status : Down Admin Status : Up
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName The name of the interface that has been created.
LowIfName This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It
contains ifindex of the AAL5 or VC Aggregation
interface.
FCS This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be
computed for the CPE side Ethernet interfaces. This can
IP DSLAM
331
be set to true only if encaptype of the lower interface is
Ethernet.
Pkt Type This parameter defines the packet type supported by the
interface. ‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured
for every CPE side Ethernet interface. By default, the
option taken is 'ALL' and it means that all packets will be
transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal Ucast
packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not
transmit any other packet type than the ones configured.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or
Down
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either
up or down.
InActivity Tmr Interval This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which
interfaces shall be marked inactive if there is no data
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set
for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the
timer is not running. In Aautosensing scenario, an
inactive interface is a candidate to deletion in case
another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which
this interface is created.
Config Status This parameter describes the configuration mode for this
interface.The value of this parameter can be Normal,
Config, NotInUse, or InUse. If the value is Config, then
this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant
status. Only after the receipt of an EoA packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The 'InUse'
and 'NotInUse' bits are read-only bits. The 'NotInUse' bit
indicates that the entry is dormant and the 'InUse' bit
indicates that the entry is activated.
M2VMac Database Id This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC
feature is disabled on this interface. This field can be
modified only when the interface is disabled.
References:
z Ethernet commands
z Ethernet Stats commands.
IDL series User Guide
332
5.13 Filtering Commands
5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get acl global macentry [macaddr <macaddr-val >]
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val > [deny disable |enable]
[track disable | enable]
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val >
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val > [deny disable | enable]
[track disable | enable]
IP DSLAM
333
Parameters:
Name Description
macaddr
<macaddr-val >
Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get Optional
deny disable | enable
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.
Type: Create --Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
track disable | enable
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A
trap is raised when packet from the address comes over a port for the first time
and when it changes the port.
Type: Create --Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: disable
Example:
$ create acl global macentry macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34 deny enable track enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Mac Address : 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34
Deny : true Track : enable
Number of times Port changed : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Mac Address Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access
Deny This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.
Track
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A
trap is raised in case packet from the address comes over a port for the first time
and when it changes the port.
Number of times
Port changed This specifies the number of times port has been changed by the MAC address.
IDL series User Guide
334
5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr list genentry ifname <interface-name>value <value-val> [valtype
U8|U16|U32]
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr list genentry ifname <interface-name> [value <value-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the
classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe*
value <value-val> List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IP DSLAM
335
Valtype U8|U16|U32 This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.Create -- Optional.
Create -- Optional
Example:
$ create clfr list genentry Ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u8
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
If Name : eoa-1
Value : 0xAC1901AA
Value Type : U32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
If Name Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the
classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.
Value List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list
Value Type This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.
IDL series User Guide
336
5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get acl port macentry [portid <portid-val >] [macaddr <macaddr-val >]
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create acl port macentry portid <portid-val > macaddr <macaddr-val >
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete acl port macentry portid <portid-val > macaddr <macaddr-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
portid <portid-val>
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC Address entry is created
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-578
macaddr
<macaddr-val>
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to be allowed access over the
particular port.
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Example:
$ create acl port macentry portId 2 macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34
IP DSLAM
337
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
PortId : 2
Mac Address : 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
PortId Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC
Address entry is created
Mac Address Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to
be allowed access over the particular port.
Caution:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE/IPOE interface.
5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist genentry [listid <listid-val>] [value <value-val>]
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist genentry listid <listid-val>value <value-val>
IDL series User Guide
338
5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist genentry listid <listid-val>value <value-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
listid <listid-val> This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
value <value-val> This field specifies the list entry value. The value range
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier
Named List table.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Example:
$ create clfr namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
Value : 0xAC1901AA
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
ListId This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.
Value This field specifies the list entry value. The value range
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier
Named List table.
IP DSLAM
339
5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist info [listid <listid-val>]
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val>
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
Parameter:
Name Description
listid listid This field stores the list identifier value.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
IDL series User Guide
340
valtype U8 | U16 | U32 This field specifies the value type of list. Value type
should match value type of matchingenlist nodes in case
a tree attached on same interface as the list. It should be
'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule or Generic
subrule with cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is
supported.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: U32
Example:
$ create clfr namedlist info listid 2 valtype u32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
ListId This field stores the list identifier value.
Value Type This field specifies the value type of list. Value
type should match value type of matchingenlist
nodes in case a tree attached on same interface
as the list. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with
cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'
value is supported.
IP DSLAM
341
5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr namedlist map [ifname <interface-name>]
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr namedlist map ifname <interface-name>listid <listid-val>
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr namedlist map ifname <interface-name>
Parameter:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which
named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field are between
EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and
IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-192.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
listid <listid-val> This field stores the list identifier value.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Example
$ create clfr namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2
IDL series User Guide
342
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-1
ListId : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
IfName This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet
interface to which named generic list is attached.
Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between
IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-192.
ListId This field stores the list identifier value.
5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile branch [pname <pname-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>] [brtype
<brtype-val>]
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile branch pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val>brtype
<brtype-val> [cnodeid <cnodeid-val>]
IP DSLAM
343
5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile branch pname <pname-val> nodeid <nodeid-val>brtype
<brtype-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
pname <pname-val> Name of the classifier profile
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
nodeid <nodeid-val> Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be
attached.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
brtype <brtype-val> This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are
allowed. For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr
(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For
Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
cnodeid <cnodeid-val> Child Node Id
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create clfr profile branch pname IGMP nodeid 3 brtype truebr
IDL series User Guide
344
Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : IGMP
Node Id : 3 Branch type : true
Child NodeId : 5
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Name Name of the classifier profile
Node Id Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be
attached.
Branch type This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only)
type, TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)
are allowed. For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc),
GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed.
For Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Child NodeId Child Node Id
5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile info [pname <pname-val>]
IP DSLAM
345
5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile info pname <pname-val>
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile info pname <pname-val>
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr profile info pname <pname-val> [descr <descr-val>] [rnode
<rnode-val>] [enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name Description
pname <pname-val> Name of the classifier profile
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
descr <descr-val> A brief description can be given with profile, to identify the profile
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
rnode <rnode-val> Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have only one root
node id
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
IDL series User Guide
346
enable | disable A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A tree can only
use a profile, if it is enabled. A profile cannot be disabled, if a
tree is using it.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 2
Example:
$ create clfr profile info pname IGMP
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : IGMP
Root NodeId : 0 Status : Enable
Description : Profile to match the IGMP packet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Name Name of the classifier profile
Root NodeId Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have
only one root node id
Status A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A
tree can only use a profile, if it is enabled. A
profile cannot be disabled, if a tree is using it.
Description A brief description can be given with profile, to
identify the profile
IP DSLAM
347
5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr profile node [pname <pname-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr profile node pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val> [ descr
<descr-val> ] [export true|false ] Ntype
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear modmask
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None
[ actval
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval
<offsetval-val> ] [ maskval <maskval-val> ] [ value <value-val> ] [ valend
<valend-val> ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt
<shiftcnt-val>] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio
low|high|asintree ]
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr profile node pname <pname-val> nodeid <nodeid-val>
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node
Description:
Use this command to modify.
IDL series User Guide
348
Command Syntax:
modify clfr profile node pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val> [ descr
descr ] [export true|false ] Ntype Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear
modmask
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None
[ actval
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval
<offsetval-val> ] [ maskval <maskval-val> ] [ value <value-val> ] [ valend
<valend-val> ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt
<shiftcnt-val>] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio
low|high|asintree ]
Parameter:
Name Description
pname <pname-val> Name of the classifier profile
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
nodeid <nodeid-val> Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: -----
descr <descr-val> A brief description can be given with node, to identify the node. If
the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and
it can be used by the applications to receive the packets coming
from control plane because of this node.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
export true|false Some of the nodes of a profile can be exported. This flag tells
whether this node is exported or not
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
IP DSLAM
349
Default value: FALSE
Ntype
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar
y|Linear|NonLinear
This specifies the type of the Classifier node.
Type: Create -- Optional
maskval <maskval-val> Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a packet.
If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is
used to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the
individual bits of the field of the packet used to compute the new
base offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8, U16, U32 or U64.
This field is also valid if the g gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is
MatchInGenList.
Type : Create --Optional
Default Value : --
value <value-val> Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types,
this field is not valid. For Linear node types, this
value is used to specify the start of the range. If
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then
this field is used to specify the value, which is to be
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If
the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field
is used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet.
If the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this field is not
valid. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is Count then this field is
read only and specifies total number of octets of the packets
hitting this node.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: ---
valend <valend-val> For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end
of the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of
the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is count
then this field is used to specify the total number of
packet hitting this node. For other actions this field is not valid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: -----
sbasetype Abs | Add |
Compute |
This field is valid only for the SET_BASE action type. It is used to
specify, whether the base off set is to be set to an absolute value,
IDL series User Guide
350
or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to
calculate new base offset value, or the new base offset value is to
be computed using some value in the packet.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ---
shiftcnt <shiftcnt-val> ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the
packet is to be shifted before multiplying it with the
gsvClfrProfileNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase. Value 32 is meant for
internal purpose and Agents should not pass this value to GAG.
GAG may return 32 value to Agent, in which case Agent should
treat it as invalid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 31
Default value: ---
mplr <mplr-val> Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by
ShiftCount. It is used to calculate the new base
offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 32
Default value: ----
Modmask
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask
|Val|None|ValueEnd|Sbt
ype|SBShiftCnt|SBMlpr|
Descrip
This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and
can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Actval
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpT
oCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|Te
rCmp|
SetPrio|MatchInList|Acc
Deny|SetBase|Count|
Retagprio |
MatchIngenlist
|GoToNextRule|allow
Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the
packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means
Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the
packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'
means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means
go to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next
rule is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq'
means check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt'
means check if the value at the location specified in the packet is
greater than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location
specified in the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means
IP DSLAM
351
check if the value at the location specified in the packet is in the
range specified by 'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if
the value at the location specified in the packet is less than, equals
to or greater than the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch
of the node whose value is equals to the value at the location
specified in the packet. 'AccDeny' means check if the value at the
location specified in the packet is equals to any of the value of the
branches of this node. 'SetBase' means set the base address as
specified by 'setbase action'. 'SetPrio' means set the internal
priority, which is used along with egress port traffic class mapping
table, to determine the output queue. 'Count' means count the
number of packet and bytes in the packets reaching this nodes.
'RetagPrio' means set the priority in the outgoing packet, which is
also used along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to
determine the output queue. 'MatchInGenList' means match value
in packet with values in genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd,
FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and GoToNextRule are valid actions.
For Unary node, Count, SetPrio and RetagPrio are valid actions.
For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt, SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid
actions. For Ternary node, TerCmp and InRange are valid actions.
For Linear node, only MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear
node, MatchinList and AccDeny are valid actions.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
Ntype
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar
y|Linear|NonLinear
This specifies the type of the Classifier node.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: -----
Offsetval offsetval OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset,
from where we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then this value is
used to specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which
shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the
new base offset. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8 the offset
can be odd or even. If the
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U16, U32 or U64 then
the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for
any other value type.
IDL series User Guide
352
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 64
Default value: -----
Valuetype valuetype Value type tells, the type of value which is to be
matched/set. For leaf type nodes this field is not
valid. If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then
this value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which
shall be used to compute the new base offset. This field is not
valid for other values of
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
sbvarindex
L2Start|L3Start
This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if
'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing Layer
3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP packet
before using 'L3Start' value
.Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Invalid
nodeprio
Low|High|AsInTree
This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority
value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as
specified in the tree.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: AsInTree
Example:
$ create clfr profile node pname IGMP nodeid 1 ntype binary actval eq valuetype
u16 value 0xffff offsetval 12 maskval 0xffff
IP DSLAM
353
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : IGMP
Node Id : 3
Exported : true Node Type : Binary
Modification Mask : Act
Action : eq
Value Type : u16 Offset : 12
Mask : 0xffff
Value : 0x800
Value End : None
Set Base type : none
Shift Count : none Multiplier : none
Description : Node to match the ip address
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Name Name of the classifier profile
Node Id Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Exported This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable
and can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.
Node Type This specifies the type of the Classifier node
Modification Mask This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this
node is an exported node.
Action Action tells what is to be done by a node.
Value Type Value type tells the type of value, which is to be matched/set.
For leaf type nodes this field is not valid. if ActVal is SetBase and
SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the
value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used to compute the
new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of
SBaseType.
Offset OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where
we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to
specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be
used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new
IDL series User Guide
354
base offset. if the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even.
If the ValueType is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be
even. This field is not valid for any other value type.
Mask Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a
packet. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then
this value is used to specify the mask, which shall be used to
identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to
compute the new base offset. This field is valid only if the
ValueType is U8, U16, U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the
ActVal is MatchInGenList.
Value Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not
valid. For Linear node types, this value is used to specify the
start of the range. if ActVal is SetBase and SBaseTypeis
Compute then this field is used to specify the value,
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset.
If the ActVal is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to
specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If the
ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not
valid. If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and
specifies total number of octet of the packets hitting this node.
Value End For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the
range. If the ActVal is InRange then this field is used to specify
the end of the range. If the ActVal is count then this field is used
to specify the total number of packet hitting this node. For other
actions this field is not valid.
Set Base type SetBaseType is used to specify whether the base off set is to be
set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new
base offset value is to be computed using some value in the
packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.
Shift Count ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to
be shifted before multiplying it with the Mplr. This field is valid
only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value 32 is used to set shift count
to an invalid value.
Multiplier Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if
the ActVal is SetBase.
Description Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or
CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the
applications to receive the packets coming from control plane
IP DSLAM
355
because of this node.
SBVar Index This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if
'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing
Layer 3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP
packet before using 'L3Start' value
Node Priority This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority
value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as
specified in the tree.
5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands
5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree branch [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]
[brtype <brtype-val>]
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree branch tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid
<nodeid-val>brtype <brtype-val>childpid <childpid-val>
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree branch tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid
<nodeid-val>brtype <brtype-val>
IDL series User Guide
356
Parameter:
Name Description
tname <tname-val> Name of the classifier tree
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: ND - ND
pid <pid-val> Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
nodeid <nodeid-val> Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
brtype <brtype-val> This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node, only
onlybr (0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For binary type
and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are allowed.
For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr
(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is allowed. The actual
value can be U8, U16, U32, U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
childpid <childpid-val> This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child Profile Id value 0
is used to add true and false branches to a AccessDeny type
node.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create clfr tree branch tname t1 pid 2 nodeid 1 brtype truebr childpid 1
IP DSLAM
357
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name : tree1
Profile Id : 3 Node Id : 2
Branch type : eq Child Profile Id : 4
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Tree Name Name of the classifier tree
Profile Id Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Node Id Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Branch type This specifies the branch types. For a unary type
node, only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is
allowed. For binary type and
Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)
are allowed. For ternary type nodes
LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr
(0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32,
U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.
Child Profile Id This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child
Profile Id value 0, is used to add true and false
branches to a AccessDeny type node.
IDL series User Guide
358
5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree info [tname <tname-val>]
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree info tname <tname-val> [descr <descry-val>] [enable | disable]
[treeprio low | high]
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr tree info tname <tname-val>
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree info tname <tname-val> [descr <descry-val>] [enable | disable]
[treeprio low | high]
IP DSLAM
359
Parameter:
Name Description
tname <tname-val> Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be
used only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
descr <descry-val> A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
enable | disable A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be
used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 2
treeprio low | high Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is
created in fast or slow memory.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: low
Example:
$ create clfr tree info tname tree1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name : tree1
Status : disable
Description : tree1
Tree Priority : High
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
360
Output field:
Field Description
Tree Name Name of the classifier tree
Status A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be
used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.
Description A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree
TreePriority Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is
created in fast or slow memory.
5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree map [ifname <interface-name>]
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree map ifname <interface-name>tname <tname-val> entrypid
<entrypid-val>
5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete clfr tree map ifname <interface-name>
IP DSLAM
361
Parameter:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Mandatory
tname <tname-val> Type: Create -- Mandatory
entrypid <entrypid-val> Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Example:
$ create clfr tree map Ifname aal5-3 tname tree1 EntryPId 5
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
If Name : aal5-3
Tree Name : tree1 Entry Profile Id : 5
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field
Field Description
If Name Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated
Tree Name
Entry Profile Id
5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree node [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]
IDL series User Guide
362
5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree node tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid <nodeid-val>
[ descr <descry-val> ] [ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ value
<value-val> ] [act Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange |TerCmp|
SetPrio|MatchInList|AccDeny|SetBase|Count| Retagprio |
MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule| allow] [valend valend ] [sbasetype Abs | Add |
Compute] [ shiftcnt <shiftcnt-val> ] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [valtype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|vlanid][ sbvarindex
l2start|l3start ] [nodeprio low]
Parameter:
Name Description
tname tname Name of the classifier tree
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
pid pid Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: -----
nodeid nodeid Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: -----
descr descr Description of the tree node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl
then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to
receive the packets coming from control plane because of this node.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
offset offset OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we
have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase
and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the
offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be used to specify
the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. If the
IP DSLAM
363
ValueType is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType is
U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not
valid for any other value type.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 65
Default value: -----
mask mask Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a
packet. If gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and
gsvClfrTreeNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is used
to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the individual bits
of the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. This
field is valid only if the gsvClfrTreeNodeValType is U8, U16, U32
or U64. This field is also valid if the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is
MatchInGenList.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
value value Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not
valid. For Linear node types, this
value is used to specify the start of the range. If
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and NodeSetBaseType is
Compute then this field is used to specify the value, which is to be
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is
used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this
field is not valid. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is Count, then this
field is read only and specifies total
number of octets of the packets hitting this node.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
act
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|
CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InR
ange|TerCmp|
SetPrio|MatchInList|A
ccDeny|SetBase|Cou
nt| Retagprio |
MatchIngenlist|
GoToNextRule|allow
Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the
packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means
Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the
packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'
means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means go
to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next rule
is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq' means
check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt' means
check if the value at the location specified in the packet is greater
than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location specified in
the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means check if the value
IDL series User Guide
364
at the location specified in the packet is in the range specified by
'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if the value at the
location specified in the packet is less than, equals to or greater than
the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch of the node whose
value is equals to the value at the location specified in the packet.
'AccDeny' means check if the value at the location specified in the
packet is equals to any of the value of the branches of this node.
'SetBase' means set the base address as specified by setbase
action. 'SetPrio' means set the internal priority, which is used along
with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. 'Count' means count the number of packet and bytes in the
packets reaching this nodes. 'RetagPrio' means set the prirority in
the outgoing packet, which is also used along with egress port traffic
class mapping table, to determine the output queue.
'MatchInGenList' means match value in packet with values in
genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd, FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and
GoToNextRule are valid actions. For Unary node, Count, SetPrio
and RetagPrio are valid actions. For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt,
SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid actions. For Ternary node,
TerCmp and InRange are valid actions. For Linear node, only
MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear node, MatchinList and
AccDeny are valid actions.
Type: Modify -- Optional
valend valend For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is InRange then this field is used to
specify the end of the range. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is count
then this field is used to specify the total number of packets hitting
this node. For other actions this field is not valid.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: -----
sbasetype Abs | Add |
Compute
SetBaseType, is used to specify, whether the base off set is to be
set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new base
offset value is to be computed using some value in the packet.This
field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: 4
shiftcnt shiftcnt ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be
shifted before multiplying it with the
gsvClfrTreeNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.
IP DSLAM
365
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 – 31
Default value: ----
mplr mplr Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if the
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 32
Default value: ----
valtype
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmI
f|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|D
ir|Prio|Len|vlanid
Value type tells the type of value that is to be matched/set.
Sbvarindex
l2start|l3start
This specifies the setbase variable index. 'L2Start' is read-only,
containing Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only,
containing Layer 3 header start offset.
Nodeprio
low|high|asintree
This specifies the priority of the tree node. Based on this priority
value, the tree node is created in fast or slow memory.
Example:
$ get clfr tree node tname tree1 pid 2 nodeid 3
Output:
Tree Name : tree1
Profile Id : 2 Node Id : 3
Exported : true Node Type : Binary
Modification Mask : act offset
Action : eq
Value Type : u32 Offset : 12
Mask : 0x0000000f
Value : 0x0000000f
ValueEnd : NA
Set Base type : NA
Shift Count : NA Multiplier : NA
Description : Node to match the ip address
IDL series User Guide
366
Output field:
Field Description
Tree Name Name of the classifier tree.
Profile Id Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Node Id Node Id, should be unique within a profile
Exported This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and can be modified
while the profile is part of a classifier tree.
Node Type This specifies the type of the Classifier node
Modification Mask This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this node is an
exported node.
Action Action tells what is to be done by a node.
Value Type Value type tells, the type of value which is to be matched/set. For leaf type nodes
this field is not valid. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this
value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used
to compute the new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of
SBaseType.
Offset OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we have to take
the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is
Compute then this value is used to specify the offset with respect to the base
offset,
which shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new
base offset. If the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType
is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for any
other value type.
Mask Mask, used to select the individual bits to be match in a packet. If ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this value is used to specify the mask,
which shall be used to identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to
compute the new base offset.This field is valid only if the ValueType is U8, U16,
U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the ActVal is MatchInGenList.
Value Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not valid. For Linear
node types, this value is used to specify the start of the range. if ActVal is
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this field is used to specify the value,
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the ActVal is
SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to specify the priority which is to be
assigned to the packet. If the ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not valid.
If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and specifies total number of
octet of the packets hitting this node.
ValueEnd For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is
count then this field is used to specify the total number of packet hitting this node.
IP DSLAM
367
For other actions this field is not valid.
Set Base type SetBaseTyp, is used to specify whether the base off set is to be set to an
absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to
calculate new base offset value or the new base offset value is to be computed
using some value in the packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.
Shift Count ShiftCount is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be shifted before
multiplying it with the Mplr. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value
32 is used to set shift count to an invalid value.
Multiplier Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is used to calculate
the new base offset. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.
Description Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field
is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to receive the packets
coming from control plane because of this node.
5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree profile [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>]
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create clfr tree profile tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>pname <pname-val>
[isroot <isroot-val>]
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get clfr tree profile tname <tname-val> pid <pid-val>
IDL series User Guide
368
5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify clfr tree profile tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val> [isroot true|false]
Parameter:
Name Description
tname <tname-val> Name of the classifier tree
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
pid <pid-val> Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: -----
pname <pname-val> Name of the profile which is to be added
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Get -- Optional
Default value: -----
isroot <isroot-val> This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root profile or not. Only
root profiles of the nodes can be specified as an entry point on an interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Delete -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Get -- Optional
Valid values: true, false
Default value:FALSE
Example:
$ create clfr tree profile tname tree1 pid 4 pname srcip
IP DSLAM
369
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Tree Name : tree1 Profile Id : 4
Profile Name : srcip
Is Root : false
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Tree Name Name of the classifier tree
Profile Id Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree
Profile Name Name of the profile which is to be added
Is Root This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root
profile or not. Only root profiles of the nodes can be
specified as an entry point on an interface.
5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter expr entry [exprid <exprid-val>]
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter expr entry exprid <exprid-val>exprstring <exprstring-val>
IDL series User Guide
370
5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter expr entry exprid <exprid-val>
Parameter
Name Description
exprid <exprid-val> Unique identifier for a filter expression.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 -65535
exprstring
<exprstring-val>
Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a
rule using the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for
precedance) and actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop,
allow, setprio, sendtocontrol, retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule,
forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', only drop, allow, gotonextrule and
forwardexit action types are valid. For eg. "(1|2):drop" will be used to
drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Example:
$ create filter expr entry exprid 1 exprstring “(1|2):drop”
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Expr Id : 1
Exprstring : (1|2):drop
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
371
Output field:
Field Description
Expr Id Unique identifier for a filter expression.
Exprstring Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a rule using
the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for precedance) and
actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop, allow, setprio, sendtocontrol,
retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule, forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out',
only drop, allow, gotonextrule and forwardexit action types are valid. For eg.
"(1|2):drop" will be used to drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.
5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter list genentry ifname <interface-name>value <value-val>] [valtype
U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter list genentry ifname <interface-name> value <value-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the
generic filter generic list is created. Valid values for the field are
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
IDL series User Guide
372
PPPOE-191.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
value <value-val> List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value
must be consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
valtype U8 | U16 | U32 This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as
InGenList or NotInGenList is attached on same interface.
Currently only 'U32' value is supported.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: U32
Example:
$ create filter list genentry ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-1
Value : 0xAC1901AA
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field
Field Description
IfName Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the generic filter
generic list is created. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or
between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.
Value List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value must be
IP DSLAM
373
consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.
Value Type This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all entries on an
interface should be same. Value type should match value type of subrule field
for which comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing
the subrule is attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is
supported.
5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist genentry [listid <listid-val>] [value <value-val>]
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist genentry listid <listid-val> value value-val>] [valueto
<valueto-val>]
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist genentry listid <listid-val> value <value-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
listid <listid-val> This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
IDL series User Guide
374
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
value <value-val> This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
valueto <valueto-val> This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create filter namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA valueto 0xAC1901AA
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
Value : 0xAC1901AA
ValueTo : 0xAC1901AA
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
ListId This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.
Value This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.
ValueTo This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.
IP DSLAM
375
5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist info [listid <listid-val>]
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist info listid <listid-val> [listtype discrete | range] [valtype
U8 | U16 | U32]
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist info listid <listid-val>
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
modify filter namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]
Parameter:
Name Description
listid <listid-val> This field stores the list identifier value.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
376
Valid values: 1 - 65535
listtype discrete | range This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range,
then list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be
specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist
of an interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: discrete
valtype U8 | U16 | U32 This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached
on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: U32
Example:
$ create filter namedlist info listid 2 listtype discrete valtype u32
Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
ListId : 2
List Type : discrete
Value Type : u32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
ListId This field stores the list identifier value.
List Type This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range, then
list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be
IP DSLAM
377
specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist of
an interface.
Value Type This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should match
value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached on
same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.
5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter namedlist map [ifname <interface-name>]
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter namedlist map ifname <interface-name> listid <listid-val>
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter namedlist map ifname <interface-name>
Parameter:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to
which named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field
are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or
IDL series User Guide
378
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and
PPPOE-191.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
listid <listid-val> This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id
must exist in Generic Filter Named List Table. Value type of the
list should match subrule field for which comparsion type is
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as
ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same interface. The list
type can either discrete or range.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Example:
$ create filter namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
IfName : eoa-1
ListId : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
IfName This specifies the eoa, pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which named generic list is
attached. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0
and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.
ListId This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id must exist in Generic
Filter Named List Table. Value type of the list should match subrule field for which
comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule
or Generic subrule with cmptype as ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same
interface. The list type can either discrete or range.
IP DSLAM
379
5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule actionmap [ruleid <ruleid-val >] [orderindex <orderindex-val >]
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val > orderindex <orderindex-val>
action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror
[priority <priority-val>] [actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask
<actionmask-val>]
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val> orderindex <orderindex-val>
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val> orderindex <orderindex-val>
[action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror]
[priority <priority-val>] [actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask
<actionmask-val>]
IDL series User Guide
380
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is
being created
Type: Create -－ Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
orderindex
<orderindex-val>
This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in this
table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple actions of
the rule are applied in the increasing order of this field
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 -255
action SetPrio |
RetagPrio|
CopyToControl
|ModifyTos |
SetBacLevel |PktVlanId
| RetagVlanId
|PktServiceVlanId
|RetagServiceVlanId
|RetagServicePrio |
Mirror
This field specifies the action of the rule
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
priority <priority-val> This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or 'retagprio'or
'retagserviceprio'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0
actionval
<actionval-val>
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that
require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and
retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos
action this parameter should contain value to be set in TOS
IP DSLAM
381
field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid
for this action. The application of this value is dependent on the
mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this parameter should
contain valid Buffer Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For
pktvlanid, retagvlanid, pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid
actions this parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in
the range 1 to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should
be filled with valid mirror context id.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0
actionmask
<actionmask -val>
This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits are
taken into consideration for modifytos action and other bits are
ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
Example:
$ create filter rule actionmap ruleid 1 orderindex 1 action SetPrio priority 3
actionval 0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Order Index : 1
Action : SetPrio Priority : 3
ActionValue : 0x00000000
Action Mask : 0xffffffff
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
382
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is
being created
Order Index This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in
this table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple
actions of the rule are applied in the increasing order of this
field
Action This field specifies the action of the rule
Priority This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or
'retagprio'or 'retagserviceprio'.
ActionValue The parameter should contain valid value for some actions
that require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio,
and retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For
modifytos action this parameter should contain value to be set
in TOS field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values
are invalid for this action. The application of this value is
dependent on the mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this
parameter should contain valid Buffer Admission Control level
value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid and pktservicevlanid actions this
parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1
to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should be filled
with valid mirror context id.
Action Mask This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits
are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then
the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field
remains unchanged.
IP DSLAM
383
5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule entry [ruleid <ruleid-val>]
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule entry ruleid r<ruleid-val> [ action drop | allow | setprio |
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit|
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description
<description-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ status enable | disable ]
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ ruledir in | out ]
[ applywhenreq enable | disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel
interface | bridge ] [ exprid <exprid-val> ] [ actionval <actionval-val> ]
[ actionmask <actionmask-val> ]
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule entry ruleid <ruleid-val >
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
IDL series User Guide
384
Command Syntax:
modify filter rule entry ruleid <ruleid-val> [ action drop | allow | setprio |
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit |
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description
<description-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ status enable | disable ]
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ applywhenreq enable |
disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel interface | bridge ] [ exprid
<exprid-val> ] [ actionval <actionval-val> ] [ actionmask <actionmask-val> ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val > Unique identifier of a filter rule.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1-65535
action drop | allow
|setprio | sendtocontrol
|retagprio | copytocontrol|
clfrdef | gotonextrule
|forwardexit | exprdef
|modifytos | setbaclevel
|pktvlanid | retagvlanid
|pktservicevlanid
|retagservicevlanid
|retagserviceprio
|ratelimiter | Mirror
Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This field
can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.
'exprdef(10)' action has a special significance that action is defined
in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be specified.
For other types of actions, the default relationship between subrules
is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef' and 'ratelimiter' action
types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef', then the rule can have at
most one subrule, that too of type 'clfrtree'. The actions setprio,
retagprio and setserviceprio require priority value to be specified in
ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol,
modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid, retagvlanid, setservicevlanid,
retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and mirror require an additional value
to be specified in ruleActionVal parameter. The actions
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos also require
ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: drop
description
<description-val>
Description of the application that receives packets matching this
rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable' Type: Create －
IP DSLAM
385
Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"
priority <priority-val> Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority which
is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value
'disable'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0
status enable | disable Admin status of the rule
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable
statsstatus enable
|disable
Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast
packets hitting the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable
ruleprio low | high Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule is
created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction'
has value 'clfrdef'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: high
ruledir in | out Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: in
IDL series User Guide
386
applywhenreq enable
|disable
This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when required.
Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to value 'enable'.
This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'. This
field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable
pkttype Mcast | Bcast
|Ucast
This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be
applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets, 'Bcast'
means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast' means this
rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if 'ruleDir' is
'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Ucast
snooplevel interface
|bridge
Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from
Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If none
of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then this field
has no significance. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: interface
exprid <exprid-val> Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression Table
to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'. In
absence of this field, the default relationship between all subrules is
all ANDed.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action setprio description lacp priority 7 status
enable statsstatus disable ruleprio high ruledir in applywhenreq disable pkttype
Ucast snooplevel interface exprid exprid 1 actionval 0x00000000 actionmask
0xffffffff
IP DSLAM
387
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Rule Action : setprio
Set Priority : 7 Admin status : enable
Stats admin status : disable Rule Priority : high
Rule Direction : in ApplyWhenReq : disable
Pkt Type : Ucast
Application Description : lacp
Snoop Level : interface
Expression Id : exprid 1
Action Value : 0x00000000
Action Mask : 0xffffffff
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule.
Rule Action Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This
field can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.
‘exprdef (10)' action has a special significance that action is
defined in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be
specified. For other types of actions, the default relationship
between subrules is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef'
and 'ratelimiter' action types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef',
then the rule can have at most one subrule, that too of type
'clfrtree'. The actions setprio, retagprio and setserviceprio require
priority value to be specified in ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol, modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid,
retagvlanid, setservicevlanid, retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and
mirror require an additional value to be specified in ruleActionVal
parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and
modifytos also require ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.
Set Priority Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output
IDL series User Guide
388
queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority
which is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used
along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the
output queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'.
Admin status Admin status of the rule
Stats admin status Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast
packets hitting the rule.
Rule Priority Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule
is created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the
'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'
Rule Direction Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).
ApplyWhenReq This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when
required. Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to
value 'enable'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value
'clfrdef'.
Pkt Type This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be
applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets,
'Bcast' means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast'
means this rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if
'ruleDir' is 'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the
value 'disable'.
Application
Description
Description of the application that receives packets matching this
rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'
Snoop Level Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from
Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If
none of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then
this field has no significance. This field can be modified only if
'status' has the value 'disable'.
Expression Id Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression
Table to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'.
In absence of this field, the default relationship between all
IP DSLAM
389
subrules is all ANDed.
Action Value The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that
require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and
retagserviceprio actions. For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0-3). Other
values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this
parameter should contain value to be set in TOS field in the packet
in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this action. The
application of this value is dependent on the mask parameter. For
setbaclevel action this parameter should contain valid Buffer
Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid, retagvlanid,
pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid actions this parameter
should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1 to 4094. For
ratelimiter action this parameter should be filled with the valid
user-defined flow type value. For mirror action this parameter
should be filled with valid mirror context id. This parameter is
ignored for other actions. Specifying an invalid value for an action
would result in error when the rule is enabled.
Action Mask This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos
actions only. For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this
parameter should contain trap level 0xffffffff (trap disabled) or
0x00000000(trap enabled). Other values are invalid for this action.
For modifytos action, only lower 8-bits are taken into consideration
and other bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule map [ifname <interface-name> | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe] [stageid <stageid-val>] [ruleid <ruleid-val>]
IDL series User Guide
390
5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val> [orderid <orderid-val>]
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val>
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val> [orderid <orderid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>| all
|alleoa | alleth |
allpppoe| allcpe |
allipoe
Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,
PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of
this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'
interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'
indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'
interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: , all , alleoa, alleth, allpppoe, allcpe,| allipoe
IP DSLAM
391
stageid <stageid-val> This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in
the mapping belongs
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1
ruleid <ruleid-val> Rule Id of the rule in the mapping
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
orderid <ordered-val> This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: Same As Ruleid
Example:
$ create filter rule map ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface : eoa-0 Stage Id : 1
Rule Id : 1 Order Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Interface Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,
PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of
this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'
interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'
indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'
IDL series User Guide
392
interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.
Stage Id This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in
the mapping belongs
Rule Id Rule Id of the rule in the mapping
Order Id This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter rule stats [ruleid <ruleid-val>]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid> Unique identifier of a filter rule
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1- 65535
Example:
$ get filter rule stats ruleid 1
Output:
Rule Id : 1 Num Hits : 4354
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule
Num Hits Number of packets that hit this rule
References:
z Generic Filter Commands
IP DSLAM
393
5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter seq entry [seqid <seqid-val >] [ruleid <ruleid-val >]
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val > [orderid
<ordered-val >]
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val >
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val > [orderid
<ordered-val >]
Parameters:
Name Description
IDL series User Guide
394
seqid <seqid-val > Sequence Id of the sequence
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get – Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535
ruleid <ruleid-val > Rule Id of the rule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535
orderid <ordered-val > This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The default value
for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535
Example:
$ create filter seq entry seqid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Sequence Id : 1 Rule Id : 1
Order Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Sequence Id Sequence Id of the sequence
Rule Id Rule Id of the rule
Order Id This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The
default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.
References:
z Generic filter related commands
IP DSLAM
395
5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter seq info [seqid <seqid-val >]
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter seq info seqid seqid [ifname <interface-name> | alleth] [stageid
<stageid-val>] [seqdir in | out]
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter seq info seqid <seqid-val>
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter seq info seqid <seqid-val > [ifname <interface-name>| alleth]
[stageid <stageid-val>] [seqdir in | out]
Parameters:
Name Description
IDL series User Guide
396
seqid <seqid-val> Sequence Id of the sequence
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid Values: 1-65535
ifname
<interface-name>
The name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EoA, PPPoE,
and Ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of this field is 'alleth', it
indicates all 'Ethernet' interfaces. If the bridge port is created over the
aggregated interface, then this field cannot have IfIndex of any specific
Ethernet interface. If the bridge port over the aggregated interface is not
created, then this field cannot have the value 'alleth'. This field should not be
specified during creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during
modify of an entry in this table.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
stageid <stageid-val> Identifier of the stage on the interface for which the sequence is being
applied.This field should not be specified during creation of an entry in this
table and must be specified during modify of an entry in this table
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1-2
Default Value:1
seqdir in | out This field specifies whether the sequence to be applied in ingress direction or
egress direction on the interface.This field should not be specified during
creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during modify of an entry
in this table.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: In
Example:
$ create filter seq info seqid 1 ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 seqdir 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Sequence Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
397
Output field:
Field Description
Sequence Id Sequence Id of the sequence
References:
z Generic filter related commands
5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule arp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>]
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ]
[ srcmacaddrto <srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ]
[ dstmacaddrto <dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val> ]
[ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val> ] [ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val> ]
[ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ]
[ ipdstaddrmask <ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
IDL series User Guide
398
5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>]
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ]
[ srcmacaddrto <srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ]
[ dstmacaddrto <dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val> ]
[ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val> ] [ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val> ]
[ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ]
[ ipdstaddrmask <ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
IP DSLAM
399
opcode request | reply |
any
The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or
reply. This field specifies the type of packets on which the
subrule is to be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and
reply packets are filtered.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
srcmacaddrfrom
<srcmacaddrfrom-val>
Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac
addresses. This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This
field and the srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac
addresses if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
srcmacaddrto
<srcmacaddrto-val>
End source Mac address of the range of source Mac
addresses. This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a
range of source Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either
'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
dstmacaddrfrom
<dstmacaddrfrom-val>
Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This
field and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination
Mac addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'
or'exrange'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
dstmacaddrto
<dstmacaddrto-val>
End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a
range of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is
either'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
IDL series User Guide
400
srcipaddrfrom
<srcipaddrfrom-val>
Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',
this field and srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP
addresses.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
srcipaddrto
<srcipaddrto-val>
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this
field and srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP
addresses.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255
dstipaddrfrom
<dstipaddrfrom-val>
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or 'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',
this field and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP
addresses.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
dstipaddrto
<dstipaddrto-val>
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'
or 'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a
range of destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255
srcmacaddrcmp eq |
neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange
Source Mac address comparison type.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
dstmacaddrcmp eq |
neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange
Destination Mac address comparison type.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
IP DSLAM
401
srcipaddrcmp eq | neq |
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist
Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if
source IP address present in interface classifier generic
list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not
present in interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which
this subrule is being created is 'out'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
dstipaddrcmp eq | neq |
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist
Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means
check if destination IP address present in interface classifier
generic list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP
address not present in interface classifier generic
list.'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
ipsrcaddrmask
<ipsrcaddrmask-val>
The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied
over the source IP address before checking against a value.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
ipdstaddrmask
<ipdstaddrmask-val>
The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is
applied over the destination IP address before checking
against a value.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same
as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
IDL series User Guide
402
Example:
$ create filter subrule arp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 opcode request srcmacaddrfrom
00:01:02:03:04:05 srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom
00:02:03:04:05:11 dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125
srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange srcipaddrcmp inrange
dstipaddrcmp exrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffff0000 ipdstaddrmask 0xffff0000
subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Opcode : request
Start Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:05 End Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:10
Start Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:11 End Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:15
Start Src Ip Addr : 172.25.1.125 End Src Ip Addr : 172.25.5.125
Start Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.6.125 End Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.10.125
Src Mac Addr Cmp : inrange
Dest Mac Addr Cmp : exrange
Src Ip Addr Cmp : inrange
Dest Ip Addr Cmp : exrange
Ip Src Addr Mask : 0xffff0000
Ip Dest Addr Mask : 0xffff0000
Subrule Prio : high
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Parameters
Name Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Opcode The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or reply.
This field specifies the type of packets on which the subrule is to
be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and reply packets are
filtered.
IP DSLAM
403
Start Src Mac Addr Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.
This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This field and the
srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac addresses if
srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.
End Src Mac Addr End source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.
This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a range of source
Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Start Dest Mac Addr Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This field
and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination Mac
addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.
End Dest Mac Addr End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac
addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a range
of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is either'inrange'
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Start Src Ip Addr Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or'notingenlist'.If
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and
srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP addresses.
End Src Ip Addr End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'.If
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and
srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP addresses.
Start Dest Ip Addr Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field
and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP addresses.
End Dest Ip Addr End destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a range of
destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.
Src Mac Addr Cmp Source Mac address comparison type.
Dest Mac Addr Cmp Destination Mac address comparison type.
IDL series User Guide
404
Src Ip Addr Cmp Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if
source IP address present in interface classifier generic
list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not present in
interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'.
Dest Ip Addr Cmp Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if
destination IP address present in interface classifier generic
list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP address not
present in interface classifier generic list.'Ingenlist' and
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which this
subrule is being created is 'out'.
Ip Src Addr Mask The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied over
the source IP address before checking against a value.
Ip Dest Addr Mask The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is applied
over the destination IP address before checking against a value.
Subrule Prio This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule clfrtree [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
tname <tname-val > entrypid <entrypid-val >
IP DSLAM
405
5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
[tname <tname-val >] [entrypid <entrypid-val >]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify --Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1- 65535
Subruleid <subruleid> Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
tname <tname> Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be used
only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
entrypid <entrypid> Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point for it.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
IDL series User Guide
406
Example:
$ create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid 1 subruleid 2 tname igmp entrypid 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Tree Name : igmp
Entry Profile Id : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Tree Name Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule
of this rule. This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A
classifier tree can be used only in one subrule. The Maximum
length of Name should be 32.
Entry Profile Id Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point
for it.
References:
z see generic filter related commands
IP DSLAM
407
5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ether [ruleid <ruleid-val >] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val
>[ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ srcmacaddrto
<srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ dstmacaddrto
<dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ ethertypefrom <ethertypefrom-val> ] [ ethertypeto
<ethertypeto-val> ] [ vlanidfrom <vlanidfrom-val> ] [ vlanidto <vlanidto-val> ]
[ priotagfrom <priotagfrom-val> ] [ priotagto <priotagto-val> ] [ dsapfrom
<dsapfrom-val> ] [ dsapto <dsapto-val> ] [ ssapfrom <ssapfrom-val> ] [ ssapto
<ssapto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
[ servicevlanidfrom <servicevlanidfrom-val> ] [ servicevlanidto
<servicevlanidto-val> ] [ servicepriotagfrom <servicepriotagfrom-val> ]
[ servicepriotagto <servicepriotagto-val> ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
IDL series User Guide
408
5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val
>[ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ srcmacaddrto
<srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ dstmacaddrto
<dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ ethertypefrom <ethertypefrom-val> ] [ ethertypeto
<ethertypeto-val> ] [ vlanidfrom <vlanidfrom-val> ] [ vlanidto <vlanidto-val> ]
[ priotagfrom <priotagfrom-val> ] [ priotagto <priotagto-val> ] [ dsapfrom
<dsapfrom-val> ] [ dsapto <dsapto-val> ] [ ssapfrom <ssapfrom-val> ] [ ssapto
<ssapto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]
[ servicevlanidfrom <servicevlanidfrom-val> ] [ servicevlanidto
<servicevlanidto-val> ] [ servicepriotagfrom <servicepriotagfrom-val> ]
[ servicepriotagto <servicepriotagto-val> ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
IP DSLAM
409
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
srcmacaddrfrom
<srcmacaddrfrom-val>
Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This
field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcmacaddrto'
specify a range of source MAC addresses if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"
srcmacaddrto
<srcmacaddrto-val>
End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This
field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC addresses, if
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is
invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
dstmacaddrfrom
<dstmacaddrfrom-val>
Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.
This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field
specify a range of destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\0"
dstmacaddrto
<dstmacaddrto-val>
End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.
This field and the previous field specify a range of destination MAC
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise
this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
IDL series User Guide
410
Modify － Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
ethertypefrom
<ethertypefrom-val>
Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if
'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of ether
types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange' Type: Create －
Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0
ethertypeto
<ethertypeto-val>
End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the previous field
specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xFFFF
vlanidfrom
<vlanidfrom-val>
Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of the rule
for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if
'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field specify a range of
VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or'exrange'(9).In VLAN
stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN ID. Type: Create
－ Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 1
vlanidto <vlanidto-val> End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of the rule for
which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the vlanidfrom
field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this
parameter maps to customer VLAN ID.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 4094
priotagfrom
<priotagfrom-val>
Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the
rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if
'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field specify a range of
priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN
stacking mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0
IP DSLAM
411
priotagto
<priotagto-val>
End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the
rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the
priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking
mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7
dsapfrom
<dsapfrom-val>
Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of DSAPs, if
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x00
dsapto <dsapto-val> End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of DSAPs, if
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xff
ssapfrom
<ssapfrom-val>
Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of SSAPs, if
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x00
ssapto <ssapto-val> End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of SSAPs, if
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0xff
srcmacaddrcmp eq |
neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |
any| inrange | exrange
Source mac address comparison type
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
dstmacaddrcmp eq |
neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |
any| inrange | exrange
Destination mac address comparison type
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
IDL series User Guide
412
Default value: any
ethertypecmp eq | neq |
lt| leq | gt | geq | any
|inrange | exrange
Ether type comparison type
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt
|leq | gt | geq | any
|inrange | exrange
VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp' is not
equal to 'any'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
priotagcmp eq | neq | lt
|leq | gt | geq | any
|inrange | exrange
Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'vlanidcmp' is not
equal to 'any'"
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
ssapcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq| gt | geq | any |
inrange| exrange
SSAP comparison type.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high
|asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: asinrule
servicevlanidfrom
<servicevlanidfrom-val>
Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the servicevlanidto field
specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 1
servicevlanidto
<servicevlanidto-val>
End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field
is invalid In native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
IP DSLAM
413
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4094
Default value: 4094
servicepriotagfrom
<servicepriotagfrom-val>
Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid
if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field and the etherPriorityTagTo
field specify a range of priority tags, if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error. Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 0
servicepriotagto
<servicepriotagto-val>
End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the
etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of service priority tags, if
'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).
Otherwise this field is invalid. In native mode configuring this parameter will
result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
Default value: 7
servicevlanidcmp eq |
neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |
any| inrange | exrange
Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be ‘any (7)', if
etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to ‘any (7)'In native mode configuring
this parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
servicepriotagcmp eq |
neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |
any| inrange | exrange
Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be ‘any (7)', if
vlanidcmp is not equal to ‘any (7)'.In native mode configuring this
parameter will result in error.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
Example:
$ create filter subrule ether ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcmacaddrfrom 00:01:02:03:04:05
srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom 00:02:03:04:05:11
dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 ethertypefrom 0x0800 ethertypeto 0x0810
vlanidfrom 2 vlanidto 5 priotagfrom 2 priotagto 5 dsapfrom 0xf0 dsapto 0xff
ssapfrom 0xf0 ssapto 0xff srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange
IDL series User Guide
414
ethertypecmp inrange vlanidcmp exrange priotagcmp inrange dsapcmp inrange
ssapcmp inrange subruleprio high servicevlanidfrom 2 servicevlanidto 5
servicepriotagfrom 2 servicepriotagto 5 servicevlanidcmp exrange
servicepriotagcmp inrange
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Start source mac address : 00:01:02:03:04:05
End source mac address : 00:01:02:03:04:10
Start destination MAC address : 00:02:03:04:05:11
End destination MAC address : 00:02:03:04:05:15
Start ethernet type : 0x0800 End ethernet type : 0x0810
Start VLAN Id : 2 End VLAN Id : 5
Start priority tag : 2 End priority tag : 5
Start DSAP : 0xf0 End DSAP : 0xff
Start SSAP : 0xf0 End SSAP : 0xff
Source MAC addrees comparison : inrange
Desination MAC addr comparison : exrange
Ether type comparison : inrange
Vlan Id comparison : exrange
Priority tag comparison : inrange
DSAP comparison : inrange
SSAP comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority : high
Start service VLAN Id : 2
End service VLAN Id : 5
Start service priority tag : 2
End service priority tag : 5
service Vlan Id comparison : exrange
Service Priority tag comparison : inrange
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
415
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Start source mac
address
Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.
This field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'srcmacaddrto' specify a range of source MAC addresses if
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End source mac
address
End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.
This field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC
addresses, if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid
Start destination MAC
address
Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC
addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This
field and the next field specify a range of destination MAC
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End destination MAC
address
End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC
addresses. This field and the previous field specify a range of
destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange'
or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Start ethernet type Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if
'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range
of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End ethernet type End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the
previous field specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Start VLAN Id Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is
invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field
specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)
or'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
customer VLAN ID.
End VLAN Id End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the vlanidfrom field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp'
is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid.
In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN
ID.
Start priority tag Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction
IDL series User Guide
416
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
is invalid if 'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field
specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)
or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
priority in the customer VLAN tag.
End priority tag End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field
and the priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if
'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this
field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to
priority in the customer VLAN tag.
Start DSAP Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range
of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End DSAP End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a
range of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid.
Start SSAP Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range
of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End SSAP End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a
range of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid
Source MAC addrees
comparison
Source mac address comparison type
Desination MAC addr
comparison
Destination mac address comparison type
Ether type comparison Ether type comparison type
Vlan Id comparison VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp'
is not equal to 'any'
Priority tag comparison Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if
'vlanidcmp' is not equal to 'any'"
DSAP comparison DSAP comparison type.
SSAP comparison SSAP comparison type.
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
IP DSLAM
417
Start service VLAN Id Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is
'out'. This field is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the
servicevlanidto field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.
End service VLAN Id End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is
'out'. This field and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of
service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field is invalid In native mode
configuring this parameter will result in error.
Start service priority
tag
Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
This field is invalid if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field
and the etherPriorityTagTo field specify a range of priority tags, if
'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In
native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.
End service priority tag End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
This field and the etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of
service priority tags, if 'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In native
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.
service Vlan Id
comparison
Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any(7)', if
etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to 'any(7)'In native mode
configuring this parameter will result in error.
Service Priority tag
comparison
Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be 'any(7)', if
vlanidcmp is not equal to 'any(7)'.In native mode configuring this
parameter will result in error.
References:
z Generic filter commands
IDL series User Guide
418
5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule generic [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ offsethdr <Ethernet-val> | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]
[ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ valuefrom <valuefrom-val> ] [ valueto
<valueto-val> ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |
asinrule ] [ namedlistid <namedlistid-val> ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ offsethdr <Ethernet-val> | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]
[ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ valuefrom <valuefrom-val> ] [ valueto
<valueto-val> ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |
asinrule ] [ namedlistid <namedlistid-val> ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
IP DSLAM
419
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
offsethdr ethernet | ip |
tcp | udp | icmp | igmp |
l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe
Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The value
'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is being created is of
direction 'out'.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet
offset <offset-val> Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 64
Default value: 0
mask <mask-val> Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
valuefrom
<valuefrom-val>
Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is invalid if
'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next field
specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
IDL series User Guide
420
valueto <valueto-val> End generic value of the range of generic values. This field and the
previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0xffffffff
gencmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange |
ingenlist | notingenlist |
innamedlist |
notinnamedlist
Generic value comparision type.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
namedlistid
<namedlistid-val>
This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which will be used
to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist' or 'notinnamedlist', this
field is manadatory else it is extra.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Default value: 1
transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe
This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which
corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this field is 'ethernet',
then IP is being carried in ethernet header and if it is 'pppoe' then
corresponding IP is being carried in PPP header.This field is valid only
when value of 'offsethdr' is any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or
igmp.Otherwise this field is extra
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet
Example:
$ create filter subrule generic ruleid 1 subruleid 2 offsethdr tcp offset 20 mask 0xFF
valuefrom 0x20 valueto 0x40 gencmp inrange subruleprio high namedlistid -
transporthdr Ethernet
IP DSLAM
421
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Offset header : tcp Offset : 20
Generic header comparison : inrange Mask : 0xFF
Subrule Priority : high Start value : 0x20
End value : 0x40
Transport Header : ethernet
NamedList Id : -
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule for which this sub rule is being
created.
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Offset header Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The
value 'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is
being created is of direction 'out'.
Offset Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value
Generic header
comparison
Generic value comparision type.
Mask Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same
as specified in the rule.
Start value Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is
invalid if 'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next
field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'
End value End generic value of the range of generic values. This field
and the previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if
'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is
invalid
Transport Header This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in
IDL series User Guide
422
which corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this
field is 'ethernet', then IP is being carried in ethernet header
and if it is 'pppoe' then corresponding IP is being carried in
PPP header.This field is valid only when value of 'offsethdr' is
any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or igmp.Otherwise this field is
extra
NamedList Id This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which
will be used to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist'
or 'notinnamedlist', this field is manadatory else it is extra.
References:
z Generic filter commands
5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule icmp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ icmptype<icmptype-val> ] [ icmpcode <icmpcode-val> ] [ icmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
IP DSLAM
423
5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ icmptype<icmptype-val> ] [ icmpcode <icmpcode-val> ] [ icmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
icmptype
<icmptype-val>
ICMP type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
icmpcode
<icmpcode-val>
ICMP code
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
icmptypecmp eq | neq |
any
ICMP type comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
IDL series User Guide
424
icmpcodecmp eq | neq
| any
ICMP code comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the
rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried
in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet
Example:
$ create filter subrule icmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 icmptype 0 icmpcode 0
icmptypecmp neq icmpcodecmp neq subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Icmp type : 0 Icmp code : 0
ICMP type comparison : neq ICMP code comparison : neq
Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : Ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
425
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Icmp type ICMP type
Icmp code ICMP code
ICMP type comparison ICMP type comparison type
ICMP code comparison ICMP code comparison type
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the
rule.
Transport Header This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried
in the PPP header.
References:
z Generic Filter commands
5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule igmp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to create.
IDL series User Guide
426
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ igmptype <igmptype-val> ] [ igmpcode <igmpcode-val> ] [ groupaddrfrom
<groupaddrfrom-val> ] [ groupaddrto <groupaddrto-val> ] [ igmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ igmptype <igmptype-val> ] [ igmpcode <igmpcode-val> ] [ groupaddrfrom
<groupaddrfrom-val> ] [ groupaddrto <groupaddrto-val> ] [ igmptypecmp eq |
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
IP DSLAM
427
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
igmptype
<igmptype-val>
IGMP type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
igmpcode
<igmpcode-val>
This fields specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of
IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is any.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
groupaddrfrom
<groupaddrfrom-val>
Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This
field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
groupaddrto
<groupaddrto-val>
End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This
field and 'groupaddrfrom' specify a range of IGMP group
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 4294967295
igmptypecmp eq | neq
| any
IGMP type comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
igmpcodecmp eq | neq
| any
IGMP code comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
igmpgroupaddrcmp
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |
geq | any | inrange |
exrange
IGMP group address comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
IDL series User Guide
428
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule
priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is
being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: ethernet
Example:
$ create filter subrule igmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 igmptype 0 igmpcode 0 groupaddr
from 224.0.2.3 groupaddrto 224.10.20.30 igmptypecmp eq igmpcodecmp eq
igmpgroupaddrcmp inrange subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Igmp type : 0 IGMP type comparison : neq
Igmp code : 0 IGMP code comparison : neq
Start group address : 224.0.2.3 End group address :
224.10.20.30
IGMP group address comparison : inrange Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : Ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Igmp type IGMP type
IP DSLAM
429
IGMP type comparison IGMP type comparison type
Igmp code This field specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of
IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is
any.
IGMP code comparison IGMP code comparison type
Start group address Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This
field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End group address End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This
field and 'groupaddrfrom' specifiy a range of IGMP group
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
IGMP group address
comparison
IGMP group address comparison type
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
Transport Header This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is
being carried in the PPP header.
References:
z Generic Filter commands
5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ip [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]
IDL series User Guide
430
5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
[ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val > ] [ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val > ]
[ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val > ] [ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val > ]
[ prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val > ] [ prototypeto <prototypeto-val > ]
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ] [ ipdstaddrmask
<ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr
ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom <tosfrom-val> ] [ tosto <tosto-val> ] [ tosmask
<tosmask-val> ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
[ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val > ] [ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val > ]
[ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val > ] [ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val > ]
[ prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val > ] [ prototypeto <prototypeto-val > ]
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ] [ ipdstaddrmask
<ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr
IP DSLAM
431
ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom <tosfrom-val> ] [ tosto <tosto-val> ] [ tosmask
<tosmask-val> ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
srcipaddrfrom
<srcipaddrfrom-val>
Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field is invalid if 'srcaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'. This field and 'srcipaddrto' specify a range of source
IP addresses if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
srcipaddrto
<srcipaddrto-val>
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.
This field and 'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP
addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise this field is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255
dstipaddrfrom
<dstipaddrfrom-val>
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or
'notingenlist'. This field and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0.0.0.0
IDL series User Guide
432
dstipaddrto
<dstipaddrto-val>
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP
addresses. This field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 255.255.255.255
prototypefrom
<prototypefrom-val>
Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field
is invalid if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto'
specify a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0
prototypeto
<prototypeto-val>
End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field
and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if
'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field
is invalid.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 27
srcaddrcmp eq | neq |
lt |leq | gt | geq | any
|inrange | exrange
|ingenlist |
notingenlist
Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if
source ip address present in interface classifier generic list.
'notingenlist' means check if source ip address not present in
interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
dstaddrcmp eq | neq |
lt |leq | gt | geq | any
|inrange | exrange
|ingenlist |
notingenlist
Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check
if destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.
'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in
interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being
created is 'out'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
prototypecmp eq | neq
| lt| leq | gt | geq | any
IP Protocol type comparison type.
Type: Create － Optional
IP DSLAM
433
|inrange | exrange Modify － Optional
Default value: any
ipsrcaddrmask
<ipsrcaddrmask-val>
The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over
the source ip address before checking against a value.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
ipdstaddrmask
<ipdstaddrmask-val>
The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied
over the destination ip address before checking against a value.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
subruleprio low | high
|asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as asinrule, subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: asinrule
transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe
This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which
IP is being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP
is being carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then
IP is being carried in PPP header.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: ethernet
tosfrom <tosfrom-val> Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a
range of TOS values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or
'exrange'(9). Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xff
Default value: 0
tosto <tosto-val> End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'toscmp' is 'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of
TOS values, if 'toscmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
IDL series User Guide
434
Valid values: 0 - 0xff
Default value: 0xff
tosmask
<tosmask-val>
The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS
field value before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom'
and 'tosto'.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x01 - 0xff
Default value: 0xff
toscmp eq | neq | lt |
leq| gt | geq | any |
inrange| exrange
TOS comparision type.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: any
Example:
$ create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125
prototypefrom 1 prototypeto 6 srcaddrcmp inrange dstaddrcmp inrange
prototypecmp inrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffffffff ipdstaddrmask 0xffffffff subruleprio
high transportHdr ethernet tosfrom 0x01 tosto 0x06 tosmask 0xff toscmp inrange
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Start src ip addr : 172.25.1.125 End src ip addr : 172.25.5.125
Start dest ip addr : 172.25.6.125 End dest ip addr : 172.25.10.125
Start IP prot type : 1 End IP prot type : 6
Start TOS value : 0x01 End TOS value : 0x06
Src ip addr comp : inrange Dest ip addr comp : inrange
IP prot type comp : inrange TOS comp type : inrange
IP Src Addr Mask : 0xffffffff IP Dest Addr Mask : 0xffffffff
Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : ethernet
TOS Mask : 0xff
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
435
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule.
End src ip addr End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This field and
'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.
Start dest ip addr Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This
field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'. This field
and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of destination IP addresses, if
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
End dest ip addr End destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This
field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of destination IP addresses, if
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Start IP prot type Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field is invalid
if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto' specify a range of IP
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
End IP prot type End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field and
'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.
Start TOS value Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a range of TOS
values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).
End TOS value End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if 'toscmp' is
'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of TOS values, if 'toscmp'
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Src ip addr comp Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if source ip
address present in interface classifier generic list. 'notingenlist' means
check if source ip address not present in interface classifier generic list.
'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which
this subrule is being created is 'out'
Dest ip addr comp Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if
destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.
'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in interface
classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.
IP prot type comp IP Protocol type comparison type.
TOS comp type TOS comparision type.
IP Src Addr Mask The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over the source
ip address before checking against a value.
IDL series User Guide
436
IP Dest Addr Mask The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied over the
destination ip address before checking against a value.
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
asinrule, subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Transport Header This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which IP is
being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP is being
carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then IP is being carried
in PPP header.
TOS Mask The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS field value
before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom' and 'tosto'.
References:
z Generic filter commands
5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule ppp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val>] [prototypeto <prototypeto-val>]
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio
low | high | asinrule]
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
IP DSLAM
437
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val>] [prototypeto <prototypeto-val>]
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio
low | high | asinrule]
Parameter:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val> Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
prototypefrom
<prototypefrom-val>
Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp'
is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'. Otherwise only this field is valid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
IDL series User Guide
438
prototypeto
<prototypeto-val>
End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.
This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp
protocol types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535
prototypecmp eq | neq
| lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange
Protocol comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this
priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory.
In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will
be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
Example:
$ create filter subrule ppp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 prototypefrom 0x1 prototypeto 0x5
prototypecmp inrange subruleprio high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Start ProtoType : 0x1 End ProtoType : 0x5
Protocol comparison : inrange Subrule Priority : high
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being
created
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Start ProtoType Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp' is
IP DSLAM
439
'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of protocol
types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.
Otherwise only this field is valid
End ProtoType End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.
This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp protocol
types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Protocol comparison Protocol comparison type
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as
specified in the rule.
References:
z see generic filter related commands
5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule tcp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val> ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val> ] [ dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val> ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val> ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]
IDL series User Guide
440
5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val > ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val > ] [ dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val > ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val > ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val > Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1-65535
subruleid <subruleid-val
>
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
srcportfrom
<srcportfrom-val >
Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is invalid
if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'srcportto' specify a range of tcp
source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
IP DSLAM
441
srcportto <srcportto-val
>
End port number of the range of source port numbers. This field and
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of TCP source port numbers if 'srcportcmp'
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535
dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val >
Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create --Optional
Modify --Optional
Default value: 0
dstportto <dstportto-val
>
End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field and
'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535
srcportcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange
Source port comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
dstportcmp eq | neq | lt |
leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange
Destination port comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high |
asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the
corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is 'Ethernet',
then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is 'PPPoE', then
the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Ethernet
IDL series User Guide
442
Example:
$create filter subrule tcp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio
high
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Start source port : 21 End source port : 23
Start destination port : 21 End destination port : 23
Source port comparison : inrange Destination port comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : Ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Start source port Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range of
tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End source port End port number of the range of source port numbers. This field and
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Start destination port Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End destination port End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field and
'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Source port
comparison Source port comparison type
Destination port
comparison
Destination port comparison type
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as
IP DSLAM
443
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Transport Header This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the
corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is
'Ethernet', then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is
'PPPoE', then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.
References:
z Generic Filter Commands
5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get filter subrule udp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
[srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val >] [srcportto <srcportto-val >] [ dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val > ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val > ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe ]
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >
IDL series User Guide
444
5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val> ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val> ] [ dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val> ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val> ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt
| geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet |
pppoe ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]
Parameters:
Name Description
ruleid <ruleid-val > Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete --Mandatory Modify
Mandatory Get --Optional
Valid values: 1-65535
subruleid
<subruleid-val >
Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Type: Create --Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Modify-- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295
srcportfrom
<srcportfrom-val >
Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range
of udp source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
srcportto
<srcportto-val >
End port number of the range of source port numbers.This field and
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers, if
'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535
dstportfrom
<dstportfrom-val >
Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of
IP DSLAM
445
udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
dstportto
<dstportto-val >
End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field
and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of udp destination port numbers, if
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 65535
srcportcmp eq | neq |
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange
Source port comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
dstportcmp eq | neq |
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |
inrange | exrange
Destination port comparison type
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: any
subruleprio low | high
|asinrule
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value,
the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is
specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the
rule.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: asinrule
transporthdr ethernet
| pppoe
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which
the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is
Ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is
PPPoE, then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Ethernet
Example:
$ create filter subrule udp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio
high
IDL series User Guide
446
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rule Id : 1 Subrule Id : 2
Start source port : 21 End source port : 23
Start destination port : 21 End destination port : 23
Source port comparison : inrange Destination port comparison : inrange
Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : ethernet
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Rule Id Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is
being created
Subrule Id Unique identifier of a filter subrule
Start source port Start port number of the range of source port numbers.
This field is invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and
'srcportto' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers,
if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'
End source port End port number of the range of source port numbers.
This field and 'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp
source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
Start destination port Start port number of the range of destination port
numbers. This field is invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This
field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of udp destination
port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or
'exrange'
End destination port End port number of the range of destination port
numbers. This field and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of
udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid
Source port
comparison Source port comparison type
Destination port
comparison
Destination port comparison type
Subrule Priority This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this
IP DSLAM
447
priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow
memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule',
subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.
Transport Header This specifies the type of the transport header in the
packet in which the corresponding IP is being
transported. If the value of this field is Ethernet, then the
IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is PPPoE,
then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP
header.
References:
z Generic Filter Commands
5.14 IGMP Commands
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop cfg info
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop cfg info [ queryinterval <queryinterval-val> ] [ anxioustimer
<anxioustimer-val> ] [ v1hosttimer <v1hosttimer-val> ] [ lastmembqryinterval
<lastmembqryinterval-val> ] [ robustness <robustness-val> ] [ status Enable |
Disable ] [ reportsup Enable | Disable ] [ qryrespinterval <qryrespinterval-val> ]
[ proxyreportstatus Enable | Disable ] [ versionmask v1 | v2 | v3 ]
[ startupqryinterval <startupqryinterval-val> ] [ startupqrycount
<startupqrycount-val> ] [ lastmemberqrycount <lastmemberqrycount-val> ]
[ unsolicrprtinterval <unsolicrprtinterval-val> ]
IDL series User Guide
448
Parameters:
Name Description
queryinterval
<queryinterval-val>
This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when
no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value of
this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are
received for it is approximately (((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness)
+ Query Response Time received in Last Query)
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xff
anxioustimer
<anxioustimer-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before
which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost
reports. The unit is seconds.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
v1hosttimer
<v1hosttimer-val>
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for
which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 260
lastmembqryinterval
<lastmembqryinterval-v
al>
This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is
the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries
sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. The
value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency
of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect
the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this parameter
is one-tenth of second.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 – 255
robustness
<robustness-val>
This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a
subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]
packet losses.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 2 - 255
IP DSLAM
449
status Enable | Disable This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be
enabled in the system.
Type: Modify -- Optional
reportsup Enable |
Disable
Report Suppression is enabled or not.
Type: Modify -- Optional
qryrespinterval
<qryrespinterval-val>
This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled
in General query that will be initiated from Columbia
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xff
proxyreportstatus
Enable | Disable
This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be supported
at the global level.
Type: Modify -- Optional
versionmask v1 | v2 |
v3
This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently
supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped
Type: Modify -- Optional
startupqryinterval
<startupqryinterval-val
>
This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries
sent on receiving Port Up topology change trigger.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xff
startupqrycount
<startupqrycount-val>
This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on
receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the
StartupQryInterval
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xff
lastmemberqrycount
<lastmemberqrycount-
val>
This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or
Group-and-Source-specific Queries sent before assuming there
are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xff
unsolicrprtinterval
<unsolicrprtinterval-val
>
This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited
membership reports of a group sent for robustness no of
times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is
enabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xff
Example:
$ get igmpsnoop cfg info
IDL series User Guide
450
Output:
Query Interval : 12 Query Response Interval : 10
StartUp Query Interval : 10 UnSolicRprtInterval : 10
Anxious Timer : 125 V1 Host Timer : 130
Last Member Query Interval : 125 Robustness Variable : 2
Igmp Snoop Status : Enable
Version Mask : v3
Report Suppression Status : Enable Proxy Report Status : Enable
StartUp QryCount : 2 Last Member QryCount : 100
Output field:
Field Description
Query Interval This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when
no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value
of this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are
received for it is approximately
(((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness) + Query Response Time
received in Last Query)
Query Response
Interval
This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled
in General query that will be initiated from Columbia
StartUp Query Interval This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries
sent on receiving Port Up topology change trigger.
UnSolicRprtInterval This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited
membership reports of a group sent for robustness no of
times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is
enabled.
Anxious Timer This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before
which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost
reports. The unit is seconds.
V1 Host Timer This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for
which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.
Last Member Query
Interval
This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is
the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries
IP DSLAM
451
sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. The
value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency
of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to
detect the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this
parameter is one-tenth of second.
Robustness Variable This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a
subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]
packet losses.
Igmp Snoop Status This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be
enabled in the system.
Version Mask This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently
supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped
Report Suppression
Status
Report Suppression is enabled or not.
Proxy Report Status This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be
supported at the global level.
StartUp QryCount This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on
receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the
StartupQryInterval
Last Member QryCount This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or
Group-and-Source-specific Queries sent before assuming there
are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.
5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands
5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val>] [srcipaddr
<srcipaddr-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val> | none]
IDL series User Guide
452
5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val> srcipaddr srcipaddr
vlanid <vlanid-val> | none [mcastvlanstag <mcastvlanstag-val> | none]
[mcastvlanctag <mcastvlanctag-val> | invlan | none] [portlist <portlist-val> |
none]
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val>] [srcipaddr
<srcipaddr-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val> | none]
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val> srcipaddr
<srcipaddr-val> vlanid <vlanid-val> | none [mcastvlanstag <mcastvlanstag-val> |
none] [mcastvlanctag <mcastvlanctag-val> | invlan | none] [portlist <portlist-val>
| none]
Parameters:
Name Description
grpipaddr
<grpipaddr-val>
This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address
for a multicast stream. The source address and destination
group address together define a multicast stream. In case of
value 0, this parameter is ignored while determining
Multicast Vlan
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IP DSLAM
453
srcipaddr
<srcipaddr-val>
This parameter specifies the source IP address of the
Multicast Server. The source address and destination group
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value
0, this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast
Vlan.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
vlanid <vlanid-val> |
none
This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet
received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP
packet was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is
ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 0
mcastvlanstag
<mcastvlanstag-val> |
none
This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used
in case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter
is not applicable.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 0
mcastvlanctag
<mcastvlanctag-val> |
invlan | none
This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used.
Two special values of this parameter are supported in
stacked mode: One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave
shall be forwarded to querier with the C tag with which it was
received from the subscriber port and the S tag specified in
multicast Vlan's definition One value (0) to signify that
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S tag
specified in multicast Vlan's definition and no C tag. Other
Value shall signify that, report/leave shall be forwarded to
querier with S and C tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 -4095
Additional Values: 0, 4097
IDL series User Guide
454
portlist <portlist-val> |
none
This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given
combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId)
maps to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr 224.0.0.7 srcipaddr 12.23.34.45 vlanid
6 mcastvlanstag 5 mcastvlanctag 5 portlist 5 6 10
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Grp IPAddress : 224.0.0.7
Src IPAddres : 12.23.34.45
VLAN Index : 6
McastVlan STag : 5 McastVlan CTag : 5
PortList : 5 6 10
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Grp IPAddress This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address for a
multicast stream. The source address and destination group
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0,
this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan
Src IPAddres This parameter specifies the source IP address of the Multicast
Server. The source address and destination group address
together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0, this
parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.
VLAN Index This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet
received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP packet
was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is ignored while
determining Multicast Vlan.
McastVlan STag This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used in
case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter is not
IP DSLAM
455
applicable.
McastVlan CTag This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used. Two
special values of this parameter are supported in stacked mode:
One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave shall be forwarded to
querier with the C tag with which it was received from the
subscriber port and the S tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition One value (0) to signify that report/leave shall be
forwarded to querier with S tag specified in multicast Vlan's
definition and no C tag. Other Value shall signify that,
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S and C tag
specified in multicast Vlan's definition.
PortList This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given
combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId) maps
to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)
5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop port info [portid <portid-val >]
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify igmpsnoop port info portid portid [ status Enable | Disable ]
[ leavemode Normal | Fast | FastNormal ] [ pktpriority <pktpriority-val> | none ]
[ maxgrpallowed <maxgrpallowed-val> ] [ querierstatus Enable | Disable ]
[ mcastvlanstatus Enable | Disable ] [ nomatchaction Drop |
Transparentlyforward | Learn ]
IDL series User Guide
456
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping
needs to be enabled or disabled.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
status Enable | Disable This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be
enabled on the port.
Type: Modify -- Optional
leavemode Normal | Fast
| FastNormal
This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message
processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered.
If the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from
that multicast group on Leave message reception and then the
Leave message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast'
for a port only if there is one host behind the port. This is
because if there are multiple hosts behind the port then it will
lead to traffic disruption for other hosts who might still be
listening to that multicast group. If the mode is set to
'FastNormal', the Leave message is forwarded and the Leave
processing is triggered immediately without waiting for any
trigger from the Querier. The 'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the
delay (equal to the time taken for Leave message to reach router
and Querier processing time for it and the time taken for Query
to reach IGMP Snoop module) in Leave processing.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: op module) in Leave processing.
pktpriority
<pktpriority-val> | none
This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the
Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need
to be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came
tagged, priority that came in the tagged frame will not be
changed. The configured priority will also be used for choice of
traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is
tagged . In case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC,
this will also be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent. There is an additional support of invalid value for egress
priority in IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be
forced on egress frame for this port.
IP DSLAM
457
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 7
maxgrpallowed
<maxgrpallowed-val>
This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that
can be received by this port
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 256
querierstatus Enable |
Disable
This parameter controls whether a port can become querier
Type: Modify -- Optional
mcastvlanstatus Enable |
Disable
This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a
port
Type: Modify -- Optional
nomatchaction Drop |
Transparentlyforward |
Learn
This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast
vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option
is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ get igmpsnoop port info portid 6
Output:
Port Index : 6
Port Igmp Snoop Status : Enable Leave Mode : Normal
IGMP PacketsPrio:2MaxGroupAllowed:2'
Querier Status : Enable McastVlan Status : Enable
No McastVlan Match Action : Learn
Output field:
Field Description
Port Index This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping
needs to be enabled or disabled.
Port Igmp Snoop
Status
This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be enabled
on the port.
Leave Mode This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message
processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered. If
the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from that
multicast group on Leave message reception and then the Leave
message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast' for a port
IDL series User Guide
458
only if there is one host behind the port. This is because if there
are multiple hosts behind the port then it will lead to traffic
disruption for other hosts who might still be listening to that
multicast group. If the mode is set to 'FastNormal', the Leave
message is forwarded and the Leave processing is triggered
immediately without waiting for any trigger from the Querier. The
'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the delay (equal to the time taken
for Leave message to reach router and Querier processing time
for it and the time taken for Query to reach IGMP Snoop module)
in Leave processing.
IGMP PacketsPrio' This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the
Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need to
be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came tagged,
priority that came in the tagged frame will not be changed. The
configured priority will also be used for choice of traffic
class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is tagged . In
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also
be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.
There is an additional support of invalid value for egress priority in
IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be forced on
egress frame for this port.
MaxGroupAllowed This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that can
be received by this port
Querier Status This parameter controls whether a port can become querier
McastVlan Status This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a
port
No McastVlan Match
Action
This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast
vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option
is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan
Caution:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.
IP DSLAM
459
5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]
[portid <portid-val>]
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val> portid
<portid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val >
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and
can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices
supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan
can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of
vlanid must be passed. For the case when the attribute
"McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked
Vlan Mode.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-4095
IDL series User Guide
460
Mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val >
A multicast MAC Address, learned through Igmp Snooping,
within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the entry,
for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of
accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF
Type: Reset － Optional
Get － Optional
Valid values: 00:30:4F:00:00:00 - 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF
portid <portid> A Bridge Port belonging to the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex) and Group
(igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the IgmpSnooping
statistics are desired.
Type: Reset --Optional
Get –Optional
Valid values: 1 - 386
Example:
$ get igmpsnoop port stats vlanid 6 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:0a:00:01 portid 6
Output:
VLAN Index : 6
Mcast Group Address : 00:30:4f:0a:00:01
Port Index : 6
Query Received : 100 Report Received : 200
Filter Mode : Include
Include SrcList : 10.12.14.16 12.10.45.76
Exclude SrcList : 10.12.34.56 34.54.76.87
Output field
Field Description
VLAN Index This parameter specifies the VlanId to uniquely identify the VlanId of the
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. In devices
supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a
multicast MAC address is shared across vlans. Therefore, VlanId is an
optional parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a
multicast MAC address. Hence VlanId is a mandatory parameter in all
the commands other than the get command. For no Vlan case, VlanId is
not required.
Mcast Group Address This parameter specifies a multicast MAC address, learnt through Igmp
Snooping, within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of
IP DSLAM
461
accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF.
Port Index This parameter specifies a bridge port belonging to the Vlan
(igmpVlanIndex) and Group (igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the
IgmpSnooping statistics are desired.
Query Received This parameter specifies thenumber of Igmp queries received on the
port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.
Report Received This parameter specifies thenumber of Membership reports received on
the port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.
Filter Mode This parameter specifies the current filter mode on a port for a given
group.
Include SrcList This parameter specifies the Include Source list, which is the list of
sources to be included in case of Include filter mode and the list of
conflicting sources in case of exclude mode of the port for a given group
Exclude SrcList This parameter specifies the Exclude Source list, which is the list of
sources to be excluded in case of exclude filter mode of the port for a
given group
Caution:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.
5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get igmpsnoop querier info [vlanid <vlanid-val >] [portid <portid-val>]
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid <vlanid-val > portid <portid-val >
IDL series User Guide
462
5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete igmpsnoop querier info vlanid <vlanid-val > portid <portid>
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val> The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as
zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan
for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a
multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter
and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case when the
attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN
with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1-4095
portid <portid-val> A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan (dot1qVlanIndex), on which the
Querier exists.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - 65535
Example:
$ create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid 6 portid 6
IP DSLAM
463
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLAN Index : 6 Port Index : 6
Querier Port Status : Mgmt
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
VLAN Index VlanId to uniquely identify the vlanid of the entry
for which the IgmpSnooping Querier is
configured/ learned. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the
information for a Querier port is shared across
vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own
information for a Querier port. Hence vlanid is a
mandatory parameter in all the commands other
than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not
required. This Feature is not supported for VLAN
with vlanid as 4097.
Port Index A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan
(dot1qVlanIndex), on which the Querier exists.
Querier Port Status Specifies whether Querier Port has been learned
dynamically or configured by the user.
Caution:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the
PPPoE interface.
IDL series User Guide
464
5.15 Interface Commands
5.15.1 Interface Commands
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats
Description:
Use this command to view statistics for one interface or all the interfaces.
Command Syntax:
get interface stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
Index of the interface having one to one mapping with
IfTable. Only Ethernet, EOA, Aggregator, HDLC,
PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM, ATM VC Aggregation
and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset
operation.
Type : Optional
Valid values: aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1,atm-*, eoa-*, dsl-*,
dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*, ehdlc-*, pppoe-*, pppr-*, vdsl-*,
ipoe-*, abond-* , vcaggr-*
Example:
$ get interface stats ifname eth-0
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface : eth-0 Description : eth-0
Type : ETHERNET Mtu : 1500
Bandwidth : 100000000 Phy Adddr :
00:BB:CC:DD:EE:F1
Last Change(sec) : 219 Unknown Prot Pkts : 0
Admin Status : Up Operational Status : Up
In Octets : 396312 Out Octets : 168929
In Discards : 0 Out Discards : 0
In Errors : 0 Out Errors : 0
In Ucast Pkts : 2291 Out Ucast Pkts : 2518
IP DSLAM
465
In Mcast Pkts : 428 Out Mcast Pkts : 0
In Bcast Pkts : 1456 Out Bcast Pkts : 0
LinkUpDnTrapEnable : Enable Promiscous Mode : True
Connector Present : True CounterDiscontTime : 0
HC In Octets : 0x000060c18
HC OutOctets : 0x0000293e1
Output Fields:
Field Description
Interface Index of the interface having one to one mapping with IfTable. Only Ethernet,
EOA , Aggregator, HDLC, PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM , ATM VC
Aggregation and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset operation.
Description This is general information about the interface
Type The type of interface, distinguished according the physical/link/network
protocol, immediately below the IP layer. It may be: ATM, ETHERNET, AAL5,
EOA, DSL, FAST, INTERLEAVED, AGGR. EHDLC, PPP, LOOPBACK,
IPOA, PPPR, PPPOE, SHDSL, ABOND, IPOE, VCAGGR, VDSL, USB. .
Mtu The size (in bytes) of the largest packet, which can be sent/received on this
interface in octets.
Bandwidth The current bandwidth of the interface, in bps.
Phy Addr Interface's address, at its protocol sublayer.
Admin Status This is the desired state of the interface. It may be: Up, Down.
Operational Status The current operational state of the interface. If ifAdminStatus is disable (2),
then ifOperStatus should be disable (2). If ifAdminStatus is changed to enable
(1), then ifOperStatus should change to enable (1), if the interface is ready to
transmit and receive network traffic. Interface will have the OperStatus value
as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the entry is 'config' and the interface is
waiting for a packet to be sensed to get activated.
Last Change Value of System UpTime (in seconds) at the time the interface entered its
current operational state.
Unknown Prot Pkts The number of packets received via the interface, which were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
In Octets The total number of octets received on the interface, including the framing
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC in
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.
Out Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC Out
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.
In Discards The number of inbound packets, which were discarded, though no errors
were detected.
IDL series User Guide
466
Out Discards The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded even though there
were no errors.
In Errors The number of inbound packets, which were not delivered to upper layers
because of errors.
Out Errors The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded because there were
errors.
In Ucast Pkts The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.
Out Ucast Pkts The total number of packets requested to be sent to unicast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.
HC In Octets The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifInOctets. Discontinuities in the
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,
and at other times, as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
Valid for eth-*.
HC OutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutOctets. Discontinuities in
the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management
system, and at other times, as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime. Valid for eth-*.
In Mcast Pkts The number of multicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.
Out Mcast Pkts The total number of packets requested to be sent to multicast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.
In Bcast Pkts The number of broadcast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.
Out Bcast Pkts The total number of packets requested to be sent to broadcast addresses, by
upper layer protocols.
LinkUpDnTrapEnable Indicates whether linkUp/ linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface.
Promiscous Mode This object has a value of false if this interface only accepts packets/frames
that are addressed to this station. This object has a value of true when the
station accepts all packets/frames transmitted on the media. The value true is
legal only for Ethernet interfaces. The value of PromiscuousMode does not
affect the reception of broadcast and multicast packets/frames by the
interface.
Connector Present This indicates whether the interface sublayer has a physical connector or not.
This is true only for physical Ethernet interfaces.
CounterDiscontTime The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occasion, at which any one or
more of this interface's counters suffered a discontinuity.
IP DSLAM
467
5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats
Description:
Use this command to reset the statistics of Ethernet, EoA, ATM, AAL5, DSL, DSLF,
DSLI, Aggr and EHDLC interfaces.
Command Syntax:
reset interface stats ifname<interface-name>
5.15.1.3 Get interface config
Description:
Use this command to view Interface Configuration.
Command Syntax:
get interface config ifname <interface-name>
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config
Description:
Use this command to modify interface configuration.
Command Syntax:
modify interface config ifname <interface-name> [trap enable|disable]
Parameters:
Name Description
Ifname
<interface-name>
Interface name, for which configuration is to be modified or viewed.
Type: Get -Optional Modify - Mandatory
Valid values: eth-*,atm-*,aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*,
ehdlc-*.
trap enable|disable
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for
this interface.
Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : enable or disable
Example:
$ get interface Config
IDL series User Guide
468
Output:
Verbose Mode On
IfName LinkUp/DnTrap
---------------------
aal5-0 Enable
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
IfName Interface name, for which configuration is to be viewed.
LinkUp/DnTrap Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps shall be
generated for this interface.
Caution:
z Reset of ATM VC interface stats also result in atm vc stat reset for the
interface and reset of Ethernet interface stats also result in dot3stats reset for the
ethernet interface.
References
z ATM Interface commands
z Ethernet commands
z EoA commands
z DSL commands
IP DSLAM
469
5.16 IP Commands
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands
5.16.1.1 Get arp
Description:
Use this command to display either the full ARP table or a single entry.
Command Syntax:
get arp [rid <rid-val>] [ip <ip-address>]
5.16.1.2 Create arp
Description:
Use this command to create a static entry in the ARP Table.
Command Syntax:
create arp [rid <rid-val>] ip <ip-address> macaddr <mac-address>
5.16.1.3 Delete arp
Description:
Use this command to delete an entry from the ARP table.
Command Syntax:
delete arp [rid <rid-val>] ip <ip-address>
Parameters:
Name Description
rid <rid-val> RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines
separate routes in context of itself. . If VlanId <X> and
RID <X> have been created and the routing database is
configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define
flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other
mode for the database is SRD (Shared Routing
IDL series User Guide
470
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and
all flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly
created and no more than one RID can be created in the
system in this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall
map to this RID for routing.
Type: Create － Optional
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
ip <ip-address> IP address corresponding to the media-dependent
physical address.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255
macaddr <mac-address> The media-dependent physical address
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0:0:0:0:0:1 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fe
Example:
$ create arp rid 1 ip 192.168.161.11 macaddr 00:11:22:33:44:55
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
RID : 1 Ifname : -
Type : static Mac Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55
Ip Address. : 192.168.161.11
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
RID RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the
VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent
Routing Database) where there are more than one RIDs in
IP DSLAM
471
the system and each RID defines separate routes in context
of itself. . If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and
the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID
<X> shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>.
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all
flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created
and no more than one RID can be created in the system in
this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID
for routing.
Ifname This specifies the physical interface for the media. It
indicates the interface over which the IP address for which
the IP Net to media mapping has been created can be
reached.
Ip Address. IP address corresponding to the media-dependent physical
address.
Type This defines the type of mapping in use. The value Invalid
has the effect that this entry is not used. It may be: Static,
Dynamic, Other
Mac Address The media-dependent physical address
Cautions:
z The specified interface should pre-exist. Please refer to the create ethernetintf
command.
References:
z delete arp command
z get arp command
z create ethernet intf command
z ip route related commands
5.16.2 IP Route Commands
5.16.2.1 Get ip route
Description:Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask <net-mask>
IDL series User Guide
472
5.16.2.2 Create up route
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask mask <net-mask>
gwyip <gwy-ip-address> [ifname <interface-name> | anywan] [proxyarpstatus
enable | disable]
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route
Description:
Use this command to create a routing table entry.
Command Syntax:
delete ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask mask <net-mask>
Parameters:
Name Description
rid <rid-val> RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the system.
Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related information
for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The
database can be of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and the routing
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other
mode for the database is SRD ( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
Type: Create － Optional
Delete － Optional
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
ip <dest-ip-address> Destination IP address of this route.
IP DSLAM
473
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0
mask<net-mask> Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*).
The mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The
creation of default route in upstream (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as
GS_CFG_ANY_WAN) can have the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.0
gwyip
<gwy-ip-address>
The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute
routes can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE
interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such
cases has to be same as the destination IP address
(gsvIpRouteDest) specified.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0
ifname
<interface-name> |
anywan
The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface
through which the next hop of this route should be reached. If
IpRouteRid is not 0, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command.
The ifname value can be either ANYWAN (0xffffffff) or ifindex of
any of the ipoe interface (ipoe-*).
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
proxyarpstatus enable
|disable
This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute
table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will
not be specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute
Table.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: disable
IDL series User Guide
474
Example:
$ create ip route rid 0 ip 192.168.161.12 mask 255.255.0.0 gwyip 172.26.6.100
ifname eth-0 routetype DIR ProxyArpStatus disable configstatus Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Rid : 0 Destination : 192.168.161.12
Net Mask : 255.255.0.0 Gateway : 172.26.6.100
Ifname : eth-0 Route Type : DIR
Route Orig : LCL Age : 0
ProxyArpStatus : disable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Rid RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database
contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that flow.
The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The database can be
of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate
routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been
created and the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes
in RID <X> shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>.
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all flows
map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more
than one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
Destination Destination IP address of this route.
Net Mask Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The
mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The creation of
default route in upstreamcan has the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.
Gateway The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute routes
IP DSLAM
475
can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE interfaces
(gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such cases has to be
same as the destination IP address (gsvIpRouteDest) specified.
Ifname The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface through
which the next hop of this route should be reached. If IpRouteRid is
not GS_CFG_MGMT_RID, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command. The
ifname value can be either ANYWAN or ifindex of any of the ipoe
interface (ipoe-*).
Route Type The type of route. It may be: dir (for Direct) or ind (for Indirect).
Route Orig The routing mechanism, through which this route was learned. It
may be: NET (for Network Management), LCL (for Local), RIP,
ICMP,DYI (Dynamic through Interface creation).
Age The number of seconds since this route was last updated or
otherwise determined to be correct.
ProxyArpStatus This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute
table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will not be
specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute Table.
References:
z get ip route command
z delete ip route command
z arp related commands.
5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ipoa intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
IDL series User Guide
476
Command Syntax:
create ipoa intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> [configstatus
Normal | Config] [enable|disable]
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ipoa intf ifname <interface-name>
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ipoa intf ifname <interface-name> [enable|disable]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The Ipoa Interface
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 -575
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the name of the lower AAL5 interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 574
configstatus Normal
|Config
This mode describes the configuration status for this
interface. If the "config" bit is set then this interface
shall be created but will have a dormant status. Only
after the receipt of an Ipoa packet from CPE side
this interface shall become active. The "In-Use" and
"Not-In-Use" bits are read only bits. The
"Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is dormant and
"In-Use" indicates that the entry is activated.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: NormalEntry
IP DSLAM
477
enable|disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable
Example:
$ create ipoa intf ifname Ipoa-0 lowif aal5-0 configstatus Normal enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname : Ipoa-0 Low IfName : aal5-0
Config Status : Normal
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The Ipoa Interface
Low IfName This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.
Config Status This mode describes the configuration status for
this interface. If the "config" bit is set then this
interface shall be created but will have a dormant
status. Only after the receipt of an Ipoa packet
from CPE side this interface shall become active.
The "In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read only
bits. The "Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is
dormant and "In-Use" indicates that the entry is
activated.
Admin Status Administrative status of the interface.
Oper Status Operational status of the interface.
IDL series User Guide
478
5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ipoe intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ipoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> macaddrprof
<macaddrprof-val> [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ipoe intf ifname <interface-name>
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ipoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> macaddrprof
<macaddrprof-val> [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]
IP DSLAM
479
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The IPOE Tunneling Interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0-575
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the ifindex
of the IPoA interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 － 575
macaddrprof
macaddrprof
Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to this
IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the
MacAddrProfileTable.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
ethpkttype Type2 |
802_3
This specifies the type of the Packet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Type2
inactivitytmrintrvl
inactivitytmrintrvl
This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which
interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data activity
on this interface during this interval. This is used only when
the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is
not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive interface is
a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is sensed on Atm
Vc Interface on which this interface is created
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0- 0xffffffff
Default value: 0
routingstatus enable
|disable
This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for this
interface. By default, for the downstream traffic destined for
IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on the downstream
route configured for the IPOE interface.If iproutingstatus is
disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used instead, for forwarding
the downstream traffic for this IPOE interface.
IDL series User Guide
480
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value:enable
enable|disable Administrative Status of the interface.
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable
Example:
$ create ipoe intf ifname Ipoe-0 lowif Ipoa-0 macaddrprof 1 ethpkttype Type2
inactivitytmrintrvl 10 routingstatus disable cfgmode Auto enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname : Ipoe-0 Low If Name : Ipoa-0
Mac Addr Prof : 1 Eth Pkt Type : Type2
InActivity Tmr Interval : 10
RoutingStatus : disable
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The IPOE Tunneling Interface.
Low If Name This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the
ifindex of the IPoA interface.
Mac Addr Prof Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to
this IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the
MacAddrProfileTable.
Eth Pkt Type This specifies the type of the Packet.
InActivity Tmr Interval This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which
interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer
is not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive
interface is a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is
sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which this interface is
created
IP DSLAM
481
RoutingStatus This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for
this interface. By default, for the downstream traffic
destined for IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on
the downstream route configured for the IPOE interface.If
iproutingstatus is disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used
instead, for forwarding the downstream traffic for this IPOE
interface.
Admin Status Administrative status of the interface.
Oper Status Operational status of the interface.
5.16.5 Rid static Commands
5.16.5.1 Create rid static
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rid static rid <rid-val>
5.16.5.2 Delete rid static
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete rid static rid <rid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
rid <rid-val> RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines
separate routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID
<X> have been created and the routing database is
configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define
IDL series User Guide
482
flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and
all flows map to this RID.
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
one RID can be created in the system in this mode.
Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID for
routing. A value of RID as 0 has a special meaning. RID
value 0 refers to management RID and all entries
created in context of RID value 0 shall be for routes
related to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual Vlan while
in Native Vlan mode this is normal Vlan(C-VLAN).
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
Example:
$ create rid static rid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
RID : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
RID RID refers to the Routing Information Database.
This database contains information about the
routes in the system. Each RID identifies a flow
and defines route related information for that
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN
Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD
(Independent Routing Database) where there are
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID
IP DSLAM
483
defines separate routes in context of itself. . If
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and
the routing database is configured for IRD, than
routes in RID <X> shall define flow for packets
coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other mode for the
database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all
flows map to this RID.
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more
than one RID can be created in the system in this
mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to
this RID for routing. A value of RID as 0 has a
special meaning. RID value 0 refers to
management RID and all entries created in
context of RID value 0 shall be for routes related
to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual
Vlan while in Native Vlan mode this is normal
Vlan(C-VLAN).
IDL series User Guide
484
5.17 MacProfile Commands
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get macprofile global [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create macprofile global profileid <profileid-val>macaddr <macaddr-val>
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get macprofile global profileid <profileid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
macaddr <macaddr-val> MAC Address for the profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Example:
$ create macprofile global profileid 3 macaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE
IP DSLAM
485
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id MAC Address
-----------------------------------------------------------
3 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
MAC Address MAC Address for the profile.
5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create resvdmac profile info profileid <profileid-val>
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
IDL series User Guide
486
Command Syntax:
delete resvdmac profile info profileid <profileid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
Example:
$ create resvdmac profile info profileid 4
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile ID : 4
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile param [profileid <profileid-val>] [mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>]
IP DSLAM
487
5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create resvdmac profile param profileid <profileid-val>mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>action Drop | TransformedBcast | Participate
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get resvdmac profile param profileid <profileid-val> mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
mcastaddr
<mcastaddr-val>
This is Reserved Multicast address. This multicast address can
only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx, where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
action Drop |
TransformedBcast |
Participate
This is the action corresponding to reserved multicast address.
'Drop' action leads to dropping of corresponding frames.
'TransformedBcast' leads to sending of the frames broadcasted
over all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging restrictions,
filtering, transformations shall apply). 'Participate' action leads to
frame coming to Control Plane and it shall be given to the registered
protocol module.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
IDL series User Guide
488
Example:
$ create resvdmac profile param Profileid 4 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:00:00:00 action
Drop
Output
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile ID : 4 Multicast address : 00:30:4f:00:00:00
Action : Drop
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.
Multicast address This is Reserved Multicast address. This
multicast address can only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx,
where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.
Action This is the action corresponding to reserved
multicast address. 'Drop' action leads to dropping
of corresponding frames. 'TransformedBcast'
leads to sending of the frames broadcasted over
all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging
restrictions, filtering, transformations shall apply).
'Participate' action leads to frame coming to
Control Plane and it shall be given to the
registered protocol module.
IP DSLAM
489
5.18 Management Traffic Commands
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt group info [groupid <groupid-val>] [ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val>]
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt group info groupid <groupid-val>ctlflowid
<ctlflowid-val>instanceid <instanceid-val>]
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt group info groupid <groupid-val>ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
groupid <groupid-val> The control packet group identifier
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 50
ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val> The Control packet flow id.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0x4
IDL series User Guide
490
instanceid
<instanceid-val>
The Control packet instance Id.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 26
Example:
$ create ctlpkt group info groupid 1 ctlflowid 1 instanceid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Group Id : 1
Control Flow Id : 1 Instance Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Group Id The control packet group identifier
Control Flow Id The Control packet flow id.
Instance Id The Control packet instance Id.
References:
z See Control Packet Instance Group related commands
5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt instance info [instanceid <instanceid-val>]
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to create.
IP DSLAM
491
Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>profileid <profileid-val>
classid <classid-val>
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>profileid <profileid-val>
classid <classid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
instanceid
<instanceid-val>
The control packets instance id.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 26
profileid <profileid-val> This field identifies the control packet profile whose
instance is being created.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
classid <classid-val> This field specifies the classid of the Instance. Class id
shall be treated as the service priority of this instance.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0x4
IDL series User Guide
492
Example:
$ create ctlpkt instance info instanceid 1 profileid 1 classid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Instance Id : 1
Profile Id : 1 Class Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Instance Id The control packets instance id.
Profile Id This field identifies the control packet profile
whose instance is being created.
Class Id This field specifies the classid of the Instance.
Class id shall be treated as the service priority of
this instance.
References:
z see control packet profile instance related commands
5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ctlpkt profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
IP DSLAM
493
Command Syntax:
create ctlpkt profile info profileid <profileid-val>maxctlpkts <maxctlpkts-val>
thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ctlpkt profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ctlpkt profile info profileid <profileid-val> [maxctlpkts <maxctlpkts-val>]
[thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> The control packet's profile id.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
maxctlpkts
<maxctlpkts-val>
This specifies the maximum control packets that can be
pending for an instance of this profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 63
thrshld1 <thrshld1-val> This specifies the number of outstanding control packets for
each instance, when control plane is congested.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 -63
IDL series User Guide
494
Example:
$ create ctlpkt profile info profileid 1 maxctlpkts 32 thrshld1 32
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1
Max Ctl Pkts : 32 Threshold1 : 32
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id The control packet's profile id.
Max Ctl Pkts This specifies the maximum control packets that
can be pending for an instance of this profile.
Threshold1 This specifies the number of outstanding control
packets for each instance, when control plane is
congested.
References:
z See control packet profiles related commands.
IP DSLAM
495
5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global acprofile [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe global acprofile profileid <profileid-val> acname <acname-val>
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe global acprofile profileid <profileid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid profileid Profile Id of the AC Name configured.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
acname acname AC Name for the Session, based on which, the
AC is selected.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Example:
$ create pppoe global acprofile profileid 2 acname ABCServer
IDL series User Guide
496
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id AC Name
------------------------------------------------------------
2 ABCServer
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id Profile Id of the AC Name configured.
AC Name AC Name for the Session, based on which, the
AC is selected.
References:
z PPPoE global ACprofile related commands.
5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global config
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppoe global config [ padimaxnumretries <padimaxnumretries-val> ]
[padrmaxnumretries <padrmaxnumretries-val> ] [ paditxintrvl <paditxintrvl-val> ]
[ padrtxintrvl<padrtxintrvl-val> ] [ wandntmrintrvl <wandntmrintrvl-val> ]
[ inactivitytmrintrvl <inactivitytmrintrvl-val> ] [ discmaxnumretries
<discmaxnumretries-val> ]
IP DSLAM
497
Parameters:
Name Description
padimaxnumretries
<padimaxnumretries-val>
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a
PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.
Type: Modify －Optional
Valid values: 1 -10
padrmaxnumretries
<padrmaxnumretries
val>
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a
PADR for establishing a PPPoE Session.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -10
paditxintrvl <paditxintrvl
-val>
The time, n seconds, between PADI retries from the
PPPoE Client.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -60
padrtxintrvl
<padrtxintrvl-val>
The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from the
PPPoE Client.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -60
wandntmrintrvl
<wandntmrintrvl-val>
The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down
Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes down,
and if the timer times out, the session is teared down.
A value of zero for this timer means it is not running.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
inactivitytmrintrvl
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>
The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity Timer.
The session can remain inactive for atmost these n
seconds after which it is teared down. A value of zero
means the timer is not running.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
discmaxnumretries
<discmaxnumretries-val>
The maximum number of times the PPPoE client does
a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE session. A
trap is given to GAG on reaching this number.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -5
Example:
$ get pppoe global Config
IDL series User Guide
498
Output:
Max Total Sessions : 10 PADI Max Num Retries : 10
PADR Max Num Retries : 10 PADI Tx Interval : 5
PADR Tx Interval : 5 WAN Dn Tmr Interval : 10
InActivity Tmr Interval : 20 DISC Max Num Retries : 3
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Max Total Sessions Maximum number of PPPoE sessions supported.
PADI Max Num
Retries
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client
sends a PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.
PADR Max Num
Retries
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client
sends a PADR for establishing a PPPoE Session.
PADI Tx Interval The time, n seconds, between PADI retries from
the PPPoE Client.
PADR Tx Interval The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from
the PPPoE Client.
WAN Dn Tmr Interval The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down
Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes
down, and if the timer times out, the session is
teared down. A value of zero for this timer means it
is not running.
InActivity Tmr Interval The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity
Timer. The session can remain inactive for atmost
these n seconds after which it is teared down. A
value of zero means the timer is not running.
DISC Max Num
Retries
The maximum number of times the PPPoE client
does a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE
session. A trap is given to GAG on reaching this
number.
References:
z PPPoE global config related commands.
IP DSLAM
499
5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global serviceprofile [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid <profileid-val> servicename
<servicename-val>
5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe global serviceprofile profileid <profileid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Profile Id of the Service Name configured.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 1 -4
servicename
<servicename-val>
Service Name for the Session, based on which,
the AC is selected.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Example:
$ create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid 1 servicename any
IDL series User Guide
500
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id Service Name
------------------------------------------------------------
1 any
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Profile Id Profile Id of the Service Name configured.
Service Name Service Name for the Session, based on which,
the AC is selected.
References:
z PPPoE global serviceprofile related commands.
5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe global stats
Parameters:
none
Example:
$ get pppoe global stats
Output:
Active Sessions : 10 Total Sessions : 12
Peak Active Sessions : 12 Num of PADI Tx : 20
Num of PADI Timeouts : 3 Num of PADR Tx : 15
Num of PADR Timeouts : 2 Num of PADT Tx : 2
Num of PADT Rx : 3 Num of PADT Rejected : 1
IP DSLAM
501
Num of PADO Rx : 2 Num of PADO Rejected : 1
Num of PADS Rx : 12 Num of PADS Rejected : 0
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx : 2
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Active Sessions The number of active pppoe sessions in the
system.
Total Sessions The total number of PPPoE sessions.
Peak Active Sessions Peak number of active PPPoE sessions.
Num of PADI Tx The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.
Num of PADI Timeouts The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a
response to a PADI.
Num of PADR Tx The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.
Num of PADR Timeouts The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a
response to a PADR.
Num of PADT Tx The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.
Num of PADT Rx The number of PPPoE PADT received.
Num of PADT Rejected The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.
Num of PADO Rx The number of PPPoE PADO received.
Num of PADO Rejected The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.
Num of PADS Rx The number of PPPoE PADS received.
Num of PADS Rejected The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.
Num of Malformed Pkts
Rx
The number of PPPoE malformed packets
received.
References:
z PPPoE global stats related commands.
5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe intf [ifname <interface-name>]
IDL series User Guide
502
5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif –val>[ wanbridgeport
<wanbridgepor-val>t ] [sessionid <sessionid-val> ] [ acmacaddr
<acmacaddr-val> ] macaddrprof <macaddrprof-val> [ servicenameprof
<servicenameprof-val> | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof <acnameprof-val> |
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]
[ enable | disable ]
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppoe intf ifname <interface-name>
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif –val>[ wanbridgeport
<wanbridgepor-val>t ] [sessionid <sessionid-val> ] [ acmacaddr
<acmacaddr-val> ] macaddrprof <macaddrprof-val> [ servicenameprof
<servicenameprof-val> | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof <acnameprof-val> |
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]
[ enable | disable ]
Parameters:
Name Description
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the ifindex of the
PPP relay interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 254
wanbridgeport
<wanbridgeport-val>
WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN side port is
acceptable. Currently, only value zero is supported.
IP DSLAM
503
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 0x0
sessionid
<sessionid-val>
Session Id for the session given only in case a static session is being
created.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 0xffff
Default value: 0x0
acmacaddr
<acmacaddr-val>
MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static session is
being created.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00
macaddrprof
<macaddrprof-val>
Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same is created
using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
servicenameprof
<servicenameprof-val>
| any |anyconfigured
Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on which the
AC is selected.The Profile for the same is created using the
PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific
service is needed to select an AC. A value of "anyconfigured"means
any configured service name profile can be used for selecting an AC.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: , 0-0xffffffff
Default value: 0
acnameprof
<acnameprof-val> |any
| anyconfigured
Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on which the AC
is selected. The Profile for the same is created using the
PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific AC is
needed for establishing a session on the WAN side. A value of
"anyconfigured"means any configured AC name profile can be used
for selecting an AC.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0-0xffffffff
Default value: 0
ethpkttype Type2 |
802_3
This specifies the type of the packet.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
IDL series User Guide
504
Default value: Type2
nature dynamic | static Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The session is
assumed to be in established state when the interface is static in
nature.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: dynamic
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create pppoe intf ifname pppoe-0 lowif ppp-0 wanbridgeport 1 sessionid 10
acmacaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE macaddrprof 1 servicenameprof 2 acnameprof 4
ethpkttype Type2 nature dynamic 0x1 enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname : pppoe-0 Low If Name : ppp-0
WAN Bridge Port : 1 Session Id : 10
AC Mac Addr : 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE Mac Addr Prof : 1
Service Name Profile : 2
AC Name Prof : 4
Eth Pkt Type : Type2 Nature : dynamic
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The PPPoE Interface.
Low If Name This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the
ifindex of the PPP relay interface.
WAN Bridge Port WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN
side port is acceptable. Currently, only value zero is
supported.
IP DSLAM
505
Session Id Session Id for the session given only in case a static
session is being created.
AC Mac Addr MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static
session is being created.
Mac Addr Prof Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same
is created using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.
Service Name Profile Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on
which the AC is selected.The Profile for the same is
created using the PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of
"any" means no specific service is needed to select an AC.
A value of "anyconfigured"means any configured service
name profile can be used for selecting an AC.
AC Name Prof Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on
which the AC is selected. The Profile for the same is
created using the PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any"
means no specific AC is needed for establishing a session
on the WAN side. A value of "anyconfigured"means any
configured AC name profile can be used for selecting an
AC.
Eth Pkt Type This specifies the type of the packet.
Nature Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The
session is assumed to be in established state when the
interface is static in nature.
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up
or down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or
Down.
References:
z PPPoE session config related commands.
IDL series User Guide
506
5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppoe session stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> The PPPoE interface.
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 254
Example:
$ get pppoe session stats ifname pppoe-0
Output:
Ifname : pppoe-0
Session Id : 10 Peer Mac Addr : 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE
Num of PADI Tx : 4 Num of PADI Timeouts : 2
Num of PADR Tx : 1 Num of PADR Timeouts : 0
Num of PADT Tx : 1 Num of PADT Rx : 1
Num of PADT Rejected : 1 Num of PADO Rx : 2
Num of PADO Rejected : 0 Num of Multi PADO Rx : 1
Num of PADS Rx : 1 Num of PADS Rejected : 0
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx : 5 Num of Generic Err Rx : 1
Version : 1 Type : 1
Connect Time : Mon Apr 18 14:00:59 2004
Duration (s) : 100 AC Cookie :
A1659E40766EDBD7214E18095A5E500C
Host Unique : 0000003E State : sessionStage
Service Name : dvt AC Name : REDBACK
IP DSLAM
507
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The PPPoE interface.
Session Id Session Id.
Peer Mac Addr MAC address of the remote AC.
Num of PADI Tx The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.
Num of PADI Timeouts The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to
a PADI.
Num of PADR Tx The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.
Num of PADR Timeouts The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to
a PADR.
Num of PADT Tx The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.
Num of PADT Rx The number of PPPoE PADT received.
Num of PADT Rejected The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.
Num of PADO Rx The number of PPPoE PADO received.
Num of PADO Rejected The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.
Num of Multi PADO Rx Number of times more than 1 PPPoE PADO was
received.
Num of PADS Rx The number of PPPoE PADS received.
Num of PADS Rejected The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.
Num of Generic Err Rx Number of generic errors received.
Version Version as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.
Type Type as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.
Connect Time Time when the session was established.
Duration (s) Number of seconds since the session was established.
AC Cookie Binary sequence representing the AC cookie given in
negotiations.
Host Unique Binary sequence representing the host unique tag value.
State State that session is in.
Service Name Service name with which the session came up.
AC Name AC name with which the session came up.
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx The number of PPPoE malformed packets received.
References:
z PPPoE session stats related commands.
IDL series User Guide
508
5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pppr intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create pppr intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [ maxpdu
<maxpdu-val> ] [ ppprackto <ppprackto-val>] [ lowiftoggletimerto
<lowiftoggletimerto-val> ] [ nature dynamic | static ] [configstatus Normal |
Config ] [ pktpriority <pktpriority-val> ] [enable | disable]
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pppr intf ifname <interface-name>
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pppr intf ifname <interface-name> [ppprackto <ppprackto-val>]
lowiftoggletimerto <lowiftoggletimerto-val>] [nature dynamic | static] [pktpriority
<pktpriority-val>] [enable | disable]
IP DSLAM
509
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
The PPPR interface.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 254
lowif <lowif-val> This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.
Type: Create －Mandatory
Valid values: 0 - 574
maxpdu <maxpdu-val> This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR
interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 1492
Default value: 1492
ppprackto
<ppprackto-val>
Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,
after sending a terminate request.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -10
Default value: 5
lowiftoggletimerto
<lowiftoggletimerto-val>
Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up
without tearing down the pppr session.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 10
Default value: 5
nature dynamic |
static
Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in
nature.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: Dynamic
configstatus Normal
|Config
This mode describes the configuration status for
the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active.
Type: Create － Optional
IDL series User Guide
510
Modify － Optional
Default value: Normal
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface
Type: Optional
Valid values: enable or disable
Default Value: enable
pktpriority
<pktpriority-val>
Priority to be set in tagged PPPOE frames or
PPP packets sent over this port from Control
Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 – 7
Default value: 0
Example:
$ create pppr intf ifname pppr-0 lowif aal5-0 maxPdu 1484 ppprAckTO 10
lowifToggleTimerTO 10 nature dynamic configstatus Normal
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname : pppr-0 Low IfName : aal5-0
Max PDU Size : 1484 Ter Ack TimeOut : 10
Lowif Toggle TimeOut : 10
Nature : dynamic Config Status : Normal
Operational Status : up Admin Status : up
PPPOA PacketsPrio:2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
511
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname The PPPR interface.
Low IfName This specifies the name of the lower AAL5
interface.
Max PDU Size This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR
interface.
Ter Ack TimeOut Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,
after sending a terminate request.
Lowif Toggle TimeOut Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up
without tearing down the pppr session.
Nature Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in
nature.
Config Status This mode describes the configuration status for
the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The
"In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read-only bits.
The "Not-In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is
dormant and "In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is
activated.
Operational Status The actual/current state of the interface. It may be
either Up or Down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Up or Down.
PPPOA PacketsPrio Priority to be set in tagged PPPOE frames or PPP
packets sent over this port from Control
Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to
be sent.
IDL series User Guide
512
5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats
Description:
Use this command to get t.
Command Syntax:
get dra global stats
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset dra global stats
Parameter:
None
Example:
$ get dra global stats
Output:
DRA Disc Count : 40 DRA Req Count : 40
DRA Decline Count : 30 DRA Inform Count : 20
DRA Offer Count : 10 DRA Ack Count : 10
DRA Nack Count : 50
IP DSLAM
513
Output field:
Field Description
DRA Disc Count Number of DHCP discovery packets received
DRA Req Count Number of DHCP request packets received
DRA Decline Count Number of DHCP decline packets received
DRA Inform Count Number of DHCP inform packets received
DRA Offer Count Number of DHCP offer packets received
DRA Ack Count Number of DHCP Ack packets received
DRA Nack Count Number of DHCP Nack packets received
References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands
5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra instance entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> profileid
<profileid-val> [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None ] [ acival <acival-val> ]
[ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ] [ portno
<portno-val> ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]
IDL series User Guide
514
5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to Delete.
Command Syntax:
delete dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> [ profileid
<profileid-val> ] [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None | None ] [ acival
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ]
[ portno <portno-val> ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]
Parameters
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Bridge Port Identifier
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan <vlan-val> VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
IP DSLAM
515
profileid <profileid-val> DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
status disable | client |
server
This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent
per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we
dont get portid from agent circuit id.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: disable
op82 disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists
This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on
receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: AddAlways
configsuboption aci |
Portid | None | None
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit Id
and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: None
acival <acival-val> This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
raival <raival-val> This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated
access loop logical port on the Columbia.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
IDL series User Guide
516
syncratefields
ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm |
MinDataRateupstrm |
MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm |
AttainableDataRatednstrm |
MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm |
MinLpDataRateupstrm |
MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm |
ActualDelayupstrm |
MaxDelaydnstrm |
ActualDelaydnstrm | None |
None
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
op82fromclientact drop |
forward
This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP
message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded
then forward should be set.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: drop
learning disable | enable This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on this
port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses assigned
towards this port using upstream/downstream packets received
on this port.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
portno <portno-val> This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
IP DSLAM
517
draaddop82tounicast
disable | enable
This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP
Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create dra instance entry portid 1 vlan 5 profileid 1 status client op82 AddAlways
configsuboption aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100,
vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields ActualDelaydnstrm
op82fromclientact drop learning enable portno 10 draaddop82tounicast enable
Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id : 1 VLAN : 5
Profile Id : 1 DRA status : client
Option82 : AddAlways
Config Sub-Option : aci
Agent Circuit Id : "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi =
100, vci = 33)"
Remote Agent Id : "conexant noida"
SyncRateInfoField : ActualDelaydnstrm
DRA Act For Op82 From Client : drop
DRA learning : enable Port No : 10
VCI : 33 VPI : 100
L2 type : Eth Encap Type : Llcmux
DRA Add Op82 To Unicast : enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Port Id Bridge Port Identifier
VLAN VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Profile Id DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance
IDL series User Guide
518
DRA status This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent
per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we
dont get portid from agent circuit id.
Option82 This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on
receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.
Config Sub-Option This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit
Id and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.
Agent Circuit Id This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id
Remote Agent Id This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated
access loop logical port on the Columbia.
SyncRateInfoField This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.
DRA Act For Op82
From Client
This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP
message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded
then forward should be set.
DRA learning This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on
this port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses
assigned towards this port using upstream/downstream
packets received on this port.
Port No This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
VCI VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for
this instance is created
VPI VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for
IP DSLAM
519
this instance is created
L2 type This Parameter represents the L2 type used
Encap Type This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the aal5 VC
corresponding the bridge port for which this instance is created
DRA Add Op82 To
Unicast
This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP
Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.
References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands
5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
get dra stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Bridge port identifier
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan <vlan-val> VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
IDL series User Guide
520
Example:
$ get dra stats entry portid 1 vlan 1
Output:
Port Id : 1 VLAN : 1
Dhcp Pkt Received : 40 Dhcp Pkt Sent : 90
Dhcp Pkt Discarded : 40
Output field:
Field Description
Port Id Bridge port identifier
VLAN VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN
Dhcp Pkt Received Number of DHCP packets received for this instance
Dhcp Pkt Sent Number of DHCP packets sent for this instance
Dhcp Pkt Discarded Number of DHCP packets discarded for this instance
References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands
5.20.4 Dra global config Commands
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get dra global config
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify dra global config [status Enable | Disable]
IP DSLAM
521
Parameters:
Name Description
status Enable | Disable Global status of DRA
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ get dra global Config
Output:
DRA global Status
------------------------------------------------------------
Enable
Output field:
Field Description
DRA global Status Global status of DRA
References:
DHCP Relay Agent commands
5.20.5 la profile entry Commands
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get ia profile entry [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create ia profile entry profileid <profileid-val> [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival
<anival-val> ] [ aciprefixstr <aciprefixstr-val> ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None ]
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None ] [ chassisval
IDL series User Guide
522
chassisval ] [ rackval <rackval-val> ] [ frameval <frameval-val> ] [ slotval
<slotval-val> ] [ subslotval <subslotval-val> ]
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete ia profile entry [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify ia profile entry profileid <profileid-val> [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival
<anival-val> ] [ aciprefixstr <aciprefixstr-val> ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None | None ]
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None | None ] [ chassisval
<chassisval-val> ] [ rackval <rackval-val> ] [ frameval <frameval-val> ] [ slotval
<slotval-val> ] [ subslotval <subslotval-val> ]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid
<profileid-val>
Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be applied on
multiple PIA or DRA instances.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
anitype auto | config This field specifies whether the Access node Identifier should be
automatically derived or is configured by the user. If its value is
auto, the ANI is derived from MAC address of access node.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: auto
IP DSLAM
523
anival <anival-val> This is used to configure access node identifier. This field will be
used only when value of gsvIaAniType is config.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
aciprefixstr
<aciprefixstr-val>
This is used to configure user defined string to be concatenated as
a part of flexible syntax in Agent Circuit Id. It is a string of
characters with spaces and special characters.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
acifieldlist AniVal |
Chassis | Rack | Frame
| Slot | SubSlot |
L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci
| VlanTag | None |
None
This field represents list of parameters which will take part in auto
generation of Agent Circuit Id.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
suboption Aci | Rai |
EncapType |
AccessLoopChar |
None | None
This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be added to VSA
tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in case of DRA. The options
which can be added include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,
EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent Circuit id
identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id specifies the subscriber
information, EncapType and AccessLoopChar identify with the
encapsulation type and access loop characterstics respectively.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
chassisval
<chassisval-val>
Chasis number of access node
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
rackval <rackval-val> Rack no of access node
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
frameval
<frameval-val>
Frame number of access node.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
IDL series User Guide
524
slotval <slotval-val> Slot number of access node
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
subslotval
<subslotval-val>
Sub-slot number of access node.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
Example:
$ create ia profile entry profileid 1 anitype auto anival 00aabbccddff aciprefixstr
"Conexant Noida" acifieldlist port vpi vci suboption Aci chassisval 1 rackval 1
frameval 1 slotval 3 subslotval 1Output
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1 ANI Type : auto
ANI value : 00aabbccddff
Aci Prefix Str : "Conexant Noida"
ACI Field List : port vpi vci
Sub Option : Aci
Chassis : 1 Rack : 1
Frame : 1 Slot : 3
Sub Slot : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Id Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be
applied on multiple PIA or DRA instances.
ANI Type This field specifies whether the Access node
Identifier should be automatically derived or is
configured by the user. If its value is auto, the ANI is
derived from MAC address of access node.
ANI value This is used to configure access node identifier. This
field will be used only when value of gsvIaAniType is
IP DSLAM
525
config.
Aci Prefix Str This is used to configure user defined string to be
concatenated as a part of flexible syntax in Agent
Circuit Id. It is a string of characters with spaces and
special characters.
ACI Field List This field represents list of parameters which will
take part in auto generation of Agent Circuit Id.
Sub Option This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be
added to VSA tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in
case of DRA. The options which can be added
include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,
EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent
Circuit id identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id
specifies the subscriber information, EncapType and
AccessLoopChar identify with the encapsulation
type and access loop characterstics respectively.
Chassis Chasis number of access node
Rack Rack no of access node
Frame Frame number of access node.
Slot Slot number of access node
Sub Slot Sub-slot number of access node.
References:
Intermediate Agent commands
5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia instance entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to create.
IDL series User Guide
526
Command Syntax:
create pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> profileid
<profileid-val> [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None ] [ acival
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable | disable ]
[ portno <portno-val> ]
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> [ profileid
<profileid-val> ] [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None | None ] [ acival
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable |
disable ] [ portno <portno-val> ]
IP DSLAM
527
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Bridge Port Identifier
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
vlan <vlan-val> VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual
VLAN
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
profileid
<profileid-val>
PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA
Instance
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
status enable | disable Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent for
this instance
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: disable
vsatag disable |
AddAlways |
AddIfNotExists
This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on
receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If
disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets. If
AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: AddAlways
configsuboptionbitm
ask aci | PortId | None |
None
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this
bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in
this MO.
Type: Create -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
528
Modify -- Optional
Default value: None
acival <acival-val> This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance. If
ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then this
parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
raival <raival-val> This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this instance.
This parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the
associated access loop logical port on Columbia.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
syncratefields
ActualDataRateupstrm
|
ActualDataRatednstrm
| MinDataRateupstrm |
MinDataRatednstrm |
AttainableDataRateups
trm |
AttainableDataRatedns
trm |
MaxDataRateupstrm |
MaxDataRatednstrm |
MinLpDataRateupstrm
|
MinLpDataRatednstrm
| MaxDelayupstrm |
ActualDelayupstrm |
MaxDelaydnstrm |
ActualDelaydnstrm |
None | None
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
iwftagfromclientact
drop | forward
This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving
PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default action
is to drop the packet silently.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: drop
IP DSLAM
529
insertiwfsubop enable
| disable
This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to
Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received for
this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE interface.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
portno <portno-val> This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered
only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: \0
Example:
$ create pia instance entry portid 1 vlan 1 profileid 1 status enable vsatag
AddAlways configsuboptionbitmask aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3,
port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields
ActualDelaydnstrm iwftagfromclientact drop insertiwfsubop enable portno 10
Auto Output
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id : 1 VLAN : 1
Profile Id : 1 PIA status : enable
PIAVsaOption : AddAlways
Config Sub Options Bitmask : aci
Agent Circuit Id : "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)"
Remote Agent Id : "conexant noida"
SyncRateInfoField Bitmask : ActualDelaydnstrm
Act for IWFTag From Client : drop
Insert Iwf Subop : enable
Port No : 10
VCI : 33 VPI : 100
L2 type : Eth
Encap Type : Llcmux
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
530
Output field:
Field Description
Port Id Bridge Port Identifier
VLAN VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual
VLAN
Profile Id PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA
Instance
PIA status Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent
for this instance
PIAVsaOption This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on
receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If
disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets.
If AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.
Config Sub Options
Bitmask
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this
bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in
this MO.
Agent Circuit Id This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance.
If ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then
this parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit
Id
Remote Agent Id This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this
instance. This parameter uniquely identifies the
subscriber on the associated access loop logical port on
Columbia.
SyncRateInfoField
Bitmask
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop
characteristic suboption.
Act for IWFTag From
Client
This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving
PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default
action is to drop the packet silently.
Insert Iwf Subop This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to
Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received
for this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE
interface.
Port No This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is
IP DSLAM
531
considered only when the bitmask for portid is set in
ConfigSubOptionBitmask
VCI VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge
port for this instance is created
VPI VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge
port for this instance is created
L2 type This Parameter specifies the L2 type used
Encap Type This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the
aal5 VC corresponding the bridge port for which this
instance is created
References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands
5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]
5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset pia stats entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Bridge port Identifier
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
IDL series User Guide
532
vlan <vlan-val> VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is
virtual VLAN
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
Additional Values: 4097
Example:
$ get pia stats entry portid 1 vlan 1
Output:
Port Id : 1 VLAN : 1
Padi Received : 10 Padi Discarded : 4354
Padr Received : 4354 Padr Discarded : 4354
Output field:
Field Description
Port Id Bridge port Identifier
VLAN VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is
virtual VLAN
Padi Received Number of PADI received for this instance
Padi Discarded Number of PADI discarded for this instance
Padr Received Number of PADR received for this instance
Padr Discarded Number of PADR packets discarded for this
instance
References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands
5.20.8 Pia global config Commands
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get pia global config
IP DSLAM
533
5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify pia global config [status Enable | Disable]
Parameters:
Name Description
status Enable | Disable Global status of PIA
Type: Modify -- Optional
Example:
$ get pia global Config
Output:
PIA global Status : Enable
Output field:
Field Description
PIA global Status Global status of PIA
References:
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands
IDL series User Guide
534
5.21 QoS Commands
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands
5.21.1.1 Get irl map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl map [ifname <interface-name>]
5.21.1.2 Create irl map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create irl map ifname < interface-name > profilename <profile-name>
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete irl map ifname < interface-name >
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname < interface-name
>
Interface Name whose IRL mapping information is to be
configured.
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*
Type : Create Mandatory
Delete Mandatory
Get --Optional
Valid values: ND - ND
profilename
<profile-name>
Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be associated with the
interface. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_')
and any combination of printable characters excluding ';'
Type: Create Mandatory
IP DSLAM
535
Example:
$ create irl map ifname aal5-0 profilename gold
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Interface Profile Name
------------------------------------------------------------
aal5-0 gold
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Interface Interface Name whose IRL mapping information
is to be configured. Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*
Profile Name Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be
associated with the interface. String of up to 64
characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any
combination of printable characters excluding ';'
5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl profile [profilename <profile-name>]
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile
Description:
Use this command to create.
IDL series User Guide
536
Command Syntax:
create irl profile profilename <profile-name> [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir
<cir-val> ] [ cbs <cbs-val > ] [ pir <pir-val > ] [ pbs <pbs-val > ] [ conformaction
<colorgreen-val> ] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |
coloryellow ]
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete irl profile profilename <profile-name>
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify irl profile profilename <profile-name> [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir
<cir-val > ] [ cbs <cbs-val > ] [ pir <pir-val > ] [ pbs <pbs-val > ] [ conformaction
<colorgreen-val>] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |
coloryellow ]
Parameters:
Name Description
profilename
<profile-name>
Profile name uniquely identify an IRL profile in the system. String of up
to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of
printable characters excluding ';'.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: ND - ND
irltype sr2cm | trtcm This field specifies the type of IRL. Two types of IRLs are supported.
Single Rate Two Color Marker (sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color
Marker (trtcm).
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: trtcm
IP DSLAM
537
cir <cir-val > Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid for
both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles. The value of this field cannot be
more than PIR.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value:0-16000
cbs <cbs-val > Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid in both
sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles. The value of this field cannot be
more than PBS in case of trTcm.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-10000
Default value: 7500
pir <pir-val > Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid only for
trtcm type of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CIR.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-16000
Default value: 1000
pbs <pbs-val > Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid only for trtcm type
of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CBS.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 96-15000
Default value: 10000
conformaction
colorgreen
Color type to be applied for conforming packets. This field is valid in
both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: colorgreen
exceedaction drop |
coloryellow
Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only for trtcm type of
profiles
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
efault value: coloryellow
violateaction drop |
coloryellow
Color type to be applied for violating packets. This field is valid in both
sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: drop
IDL series User Guide
538
Example:
$ create irl profile profilename gold irltype trtcm cir 1000 cbs 400 pir 2000 pbs
12000 conformaction colorgreen exceedaction coloryellow violateaction drop
Output:
Output field:
Field Description
Profile name Profile name uniquely identifies an IRL profile in
the system. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z',
'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of printable
characters excluding ';'.
Profile Type This field specifies the type of IRL. Two type of
IRLs are supported. Single Rate Two Color Marker
(sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color Marker (trtcm).
CIR(kbps) Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps.
This field is valid for both sr2cm and trtcm type of
profiles. The value of this field cannot be more
than PIR.
CBS(bytes) Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field
is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles.
The value of this field cannot be more than PBS in
case of trTcm.
PIR(kbps) Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field
is valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of
this field cannot be less than CIR.
PBS(bytes) Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is
valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of
this field cannot be less than CBS.
Conform action Color type to be applied for conforming packets.
This field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of
profiles.
Exceed action Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only
for trtcm type of profiles.
Violate action Color type to be applied for violating packets. This
field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles
References:
z IRL Commands
IP DSLAM
539
5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get irl stats [ifname <interface-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname
<interface-name>
Interface Name whose IRL statistics are
requested.
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*.
Type : Get -- Optional
Valid values : ND - ND
Example:
$ get irl stats ifname aal5-0
Output:
Interface : aal5-0 Num packets violated : 100
Num packets exceeded : 300 Num packets conformed : 1000
Output field:
Field Description
Interface Interface Name whose IRL statistics are
requested.
Num packets violated Number of packets that violated PIR in case of
trTcm. In case of crTcm it is the number of packets
violating CIR.
Num packets
exceeded
Number of packets that exceeded CIR. This field is
valid only for trtcm type of profiles.
Num packets
conformed Number of packets that conformed to CIR.
References:
z IRL Commands
IDL series User Guide
540
5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge rlinstance map [portid <portid-val>]
[flowtype <flowtype-val> | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast]
5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create bridge rlinstance map portid
<portid-val>flowtype <flowtype-val>| bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast |
instanceid <instanceid-val>
5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: delete bridge rlinstance map portid <portid-val>
flowtype <flowtype-val> | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast
5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map
Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify bridge rlinstance map portid
<portid-val>flowtype <flowtype-val>| bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast
[instanceid <instanceid-val>]
Parameters
Name Description
portid <portid-val> Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is
associated. If the value of this field is 'All', it
indicates all bridge ports. For a particular flow,
instance map cannot be created both for a specific
port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 194
IP DSLAM
541
flowtype
<flowtype-val>| bcast |
unregmcast |
unknownucast
This field identifies the flow for which this instance
is applied. Three flow types are reserved for
broadcast, unregistered multicast and unknown
unicast traffic. The other user defined flows are
identified by filtering rules by associating flow type
with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 16 - 32
instanceid
<instanceid-val>
This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 250
Example:
$ create bridge rlinstance map portid 6 flowtype bcast instanceid 1 configstatus
Auto
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Port Id : 6
Flow Type : bcast
Instance Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Port Id Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is associated.
If the value of this field is 'All', it indicates all bridge ports.
For a particular flow, instance map cannot be created both
for a specific port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.
Flow Type This field identifies the flow for which this instance is
applied. Three flow types are reserved for broadcast,
unregistered multicast and unknown unicast traffic. The
IDL series User Guide
542
other user defined flows are identified by filtering rules by
associating flow type with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.
Instance Id This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.
Cautions:
z An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over
PPPOE and IPOE interface.
5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl actionprofile info [profileid <profileid-val>] [result conform | exceed |
violate] [action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos |
setbaclevel]
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val> result conform | exceed |
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel
[actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask <actionmask-val>] [description
<description-val>]
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val>result conform | exceed | violate
action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel
IP DSLAM
543
5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val> result conform | exceed |
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel
[actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask <actionmask-val>] [description
<description-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid
<profileid-val>
Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which uniquely identifies
the action profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 32
result conform |
exceed | violate
The result type for which action is configured to be taken.
Multiple actions can be configured for a result type.There shall
be multiple entries with same profile identifier and a result type if
multiple actions are configured for the result type. If there is no
entry configured for a result type, the action is assumed to be
'allow' for that result.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
action drop | allow |
sendtocontrol |
copytocontrol |
modifytos | setbaclevel
Action to be taken on the packet.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
544
actionval
<actionval-val>
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that
require an additional input.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).
Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this
parameter should contain value to be set in tos field in the
packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this
action. The application of this value is dependent on the mask
field. For setbaclevel action this parameter should contain Buffer
Admission Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for this
action. This parameter is ignored for other actions.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0
actionmask
<actionmask-val>
This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos
actions only.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this
parameter should contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this action.Only lower
8-bits are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Default value: 0xffffffff
description
<description-val>
Description of the application that receives packets matching
this RL. This field is mandatory if Action is 'sendtocontrol' or
'copytocontrol'.The description string should not begin with
underscore '_' as it is reserved for special usage e.g.
_PPPOE_CONTROL.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\0"
Example:
$ create rl actionprofile info profileid 1 result conform action copytocontrol actionval
0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff description lacp
IP DSLAM
545
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Action Profile Id : 1 Action Result : conform
Profile Action : copytocontrolActionVal : 0x00000000
Action Mask : 0xffffffff Application Description : lacp
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Action Profile Id Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which
uniquely identifies the action profile.
Action Result The result type for which action is configured to be
taken. Multiple actions can be configured for a
result type.There shall be multiple entries with
same profile identifier and a result type if multiple
actions are configured for the result type. If there is
no entry configured for a result type, the action is
assumed to be 'allow' for that result.
Profile Action Action to be taken on the packet.
ActionVal The parameter should contain valid value for some
actions that require an additional input.For
sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this
parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).
Other values are invalid for this action. For
modifytos action this parameter should contain
value to be set in tos field in the packet in the
range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this
action. The application of this value is dependent
on the mask field. For setbaclevel action this
parameter should contain Buffer Admission
Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for
this action. This parameter is ignored for other
actions.
Action Mask This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol
and modifytos actions only.For sendtocontrol and
copytocontrol actions this parameter should
IDL series User Guide
546
contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this
action.Only lower 8-bits are taken into
consideration for modifytos action and other bits
are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is
overwritten with the corresponding bit in action
value. In the mask if a bit location contains 0, then
the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains
unchanged.
Application
Description
Description of the application that receives packets
matching this RL. This field is mandatory if Action
is 'sendtocontrol' or 'copytocontrol'.The description
string should not begin with underscore '_' as it is
reserved for special usage e.g.
_PPPOE_CONTROL.
5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl instance info [instanceid <instanceid-val>]
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create rl instance info instanceid <instanceid-val> profileid <profileid-val>
actionprofileid <actionprofileid-val>
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
IP DSLAM
547
Command Syntax:
delete rl instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
instanceid
<instanceid-val>
Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely
identifies a rate limiter instance.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 250
profileid
<profileid-val>
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's
configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm
and associated parameters are based on the
configuration profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 16
actionprofileid
<actionprofileid-val>
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action
profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet
depending on the result are based on the action
profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 32
Example:
$ create rl instance info instanceid 3 profileid 2 actionprofileid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Instance Id : 3
Profile Id : 2 Action Profile Id : 1
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
548
Output field:
Field Description
Instance Id Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely identifies
a rate limiter instance.
Profile Id This field identifies the rate limiter instance's
configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm and
associated parameters are based on the configuration
profile.
Action Profile Id This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action
profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet depending
on the result are based on the action profile.
5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rl profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to create
Command Syntax:
create rl profile info profileid <profileid-val> [ rate <rate-val> ] [ mbs <mbs-val> ]
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate <peakrate-val> ] [ pbs
<pbs-val> ]
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get rl profile info profileid <profileid-val>
IP DSLAM
549
5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify rl profile info profileid <profileid-val> [ rate <rate-val> ] [ mbs <mbs-val> ]
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate <peakrate-val> ] [ pbs
<pbs-val> ]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid
<profileid-val>
Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,
whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile. The
configuration profile contains all parameters required
for rate limiting algorithm to operate.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 16
rate <rate-val> This field defines the committed information rate. If
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 100000000
Default value: 100000000
mbs <mbs-val> This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level' is
'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 4 - 65535
Default value: 65535
IDL series User Guide
550
level packet | byte Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the algorithm
executes in terms of number of packets or number of
bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is configured in
terms of packets per second and burst size is
configured in terms of number of packets.If the 'level' is
'byte'(2), rate is configured in terms of bits per second
and burst size is configured in terms of number of
bytes.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: packet
type sr2cm | trtcm Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The sr2cm
(single rate two color marker) is a single-rate algorithm.
It takes rate and burst size as input parameters.The
trtcm (two rate three color marker) is a dual-rate
algorithm. It takes two sets of rate and burstsize as
inputs, one each for peak and committed information.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: sr2cm
peakrate
peakrate-val>
This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field
defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is 'packet'(1),
the unit is packets per second. If level is byte, the unit is
bits per second.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 100000000
Default value: 100000000
pbs <pbs-val> This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field
defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is 'packet'(1), the
unit is number of packets. If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is
number of bytes.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 4 - 65535
Default value: 65535
Example:
$ create rl profile info profileid 1 rate 24 mbs 24 level packet type trtcm peakrate 30
pbs 30
IP DSLAM
551
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1
Level : packet Type : trtcm
Rate : 24 Max Burst Size : 24
Peak Rate : 30 Peak Max Burst Size : 30
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Id
Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,
whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile.
The configuration profile contains all parameters
required for rate limiting algorithm to operate.
Level Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the
algorithm executes in terms of number of packets
or number of bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is
configured in terms of packets per second and
burst size is configured in terms of number of
packets.If the 'level' is 'byte'(2), rate is configured
in terms of bits per second and burst size is
configured in terms of number of bytes.
Type Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The
sr2cm (single rate two color marker) is a
single-rate algorithm. It takes rate and burst size
as input parameters.The trtcm (two rate three color
marker) is a dual-rate algorithm. It takes two sets
of rate and burstsize as inputs, one each for peak
and committed information.
Rate This field defines the committed information rate. If
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second.
If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.
Max Burst Size This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level'
is 'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.
Peak Rate This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This
field defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If level
IDL series User Guide
552
is byte, the unit is bits per second.
Peak Max Burst Size This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This
field defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level'
is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.
5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sched profile class [name <name-val>] [classid <classid-val>]
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify sched profile class name <name-val> classid <classid-val> [param1
<param1-val>] [param2 <param2-val>] [param3 <param3-val>] [param4
<param4-val>] [param5 <param5-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
name <name-val>
Name of the scheduling profile.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
classid <classid-val>
Scheduling profile class identifier
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1－ 8
param1 <param1-val>
This specifies the first parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the weight of the class
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means
IP DSLAM
553
Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight
will be normalized with the sum of all classId
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *
10). The default value listed is only an indicative
value.
Type: Modify － Optional
param2 <param2-val> This specifies the second parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the Minimum bandwidth in
Kbps. Value zero means no minimum bandwidth
guarantee for the class.
Type: Modify － Optional
param3 <param3-val> This specifies the third parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the Maximum bandwidth
limit in Kbps for the class. Value zero means no
maximum bandwidth limit for the class.
Type: Modify － Optional
param4 <param4-val> This specifies the fourth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
Type: Modify -- Optional
param5 <param5-val> This specifies the fifth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
Type: Modify － Optional
IDL series User Guide
554
Example:
$ get sched profile class name gold classid 1
Output:
Profile Name : gold
Class Id : 1
Profile Class Param1 : 20 Profile Class Param2 : 25
Profile Class Param3 : 25 Profile Class Param4 : 0
Profile Class Param5 : 25
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Name Name of the scheduling profile
Class Id Scheduling profile class identifier
Profile Class Param1
This specifies the first parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the weight of the class
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means
Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight
will be normalized with the sum of all classId
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *
10). The default value listed is only an indicative
value.
Profile Class Param2
This specifies the second parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored.
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter
specifies the Minimum bandwidth in Kbps. Value
zero means no minimum bandwidth guarantee
for the class.
Profile Class Param3
This specifies the third parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
IP DSLAM
555
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is
ignored.
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter
specifies the Maximum bandwidth limit in Kbps
for the class. Value zero means no maximum
bandwidth limit for the class.
Profile Class Param4
This specifies the fourth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
Profile Class Param5
This specifies the fifth parameter for the class
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed
is only an indicative value.
References:
z Scheduling profile related commands
5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sched profile info [name <name-val>]
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create sched profile info name <name-val> [algo pp | custom] iftype eth| atm
IDL series User Guide
556
5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete sched profile info name <name-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
name <name-val>
Name of the scheduling profile
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
algo pp | custom
Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and custom is
supported over ATM. In Proabalistic Priority algorithm, the
traffic class parameter determines the probablity with which
its corresponding queue is served when it is polled by the
server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have flexibility to
assign minimum rate, maximum rate, and excess bandwidth
sharing weight for classes and the scheduling shall be done
based on these parameters among classes.
Type: Create -- Optional
Default value: pp
iftype eth | atm
The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for which the
scheduling profile is applicable.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Example:
$ create sched profile info name gold algo pp iftype atm
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Name : gold
Scheduling Algorithm : pp Interface Type : eth
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
557
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Name Name of the scheduling profile
Scheduling
Algorithm
Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and
custom is supported over ATM. In Proabalistic
Priority algorithm, the traffic class parameter
determines the probablity with which its
corresponding queue is served when it is polled by
the server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have
flexibility to assign minimum rate, maximum rate,
and excess bandwidth sharing weight for classes
and the scheduling shall be done based on these
parameters among classes.
Interface Type The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for
which the scheduling profile is applicable.
Caution:
z For a scheduling profile that has iftype as atm, upto 8 classes can be
configured, while for a scheduling profile that has iftype as eth, 8 classes can be
configured.
References:
z Scheduling profile related commands.
5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile class [profileid <profileid-val>] [classid <classid-val>]
IDL series User Guide
558
5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:modify trfclass profile class profileid <profileid-val>classid
<classid-val> [size <size-val>] [thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Traffic class profile identifier.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 10
classid <classid-val> Traffic class profile class identifier.
Type: Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
size <size-val> This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic
class.
Type: Modify -- Optional
thrshld1
<thrshld1-val>
This parameter specifies the low threshold of the
queue, as a percentage of the queue size. When
the queue is full beyond this threshold, only
conforming frames are passed and
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance
of frames is determined as per IRL configured on
input the ATM port.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 100
Example:
$ get trfclass profile class profileid 1 classid 1
Output:
Profile Identifier : 1 Class Id : 1
Traffic Class Param Size : 32 Traffic Class Param Thresh : 50
IP DSLAM
559
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Identifier Traffic class profile identifier.
Class Id Traffic class profile class identifier.
Traffic Class Param Size This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic class.
Traffic Class Param Thresh This parameter specifies the low threshold of the queue, as a
percentage of the queue size. When the queue is full beyond
this threshold, only conforming frames are passed and
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance of frames is
determined as per IRL configured on input the ATM port.
References:
z See traffic class profile related commands.
5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
create trfclass profile info profileid <profileid-val> iftype eth | atm
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass profile info profileid <profileid-val>
IDL series User Guide
560
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Traffic class profile identifier.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 10
iftype eth | atm Interface type.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Example:
$ create trfclass profile info profileid 3 iftype eth
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile identifier : 3 Interface Type : eth
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile identifier Traffic class profile identifier.
Interface Type Interface type.
5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get trfclass stats [ifname <ifname-val>] [classid <classid-val>]
IP DSLAM
561
5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
reset trfclass stats [ifname <ifname-val>] [classid <classid-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <ifname-val> Interface name
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
classid <classid-val> Traffic class identifier
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Example:
$ get trfclass stats ifname 149 classid 1
Output:
Interface Name : 149 Class Id : 1
NumDiscardPkts : 10
Output field:
Field Description
Interface Name Interface name
Class Id Traffic class identifier
NumDiscardPkts Number of packets discarded
IDL series User Guide
562
5.22 RMON Commands
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to create RMON probe.
Command Syntax:
create srmon probe rindex <rindex-val> ifname <interface-name> owner
<owner-string>
5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to delete the RMON probe.
Command Syntax:
delete srmon probe rindex <rindex-val>
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe
Description:
Use this command to get RMON probe information and statistics.
Command Syntax:
get srmon probe [rindex <rindex-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
rindex <rindex-val> Unique identifier of the probe.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
Get - Optional
Valid values : 0 －20
Ifname
<interface-name>
This specifies the Interface name.
Type: Create – Mandatory
Valid values : eoa-0 - *, eth-0-*
owner <owner-string> The entity that configured this probe, and is
therefore using the resources assigned to it.
IP DSLAM
563
Type : Create – Mandatory
Valid values: Strings of up to 64 ASCII
characters.
Example:
$ get srmon probe rindex 1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
RMON Probe Index : 1
If-Name : eth-0 Stats Owner : Conexant
Total Octets : 800 Total Packets : 200
Total Broadcast Packets : 138 Total Multicast Packets : 200
Total 64 Octets : 100 Total 65-127 Octets : 200
Total 128-255 Octets : 200 Total 256-511 Octets : 300
Total 512-1023 Octets : 50 Total 1024-1518 Octets : 100
Output field:
Field Description
RMON Probe Index Unique identifier of RMON probe.
If-Name This specifies the Interface name. It can be :
eoa-0 - *, eth-*
Stats Owner The entity that configured this entry and is
therefore using the resources assigned to it.
Total Octets The total number of octets of data (including
those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Total Packets The total number of packets (including bad
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Total Broadcast
Packets
The total number of good packets received, that
were directed to the broadcast address.
Total Multicast Packets The total number of good packets received, that
were directed to a multicast address.
Total 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received, that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Total 65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received, that were between 65 and
127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
IDL series User Guide
564
bits but including FCS octets).
Total 128-255 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 128 and
255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Total 256-511 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 256 and
511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Total 512-1023 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 512 and
1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Total 1024-1518 Octets The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were between 1024 and
1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Caution:
z This command is not supported on an EoA interface for which ConfigStatus is
set to Config.
5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rmon task [rname <task-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
Rname< taskname> This parameter specifies the name of a particular
task.
Valid values: Any task name present in the
system.
IP DSLAM
565
Example:
$ get rmon task taskname tsk1
Output:
Name : TSK1 Status : EVENT SUSPEND
Sched Count : 1 Priority : 10
Preempt : Yes Time Slice : 0
Stack Base : 0x520cc18 Stack Size : 2048
CleanStackSize : 14080
LastSchedTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:08 1970-
Output field:
Field Description
Name This parameter specifies the name of the task.
Status This parameters specifies the status of the task. The task
can in ready state, terminated state, suspended state or
finished state.
Sched Count This parameter specifies the Schedule count of the task i.e.
number of times the task has been scheduled.
Priority This parameter tells the priority of the task.
Preempt This parameter tells whether the task preemption is allowed
or not. If the value is yes then task can be preempted .If the
value is No , then task can not be preempted.
Time Slice This parameters tell the time slice of the task. If this value is
zero, it means that time slicing is disabled for this task.
Stack Base This parameter specifies the base address (starting
address) of the stack associated with this task. The stack of
the task would span from the address as given by Stack
Base till the address as given by (Stack Base + Stack Size).
Note that the stack grows from the address as given by
(Stack Base + Stack Size) towards Stack Base.
Stack Size This parameters tells the total number of bytes in the task's
stack.
CleanStackSize This Parameter tells the free stack size i.e. the number of
bytes that have never been accessed in the stack of task.
Basically this gives an idea of the stack watermark.
LastSchedTime This parameter tells the system time at which the task was
lastly scheduled.
IDL series User Guide
566
5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get rmon mpool [rname <mpool-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
rname mpool This parameter specifies the name of a particular memory pool.
Valid values : Any memory pool name present in the system.
A user can also give first few characeters of a memory pool
name. In that case all the memory pools whose name start with
those characters shall be displayed.
Example 1:
For variable size memory pool
$ get rmon mpool DCLFR113
Output:
Name : DCLFR113 Size : 5392
Min : 16 Free : 5360
Tasks Waiting : 0 Suspend Type : FIFO
StartAddr : 0x147b7d28 FirstTaskName : -
FirstAllocator : CLFR LastAllocator : CLFR
LastDellocater : CLFR LastFailUser : -
LastFailDellocater : - WaterMark : 84
TotalMemAlloc : 52 TotalMemFree : 52
MemAllocFailCount : 0 MemFreeFailCount : 0
MPoolType : DYNAMIC Threshold : 5392
Threhold Count : 0
LastMemAllocTime : Thu Jan 01 00:01:08 1970
LastMemFreeTime : Thu Jan 01 00:02:18 1970
LastMemAllocFailTime: -
LastMemFreeFailTime : -
ThresholdHitTime : -
IP DSLAM
567
Output field:
Field Description
Name Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,
the name starts with 'D'.
Size Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes in the
pool.
Min Minimum number of bytes for each allocation
from this pool.
Free Number of free bytes in the pool i.e. Number of
bytes that are available in the pool for allocation
and has not been yet allocated.
Task Waiting Number of tasks waiting on this pool.
Suspend Type The task suspended type. Task suspend type on
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First
Out) or Priority.
Start Addr The Starting Address of the memory pool.
FirstTaskName Name of the first suspended task on this memory
pool.
FirstAllocator Name of the module which has firstly allocated
memory from the pool.
LastAllocator Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) allocted memory from the pool.
LastDellocater Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently)deallocated memory to the pool.
LastFailAllocator Name of the module which has lastly failed to
allocate the memory from the pool.
LastFailDeallocator Name of the module which has lastly failed to
deallocate the memory to the pool.
WaterMark WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum
amount of memory that has been allocated from
the memory pool at some point in time.
TotalMemAlloc Total amount of memory allocated from the
memory pool (since its creation ). This field is a
running counter and it only increments. When the
memory is freed this field is not decremented
rather the TotalMemFree field is incremented.
TotalMemFree Total amount of memory that has been
deallocted from the memory pool (since its
creation). This is also a running counter.
MemAllocFailCount The number of times memory allocation from this
IDL series User Guide
568
pool has been failed.
MemFreeFailCount The number of times the memory deallocation to
the pool has been failed.
MPoolType Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the
memory pool is of variable size . If it is
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.
Threshold Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in
number of bytes.
ThresholdCOunt Number of times the threshold value has been hit
for this memory pool.
LastMemAllocTime The system time when memory was lastly
allocated from the pool.
LastMemFreeTime The system time when memory was lastly freed
into the pool.
LastMemAllocFailTime The system time when the last memory
allocation from the pool has failed.
LastMemFreeFailTime The system time when the last memory
deallocation has failed.
ThresholdHitTime The system time when threshold of the pool has
hit most recently.
Example 2:
For fixed size memory pool
$ get rmon mpool FTSK142
Output:
Name : FTSK142 Size : 280
Partion Size : 20 Allocated : 1
Free : 9
Tasks Waiting : 0 Suspend Type : FIFO
StartAddr : 0x5307e40 FirstTaskName : -
FirstAllocator : TSK1 LastAllocator : TSK1
LastDellocater : TSK1 LastFailUser : -
LastFailDellocater : - WaterMark : 84
TotalMemAlloc : 3 TotalMemFree : 2
MemAllocFailCount : 0 MemFreeFailCount : 0
MPoolType : PARTTION Threshold : 280
Threhold Count : 0
LastMemAllocTime : Thu Jan 01 00:02:34 1970
LastMemFreeTime : Thu Jan 01 00:02:49 1970
IP DSLAM
569
LastMemAllocFailTime: -
LastMemFreeFailTime : -
ThresholdHitTime : -
Output field:
Field Description
Name Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,
the name starts with 'F'.
Size Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes in the
pool.
Partition Size Partition size specifies the size of each partition
in bytes.
Allocated Number of partitions allocated.
Free Number of free partitions in the pool i.e.
Number of partitions that are available in the pool
for allocation and has not been yet allocated.
Task Waiting Number of tasks waiting on this pool.
Suspend Type The task suspended type. Task suspend type on
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First
Out) or Priority.
StartAddr The Starting Address of the memory pool.
FirstTaskName Name of the first suspended task on this memory
pool.
FirstAllocator Name of the module which has firstly allocated
partition from the pool.
LastAllocator Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) allocted partition from the pool.
LastDellocater Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently) freed the partition to the pool.
LastFailUser Name of the module which has lastly failed to
allocate the partition from the pool.
LastFailDellocater Name of the module which has lastly failed to
free the partition in to the pool.
WaterMark WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum
amount of memory that has been allocated from
the memory pool at some point in time. This
figure (displayed in bytes) includes the memory
allocated as well as the overhead that nucleus
keeps while allocating partitions.
TotalmemAlloc Total number of partitions allocated from the
IDL series User Guide
570
memory pool (since its creation ). This is a
running counter, it always increments never
decrements.
TotalMemFree Total number of partitions that has been freed
into the memory pool (since its creation). This is
a running counter, it always increments never
decrements.
MemAllocFailCount The number of times partition allocation from this
pool has failed.
MemFreeFailCount The number of times the partition deallocation to
the pool has failed.
MPoolType Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the
memory pool is of variable size . If it is
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.
Threshold Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in
number of bytes.
Threshold Count Number of times the threshold value has been hit
for this memory pool.
LastMemAllocTime The last system time when a partition has been
allocated from the pool.
LastMemFreeTime The last system time when a partition has been
freed into the pool.
LastMemAllocFailTime The last system time when the partition
allocation from the pool has failed.
LastMemFreeFailTime The last system time when the partition
deallocation has failed.
ThresholdHitTime The last system time when threshold of the pool
has hit.
5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the memory pool. This
command will display 20 entries (maximum) .Events are logged for the memory
pool for the following 3 cases:
z Mem Pool Allocation Fail.
z Mem Pool Deallocation Fail.
z Threshold Hit.
IP DSLAM
571
Command Syntax:
get rmon mpool threshold
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon mpool threshold
Output:
Task Name : TSK1
Mpool Name : FTSK143
Pool Type : PARTITION
ThresholdHitTimeStamp :Thu Jan 01 00:20:53 1970
Event Type : Allocation Fail
Output field:
Field Description
Task Name Name of the module which tries to allocate or
deallocate from memory pool during a critical
event.
MPool Name The name of memory pool.
Pool Type Type of memory pool. DYNAMIC for variable
size of memory pool and PARTITION for fixed
size memory pool.
ThresholdHitTimeStamp The system time at which event logging is done.
Event Type Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Allocation Fail - If allocation from pool has
failed.
Deallocation Fail - If deallocation from pool has
failed.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of pool has
been hit while allocation.
IDL series User Guide
572
5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of memory pool. This command will
reset the following parameters of memory pool.
z Set MemAllocFailCount value to zero.
z Set MemFreeFailCount value to zero.
z Set watermark value to the value of the currently allocated memory from that
pool.
z Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
reset rmon mpool
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon mpool
Output Field:
None
5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue
Description:
Use this command to get the information about a particular queue or about all the
queues present in the system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon queue [rname <queue-name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
rname <queue-name> This parameter specifies the name of a particular
queue.
Valid values: Any queue name present in the
system.
IP DSLAM
573
Example:
$ get rmon queue rname tsk173
Output:
Name : TSK173 Start Addr : 0x520c700
Size : 10 Available Size : 9
Pending Msgs : 1 Msg Type : FIXED
Msg Size : 1 Suspend Type : PRIORITY
Tasks Waiting : 0 FirstTaskName : -
TotalMsgIn : 3 TotalMsgOut : 2
DropCount : 0 WaterMark : 3
LastMsgInFailPtr: 0x0 LastSender : TSK2
LastRecvr : TSK1 LastSenderFail : -
LastRecvFail : - ThreshHold : 10
ThresholdHitCount: 0
LastMsgOutTime : Thu Jan 01 00:04:17 1970
LastMsgInTime : Thu Jan 01 00:03:50 1970
LastMsgOutFailTime : -
LastMsgInFailTime : -
ThresholdHitTime : -
Output field:
Field Description
Name Name of the Queue.
Start Addr The Starting Address of the queue.
Size Size of the queue i.e the total number of unsigned
words (4 bytes) in the queue.
Available Size Available size of the queue i.e. number of unsigned
words (4 bytes) free in the queue.
Pending Msgs Number of messages present in the queue.
Msg Type Type of the messages in the queue. If it is FIXED,
then all the messages in the queue are of a fixed size.
If it is VARIABLE , then the messages present in the
queue can be of varying size.
Msg Size Size of the message in number of unsigned words (4
bytes). If the msg type is fixed, then it tells the exact
size of each message , else if the msg type is variable
then it tells the maximum message size.
Suspend Type The task suspended type. Task suspend type on the
queue can be either FIFO (First In First Out) or
IDL series User Guide
574
Priority.
Tasks Waiting Number of tasks waiting on this queue.
FirstTaskName Name of the first suspended task on this queue.
TotalMsgIn Total number of messages enqueued i.e. the number
of messages send to this queue (since its creation ).
This is a running counter and never decrements.
TotalMsgOut Total number of messages dequed i.e. the number of
messages received from this queue(since creation).
This is a running counter and never decrements.
DropCount Number of messages dropped i.e. total number of
times message send to this queue failed. This is a
running counter and never decrements.
WaterMark WaterMark of the queue i.e the maximum number of
unsigned words (4 bytes) that has been present in this
queue at some point in time.
LastMsgInFailPtr Address of the message buffer that failed to enqueue
in the queue lastly.
LastSender Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most
recently) send the message to the queue.
LastRecvr Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most
recently)recieved the message from the queue.
LastSenderFail Name of the module which has lastly failed to send
the message to the queue.
LastRecvFail Name of the module which has lastly failed to receive
the message from the queue.
Threshold Threshold Value set for the queue, in number of
unsigned words (4 bytes).
ThresholdHitCount Number of times threshold has been hit for the queue.
LastMsgOutTime The system time when the message was lastly
received from the queue.
LastMsgInTime The system time when the message was lastly send
to the queue.
LastMsgOutFailTime The system time when the message receiving from
the queue has lastly failed.
LastMsgInFailTime The system time when the message send to the
queue has lastly failed.
ThresholdHitTime The system time when threshold of the queue has
lastly hit.
IP DSLAM
575
5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the queue. This command
will display 20 entries (maximum) . Events are logged for the queue for the
following 3 cases:
z Message Receiving From Queue Fail.
z Message Send To Queue Fail.
z Threshold Hit.
Command Syntax:
get rmon queue threshold
Parameters
None
Example
$ get rmon queue threshold
Output
Queue Name : TSK173 Task Name: TSK1
ThreshHitTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:14 1970
Event Type : Msg Recv From Q Fail
Output field:
Field Description
Queue Name Name of the queue.
Task Name Name of the module which has tried to send or
receive the message from the queue when the
event has happened.
ThresholdHitTime The system time at which event logging is done.
Event Type Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Msg Send To Q Fail - If failure occurred while
sending message to queue.
Msg Recv From Q Fail - If failure occurred while
receiving a message from the queue.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of queue has
been hit while sending the message to queue.
IDL series User Guide
576
5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of queue. This command will reset
the following parameters of queue.
z Set DropCount value to zero.
z Set watermark value to the value of the currently used size of queue .
z Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
Reset rmon queue
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon queue
Output Field:
None
5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the net buffers present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon netbuf
Parameters
None
Example:
$ get rmon netbuf
IP DSLAM
577
Output
TotalNetBuf : 116 TotalUsed : 8
TotalFree : 7 WaterMark : 3
Threshold : 116 ThresholdHitCount: 0
AllocFailCount : 0 FreeFailCount : 0
LastUserTask : PKEV LastFreeTask : PKEV
LastUserFailTask : LastFreeFailTask :
ThresholdHitTask :
LastUsedTime : Thu Jan 01 00:04:45 1970
LastFreeTime : Thu Jan 01 00:05:01 1970
LastUseFailTime : -
ThresholdHitTime : -
Output field:
Field Description
TotalNetBuf Total number of net buffers present in the system.
TotalUsed Total number of net buffers allocated by the system since the system has
come up. This is a running counter and never decrements.
TotalFree Total number of net buffers freed by the system since the system has come
up. This is a running counter and never decrements.
WaterMark WaterMark of the net buffer i.e. maximum number of net buffers used by the
system at some point in time.
Threshold Threshold value set for net buffer in the system in terms of number of net
buffers.
ThresholdHitCount Number of times threshold has been hit for the net buffer.
AllocFailCount Number of times net buffer allocation has failed.
FreeFailCount Number of times net buffer freeing has failed.
LastUserTask Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used)the net buffer.
LastFreeTask Name of the task which has lastly deallocated (freed) the net buffer.
LastUserFailTask Name of the task which has lastly failed to allocate (used) the net buffer.
LastFreeFailTask Name of the task which has lastly failed to deallocate (freed) the net buffer.
ThresholdHitTask Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used) the net buffer, causing
threshold hit.
LastUsedTime The last system time when net buffer was lastly used.
LastFreeTime The last system time when net buffer was lastly freed.
LastUseFailTime The last system time when the net buffer allocation has lastly failed.
ThresholdHitTime The last system time when the threshold has hit while allocating the net
buffer.
IDL series User Guide
578
5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold
Description:
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the netbuffer. This
command will display 20 entries(maximum). Events are logged for netbuffer in the
following 3 cases:
z Allcation of net buffer failed.
z Threshold Hit.
Command Syntax:
get rmon netbuf threshold
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon netbuf threshold
Output:
Task Name : TSK1
ThresholdHitTimeStamp : Thu Jan 01 00:00:39 1970
Event Type : Allocation Fail
Output field:
Field Description
Task Name The name of Task which tries to allocate the
netbuffer during a critical event.
ThresholdHitTimeStamp The system time when event logging is done.
Event Type Cause of event logging.
Its value can be:
Allocation Fail - If allocation of net buffer has
failed.
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of net buffer
has been hit while allocation.
IP DSLAM
579
5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf
Description:
Use this command to reset some parameters of netbuf. This command will reset
the following parameters of netbuf.
z Set ThresholdCount value to zero.
z Set AllocFailCount value to zero
z Set WaterMark to the number of net buffers currently used by system.
z Set FreeFailCount value to the zero.
Command Syntax:
reset rmon netbuf
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ reset rmon netbuf
Output Field:
None
5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the semaphores present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon semaphore
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon semaphore
IDL series User Guide
580
Output:
Name Count Suspend Type Tasks Waiting First
Task
--------------------------------------------------------------
SACL4 1 FIFO 0 -
Output field:
Field Description
Name This specifies the name of the semaphore.
Count This specifies the current instance count of the
semaphore.
Suspend Type This specifies the task suspended type on this
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority type.
Task Waiting This specifies the number of tasks waiting on this
semaphore.
First Task This specifies the name of the first task suspended on
the semaphore.
5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp
Description:
Use this command to get the information about all the event groups present in the
system.
Command Syntax:
get rmon eventgrp
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get rmon eventgrp
IP DSLAM
581
Output:
Name Event Flags Tasks Waiting First
Task
-------------------------------------------------------------
EDSLM11 0 1
DSLM
Output field:
Field Description
Name This specifies the name of the event flag group.
Count This specifies the current event flags.
Suspend Type This specifies the task suspended type on this
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority
type.
Task Waiting This specifies the number of tasks waiting on
the event flag group.
First Task This specifies the name of the first task
suspended on the event flag group.
IDL series User Guide
582
5.23 SNMP Commands
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp comm [community <community-val >]
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create snmp comm community <community-val > [access ro | rw]
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp comm community <community-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
community
<community-val >
This specifies the Community name.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
access ro | rw
This specifies the access permissions given to
man-agers with this community name. ro implies
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
per-missions.
Type: Create － Optional
Default value: ro
IP DSLAM
583
Example:
$ create snmp comm community public
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Access community
------------------------------------------------------------
ro public
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
community This specifies the Community name.
Access
This specifies the access permissions given to
man-agers with this community name.ro implies
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
per-missions.
References:
z SNMP commands
5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp host
5.23.2.2 Create snmp host
Description:
Use this command to create.
IDL series User Guide
584
Command Syntax:
create snmp host ip <ip-address > community <community-val >
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp host ip <ip-address > community <community-val >
Parameter:
Name Description
ip <ip-address >
This specifies the IP address of the manager that
has access permissions.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
community
<community-val >
This specifies the Community name. This must
be a valid community in the snmp community
table.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Example:
$ create snmp host ip 172.25.34.34 community public
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Host Address Community
--------------------------------------------------------------
172.25.34.34 public
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
585
Output field:
Field Description
Ip Address This specifies the IP address of the manager that
has access permissions.
Community
This specifies the Community name. This must
be a valid community in the snmp community
table.
References:
z SNMP commands
5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp stats
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify snmp stats [authentraps enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name Description
authentraps enable
|disable
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is
permitted to generate authentication-failure
traps. The value of this object overrides any
configuration information; as such, it provides a
means whereby all authentication-failure traps
may be disabled.
Type: Modify － Optional
Default value: disable
IDL series User Guide
586
Example:
$ get snmp stats
Output:
InPkts : 100 OutPkts : 100
InBadVersions : 0 InBadCommunityNames : 0
InBadCommunityUses : 0 InASNParseErrs : 0
InTooBigs : 0 InNoSuchNames : 0
InBadValues : 0 InReadOnlys : 0
InGenErrs : 0 InTotalReqVars : 200
InTotalSetVars : 0 InGetRequests : 100
InGetNexts : 0 InSetRequests : 0
InGetResponses : 0 InTraps : 0
OutTooBigs : 0 OutNoSuchNames : 0
OutBadValues : 0 OutGenErrs : 0
OutGetRequests : 0 OutGetNexts : 0
OutSetRequests : 0 OutGetResponses : 100
OutTraps : 0 AuthenTraps : disable
SilentDrops : 0 ProxyDrops : 0
Output field:
Field Description
InPkts The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport
service.
OutPkts The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP
protocol entity to the transport service.
InBadVersions The total number of SNMP Messages which were delivered to the SNMP
protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.
InBadCommunityNames The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity
which used a SNMP com-munity name not known to say entity.
InBadCommunityUses
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity
which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP
community named in the Message.
InASNParseErrs The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol
entity when decoding received SNMP Messages.
InTooBigs The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.
InNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'noSuchName'.
InBadValues The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
IP DSLAM
587
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.
InReadOnlys
The total number valid SNMP PDUs which were de-livered to the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `readOnly'. It
should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU which
contains the value 'readOnly' in the error-status field, as this object is provided
as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.
InGenErrs The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.
InTotalReqVars
The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the
SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and
Get-Next PDUs.
InTotalSetVars The total number of MIB objects which have been altered successfully by the
SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs.
InGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
InGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
InSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
InGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been accepted
and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
InTraps The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
OutTooBigs The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.
OutNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status is 'noSuchName'.
OutBadValues The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.
OutGenErrs The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.
OutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.
OutGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been generated by the
SNMP protocol entity.
OutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.
OutGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.
IDL series User Guide
588
OutTraps The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been generated by the
SNMP protocol entity.
AuthenTraps
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to generate
authentication-failure traps. The value of this object overrides any configuration
infor-mation; as such, it provides a means whereby all au-thentication-failure
traps may be disabled.
SilentDrops
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRe-quest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs
delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped be-cause the size of a
reply containing an alternate Re-sponse-PDU with an empty variable-bindings
field, was greater than, either a local constraint, or the maximum message size
associated with the origi-nator of the request.
ProxyDrops
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNex-tRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs
delivered to the SNMP entity, which were silently dropped, be-cause the
transmission of the (possibly translated) message to a proxy target failed in a
manner (other than a time-out) such that no Response-PDU could be returned.
References:
z SNMP commands.
5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get snmp traphost [ip <ip-address>] [port <port-val >]
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create snmp traphost ip <ip-address > community <community-val > [port
<port-val >] [version v1 | v2c]
IP DSLAM
589
5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete snmp traphost ip < ip-address > [port <port-val >]
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost
Description:
Use this command to modify
Command Syntax:
modify snmp traphost ip <ip> [port <port>] [version v1 | v2c] [severity critical |
major | minor | info]
Parameter:
Name Description
ip<ip-address > This specifies the IP address of the manager where trap is to be sent.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
port <port-val >
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be sent.
Type: Create －Optional
Get － Optional
Modify － Optional
Delete － Optional
version v1 | v2c
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the Manager.
Type: Create－Optional
Get － Optional
Modify － Optional
Default value: v2c
severity critical | major
| minor | info
This specifies the Trap severity which is used for trap classification.The
given trap severity will be used for filtering of traps on per manager basis
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of configured severity
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
IDL series User Guide
590
Example:
$ create snmp traphost ip 172.25.34.34 port 162 community public version v2c
severity minor
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ip Address : 172.25.34.34
Community : public
Port : 162 Version : v2c
Severity : minor
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Ip Address This specifies the IP address of the manager
where trap is to be sent.
Port This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be
sent.
Community This specifies the Community name used in the
trap.
Version This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the
Manager
Severity This specifies the Trap severity which is used for
trap classification.The given trap severity will be
used for filtering of traps on per manager basis
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of
configured severity
IP DSLAM
591
5.24 SNTP Commands
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp cfg
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify sntp cfg [enable | disable]
Parameter:
Name Description
enable|disable
This specifies whether the SNTP service is
enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is
enabled and False means that SNTP is disabled.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Example:
$ modify sntp cfg enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Status : Enable
Output field:
Name Description
Status
This specifies whether the SNTP service is
enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is
enabled and False means that SNTP is disab
IDL series User Guide
592
5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp servaddr
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create sntp servaddr <ip-address>
Example:
$ create sntp servaddr 172.23.3.45
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Server Addr : 172.23.3.45 Status : Standby
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Server Addr This specifies the IP Address of the SNTP
Server.
Status Server is in Use. OR Server is in standby mode
i.e. not in use.
IP DSLAM
593
5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get sntp stats
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset sntp stats
Example:
$ get sntp stats
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Requests count : 0 Response count : 0
Invalid Response count : 0 Lost Response count : 0
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970
Output field:
Field Description
Requests count This specifies the number of requests sent to SNTP
Server.
Responses count This specifies the Number of responses received from SNTP Server.
Invalid Responses
count
This specifies the Number of invalid responses received from SNTP
Server.
Lost Responses count This specifies the number of responses which do not come within
time limit.
Last Time Stamp
[MM/DD/
YYYY::HH:MM:SS]
This specifies time at which the local clock was last set or corrected.
The display format shall be mm/dd/ yyyy:hr:min:sec.
IDL series User Guide
594
5.25 System Commands
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get cbuftrace cfg [module <module-val>]
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg
Description:
Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax:
reset cbuftrace cfg module <module-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
module <module-val> This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified
Type: Reset -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Example:
$ get cbuftrace cfg module GAG
Output:
module : GAG
flow : 3 level : 0xff
Output field:
Field Description
module This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified
flow This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace flow.
level This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace level.
IP DSLAM
595
5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands
5.25.2.1 Commit
Description:
Use this command to commit the active configuration to the flash. This command is
not supported
Command Syntax:
commit [nbsize]
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ commit
Output:
Set Done
Caution:
This command will take some time to execute.
References:
reboot command
Download command.
5.25.2.2 Reboot
Description:
Use this command to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration.
Command Syntax:
reboot [control <nvram|network>] [dataplane <nvram|network>] [config
<network | default | last | backup | clean | minimum | safe >]
IDL series User Guide
596
Parameters:
Name Description
control
<nvram|network>
This specifies whether the control plane binaries are to be
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in
NVRAM are to be used.
Type : Optional
Default value: Binary present in NVRAM.
dataplane
<nvram|network>
This specifies whether the data plane binaries are to be
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in
NVRAM are to be used.
Type: Optional
Default value: Binaries present in NVRAM.
config <network|default|
last|backup|clean|minimu
m>
This specifies the boot configuration – the
<last|backup|clean|minimum> source, from which to boot up.
The boot configuration is set to last automatically, whenever
a commit command is given. The boot configuration being an
optional parameter, if it is not specified, it retains the previous
value. So giving reboot after a commit will result in a reboot
from the committed configuration.
Default: Use Default factory configuration while booting up.
Backup: Use the Backup configuration to boot the system.
Last: Use last committed configuration to boot the system.
Minimum: Use a configuration in which:
• the size command is executed.
• the user (login name and password as root) is created.
• an Ethernet interface with IP address 192.168.1.1 mask
255.255.0.0 is created.
Clean: The system comes up with nothing configured.
Network: The system fetches the default configuration file
from the remote host and system comes up with this default
configuration, fd.cfg.
Type : Optional
Default value: If a reboot is being given for the first time,
then the default value is default. Otherwise, the default value
is the same as what was given the last time.
IP DSLAM
597
Mode:
Super-User.
Example:
$ reboot
Output:
None
Output Fields:
None
References:
Commit command.
5.25.3 System Control Table Commands
5.25.3.1 Create user
Description:
Use this command to create a user account. A maximum two accounts can exist.
Command Syntax:
create user name <user-name> passwd <password> [root|user]
5.25.3.2 Delete user
Description:
Use this command to delete a user login.
Command Syntax:
delete user name <user-name>
5.25.3.3 Get user
Description:
Use this command to display information of all the users. Password information
isnot displayed.
Command Syntax:
get user
IDL series User Guide
598
Parameters:
Name Description
Name <user-name>
This specifies the User Name to be created.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and
any combination of printable
characters excluding “;”
passwd <password>
This specifies the password required by this user to
login to the unit.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and
any combination of printable characters excluding “;”.
Root|user
This indicates the privilege level of the user.
Type : Optional
Default value: user
Example:
$ create user name user1 passwd temp1 user
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Privilege UserName
----------------------
user user1
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
UserName This shows the new user login, which has been cre-ated.
Privilege This represents the privilege level associated with the user
name shown. It may be: user, root
References:
Delete user command.
get user command
passwd related commands.
IP DSLAM
599
5.25.3.4 Passwd
Description:
Use this command to change the password associated with a user login. An
ordinary user may change the password for another user if he knows the old
password. However, the root does not need to know a user’s existing password
before changing it. The passwords are not echoed on to the screen.
Command Syntax:
passwd [name]
Parameters:
Name Description
name
The id of the user whose password is to be
changed. If not specified then the current user is
as-sumed.
Type: Mandatory, if user is logged in through
serial port and user authentication is disabled
through se-rial port. Otherwise, Optional.
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters (All
print-able characters except ‘;‘)
Mode:
Super-User, User.
Example:
Normal Usage
$passwd
Old Password:
New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.
Super User (for ordinary user)
$passwd User1
Enter New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.
IDL series User Guide
600
Output::
None
Caution:
None.
References:
user command
5.25.4 System crash info Commands
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info
Description:
T This command is used to display a list of crashes that were encountered by the
system. This command is not supported on the Flashless system.
Command Syntax:
get system crash info [numentries <numentries-val>] [showview [general |
ctrlandstatusregs | stackregs | stackinfo | altwinregs | stdwinregs |
stdwinregsdetailed | coprocessorregs] +]
Parameters:
Name Description
Numentries
<numentries-val>
This specifies the last <numentries> number of crashes
encountered in the system.
Type: Optional
Valid values: 1 to 128
Default : 1
showview general |
ctrlandstatusregs |
stackregs | stackinfo |
altwinregs | stdwinregs
| stdwinregsdetailed |
coprocessorregs]+
The optional showview parameter shall help the user to view
selective details of the crash dump. The information on any one
or combination of crash dump sections can be retrieved by
ORing the following parameters:
•general
•ctrlandstatusregs
•stackregs
•stackinfo
•altwinregs
•stdwinregs
•stdwinregsdetailed
IP DSLAM
601
•coprocessorregs
Note: You cannot use the stdwinregs and stdwinregsdetailed
parameters simultaneously.
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get system crash info numentries 1 showview general ctrlandstatusregs
stackregs stackinfo altwinregs stdwinregs coprocessorregs
Output:
General crash info
Crash Id : 1 Crash IU : 0
Time of Crash : Thu Jan 01 00:00:43 1970
DP Version : DP_B02_10_15_09_ip1000a
CP Version : COL2.10.3.0.060317
Crash Cause : CP crashed after DP Init
SystemUpTime Days Hours Mins Secs
--------------------------------------------------------
0 0 0 43
User Crash Info :
Control And Status Registers
PSR Reg : 0x940060c7 Wim Reg : 0x1
Single Fault PC : 0x4d3cdb8 Single Fault nPC : 0x4d3cdbc
Double Fault PC : 0x0 Double Fault nPC : 0x0
Y Reg MSW : 0x0 Y Reg LSW : 0x12345678
Single Fault Trap Num : 0x7 Double Fault Trap Num : 0xffffffff
Fault Status Reg : 0x14 Double Fault Reg : 0xcf70
IER : 0x2000 Trap Base Reg : 0x4f7a070
Alternate Window # 0x1f
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x0 : 0x0
Alternate Window # 0x1e
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
IDL series User Guide
602
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x0 : 0x0
Alternate Window # 0x1d
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x0 : 0x0
....
....
....
Alternate Window # 0x18
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x0 : 0x0
Current Standard Window Dump # 0x8
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
New Func Called
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x1 : 0x30800005
1 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x52a7164 : 0x0
2 : 0x7 : 0x0 : 0x5c67400 : 0x2800005
3 : 0x18 : 0x5 : 0x5c67400 : 0x2
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x0 : 0x52bdce0
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x1 : 0xffff : 0x0
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x52bdbb0 : 0x59ec : 0x52bdc18
7 : 0x0 : 0x4f6e040 : 0x0 : 0x4ce765c
Standard Window Dump # 0x9
IP DSLAM
603
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x30800005 : 0x1 : 0x0
1 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x52bde30 : 0xf
2 : 0x7 : 0x2800005 : 0x2 : 0x4fcbf38
3 : 0x18 : 0x2 : 0x5c67400 : 0xf
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x52bdce0 : 0x0 : 0x567
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x0 : 0x5c67000 : 0x51eb851f
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x52bdc18 : 0x0 : 0x52bdc98
7 : 0x0 : 0x4ce765c : 0x0 : 0x4ce591c
Standard Window Dump # 0xa
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x5b70ed0 : 0x542a810
1 : 0x0 : 0xf : 0x52bde18 : 0x0
2 : 0x7 : 0x4fcbf38 : 0x20000000 : 0x5abc6f8
3 : 0x18 : 0xf : 0x0 : 0x542a810
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x567 : 0x4f6cbb8 : 0x5c36448
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x51eb851f : 0xffffffff : 0x5b69300
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x52bdc98 : 0x0 : 0x52bdd18
7 : 0x0 : 0x4ce591c : 0x52bdcd9 : 0x4ce52f0
....
....
....
Wim Window # 0x0
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0
1 : 0x0 : 0xb : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x7 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0
3 : 0x18 : 0x5c67400 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0xffffffff : 0x0 : 0x0
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x52bdff8 : 0x0 : 0x5c67410
7 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x4f62f7c
Standard Window Dump # 0x1
IDL series User Guide
604
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x57e2688
1 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x52bd8e5 : 0x0
2 : 0x7 : 0x0 : 0x1 : 0xf7
3 : 0x18 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0xe7
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x54758a4
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x40
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x5c67410 : 0x8000 : 0x5c67410
7 : 0x0 : 0x4f62f7c : 0x52a69a8 : 0x4d501fc
Standard Window Dump # 0x2
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x57e2688 : 0x944060c2 : 0xedd
1 : 0x0 : 0x0 : 0x4d4bbec : 0x0
2 : 0x7 : 0xf7 : 0x4d4bbf0 : 0x0
3 : 0x18 : 0xe7 : 0x2000708 : 0x0
4 : 0x4f6cca8 : 0x54758a4 : 0x0 : 0x0
5 : 0x144805cc : 0x40 : 0x5c67000 : 0x0
6 : 0x5c67400 : 0x5c67410 : 0x0 : 0x5c67410
7 : 0x0 : 0x4d501fc : 0x1 : 0x4a58968
Coprocessor Register Dump
CCSR Register : 0x2f7f72a7 CCCRC Register : 0x7fffffff
CCPR Register : 0xfe5bf8b7
CCIR Register : 0xffffffff CCIBR Register : 0xffffffff
CCOBR Register : 0xfffffffe CCOR Register : 0xdfffffff
Call Stack at the time of Crash :
StackDepth : CallAddress : Return Address: Frame Ptr : StackPtr
8 : 0x4f6e040 : 0x4ce765c :0x52bdc18 : 0x52bdbb0
7 : 0x4ce765c : 0x4ce591c :0x52bdc98 : 0x52bdc18
6 : 0x4ce591c : 0x4ce52f0 :0x52bdd18 : 0x52bdc98
5 : 0x4ce52f0 : 0x4ce3140 :0x52bdd90 : 0x52bdd18
4 : 0x4ce3140 : 0x4ce333c :0x52bde30 : 0x52bdd90
3 : 0x4ce333c : 0x4ce44dc :0x52bdec8 : 0x52bde30
2 : 0x4ce44dc : 0x4f62830 :0x52bdf90 : 0x52bdec8
Stack dump at the time of Crash:
0x052bb528: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
IP DSLAM
605
0x052bb538: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb548: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb558: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb568: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 27 00 00 00 00
0x052bb578: 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 04 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 00
0x052bb588: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 05 a4 d9 50 00 00 00 00
0x052bb598: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 34 05 a5 14 68
0x052bb5a8: 01 23 45 67 00 00 21 44 00 00 00 00 05 a4 d9 50
0x052bb5b8: 05 2b b5 f0 05 bf c4 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 02
0x052bb5c8: 05 2b bb d8 04 a4 0a 40 00 00 00 17 ff ff ff ff
0x052bb5d8: 05 2b b5 f0 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 15 05 a4 d9 7c
0x052bb5e8: 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 0d 0a 00 40 04 b8 24 78
0x052bb5f8: 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 50 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb608: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb618: 00 00 00 21 00 00 21 47 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x052bb628: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 68 00 00 00 00
0x052bb638: 05 a5 f2 3c 05 2b b0 08 00 00 00 1d 00 00 00 17
0x052bb648: cc cc cc cd 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01
0x052bb658: 00 01 38 00 05 a4 d9 50 ff ff ff bc 00 00 3a d4
0x052bb668: 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 05 26 47 f0
0x052bb678: 00 00 00 00 05 2b b7 28 05 2b bd 88 05 a5 14 50
0x052bb688: 05 2b bd 88 05 2b b7 28 05 a5 14 68 04 a4 43 8c
0x052bb698: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a6 13 2c
0x052bb6a8: 00 00 00 77 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Task for which stack over flow occur
_______________________________________
NO Stack Overflow
Output Fields:
Field Description
Crash Id The crash number.
Crash IU The internal processor number.
Time of Crash This specifies the time of the crash.
DP Version Version of Crashed DP
CP Version Version of Crashed CP
Crash Cause This specifies the crash cause. Following are the possible
causes:
- Ctrl Transfer To CP Failed
IDL series User Guide
606
- Crash in CP self processing
- DP Init Failure
- CP crashed after DP Init
- DP crashed after DP Init
- DP internal Failure
- System in Loop
- Crash in DP Processing
SystemUpTime This specifies the system up time in:
Days : Hours : Minutes : Seconds
PSR Reg This specifies the value of the processor state register at the
time of the crash.
Wim Reg The window invalid mask register.
PC This specifies the value of the program counter at the time of
the crash.
nPC This specifies the value of the next program counter at the
time of the crash.
Y Reg MSW This specifies the value of MSW of the Y Register at the time
of the crash.
Y Reg LSW This specifies the value of LSW of the Y Register at the time of
the crash.
Trap Num This specifies the number of traps that caused the crash.
Trap Base Reg This specifies the value of the Trap Base register at the time of
the crash.
Fault Status Reg This specifies the value of the Fault Status Register at the time
of the crash.
Double Fault Reg This specifies the value of the Double Fault Register at the
time of the crash.
IER This specifies the value of the Implementation Extension
Register at the time of the crash.
Alternate Window - Reg#
Local
For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture
specifies all local register for Alternate Windows # 24 to 31
(0x1f to 0x18).
Alternate Window - Reg#
In
For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture
specifies all input register for Alternate Windows # 24 to
31(0x1f to 0x18).
Standard Window Dump
- Registers - Global
The Sparclet Global register.
Standard Window Dump
- Registers - Out
The output registers of the specified Sparclet Window.
Standard Window Dump The local registers of the specified Sparclet Window.
IP DSLAM
607
- Registers - Local
Standard Window Dump
- Registers - In
The input registers of the specified Sparclet Window.
CCSR Register The CCP Status register.
CCCRC Register The CCP CRC register.
CCPR Register The CCP Polynomial register.
CCIR Register The CCP InReg register.
CCIBR Register The CCP InBuf register.
CCOBR Register The CCP OutBuf register.
CCOR Register The CCP OutReg register.
Stack at the time of the
Crash - StackDepth -
CallAddress
The callee function address.
Stack at the time of the
Crash - StackDepth -
Return Address
The return address back to the caller function.
Stack at the time of the
Crash - StackDepth -
Frame Ptr
The frame pointer at the time of the call.
Stack at the time of the
Crash - StackDepth -
StackPtr
The stack pointer at the time of the call.
Stack dump at the time of
Crash
The stack dump at the time of crash. The total size of the
dump would be the minimum between the hash define 400 and
the total number of bytes actually in the stack.
Tasks for which Stack
Overflow Occurred
In case the crash is due to stack overflow, the task for which
stack overflow has occurred will be displayed here. Otherwise,
it would specify that stack overflow hasn't occurred - meaning
that the crash is due to some other reason.
Note:
The Current Standard Window dump displays the current dump corresponding to
Global, Out, Local, and In.
IDL series User Guide
608
5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo
Description:
This command gets system crash configuration parameters..
Command Syntax:
get system crash configinfo
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo
Description:
This command modifies system crash configuration parameters
Command Syntax:
modify system crash configinfo [action reboot | debug]
Parameters:
Name Description:
Action reboot|debug This parameter defines the state of the system after
a DP IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the
system shall reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to
debug, the system shall not reboot and a CLI prompt
shall be given to the user for further debugging.
Type :Modify - Optional
Valid values : reboot - debug
Example:
$ modify system crash configinfo action reboot
Output:
Crash Config Info : reboot
Output Fields:
Field Description
Crash Config Info This parameter defines the state of the system after a DP
IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the system shall
reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to debug, the system
shall not reboot and a CLI prompt shall be given to the
user for further debugging.
IP DSLAM
609
5.25.5 System info Commands
5.25.5.1 Get system info
Description:
This command to get system parameters.
Command Syntax:
get system info
5.25.5.2 Modify system info
Description:
Use this command to modify the system parameters.
Command Syntax:
modify system info [contact <sys-contact>] [name <sys-name>] [location
<sys-location>] [vendor <sys-vendor-info>] [logthresh <sys-log-threshold>]
[systime <systime>] [dst <on |off>] [timezone <timezone>]
Parameters:
Name Description:
contact <sys-contact> This contains the textual identification of the contact person
for this modem, together with information on how to contact
this person
Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
name <sys-name> This specifies the name of the modem
Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
Location <sys-location> This specifies the physical location of this modem Type:
Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
vendor
<sys-vendor-info>
This contains the vendor-specific information
Type: Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
logthresh
<sys-logthreshold>
This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or lower
than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and represents
critical traps. Changing the parameter’s value in a flashless
system shall have no effect as there is no NVRAM support
present to log traps. Type: Optional
IDL series User Guide
610
Valid values: 1-4
Systime <system-time> This specifies the current system time.
Type: Optional
Valid values: System Time String in format. The total string
length must be 20 characters. Single digits should be
prepended with a `0', e.g. `1' should be given as `01' mon dd
hh:mm:ss year e.g. "Feb 01 21:20:10 2001"
dst <on | off> This specifies if the Daylight Savings Time has been
enabled or not.
Type: Optional
Valid values: on|off
timezone <timezone>
Time zone
Type: Optional
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values withinì ì,
followed by their descriptions.
"IDLW" - International Date Line West
"NT" - Nome
"HST" - Hawaii Standard
ìCAT" - Central Alaska
"AHST"- Alaska-Hawaii Standard
"YST" - Yukon Standard
"PST"- US Pacific Standard
"MST"- US Mountain Standard
"CST"- US Central Standard
"EST"- US Eastern Standard
"AST"- Atlantic Standard
"NFST"- Newfoundland Standard
"NFT"- Newfoundland
"BRST"-Brazil Standard
"AT"- Azores
ìWAT" - West Africa
"GMT" - Greenwich Mean
"UTC" - Universal (Coordinated)
"WET" - Western European
"CET" - Central European
"FWT" - French Winter
"MET" - Middle European
"MEWT" - Middle European Winter
"SWT" - Swedish Winter
"EET" - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1
IP DSLAM
611
"IST" - Israeli Standard
"BT" - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2
"IT" - Iran
"ZP4" - "Russia Zone 3"
"ZP5" - "Russia Zone 4"
"INST" - "Indian Standard"
"ZP6" - "Russia Zone 5"
"NST" - "North Sumatra"
"WAST" - West Australian Standard
"SSMT" - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6
"JT" - Java
"CCT" - China Coast, Russia Zone 7
"ROK" - Korean Standard
"KST" - Korean Standard
"JST" - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8
"CAST" - Central Australian Standard
"EAST" - Eastern Australian Standard
"GST" - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9
"IDLE" - International Date Line East
"NZST" - New Zealand Standard
"NZT" - New Zealand
Example: ìIDLWî , that stands for International Date
Line West
Example:
$ get system info
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Description : Columbia
Name : conexant.com
Location : Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
Contact : Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
Vendor : Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A
LogThreshold : 0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.200
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 5:2:0
HwVersion : c023b6d3
IDL series User Guide
612
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.3.0.040707
DPSwVersion :
System Time : Thu Jan 01 05:02:00 1970
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end applications
Output Fields:
Field Description
Description This is a textual description of the entity.
Name This specifies the name of the system.
Location This specifies the physical location of this node.
Contact This shows the textual identification of the contact person
for this managed node, together with the information on
how to contact this person.
Vendor This shows the vendor-specific information.
LogThreshold This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or
lower than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and
represents critical traps.
Object-id This shows the vendor's authoritative identification of the
network management subsystem contained in the entity.
Up Time This specifies the time in seconds since the system is up.
HwVersion This specifies the hardware and firmware version of the
system.
CPSwVersion This specifies the software version of the CP.
DPSwVersion This specifies the software version of the DP.
System Time This shows the current system time.
Time Zone This specifies the time zone that has been set on the
modem.
DST This specifies whether Daylight Saving Time has been
enabled or not.
Services This specifies the functionality provided by this node.
These may be: physical, datalink, internet, end-to-end, or
applications.
References:
Get/modify nbsize
Get system stats
IP DSLAM
613
5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime
Description:
Use this command to display a list of idle time records.
Command Syntax:
get rmon idletime [numentries <numentries-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description:
Numentries
<numentries-val>
This specifies last numentries idle time records
to be displayed
Type: Optional
Valid values : 1 to 6
Default : 10
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get rmon idletime numentries 1
Output:
$get rmon idletime numentries 1
Start Time End Time Total
Idle Util %
Time Time
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thu Jan 1 12:34:51 1970 Thu Jan 1 12:35:00 1970 10s 7s 30
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Start Time This specifies the starting time of the period for
which the idle time was recorded
End Time This specifies the end time of the period for
which the idle time was recorded
Total Time This specifies the total time (in seconds) elapsed
in this period.
Idle Time This specifies the time (in seconds) for which the
IDL series User Guide
614
system was idle during this period.
Util % This specifies the Utilization (in percentage) of
the system during this period
5.25.6 System manuf info Commands
5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info
Description:
This command is used to display manufacturing text information in the system.
Command Syntax:
get system manuf info
Example:
$ get system manuf info
Output:
CpeUtopiaMode : Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
NetUtopiaMode : Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
CpeUtopiaMaster : True NetUtopiaMaster : False
MaxEthMacPhy : 2 ColumbiaIdSel : 18
CpeUtopiaFreq : 40 MHz
Eth Speed : 100 Mbps
S.No | SelfMacAddr | EthPortIdSel | EthType
---------------------------------------------------
1 | 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF | 16 | Data Mgmt
2 | 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FE | 17 | Data Mgmt
Dsl manuf Text Info
---------------------
Num of LBRams : 2 Num of Chips : 2
Num of Ports : 24 Interface Type : Host Bus
Chip Type : G24
Serial Number : <co-0123456>
Vendor Id : FFBSGSPN
Version Number : Z3219
Chip No Base Addr LBRam
-------------------------------
IP DSLAM
615
1 0x84a00000 0
2 0x84a00c00 1
Logical To Physical Port Mapping
--------------------------------
[ 0 - 7 ] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[ 8 - 15 ] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
[ 16 - 23 ] 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
[ 24 - 31 ] 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
[ 32 - 39 ] 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
[ 40 - 47 ] 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
UART manuf Text Info
---------------------
Num of UARTs : 1
HSSL Port Id : 1 Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits : 8 Stop Bit : 2
Parity : Even UART Mode : Polling
Application Type : Console
$
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
CpeUtopiaMode Mode of operation of CPE side Utopia interface
NetUtopiaMode Mode of operation of NET side Utopia interface
CpeUtopiaMaster This specifies whether CPE side Utopia interface is master
NetUtopiaMaster This specifies whether NET side Utopia interface is
master
MaxEthMacPhy This specifies the maximum number of MACs that can be
configured
ColumbiaIdSel Specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which is connected
to IDSEL pin of the Columbia
CpeUtopiaFreq CPE Frequency for Utopia Interface
Eth Speed This specifies the speed of operation. Supported speeds
are – 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps. It is a bitmask.
SelfMacAddr This specifies the self MAC address
EthPortIdSel This specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which
is connected to IDSEL pin of the Ethernet device
IDL series User Guide
616
EthType This specifies the Defines the ethernet types – data
, mgmt, or both. It is a bitmask.
Num of LBRams This specifies the number of LBRams in the system.
Num of Chips This specifies the number of Chips in the system.
Num of Ports This specifies the number of Ports per Chip in the system.
Interface Type This specifies the InterfaceType. Following are the values it
can take – Host Bus, PCI, Utopia
Chip Type This specifies the Type of Chip – G24, G16, and octane.
Serial Number This specifies the vendor specific string that identifies the
vendor equipment.
Vendor Id This specifies the binary vendor identification field.
Version Number This specifies the vendor specific version number
sent by this ATU as part of the initialization message
Base Addr This specifies the base address of the chip.
LBRam This specifies the LBRam associated with the chip
Logical To Physical
Port Mapping This specifies the Logical To Physical Port Mapping.
No of UARTs This specifies the number of UARTs configured.
HSSL Port Id This specifies the HSSL port to be used for UART.
Baud Rate This specifies the Baud Rate of the port
Data Bits This specifies the number of data bits to be used
Stop Bit This specifies the stop bits used on HSSL – 1, 2, 1.5
Parity This specifies the parity used on HSSL – even, odd, none
UART Mode This specifies the UART Mode – polling, interrupt based
Application Type This specifies the application name using this UART.
5.25.7 System reboot info Commands
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info
Description:
This command is used for displaying a list of reboot failures that were encountered
when the system was trying to come up.
Command Syntax:
get system reboot info [numentries]
IP DSLAM
617
Parameters:
Name Description:
numentries
<numentries-val>
This specifies the last <numentries> number of
reboot failures recorded in the system.
Type: Optional
Valid values : 1 to 100
Default : 1
Example:
$ get system reboot info numentries 1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
CP Bin Version : 1.6
DP Bin Version : 1.8
Time of Reboot : Thu Jan 2 12:34:56 1970
Reboot Failure Cause : DP Init Failure
Reboot Type : Secondary CFG
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Control Plane Version The control Plane Version with which the system
could not come up.
Data Plane Version The data Plane Version with which the system
could not come up.
Time of Reboot Time at which the reboot failure occured.
Type of Reboot
This tells the type of reboot with which the
system is trying to come up. The various possible
values are :-
Last, Back Up, Default, Minimum, Clean.
Failure Cause
This tells the various causes of failure that
system encountered while rebooting. It can be :-
Sdram CP Decompress failed
Nvram CP Decompress failed
Sdram DP Decompress failed
Nvram DP Decompress failed
DP Init Failure
Nvm CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch ＃
IDL series User Guide
618
Sdram CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP All DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP All DP CI Mismatch
Applying Last cfg failed
Applying BackUp cfg failed
Applying Min cfg failed
Applying Nvm FD failed
Applying Sdram FD failed
Nvm CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
NVRAM CP had invalid sign
SDRAM CP had invalid sign
Control Plane wrongly linked
CP mem req exceeds limit
Applying Clean cfg Failed
5.25.8 Nbize Commands
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize
Description:
Use this command to view System Sizing parameters available on next boot.
Command Syntax:
get nbsize
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize
Description:
Use this command to modify System Sizing parameters available on next boot.
Command Syntax:
modify nbsize [ maxatmport <maxatmport-val> ] [ maxvcperport
<maxvcperport-val> ] [ maxvc <maxvc-val> ] [ maxatmoam <maxatmoam-val> ]
[ maxrmon <maxrmon-val> ] [ maxnumethprioqs <maxnumethprioqs-val> ]
[ maxnumeoaprioqs <maxnumeoaprioqs-val> ] [ maxmulticast
<maxmulticast-val> ] [ maxmac <maxmac-val> ] [ maxhashbuck
<maxhashbuck-val> ] [ maxnumvlan <maxnumvlan-val> ] [ maxvlanidval
<maxvlanidval-val> ] [ maxnumacentry <maxnumacentry-val> ] [ devcap IVL |
IP DSLAM
619
SVL | none ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted | Residential ]
[ maxhpriotreenodes <maxhpriotreenodes-val> ] [ maxlpriotreenodes
<maxlpriotreenodes-val> ] [ maxclfrtrees <maxclfrtrees-val> ] [ maxclfrprofiles
<maxclfrprofiles-val> ] [ maxinrules <maxinrules-val> ] [ maxoutrules
<maxoutrules-val> ] [ maxinhpriosubrules <maxinhpriosubrules-val> ]
[ maxinlpriosubrules <maxinlpriosubrules-val> ] [ maxouthpriosubrules
<maxouthpriosubrules-val> ] [ maxoutlpriosubrules <maxoutlpriosubrules-val> ]
[ mcastcap ivmcapable | svmcapable | none ] [ ridcap irdcapable | srdcapable ]
[ maxnumac <maxnumac-val> ] [ maxnumsrcmac <maxnumsrcmac-val> ]
[ vlanmode nativemode | stackedmode ] [ svlanprotocolid
<svlanprotocolid-val> ] [ tvlanprotocolid <tvlanprotocolid-val> ] [ tvlanid
<tvlanid-val> ] [ abondglbctrlvpi <abondglbctrlvpi-val> ] [ abondglbctrlvci
<abondglbctrlvci-val> ] [ abondglbsidfmt EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ]
Parameters:
Name Description
maxatmport
<maxatmport-val>
Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -144
maxvcperport
<maxvcperport-val>
Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port. Type:
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
maxvc <maxvc-val> Maximum number of VCs possible in the system. Type:
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - (144 * 8)
maxatmoam
<maxatmoam-val>
Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a
time.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 10
maxrmon <maxrmon-val> Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied
simultaneously in the system
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 20
maxnumethprioqs
<maxnumethprioqs-val>
This specifies the max number of priority queues that can
be configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet
interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
maxnumeoaprioqs
<maxnumeoaprioqs-val>
This specifies the max number of priority queues that can
be configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface
IDL series User Guide
620
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -8
maxmulticast
<maxmulticast-val>
Maximum number of multicast groups that can be
configured in the system
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
maxmac <maxmac-val> Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by
the system. This should be a multiple of 32
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4000
maxhashbuck
<maxhashbuck-val>
Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.
This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8192
maxnumvlan
<maxnumvlan-val>
Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the
Bridge either statically or dynamically
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 512
maxvlanidval
<maxvlanidval-val>
Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
maxnumacentry
<maxnumacentry-val>
Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be
configured on the Bridge
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 512
devcap IVL | SVL | none Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked
Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans. Type: Modify －
Optional
bridgingmode Restricted
|Unrestricted |
Residential
This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value
residential species that packets coming from CPE side
would be forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In
case of restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a
lookup and if the destination is another CPE port, the packet
would be dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed.
Unrestricted bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all
cases.
Type: Modify － Optional
maxhpriotreenodes
<maxhpriotreenodes-val>
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access
priority that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional
IP DSLAM
621
Valid values: 1 -32
maxlpriotreenodes
<maxlpriotreenodes-val>
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access
priority that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -256
maxclfrtrees
<maxclfrtrees-val>
Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 63
maxclfrprofiles
<maxclfrprofiles-val>
Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 61
maxinrules
<maxinrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is
ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -275
maxoutrules
<maxoutrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is
ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 -25
maxinhpriosubrules
<maxinhpriosubrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -75
maxinlpriosubrules
<maxinlpriosubrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -425
maxouthpriosubrules
<maxouthpriosubrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
Valid values: 1 -25
maxoutlpriosubrules
<maxoutlpriosubrules-val>
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －
Optional
IDL series User Guide
622
Valid values: 1 -175
mcastcap ivmcapable
|svmcapable | none
It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device
capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value.
If the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable
then the only valid value for this field is none. If the device
capability is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't
have value none. ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set
together.In case of Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to
Virtual Vlans.
Type: Modify － Optional
ridcap irdcapable
|srdcapable
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This
database contains information about the routes in the
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on
the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,
IRD( Independent Routing Database) where there are more
than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate
routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have
been created and the routing database is configured for
IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define flow for packets
coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other mode for the database
is SRD( Shared Routing Database) where there is a single
RID in the system and all flows map to this RID. This RID
has to be explicitly created and no more than 1 RID can be
created in the system in this mode. Flows for all created
VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
Type: Modify － Optional
maxnumac
<maxnumac-val>
It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators
supported.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
maxnumsrcmac
<maxnumsrcmac-val>
It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses
that can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE
interfaces.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 8
vlanmode nativemode
|stackedmode
Vlan Mode Type: Modify Optional
svlanprotocolid
<svlanprotocolid-val>
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
IP DSLAM
623
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x8100 - 0xFFFF
tvlanprotocolid
<tvlanprotocolid-val>
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan (0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0x8100 － 0xFFFF
tvlanid <tvlanid-val> This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
abondglbctrlvpi
<abondglbctrlvpi-val>
This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will
be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot
only.
Type: Modify － Optional
abondglbctrlvci
<abondglbctrlvci-val>
This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will
be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot
only.
Type: Modify － Optional
abondglbsidfmt
EightBitSid |
TwelveBitSid
This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group
Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in
this value will be applied at next boot only.
Type: Modify － Optional
Example:
$ get nbsize
IDL series User Guide
624
Output:
Max ATM Ports : 48 Max VC per Port : 8
Max VCs : 384 Max OAM activities : 10
Max RMON probes : 20 Bridging Mode :
Residential
Max Multicast groups : 256 Max MAC addresses : 4000
Max Hash buckets : 8192 Max Vlans : 512
Max VlanId Value : 4095 Max num Static Mac Entries : 512
Dev Capabilities : IVL
Max Num EOA Prio Qs : 3 Max Num Eth Prio Qs : 8
Max High Prio Tree Nodes : 100 Max Low Prio Tree Nodes : 200
Max Clfr Trees : 63 Max Clfr Profiles : 63
Max In Rules : 250 Max Out Rules : 50
Max In HighPrio SubRules : 100 Max In LowPrio SubRules : 300
Max Out HighPrio SubRules : 50 Max Out LowPrio SubRules : 150
Mcast Capabilities : ivmcapable
Max Access Concentrators : 2
Max Src MAC Addresses : 4
Vlan Mode : 1
S Vlan Protocol Id : 0x9100 T Vlan Protocol Id : 0x9200
T Vlan Id : 1
AbondGlbCtrlVpi : 0 AbondGlbCtrlVci : 20
AbondGlbSidFmt : TwelveBitSID
Ridcap : srdcapable
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Max ATM Ports Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured
Max VC per Port Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port.
Max VCs Maximum number of VCs possible in the system.
Max OAM activities Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a time.
Max RMON probes Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied
simultaneously in the system
Bridging Mode This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value
residential species that packets coming from CPE side would be
forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In case of
restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a lookup and if
the destination is another CPE port, the packet would be
dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed. Unrestricted
bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all cases.
IP DSLAM
625
Max Multicast groups Maximum number of multicast groups that can be configured in
the system
Max MAC addresses Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the
system. This should be a multiple of 32
Max Hash buckets Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.
This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)
Max Vlans Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the
Bridge either statically or dynamically
Max VlanId Value Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support
Max num Static Mac
Entries
Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be
configured on the Bridge
Dev Capabilities Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked Vlan
Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.
Max Num EOA Prio Qs This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be
configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface
Max Num Eth Prio Qs This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be
configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet interface.
Max High Prio Tree
Nodes
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access priority
that can be created.
Max Low Prio Tree
Nodes
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access priority
that can be created.
Max Clfr Trees Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.
Max Clfr Profiles Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.
3Max In Rules Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.
Max Out Rules Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.
Max In HighPrio
SubRules
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.
Max In LowPrio
SubRules
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.
Max Out HighPrio
SubRules
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high
access priority that can be created.This parameter is
deprecated and the value is ignored.
Max Out LowPrio
SubRules
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low access
priority that can be created.This parameter is deprecated and
the value is ignored.
Mcast Capabilities It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device
IDL series User Guide
626
capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value. If
the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable then
the only valid value for this field is none. If the device capability
is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't have value none.
ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set together.In case of
Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.
Max Access
Concentrators
It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators
supported.
Max Src MAC
Addresses
It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses that
can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE interfaces.
Vlan Mode Vlan Mode
S Vlan Protocol Id This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
T Vlan Protocol Id This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
T Vlan Id This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is
recommended to keep the value for this different from
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.
AbondGlbCtrlVpi This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will be
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.
AbondGlbCtrlVci This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will be
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.
AbondGlbSidFmt This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group
Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this
value will be applied at next boot only.
Ridcap RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database
IP DSLAM
627
contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The
database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent Routing
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and the routing
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than
1 RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for all
created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.
5.25.9 System Stats Commands
5.25.9.1 Get system stats
Description:
Use this command to view System Statistics.
Command Syntax:
get system stats
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats
Description:
Use this command to reset System Statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset system stats
Example:
$ get system stats
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Verbose Mode On
CPE Ucast Addr Count : 10 DnLink Ucast Addr Count : 80
NET Ucast Addr Count : 20 CPE Learn Entry Discards : 90
IDL series User Guide
628
DnLink Learn Entry Discards : 30 NET Learn Entry Discards : 100
Dyn Addr Conflicts Static : 40 Moved Dyn Addrs Count : 110
Ucast Lookup Fail Count : 50 Mcast Lookup Fail Count : 120
Tx Ctl Pkts Count : 60 Rx Ctl Pkts Count : 130
Ctl Pkts Discards Count : 70
PPPOE Session Look Up Failures: 5
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
CPE Ucast Addr
Count
Number of unicast addresses, which were learned from the
CPE ports.
DnLink Ucast Addr
Count
Number of unicast addresse,s which were learned from the
Downlink port.
Learn Entry Discards Number of addresses which, were not learned from the
CPE ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.
DnLink Learn Entry
Discards
Number of addresses which, were not learned from the
Downlink port, due to lack of space in the for-warding
table.
Dyn Addr Conflicts
Static
Number of times a learned address conflicted with a static
address.
Moved Dyn Addrs
Count
Number of times a learned address moved from one port
to another.
Ucast Lookup Fail
Count Number of times Unicast address lookup failed.
Mcast Lookup Fail
Count Number of times Multicast address lookup failed.
Tx Ctl Pkts Count Number of packets sent to the Control module.
Rx Ctl Pkts Count Number of packets received from Control module.
Ctl Pkts Discards
Count Number Control module packets discarded.
NumNetUcastAddrCo
unt
Number of unicast addresses which were learned from the
Net ports.
NumNetLearnEntryDi
scards
Number of addresses, which were not learned from the
Net ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.
References:
get/modify system info
get/modify nbsize
IP DSLAM
629
5.25.10 System Traps Commands
5.25.10.1 Reset traps
Description:
Use this command to delete all trap logs.
Command Syntax:
reset traps
Mode :
super-user
Example:
$ reset traps
Output:
Set Done
Output Fields:
None
References:
get traps command.
5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands
5.25.11.1 Get traps
Description:
Use this command to get the listing of all Trap Log Table entries (tTraps) or the last
few tentries (Traps). This command is not supported on a flashless system.
Command Syntax:
get traps [num-of-traps]
IDL series User Guide
630
Parameters:
Name Description
Num-of-traps This specifies the maximum number of (entries)
traps to be displayed from trap log table; if not
specified then all entries are displayed.
Type: Optional
Valid values : 0 to 4294967295
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$ get traps
Output
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ATM VC Up :Interface Name–
aal5-0
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : System Up
Output Fields
FIELD Description
Trap time This specifies the time at which the trap was logged.
Trap severity This specifies the severity level of the trap. It can be –
CRITICAL ALARM
MAJOR ALARM
WARNING
STATUS ALARM
Trap name
This specifies the name of the trap. It can be –
System Init Failed - This trap is originated at the time of system initialization
failures. The failure could be due to an internal error or due to a
wrong/corrupted configuration file. Trap parameters are Module and Cause.
System Up - This trap is originated after the unit boots up successfully.
ADSL ATUC Up - This trap indicates that the DSL port is in data mode.
ADSL ATUC Down - This trap indicates that the DSL port is no longer in data
mode.
ATM Interface Up - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally up.
Trap parameter is Interface No.
ATM Interface Down - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally
down. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ETHER Interface Up - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is
IP DSLAM
631
operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ETHER Interface Down - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface No.
ATM VC Up - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally up. Trap
parameter is Interface Name.
ATM VC Down - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally down.
Trap parameter is Interface Name.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.
EoA Interface Up – This trap indicates that the EOA interface is
operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface name
EOA Interface Down - This trap indicates that the EOA Interface is
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface Name.
ADSL Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Framing
15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Signal
15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL Loss of Power Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Power
15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Errored
Second 15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL ADUC Tx Rate changed - This trap indicates that the ATUCs transmit
rate has changed (RADSL mode only).
ADSL Loss of Link Threshold hit- This trap indicates that Loss of Link
15-minute interval threshold has reached
ADSL ATUC Init failed - This trap indicates that ATUC initialization failed. See
adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons
ADSL Failed Fast Retrains Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Failed
Fast Retrains 15-minute threshold has reached
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This
trap indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored
Seconds has reached.
IDL series User Guide
632
ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
ADSL Unavailable Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
unavailable seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached
ADSL Severely Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
severely errored seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached.
Aggregator Interface Up - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface is
operationally up.
Aggregator Interface Down - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface
is operationally down.
The OP state of ADSL line <interface name> has changed from <previous
status> to <current status>- This trap indicates the change in the operational
status of the port.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This
trap indicates that Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of
Signal 15-minute interval threshold has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power Threshold hit - This rap indicates that Loss of
Power 15-minute interval threshold has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Rate Changed -This trap indicates that the ATUR rate has
changed (RADSL mode only).
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the
mac address has been learned has changed.
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the
tracked MAC address is being received has changed.
Port binding status learnt - This trap indicates that the particular mac
address has been received for the first time. This trap will also be received if
the tracked MAC address is received from an existing port and the port from
IP DSLAM
633
which it was earlier received has been deleted by now.
Failed To Get IP Address - This trap indicates that DHCP client could not
get an ip address from DHCP server.
Chip Lockup Detected - This trap indicates that a chip lockup has occurred.
Chip Recovery from Lockup OK - This trap indicates that Chip Recovery
from Lockup has occurred.
Chip Recovery from Lockup Failed - This trap indicates that Chip
Recovery from Lockup has Failed.
Chip Preinit CheckSum Failed - This trap indicates that Preinit Checksum
for Chip has Failed
Xcvr Lockup Detected - This trap indicates that a transceiver lockup has
occurred.
Xcvr Recovery from Lockup OK - This trap indicates that a transceiver
Recovery from Lockup has occurred.
Xcvr Recovery from Lockup Failed - This trap indicates that a transceiver
Recovery from Lockup has Failed
EHDLC Interface Up - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is
operationally up. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.
EHDLC Interface Down - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is
operationally down. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.
Control packet Q congestion start - This trap indicates that Congestion
has occurred on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.
Control packet Q congestion stop - This trap indicates that Congestion has
stopped on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.
Statistics Reset - This trap indicates that Interface Stats has been reset .
ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that 1-Day
interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.
ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates
that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has reached.
IDL series User Guide
634
ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.
ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.
ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds
has reached.
ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has
reached.
PPPOE Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
PPPOE Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.
PPPOE Max Tries in Discovery Stage have exceeded for a PPPoE - This
trap indicates that the maximum tries for initiation of discovery stage for the
PPPoE session establishment has exceeded for the PPPoE interface. The
Trap parameter is the interface name.
PPPR Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
PPPR Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.
Lock on GAG acquired: This trap specifies that an agent has acquired an
exclusive lock on GAG. Requests from other agents will not be serviced by
GAG.
IP DSLAM
635
Lock on GAG released: This trap specifies that an agent has released lock on
GAG. Requests from other agents will now be serviced by GAG.
Bridge port status transitioned to dormant : This trap specifies that bridge
port status has changed to dormant.
ATM interface out of deficit : This trap specifies that ATM interface is out of
deficit.
ATM VC AAL5 EncapType Changed : This trap specifies that encapsulation
type of ATM VC AAL5 has changed.
AutoSensing Config Change Based Stack Tear DownFailed, RETRY:
Change of Power Management State of ADSL Line: This trap specifies that
power management state of ADSL line has changed.Chip Local Bus Access
Failed: This trap specifies that power management state of ADSL line has
changed.
IPOA Interface Up: This trap indicates that theIPOA interface is operationally
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.I
POA Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOA interface is
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.
IPOE Interface Up: This trap indicates that thePPPR interface is operationally
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
IPOE Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOE interface is
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.
ABOND Interface Up: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
ABOND Interface Down: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
VCAGGR Interface Up: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.
VCAGGR Interface Down: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL Loop Attenuation crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop
attenuation is crossing.
SHDSL SNR crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop attenuation is
crossing.
SHDSL Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap indicates that
15-Minute interval threshold for SHDSL Errored Seconds has reached.
SHDSL Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap
indicates that 15- minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored
Seconds has reached.
SHDSL CRC Anomalies 15-Minute Threshold hit: This notification indicates
that the CRC anomalies threshold (as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile
IDL series User Guide
636
table) has been reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint.
Reached/exceeded is determined by comparing the endpoint's CRC
anomalies in the current 15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr
Table) with the specified threshold.
SHDSL Loss of Sync Word Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This
notification indicates that the Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) seconds threshold
(as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile table) has been
reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint. Reached/exceeded is
determined by comparing the endpoint's LOSW seconds in the current
15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr Table) with the specified
threshold.
SHDSL Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This trap indicates
that 15-minuteinterval threshold for SHDSL Unavailable Secondshas reached.
SHDSL Invalid number of Repeaters detected: This trap indicates the
number of Invalid repeaters detected.
SHDSL Loopback Failure detected:This trap indicates that loop back failure
has been detected.
SHDSL Power Backoff Setting changed: This trap specifies that Operational
state of VDSL line has changed.
SHDSL STU-C Init Fail: This notification indicates that STUC failure during
initialization due to peer STU not able to support requested configuration
SHDSL Local Power Loss: This trap specifies that local power loss of SHDSL
Change of OP state of SHDSL line: This trap specifies change of Operational
state of VDSL line.
SHDSL Framer OH and Defects Trap: This notification indicates a change in
values of overhead/defect data transmitted from the remote unit. LOSD,
SEGA, PS, and SEGD values are reported.
SHDSL STU-C Up: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is operationally
up. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL STU-C Down: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.
SHDSL Remote ATM Cell Status Response: This trap indicates that remote
ATM Cell status response has been received.
SHDSL UTC received in response of STU-R Config Request: This
notification indicates the remote unit was unable to comply (UTC) with an
STU-R Configuration Request -Management (EOC Message Id 18).
SHDSL UTC received in response of Remote EOC request: This
notification provides a generic unable to comply(UTC) indication. If the remote
unit is unable to comply with a remote EOC request, this trap indicates the
noncompliance of the remote unit.
SHDSL Generic Failure Trap: This notification reports any failure that has
IP DSLAM
637
occurred while processing any command issued by the customer.
Trap parameters This specifies additional parameters describing the trap. Different traps have
different combinations of trap parameters. There are also some traps with no
additional parameters. The parameters can be -
Module - <module name>
Cause - <failure cause>
Interface - <interface name>
<user name>
IP - <IP address>
Port - <port number>
VPI - <vpi>
VCI - <vci>
Current - <current value>
Threshold - <threshold value>
Previous - <previous value>
References:
z reset traps command
z logthresh parameter in modify system and get system commands.
5.25.12 System Version Commands
5.25.12.1 Get system version
Description:
This command is used to get the information of the versions with which the system
has come up.
Command Syntax:
get system version
Parameters:
None
Example:
$ get system version
IDL series User Guide
638
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Control Plane Binary : COL 2.6.0.0.040217
Data Plane Binary : DP_B02_06_19
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Control Plane Binary This tells about the version of the control plane
binary with which the system has come up.
Data Plane Binary This tells about the version of the data plane binary
with which the system has come up.
5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg
Description:
Use this command to display the trace configuration for a specific module, or for all
modules.
Command Syntax:
get trace cfg [module <module-name>]
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg
Description:
Use this command to modify the trace and log configuration for a specific module
Command Syntax:
modify trace cfg module <module-name> [flow <trace-flow>] [level <trace-level>]
[syslog|net|stdout] [dest <ip-address>] [port <port-number>]
Parameters:
Name Description
module
<module-name>|all
This specifies the module, for which trace/log configuration
is to be modified.
Type : Modify – Mandatory
Get – Optional
Valid values: GCOS,OAM, CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM,
EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM, FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP,
IP DSLAM
639
GVRP, LACP
flow<trace-flow> This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter
for trace flow.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff
level <trace-level> This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter
for trace level.
Type : Optional
Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff
syslog|net|stdout This specifies the type of logging to be done. Incase net or
syslog is specified then dest and port must be specified.
Type: Optional
dest<ip-address> This specifies the IP address for host for logging for trace
type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace type stdout
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;
else it is invalid
Valid values: Any valid class A/B/C IP address
port <port-number> Port number on which, host is listening for trace info to be
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid
incase of trace type stdout
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;
else it is invalid
Valid values: 0-4294967295
Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ modify trace cfg module GAG flow 0x1 level 0x1
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Module Flow Level Type Destn Port
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GAG 0x0 0x0 Stdout 0.0.0.0 0
Set Done
Module Flow Level Type Destn Port
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GAG 0x1 0x1 Stdout 0.0.0.0 0
IDL series User Guide
640
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Module This specifies the module for trace/log config whose
information is being displayed: It can be : GCOS,OAM,
CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM, EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM,
FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP, GVRP, LACP
Flow This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the
filter for trace flow.
Level This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the
filter for trace level.
Type This specifies the type of logging to be done. It may be:
Syslog, Net, Stdout
Destn This specifies the IP address for host for logging for
trace type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace
type stdout
Port Port number on which host is listening for trace info to be
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid
incase of trace type stdout
References:
z get trace cfg command
z get trace stats command.
5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats
Description:
Use this command to display trace statistics.
Command Syntax:
get trace stats
Parameters:
None
IP DSLAM
641
Mode:
Super-User, User.
Example:
$ get trace stats
Output:
Verbose Mode On/Off
Bytes Logged: 2744 Bytes Discarded : 40595
Msgs Logged : 19 Msgs Discarded : 1045
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Bytes Logged This specifies the number of bytes logged by the
tracing/logging module.
Bytes Discarded This specifies the number of bytes discarded by
the tracing/ logging module due to filtering.
Msgs Logged This specifies the number of message logged by
the tracing/ logging module.
Msgs Discarded This specifies the number of messages discarded
by the tracing/logging module due to filtering.
References:
z get trace cfg command
z Modify trace cfg command.
IDL series User Guide
642
5.26 VC Aggregation Commands
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm vcaggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm vcaggr intf ifname <interface-name> mapid <mapid-val>
defaultdnstrmvc <defaultdnstrmvc-val> [enable | disable]
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm vcaggr intf ifname<interface-name>
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vcaggr intf ifname <interface-name> [defaultdnstrmvc
<defaultdnstrmvc-val>] [enable | disable]
IP DSLAM
643
Parameters:
Name Description
ifname <interface-name> Name of the VC aggregation interface
Type: Create － Mandatory
Delete － Mandatory
Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 142
mapid <mapid-val> It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap table. The
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being aggregated and the
priority assignment information. Once the aggregation interface is
created with the specified MapId, no more entries canbe created in
the VcAggrMap table for that MapId, however the priority
assignment can be modified any time
Type: Create － Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 144
defaultdnstrmvc
<defaultdnstrmvc-val>
Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All the downstream
priorities that are left unassigned in the VcAggrMap table with the
associated MapId, will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in the VcAggrMap
table.
Type: Create － Mandatory
Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 － 574
enable | disable Administrative status of the interface.
Type: Create － Optional
Modify － Optional
Valid values: enable, disable
Default value: enable
Example:
$ create atm vcaggr intf ifname VcAggr-0 mapid 1 defaultdnstrmvc aal5-0 enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ifname : VcAggr-0 VC MapId : 1
default downstream VC : aal5-0
IDL series User Guide
644
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Down
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Ifname Name of the VC aggregation interface
VC MapId It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap
table. The VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs
being aggregated and the priority assignment
information. Once the aggregation interface is
created with the specified MapId, no more entries
canbe created in the VcAggrMap table for that
MapId, however the priority assignment can be
modified any time
default downstream
VC
Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All
the downstream priorities that are left unassigned
in the VcAggrMap table with the associated MapId,
will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in
the VcAggrMap table.
Oper Status The actual/current state of the interface. It can be
either up or down.
Admin Status The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Up or Down.
5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get atm vcaggr map [mapid <mapid-val>] [vc <vc-val>]
IP DSLAM
645
5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val> vc <vc-val> [dnstrmpriolist
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio <upstrmdefprio-val> |none]
[upstrmregenprio <upstrmregenprio-val> |none]
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val>vc <vc-val>
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val> vc <vc-val> [dnstrmpriolist
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio <upstrmdefprio-val> |none]
[upstrmregenprio <upstrmregenprio-val> |none]
Parameters:
Name Description
mapid <mapid-val> It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being
aggregated and the associated priorities in
downstream and upstream directions. Once the
VC aggregation interface is created with the a
MapId, no more entries can be created in the
VcAggrMap table for that MapId
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 24
IDL series User Guide
646
vc <vc-val> Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 101 -206
dnstrmpriolist 0 | 1 | 2 |
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none
This field specifies the downstream priorities with
which the specified VC interface shall be
associated under a VC Aggregation interface.
This field is used for demultiplexing downstream
traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities.
But not two VCs can be mapped to same priority.
Value None has special significance. It specifies
that this VC is part of VC Aggregation interface
but no priority is mapped to it.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 8
upstrmdefprio
<upstrmdefprio-val>
Priority parameter to be used for tagging the
untagged upstream traffic coming on a VC.
Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is
specified, then bridge port's defprio will be used
for tagging the untagged packets
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 -8
Default value: 8
upstrmregenprio
<upstrmregenprio-val>
Priority parameter to be used for retagging the
tagged upstream traffic coming on a
VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is
specified, then bridge port's priority regeneration
map will be used.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 8
Default value: 8
IP DSLAM
647
Example:
$ create atm vcaggr map mapid 1 vc aal5-0 dnstrmpriolist 1 3 7 upstrmdefprio 2
upstrmregenprio 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VC map Id : 1 VC Intf : aal5-0
Up Stream Default Priority : 2 Up Stream Regen Priority : 2
Downstream priority Map : 1 3 7
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
Field Description
VC map Id It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The VcAggrMap contains
the list of VCs being aggregated and the associated priorities in
downstream and upstream directions. Once the VC aggregation
interface is created with the a MapId, no more entries can be
created in the VcAggrMap table for that MapId
VC Intf Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.
Up Stream Default
Priority
Priority parameter to be used for tagging the untagged upstream
traffic coming on a VC. Regeneration of priority at bridge level will
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then
bridge port's defprio will be used for tagging the untagged packets
Up Stream Regen
Priority
Priority parameter to be used for retagging the tagged upstream
traffic coming on a VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then
bridge port's priority regeneration map will be used.
Downstream priority
Map
This field specifies the downstream priorities with which the
specified VC interface shall be associated under a VC
Aggregation interface. This field is used for demultiplexing
downstream traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities. But
not two VCs can be mapped to same priority. Value None has
special significance. It specifies that this VC is part of VC
Aggregation interface but no priority is mapped to it.
IDL series User Guide
648
5.27 VLAN Commands
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info
Description:
Use this command to get GVRP information.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp info
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info
Description:
Use this command to modify GVRP information.
Command Syntax:
modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable | disable
Parameter:
Name Description
gvrpstatus enable | disable The administrative status requested by management for GVRP
Type: Optional
Example:
$ modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable
Output:
Verbose Mode On:
VLAN Version Number : 1 Current VLANS : 1000
GVRP Status : enable
Set Done
VLAN Version Number : 1 Current VLANS : 1000
GVRP Status : enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Set Done
IP DSLAM
649
Output Fields:
Field Description
VLAN Version
Number
Version Number of IEEE802.1Q, that device
supports.
Current VLANS The current number of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs that
are configured on this device.
GVRP Status The administrative status requested by
management for GVRP.
References:
gvrp port info commands
gvrp port stats commands
5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp port info [portid <portid-val >]
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify gvrp port info portid <portid-val > [ portvlanid <portvlanid-val > ]
[ acceptframetypes all | tagged ] [ ingressfiltering true|false ] [ gvrpstatus
enable | disable ] [ restrictedvlanreg true|false ][pktpriority <pktpriority-val> ]
[psvlanid <psvlanid-val> | none] [ppstatus enable | disable] [ctosprofileid
<ctosprofileid-val> | none]
Parameter:
Name Description
portid <portid-val> The bridge port id.
Type: Modify － Mandatory
Get － Optional
IDL series User Guide
650
Valid values: 1 - 578
portvlanid
<portvlanid-val>
The VLAN Identifier.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
acceptframetypes all
|tagged
When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When
All, untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this
port.
Type: Modify － Optional
ingressfiltering False
|True
When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames
for VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set.
When false, the port will accept all incoming frames.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True
gvrpstatus enable
|disable
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable',
indicates that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as
'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is also enabled for this
device. When this is 'disable', even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP
INFO' command is 'enable' for the device, GVRP will be
'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP packets
received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all
GVRP Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port.
This configuration shall not be effective for a bridge port
created over PPPOE/IPOE interface.
Type: Modify － Optional
restrictedvlanreg
False |True
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the
value of this control is true(1), then creation of a new
dynamic VLAN entry is permitted only if there is a Static
VLAN Registration Entry for the VLAN concerned, in which,
the Registrar Administrative Control value for this port is,
Normal Registration. Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: False, True
pktpriority
<pktpriority-val>
For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this
priority shall be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on
outgoing interface. In case the bridge port is over an
Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the VC,
on which the packet is to be sent.
Type: Modify － Optional
IP DSLAM
651
Valid values: 0 - 7
psvlanid
<psvlanid-val> | none
Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to
frames received on this port. This is applicable only to
Non-Provider ports. The value zero here means that this field
is not applicable. psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge
port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be
non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid
and ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the
ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 - 4095
ppstatus enable |
disable
This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider
port as per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only
in Vlan stacking scenario. The modification of this parameter
is allowed only when the bridge port is disabled. If the value
of this field is enable i.e the port is a provider port, then
Priority of the incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved
irrespective of gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the
Svlan to which the packet belongs to.
Type: Modify － Optional
ctosprofileid
<ctosprofileid-val> |
none
This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile
associated† with this interface. Value zero for this means no
CtoS profile associated with this port.† psvlanid and
ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be
zero. In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces
psvlanid value must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for
such a port. For other bridge ports† psvlanid value can be
zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have non-zero value
for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid
shall be ignored.
Type: Modify － Optional
Valid values: 0 -4
Example:
$ get gvrp port info portid 10
IDL series User Guide
652
Output:
Verbose Mode On:
VLAN Version Number : 1 Current VLANS : 1000
GVRP Status : enable
Set Done
VLAN Version Number : 1 Current VLANS : 1000
GVRP Status : enable
Verbose Mode Off:
Set Done
Output Fields:
Field Description
Port Id The bridge port id.
Port VLAN Index The VLAN Identifier.
Accept Frame Types When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged frames or
Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When All, untagged
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be
accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
Ingress Filtering When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for VLANs,
which do not include this Port in its Member set. When false, the port
will accept all incoming frames.
Gvrp Status The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable', indicates
that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP
INFO' command is also enabled for this device. When this is 'disable',
even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is 'enable' for the
device, GVRP will be 'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP
packets received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all GVRP
Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port. This configuration
shall not be effective for a bridge port created over PPPOE/IPOE
interface.
Failed Registrations The total number of failed GVRP registrations, for any reason, on this
port.
Last Pdu Origin The Source MAC Address of the last GVRP message received on
this port.
Restricted Vlan
Registration
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the value of
this control is true(1), then creation of a new dynamic VLAN entry is
IP DSLAM
653
permitted only if there is a Static VLAN Registration Entry for the
VLAN concerned, in which, the Registrar Administrative Control value
for this port is, Normal Registration.
GVRP PacketsPrio' For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this priority shall
be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface. In
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.
PS VLAN Index Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to frames
received on this port. This is applicable only to Non-Provider ports.
The value zero here means that this field is not applicable. psvlanid
and ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be zero.
In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value
must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and
ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall
be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored
Port Provider Status This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider port as
per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only in Vlan stacking
scenario. The modification of this parameter is allowed only when the
bridge port is disabled. If the value of this field is
GS_STATE_ENABLE i.e the port is a provider port, then Priority of the
incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved irrespective of
gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the Svlan to which the packet
belongs to.
CtoS Profile Id This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile associated†
with this interface. Value zero for this means no CtoS profile
associated with this port.† psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge port on
PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be non-zero,
ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other bridge ports†
psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have
non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and
psvlanid shall be ignored.
References:
gvrp commands
IDL series User Guide
654
5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats
Description:
Use this command to get GVRP port statistics.
Command Syntax:
get gvrp port stats [portid <portid-val >]
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats
Description:
Use this command to reset GVRP port statistics.
Command Syntax:
reset gvrp port stats portid <portid-val>
Parameter:
Name Description
portid <portid-val > The bridge port id.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 1-578
Example:
$ get gvrp port stats
Output:
ortId : 6
Recv Join Empty : 100 Send Join Empty : 100
Recv Join In : 200 Send Join In : 200
Recv Empty : 200 Send Empty : 200
Recv Leave : 300 Send Leave : 300
Recv Leave All : 300 Send Leave All : 300
Leave Empty Rx : 300 Leave Empty Tx : 300
Output Fields:
Field Description
PortId Index of the Bridge Port.
Recv Join Empty Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages
received.
IP DSLAM
655
Send Join Empty Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages
sent.
Recv Join In Counter for the number of Join In Messages
received.
Send Join In Counter for the number of Join In Messages sent.
Recv Empty Counter for the number of Empty Messages
received.
Send Empty Counter for the number of Empty Messages sent.
Recv Leave Counter for the number of Leave Messages
received.
Send Leave Counter for the number of Leave Messages sent.
Recv Leave All Counter for the number of Leave All Messages
received.
Send Leave All Counter for the number of Leave All Messages
sent.
Leave Empty Rx Counter for the number of Leave Empty Rx
received.
Leave Empty Tx Counter for the number of Leave Empty Tx sent.
References:
gvrp commands
5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan curr info [vlanid <vlanid-val >]
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanid <vlanid-val >
The VLAN Identifier.
Type: Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
IDL series User Guide
656
Example:
$ get vlan curr info vlanid 45
Output:
VLAN Index : 45
VLAN Status : 1
Egress Ports : 24
Untagged Ports : 24
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id : 1
Output field:
Field Description
VLAN Index The VLAN identifier
VLAN Status This value indicates the status of the VLAN Port
corresponding to this entry. Other (1) - the entry is
for the default VLAN created for the system.
Permanent (2) - this entry, corresponding to an
entry in dot1qVlanStaticTable, is currently in use
and will remain so after the next reset of the
device. The port lists for this entry include ports
from the equivalent dot1qVlanStaticTable entry
and ports learnt dynamically. Dynamic (3) - this
entry is currently in use and will remain so until
removed by GVRP. There is no static entry for
this VLAN and it will be removed when the last port
leaves the VLAN.
Egress Ports The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
this VLAN, as either tagged or untagged frames.
Untagged Ports The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
this VLAN as untagged frames. In Stacked Vlan
mode this applies tagging/untagging for C-VLAN.
Bridging Mode This specifies the state of full bridging for the Vlan.
There can be 3 values associated with this based
on global fullBridgingStatus. These values can
be restricted bridging, unrestricted full bridging and
residential bridging. The user can specify the
bridging mode for the vlan in the
Dot1qVlanStaticTable table as one of these
IP DSLAM
657
values; otherwise the vlan inherits the globally set
bridging mode. Unrestricted bridging is not
applicable for bridge ports created over pppoe
interface even though the vlan may be
unrestricted.For a Vlan with bridging mode as
CrossConnect there is no learning and lookup and
there are at most two member ports for it. In band
Management traffic cannot run for such a vlan.
VLAN here means the 802.1q vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of
Stacked Vlan Mode.
Flood support Status This tells if the flooding shall be done for unknown
unicast packets for this vlan or not. The unknown
unicast packets shall be flooded to all ports for a
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) is
enabled or throttle and the value per vlan is also
enabled else dropped. This field is not applicable if
dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is CrossConnect
Broadcast support
Status
This tells if the broadcast shall be done for this vlan
or not. The broadcast packets shall be
broadcasted on all ports for a vlan if global value
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan
are both enabled else dropped. This field is not
applicable if dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is
CrossConnect.
Reserved Mac Profile
Id
The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to
determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q
and IEEE 802.1ad.
5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to get.
IDL series User Guide
658
Command Syntax:
get vlan mapprofile info [profileid <profileid-val>]
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan mapprofile info profileid <profileid-val>profiletype CtoS
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan mapprofile info profileid <profileid-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Vlan Map profile identifier
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
profiletype CToS Profile type
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Example:
$ create vlan mapprofile info profileid 3 profiletype CtoS
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 3 Profile Type : CtoS
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IP DSLAM
659
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Id Vlan Map profile identifier
Profile Type Profile type
References:
VLAN commands
5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan mapprofile param [profileid <profileid-val>] [vlan1 <vlan1-val>]
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan mapprofile param profileid <profileid-val> vlan1 <vlan1-val>vlan2
<vlan2-val>
5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan mapprofile param profileid <profileid-val>vlan1 <vlan1-val>
Parameters:
Name Description
profileid <profileid-val> Vlan Map profile identifier.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
660
Valid values: 1 - 4
vlan1 <vlan1-val> This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4095
vlan2 <vlan2-val> This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range
for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - 4095
Example:
$ create vlan mapprofile param profileid 1 vlan1 1 vlan2 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Profile Id : 1 Vlan 1 : 1
Vlan 2 : 2
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
Output field:
Field Description
Profile Id Vlan Map profile identifier.
Vlan 1 This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given
profile.
IP DSLAM
661
Vlan 2 This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range
for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-4097. There can only be single entry for this
parameter corresponding to a given profile.
References:
VLAN commands
5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static
Description:
Use this command to get.
Command Syntax:
get vlan static [vlanname <vlan-name>] [vlanid <vlanid-val>]
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static
Description:
Use this command to create.
Command Syntax:
create vlan static vlanname <vlan-name>vlanid <vlanid-val> [ egressports
<egressports-val> ] [ forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> ]
[ untaggedports <untaggedports-val> ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted |
Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ] [ igmpsnoopaction
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio <igmpsnoopingressprio-val> | none ]
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac
<bngmac-val> ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]
IDL series User Guide
662
5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static
Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax:
modify vlan static vlanname <vlan-name>vlanid <vlanid-val> [ egressports
<egressports-val> ] [ forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> ]
[ untaggedports <untaggedports-val> ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted
| Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ] [ igmpsnoopaction
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio <igmpsnoopingressprio-val> | none ]
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac
<bngmac-val> ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static
Description:
Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax:
delete vlan static vlanname <vlanname-val > | vlanid <vlanid-val >
Parameters:
Name Description
vlanname <vlanname-val > An administratively assigned string, which may be used to identify
the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of create cmnd. In case of
get/modify/delete - either vlan name or vlan id can be given.
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
vlanid <vlanid-val The VLAN Identifier. GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special
Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are
neither created nor learned in the system. The valid range for this
field also includes GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the
range 1-4095
Type: Create -- Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Modify -- Mandatory
Get -- Optional
IP DSLAM
663
Valid values: 1 - 4095
egressports
<egressports-val>
The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the egress list
for this VLAN by management
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
forbidegressports
<forbidegressports-val>
The set of ports which are prohibited by management from being
included in the egress list for this VLAN.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
untaggedports
<untaggedports-val>
The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for this
VLAN, as untagged.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 0
bridgingmode Restricted |
Unrestricted | Residential |
CrossConnect
This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN. There can be
three values associated with this, based on global
fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted bridging,
unrestricted full bridging and residential bridging. If the user does
not specify the bridging mode at the time of VLAN creation, the
VLAN inherits the globally set bridging mode. The user can modify
bridging mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only specify
globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The bridging modes are
defined as Restricted Full Bridging, Unrestricted full bridging and
Resedential bridging. The default residential VLAN, like any other
residential VLAN allows only one net side bridge port as its
member. This port shall be added automatically to the default
VLAN if it is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to the
egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after removing the
previously added net side bridge port. Unrestricted bridging is not
applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE interface even
though the VLAN may be unrestricted.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: usly added net side bridge port. Unrestricted
bridging is not applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE
interface even though the VLAN may be unrestricted.
IDL series User Guide
664
Default value: Resedential bridging
floodsupport enable | disable This specifies if the flooding has to be done for unknown unicast
packets for this vlan or not.The default value for this shall be taken
from enable when vlan is created. The unknown unicast packets
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value (present
inDot1dTpInfo) is enabled or throttle, and the value pervlan is also
enabled else dropped.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: enable
bcastsupport enable | disable This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this vlan or not.
The default value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is
created. The broadcast packets shall be flooded on all ports for a
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan
are both enabled else dropped.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value:enable
resvmacprofileid
<resvmacprofileid-val>
The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to determine the
behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames. Reserved Mac
addresses are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in
IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN static entry
creation to succeed. Further, even if the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the corresponding
entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param Table" is missing the packets
will be dropped. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1 - 4
Default value: 1
igmpsnoopaction Drop |
TransparentlyForward | Learn
This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then
igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry will be
learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction with global
igmpsnoopStatus and port level igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is
IGMP functionality will be executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled
globally and on the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual
vlan on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP frames shall
IP DSLAM
665
be dropped. If action is "transparently forward", then IGMP frames
received for this Vlan shall be forwarded transparently and learning
will not be done
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Learn
igmpsnoopproxyreporting
Enable | Disable
This parameter provides a configuration option to choose between
transparent snooping or Proxy reporting behavior per Vlan.
Depending on the type of mode, IGMP module will perform either
transparent snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being referred is the
one on which learning will happen. It will be multicast vlan, if
"Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Disable
igmpsnoopingressprio
igmpsnoopingressprio | none
This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced on the
incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has valid value, then
that value will be used for traffic class determination and packet
priority. If valid egress priority is configured for a port, then egress
priority shall override the ingress priority. In addition, there is
support of invalid value for ingress priority to indicate that the
priority is not to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the
Vlan which is being referred is the one on which learning shall
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is
enabled.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 -7
Additional Values: 8
Default value: 8
darpstatus Enable | Disable This specifies whether ARP packets received on this VLAN are to
be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge
port mapping learnt using DRA. This attribute is effective in
conjunction with the attribute 'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of
'Dot1dBasePortExtTable' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as
mentioned above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the
normal bridging flow.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
IDL series User Guide
666
Default value: enable
darpfailedhandling Drop |
TransparentForward |
FloodTrustedPorts
This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet received on
this VLAN for which it is not possible to determine a single port
using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using
DRA. If the value is drop, the ARP packet will be dropped. If the
value is Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be forwarded
as per the normal bridging. If the value is FloodTrustedPorts, the
ARP packet will be forwarded as per the normal bridging, but only
on ports that are trusted.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: FloodTrustedPorts
drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP broadcast
packet received for this vlan will be converted to unicast packet or
not.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Disable
bngmac <bngmac-val> This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this VLAN. If VLAN
is configured to convert DHCP broadcast packets to Unicast
packets,then this MAC address is used as destination MAC
address.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"
drastatus Enable | Disable This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is enabled
for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as per the port
configuration on which DHCP packet is received. If disabled DRA
will not perform any action on the DHCP packets received over this
vlan.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Enable
piastatus Enable | Disable This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is enabled for
this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per the port configuration
on which PPPoE packet is received. If disabled PIA will not
perform any action on the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: Enable
IP DSLAM
667
findoneportfailact drop |
floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward
This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails to
determine the destined port for downstream DHCP packets. If this
field is set to drop then the packets are dropped. If it is specified as
floodtrusted then packets are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is
set as TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to all
the ports as per normal bridging functionality.
Type: Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: TransparentlyForward
Example :
$ create vlan static vlanname gsvlan vlanid 1 egressports 1 2 20 forbidegressports
34 5 untaggedports 2 bridgingmode Residential bcastsupport enable floodsupport
enable resvmacprofileid 1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
VLAN Name : gsvlan
VLAN Index : 1
Egress ports : 1 2 20
Forbidden Egress Ports : 34 5
Untagged Ports : 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
Reserved Mac Profile Id : GS_CFG_DEF_RSVD_MAC_PROFILE_ID
Igmp Snoop Action : Learn
Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status : Normal
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority : 4 Directed ARP status : enable
DARPFailedHandling : enable
DRA Bcast To Ucast : Enable
BNG MAC address : 00:01:03:04:05:11
DRA Status : Enable
PIA Status : Enable Find One Port Fail Act : Drop
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created
IDL series User Guide
668
Output field:
Field Description
VLAN Name An administratively assigned string, which may be used
to identify the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of
create cmnd. In case of get/modify/delete - either vlan
name or vlan id can be given.
VLAN Index The VLAN Identifier. GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is
a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those
VLANs that are neither created nor learned in the
system. The valid range for this field also includes
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range
1-4095.
Egress ports The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by management
Forbidden Egress Ports The set of ports which are prohibited by management
from being included in the egress list for this VLAN.
Untagged Ports The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets
for this VLAN, as untagged.
Bridging Mode This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN.
There can be three values associated with this, based on
global fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted
bridging, unrestricted full bridging and residential
bridging. If the user does not specify the bridging mode
at the time of VLAN creation, the VLAN inherits the
globally set bridging mode. The user can modify bridging
mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only
specify globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The
bridging modes are defined as Restricted Full Bridging,
Unrestricted full bridging and Resedential bridging. The
default residential VLAN, like any other residential VLAN
allows only one net side bridge port as its member. This
port shall be added automatically to the default VLAN if it
is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to
the egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after
removing the previously added net side bridge port.
Unrestricted bridging is not applicable for bridge ports
created over the PPPoE interface even though the VLAN
may be unrestricted.
IP DSLAM
669
Flood support Status This specifies if the flooding has to be done for
unknown unicast packets for this vlan or not.The default
value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is
created. The unknown unicast packets shall be flooded
on all ports for a vlan if global value (present
inDot1dTpInfo)is enabled or throttle, and the value
pervlan is also enabled else dropped.
Broadcast support Status This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this
vlan or not. The default value for this shall be taken from
enable when vlan is created. The broadcast packets
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan are both
enabled else dropped.
Reserved Mac Profile Id The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to
determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and
IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN
static entry creation to succeed. Further, even if the
specified "ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the
corresponding entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param
Table" is missing the packets will be dropped. VLAN
here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan
mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.
Igmp Snoop Action This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then
igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry
will be learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction
with global igmpsnoopStatus and port level
igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is IGMP functionality will be
executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled globally and on
the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual vlan
on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP
frames shall be dropped. If action is "transparently
forward", then IGMP frames received for this Vlan shall
be forwarded transparently and learning will not be done
Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status This parameter provides a configuration option to
choose between transparent snooping or Proxy
reporting behavior per Vlan. Depending on the type of
mode, IGMP module will perform either transparent
IDL series User Guide
670
snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being
referred is the one on which learning will happen. It will
be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced
on the incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has
valid value, then that value will be used for traffic class
determination and packet priority. If valid egress priority
is configured for a port, then egress priority shall override
the ingress priority. In addition, there is support of invalid
value for ingress priority to indicate that the priority is not
to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the Vlan
which is being referred is the one on which learning shall
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option"
is enabled.
Directed ARP status This specifies whether ARP packets received on this
VLAN are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId,
IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using DRA.
This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute
'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of 'Dot1dBasePortExtTable'
MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as
per the normal bridging flow.
DARPFailedHandling This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet
received on this VLAN for which it is not possible to
determine a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. If the value is
drop, the ARP packet will be dropped. If the value is
Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be
forwarded as per the normal bridging. If the value is
FloodTrustedPorts, the ARP packet will be forwarded as
per the normal bridging, but only on ports that are
trusted.
DRA Bcast To Ucast This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP
broadcast packet received for this vlan will be converted
to unicast packet or not.
BNG MAC address This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this
VLAN. If VLAN is configured to convert DHCP broadcast
packets to Unicast packets,then this MAC address is
used as destination MAC address.
IP DSLAM
671
DRA Status This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as
per the port configuration on which DHCP packet is
received. If disabled DRA will not perform any action on
the DHCP packets received over this vlan.
PIA Status This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per
the port configuration on which PPPoE packet is
received. If disabled PIA will not perform any action on
the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.
Find One Port Fail Act This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails
to determine the destined port for downstream DHCP
packets. If this field is set to drop then the packets are
dropped. If it is specified as floodtrusted then packets
are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is set as
TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to
all the ports as per normal bridging functionality.
References:
VLAN commands
IDL series User Guide
672
5.28 Miscelleneous Commands
5.28.1 File Commands
5.28.1.1 Apply
Description:
Use this command to apply a configuration file stored on the system
Command Syntax:
Apply fname <file-name> [version <version>] [besteffort true|false]
Parameters:
Name Description
fname <file-name>
This specifies the name of the configuration file (the
extension of the file shall be .cfg) to be applied. The
file shall contain valid CLI commands. The user shall
specify the filename for files present in the system as
directories. The directories are /nvram/cfg/
factorydef/, /nvram/user/, /sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.
Type: mandatory
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: (‘A’-’Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘,’_’)
version <version>
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
applied.
Type: Optional
Default Value: Incase of multiple version files the
active copy gets applied. Not valid for single version
file.
besteffort true|false
If the besteffort flag is false, command execution (as
specified in "file-name"file) stops immediately after a
command returns an error. If the besteffort flag is
true, command execution (as specified in
"file-name"file) continues even if a command returns
an error.
Type : Optional
Default value : false
Mode:
Super-User
IP DSLAM
673
Example:
$ apply fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 2
Output:
The output of the command is dependent on the list of CLI commands in
commands.cfg file.
Example 1:
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:
Verbose on
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0
Entry Created
If-Name : atm-0 LowIfName : dsl-0
MaxVccs : 2 MaxConfVccs : 4
MaxVpiBits : 3 MaxVciBits : 10
OAMSrc : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Up
Example 2:
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0
The output would be:
Entry Created
Output Fields:
None
References:
Upgrade command
Remove command
List command
Download command
IDL series User Guide
674
5.28.1.2 Download
Description:
Use this command to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from the
remote host.
Command Syntax:
download src <src-filename> dest <dest-filename> ip <ip-address> [mode
tftp|ftp] [savemode comapact]
Parameters:
Name Description
src <src-filename>
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file to be
downloaded from a remote host.
The filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension
can be .cfg or .bin or any other user specified extension. A cfg file can contain
only valid CLI commands. A .bin file must bea valid image file.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)
dest <dest-filename>
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file on the
system. The user shall specify the filename for files present in the system, as
directories.
The directories are /nvram/bin/control/ - This directory contains control plane
zipped image. There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the
image file shall be as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool.
The files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/dataplane/ - This directory contains data plane zipped image.
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/decompressor/ - This directory contains decompressor image.
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/dslphy/ - This directory contains DSL physical layer image. Only
one version of image is possible. The name of the image file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
NVRAM.
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/ - This directory contains factory default configuration
files. There can be multiple versions of files. The name of the file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in
IP DSLAM
675
NVRAM.
/nvram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. There can be multiple
versions of files. The files are stored in NVRAM.
/sdram/cfg/ - This directory contains user specific Configuration files with .cfg
extension. The files are stored in SDRAM
/sdram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. The files are stored in
SDRAM.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all Characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)
ip <ip-address>
This specifies the IP address of the remote host from which the file is to be
downloaded.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any valid IP address.
mode tftp | ftp
This specifies the protocol to be used for downloading the file. Currently only
TFTP is supported.
Type: Optional
Default Value : TFTP
savemode compact It allows saving of files in the compact mode. This option is applicable for
downloading user files only.
Note: This option is enabled only when
GS_CFG_USER_COMPACT_FILE_SYSTEM is TRUE.
Type: Optional
Valid Values: compact
Example:
$ download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Downloading The Code File. . .
Download Completed
Verbose Mode Off
Downloading The Code File. . .
Download Completed
Output Fields:
None
IDL series User Guide
676
Caution:
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host. After downloading the
image in safe mode, the system should be rebooted and no other nvram
operations should be tried on the system.
References:
upgrade command
remove command
list command
apply command
5.28.1.3 List
Description:
This command is used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit
Command Syntax:
list fname [/nvram | /sdram]
Parameters:
Name Description
fname [/nvram | /sdram] This specifies whether the files of NVRAM or SDRAM
are to be listed.
/nvram – This lists all directories and files stored in
NVRAM.
/sdram - This lists all directories and files stored in
SDRAM.
Type: Optional.
Default Value: All the files present in the NVRAM or
SDRAM will be displayed.
Mode:
Super-User.
Example :
$ list fname /nvram
IP DSLAM
677
Output :
Verbose Mode On
Flash size : 4194304
Flash Block size : 131072
Free Blocks in Flash : 3
/nvram/bin/control/
Name : CP.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 1424656
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 11
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
Name : DP.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 293092
Time : Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 3
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
Name : gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 91632
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
Name : gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 159408
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 2
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
Name : FD.cfg
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 45
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/cfg/manuf/
Name : Manuf.txt
IDL series User Guide
678
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 5768
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/system/
Name : CFG1
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 262056
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 2
Name : CFG2
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 262056
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 2
Name : LOGS
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 130988
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/user
Name : user.txt
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 5768
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
Verbose Mode Off
Flash size : 4194304
Flash Block size : 131072
Free Blocks in Flash : 4
/nvram/bin/control/
Name : CP.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 1424656
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 11
IP DSLAM
679
/nvram/bin/dataplane/
Name : DP.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 293092
Time : Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 3
/nvram/bin/dslphy/
Name : gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 91632
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
Name : gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 159408
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 2
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/
Name : FD.cfg
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 45
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/cfg/manuf/
Name : Manuf.txt
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 5768
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/system/
Name : CFG1
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 262056
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 2
Name : CFG2
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 262056
IDL series User Guide
680
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 2
Name : LOGS
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 130988
Time :
Permission : SYS State : active
Used Blocks : 1
/nvram/user
Name : user.txt
Version : 1 Size(bytes) : 5768
Time : Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004
Permission : RW State : active
Used Blocks : 1
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Flash Size Total flash size in bytes. This field is relevant for NVRAM files
Flash Block Size Flash Block Size in bytes.This field is relevant for NVRAM files.
Free Blocks in Flash Number of free blocks in flash. This field is relevant for NVRAM
files.
Name The name of the file present in the directory. Name starting with ì/î
indicates directory name.
Version This specifies the version of the file.
Time Time at which the file got created. This is displayed in Day Mon DD
HH:MM:SS YEAR format.
Size The size of the file in bytes.
Permissions Permission of the file. It can be read only, read write or protected.
State The state of the file. It can be active, inactive, tried, latest.
Used Blocks Number of blocks used in the flash by the file.
References:
upgrade command
remove command
apply command
download command
IP DSLAM
681
5.28.1.4 Permission
Description:
Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash.
Command Syntax:
permission fname <fname-val> type ro|rw|pr [version <version-val>]
Parameters:
Name Description
fname fname Name of the file whose permission is to be changed.
Type: mandatory
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: ('A'-
'Z','a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-','_')
version version This specifies the version of the file that need to be
applied.
Type: Optional for single version file.
Mandatory for multiple version file.
type ro|rw|pr This specifies that to what type, ro (read-only), rw
(read-write), or pr (protected), permission of the file is to
be changed.
Type: mandatory
Valid Values : ro | rw | pr
Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ permission fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 1 type ro
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Set Done
Verbose Mode Off
Set Done
Output Fields:
None
IDL series User Guide
682
References:
upgrade command
remove command
list command
download command
5.28.1.5 Ping
Description:
Use to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.
Command Syntax:
ping {ip-address | domain-name} [-t | -n <number>] [-i <time-to-live>] [-w
<seconds>] [-s <size>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ip-address |
domain-name
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or
Domain Name - String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’,
’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
-t This indicates continuous ping to host, until the user interrupts.
Type: Optional
-n <number>
This specifies the number of pings to send to host.
Type : Optional
Valid values : 1-65535
Default Value: 4
-w <seconds>
This specifies the time interval between successive ping requests
Type : Optional
Valid values : 0-65535
Default Value : 2
-I <time-to-live>
This specifies the time-to-live, to be filled in the ping request
Type : Optional
Valid values : 0 – 255
Default Value : 64
-s <size>
This specifies the size of payload for ping. Type : Optional
Valid values : 4-1500
Default Value : 64
IP DSLAM
683
Example:
$ ping 192.168.1.13
Output:
$ ping 192.168.1.13
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=0 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=1 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=2 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=3 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
-------------------- Ping Statistics --------------------
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0 percent packet loss
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
64 bytes of... This denotes the number of bytes in the ping packet and the source IP Address.
Seq This denotes the ping attempt counter value.
Ttl This is the Time to live for the packet.
Rtt This denotes the Round trip Time for the packet. A value less than 10ms is shown as
0.
5.28.1.6 Remove
Description:
Use this command to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit
Command Syntax:
remove fname <file-name> [version <version>]
Parameters:
Name Description
fname <file-name>
This specifies the file name, which needs to be removed. The user shall
specify the filename for files present in the system, as directories. The
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/control/,
/nvram/bin/dataplane/, /nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,
/nvram/user/,/sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters ('A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-', '_')
IDL series User Guide
684
version <version>
This specifies the version of the file that need to be removed.
Type: Optional for single version file. Mandatory for multiple version
file. Default Value:
Example:
$ remove fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg
Output:
Verbose Mode On
File removed
Verbose Mode Off
File removed
Output Fields:
None
References:
apply command
list command
download command
5.28.1.7 Upgrade
Description:
Use this command to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.
Command Syntax:
upgrade fname <file-name> version <version>
Parameters:
Name Description
fname <file-name> This specifies the file name, which needs to be upgraded. The specified
file becomes Active and the present active file is made inactive.The user
shall specify the filename for files present in Columbia, as directories. The
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/dataplane/,
/nvram/bin/decompressor, /nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,
/nvram/ user/,
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)
IP DSLAM
685
version <version>
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
upgraded
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: Decimal number
Mode:
Super-User
Example:
$ upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/commands.cfg version 2
Output:
Verbose Mode On
File upgraded
Verbose Mode Off
File upgraded
Output Fields:
None
References:
apply command
list command
download command
5.28.1.8 Upload
Description:
Use this command to upload the primary/secondary configuration file saved in
flash on the Columbia system to the remote host.
Command Syntax:
Upload src <src-filename> dest <dest-filename> ip <ip-address> [mode tftp | ftp]
IDL series User Guide
686
Parameters:
Name Description
src <src-filename> This specifies the name of the configuration file on the system. The files that can be
uploaded are: /nvram/system/primcfg - The primary configuration file created on the
system after commit operation has been performed once.
/nvram/system/seccfg - The secondary configuration file created on the system after
commit operation has been performed twice.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')
dest <dest-filename> This specifies the name of the configuration file to be uploaded to a remote host. The
filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension can be .cfg
or .bin or any other user specified extension. Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')
ip <ip-address> This specifies the IP address of the remote host to which the file is to be uploaded.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any valid IP address
mode tftp | ftp This specifies the protocol to be used for uploading the file. Currently, only TFTP is
supported.
Type: Optional
Valid values: TFTP
Example:
$ upload src /nvram/system/primcfg dest myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1
Output:
Verbose Mode On
Uploading The Code File. . .
Upload Completed
Verbose Mode Off
Uploading The Code File. . .
Upload Completed
Output Fields:
None
Caution:
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host.
References:
Commit command
IP DSLAM
687
5.28.2 Other Commands
Description:
Use this command to create an alias for any CLI command. You can later call this
command by using the alias-string along with any additional parameters, which
you need to specify. It will display a list of all the aliases currently defined if no
parameter is given.
Command Syntax:
alias [alias-string = aliased-command]
Parameters:
Name Description
alias-string
The string, which you will use to refer to the aliased command,
henceforth. It should not match any CLI keyword.
Type: Optional
Valid values: string of up to 14 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)
aliased-command
This is the total CLI command length (512 characters).
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any string (all printable characters except ‘;’) as long as
the total CLI Command length is not exceeded.
Mode:
Super-User, User
Output:
With Parameters
$alias abc = modify nbsize
Set Done
$abc maxatmport 48
Set Done
Without Parameters
$alias
Alias Command
---------------------------
abc modify nbsize
IDL series User Guide
688
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
Alias This is the new abbreviated command, which you may use
in place of the string specified in Command.
Command The command string which has been aliased.
References:
Unalias command
5.28.2.1 Unalias
Description:
Use this command to delete an alias. Either a particular alias or all aliases can be
removed using this command.
Command Syntax:
unalias [all | <name>]
Parameters:
Name Description
all
Using this option all the aliases defined in the system will be removed.
Type: Optional
Valid values: String ìALL.î
Name
Name of the alias defined for a command.
Type: Optional.
Valid values: Any valid alias defined in the system.
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example :
Unalias abc
Output:
Entry Deleted
Output Fields:
None
IP DSLAM
689
5.28.2.2 Help
Description:
Use this command for a listing of all the user inputs permissible at the point. In
case Help is asked for, as a parameter of any incomplete command, then it
displays a list of all the pending/Extra parameters input by the user. In all other
cases, the next set of permissible keywords required in order to shortlist a
command, is displayed. The Incomplete Command keyed in by the user is made
available again, after help is dispalyed.
Command Syntax:
help |? or <Any Incomplete Command>?
Mode:
Super-User, User
Example:
$help
Command Description
------- -----------
alias To Alias a command
commit Commit the active config to the flash
create Create a new entry of specified type
delete Delete the specified entry
.
.
$delete ?
Command Description
------- -----------
arp IP Net To Media Table
atm ATM Commands
bridge Bridge Commands
dhcp DHCP Commands
.
.
$delete atm ?
Command Description
------- -----------
port ATM port commands
vc intf ATM VC Interface commands
IDL series User Guide
690
Output Fields:
None
Caution:
Currently help is not available between a parameter name and its value.
5.28.2.3 Logout
Description:
Use this command to exit from the CLI shell.
Command Syntax:
logout | quit | exit
5.28.2.4 Prompt
Description:
Use this command to set the new CLI prompt.
Command Syntax:
prompt <new-prompt>
Parameters:
Name Description
prompt <new-prompt>
The new prompt string.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 19 characters ( All characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)
Mode :
Super-User, User
Example :
$ prompt $$$
Output:
Set Done
$$$
Output Fields:
None
IP DSLAM
691
Caution:
None. The modified prompt is not saved across a reboot.
5.28.2.5 Traceroute
Description:
This command is used to trace the route to the specified destination.
Command Syntax:
traceroute {ip <ip-address> | dname <domain-name>} {ping | udp} [-m
<num-of-hops>] [-w <wait-time>] [-p <udp-port-number>] [-q <numof-probes>]
Parameters:
Name Description
ip-address | dname
<domain-name>
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or
Domain Name (String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-
‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
Ping | udp Traceroute probe message type
Type: Mandatory
-m <num-of-hops>
Maximum number of hops to search for ip-address Type: Optional
Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 30
-w <wait-time>
This specifies the timeout in seconds
Type: Optional
Valid values : 0-65535
Default Value : 5
-p <udp-port-number>
Destination UDP port to be used, only when Probe is Udp
Type: Optional.
Valid Values: 0-65535
Default Value : 32768
-q <num-of-probes>
Number of probes to be sent for each TTL value Type: Optional
Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 3
Example:
$ traceroute 192.168.1.13 ping
IDL series User Guide
692
Output:
Tracing route to [192.168.1.13]
Over a maximum of 30 hops
1 0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms 192.168.1.13
Trace complete.
Output Fields:
FIELD Description
1 This denotes the hop counter value.
2-4 These are the Round trip timings of the 3 probe packets sent. A * denotes that
this probe was missed.
5 This is the ip address of the intermediate/destination node.
References:
ping command.
5.28.2.6 Verbose
Description:
Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the
execution of a command (create, delete, modify,get). However if this mode is
turned off, then display only shows the final result of execution of command, i.e.
whether it was successful or failure.
Command Syntax:
Verbose [on | off]
Parameters:
Name Description
On
Used for switching on the verbose mode.
Type: Optional
Valid values: On.
Off
Used for switching off the verbose mode.
Type: Optional.
Valid values: Off
Mode:
Super-User
IP DSLAM
693
Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail
verbose off
create user name admin passwd admin root
create dsl system
create ethernet intf ifname eth-1 ip 192.168.100.111 mask 255.255.255.0
create bridge port intf portid 385 ifname eth-1 status enable
create ethernet intf ifname eth-3 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0
modify bridge mode enable
create atm port ifname atm-1 lowif dsl-1
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-1 lowif aal5-1
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-1 portid 1 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-2 lowif dsl-2
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-2 lowif atm-2 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-2 lowif aal5-2
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-2 portid 2 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-3 lowif dsl-3
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-3 lowif atm-3 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-3 lowif aal5-3
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-3 portid 3 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-4 lowif dsl-4
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-4 lowif atm-4 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-4 lowif aal5-4
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-4 portid 4 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-5 lowif dsl-5
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-5 lowif atm-5 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-5 lowif aal5-5
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-5 portid 5 learning enable status enable
IDL series User Guide
694
create atm port ifname atm-6 lowif dsl-6
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-6 lowif atm-6 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-6 lowif aal5-6
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-6 portid 6 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-7 lowif dsl-7
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-7 lowif atm-7 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-7 lowif aal5-7
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-7 portid 7 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-8 lowif dsl-8
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-8 lowif atm-8 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-8 lowif aal5-8
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-8 portid 8 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-9 lowif dsl-9
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-9 lowif atm-9 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-9 lowif aal5-9
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-9 portid 9 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-10 lowif dsl-10
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-10 lowif atm-10 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-10 lowif aal5-10
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-10 portid 10 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-11 lowif dsl-11
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-11 lowif atm-11 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-11 lowif aal5-11
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-11 portid 11 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-12 lowif dsl-12
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-12 lowif atm-12 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-12 lowif aal5-12
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-12 portid 12 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-13 lowif dsl-13
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-13 lowif atm-13 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-13 lowif aal5-13
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-13 portid 13 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-14 lowif dsl-14
IP DSLAM
695
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-14 lowif atm-14 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-14 lowif aal5-14
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-14 portid 14 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-15 lowif dsl-15
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-15 lowif atm-15 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-15 lowif aal5-15
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-15 portid 15 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-16 lowif dsl-16
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-16 lowif atm-16 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-16 lowif aal5-16
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-16 portid 16 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-17 lowif dsl-17
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-17 lowif atm-17 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-17 lowif aal5-17
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-17 portid 17 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-18 lowif dsl-18
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-18 lowif atm-18 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-18 lowif aal5-18
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-18 portid 18 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-19 lowif dsl-19
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-19 lowif atm-19 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-19 lowif aal5-19
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-19 portid 19 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-20 lowif dsl-20
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-20 lowif atm-20 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-20 lowif aal5-20
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-20 portid 20 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-21 lowif dsl-21
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-21 lowif atm-21 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-21 lowif aal5-21
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-21 portid 21 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-22 lowif dsl-22
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-22 lowif atm-22 vpi 8 vci 81
IDL series User Guide
696
create eoa intf ifname eoa-22 lowif aal5-22
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-22 portid 22 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-23 lowif dsl-23
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-23 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-23 lowif aal5-23
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-23 portid 23 learning enable status enable
create atm port ifname atm-24 lowif dsl-24
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-24 lowif atm-24 vpi 8 vci 81
create eoa intf ifname eoa-24 lowif aal5-24
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-24 portid 24 learning enable status enable
create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action sendtocontrol description IGMP
create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 1 prototypefrom 2 prototypecmp eq
modify filter rule entry ruleid 1 status enable
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eth-1 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-1 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-2 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-3 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-4 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-5 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-6 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-7 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-8 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-9 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-10 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-11 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-12 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-13 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-14 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-15 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-16 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-17 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-18 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-19 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-20 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-21 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-22 stageid 1
IP DSLAM
697
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-23 stageid 1
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-24 stageid 1
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 385 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 1 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 2 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 3 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 4 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 5 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 6 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 7 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 8 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 9 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 10 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 11 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 12 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 13 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 14 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 15 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 16 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 17 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 18 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 19 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 20 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 21 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 22 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 23 status enable
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 24 status enable
verbose on
end
IDL series User Guide
698
Appendix B --- Supported mibs
PropMib (Conexant)
z GSV-ABOND-MIB.mib
z GSV-ACL-MIB.mib
z GSV-ACT-STDBY-MIB.mib
z GSV-ADMIN-MIB.mib
z GSV-AGGR-MIB.mib
z GSV-ATM-MIB.mib
z GSV-BRIDGE-MIB.mib
z GSV-CLFR-MIB.mib
z GSV-CTLPKT-MIB.mib
z GSV-EHDLC-MIB.mib
z GSV-ENTERPRISE-INFO-MIB.mib
z GSV-ETHER-MIB.mib
z GSV-GENFLTR-MIB.mib
z GSV-IA-MIB.mib
z GSV-IGMP-MIB.mib
z GSV-IPOA-IPOE-MIB.mib
z GSV-IRL-MIB.mib
z GSV-LACP-MIB.mib
z GSV-PPPoE-MIB.mib
z GSV-PPPR-MIB.mib
z GSV-RDNCY-AGG-MIB.mib
z GSV-RL-MIB.mib
z GSV-SCHD-PRFL-MIB.mib
z GSV-SNTP-MIB.mib
z GSV-SYS-MIB.mib
z GSV-TC-MIB.mib
z GSV-TRAP-MIB.mib
z GSV-TRFCLASS-MIB.mib
z GSV-TRFCLASS-STATS-MIB.mib
z GSV-VC-AGGR-MIB.mib
z GSV-VMAC-MIB.mib
IP DSLAM
699
StdMib (Standard)
z ADSL-DMT-LINE-MIB.mib
z ADSL-TC-MIB
z ATM-TC-MIB
z draft-ietf-atommib-atm2-17
z draft-ietf-bridge-bridgemib-smiv2-02
z draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-00
z draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-01
z EtherLike-MIB
z HCNUM-TC
z HC-PerfHist-TC-MIB
z IANAifType-MIB.mib
z IEEE8023-LAG-MIB
z IF-MIB
z IP-MIB
z PerfHist-TC-MIB
z Q-BRIDGE-MIB
z RFC1213-MIB
z rfc2515
z rfc2662
z rfc2665
z rfc3440
z RMON2-MIB.mib
z RMON-MIB
z SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
z SNMPv2-MIB
z SNMPv2-SMI
z SNMPv2-TC
z TOKEN-RING-RMON-MIB.mib
z VDSL-LINE-EXT-MCM-MIB
z VDSL-LINE-MIB.txt
IDL series User Guide
700
Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works
IEEE 802.1X is a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that
restricts unauthorized devices from connecting to a local area network (LAN) through
publicly accessible ports. 802.1X authenticates each user device that is connected to a
switch port before making available any services that are offered by the switch or the LAN.
Until the device is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible
Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the device is
connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.
802.1X controls network access by creating two distinct virtual access points at each port
(See Above Figure). One access point is an uncontrolled port; the other is a controlled port.
All traffic through the single port is available to both access points. Only EAPOL traffic is
allowed to pass through the uncontrolled port, which is always open. The controlled port is
open only when the device that is connected to the port has been authorized by 802.1X.
After this authorization takes place, the controlled port opens, allowing normal traffic to
pass.
IP DSLAM
701
Device Roles
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles. (See
below figure).
z Supplicant—Requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the
switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant software.
z Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the host. The authentication server
validates the identity of the host and notifies the DSLAM whether or not the host is authorized to
access the LAN and DSLAM services. Because the DSLAM acts as the proxy, the authentication
service is transparent to the host. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only
supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged
between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.
z DSLAM (Authenticator)—Controls the physical access to the network that is based on the
authentication status of the host. The DSLAM acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the host and
the authentication server, requesting identity information from the host, verifying information with the
authentication server, and relaying a response to the host. The DSLAM interacts with the RADIUS
client. The RADIUS client encapsulates and decapsulates the EAP frames and interacts with the
authentication server.
z When the DSLAM receives Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames and
relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP
frame is reencapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined
during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame
format. When the DSLAM receives the frames from the authentication server, the server's frame
header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the
host.
IDL series User Guide
702
Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange
The host initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the
DSLAM to request the host's identity.
When the host supplies its identity, the DSLAM acts as the intermediary, pass EAP frames
between the host and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the
authentication succeeds, the DSLAM port becomes authorized.
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method that is being
used. The below fiugre shows a message exchange that is initiated by the host using the
One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.
IP DSLAM
703
802.1X CLI commands
Specifying RADIUS Servers
To specify one or more RADIUS servers, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task Command
Step 1 Specify the IP address of up to three RADIUS
servers. Specify the primary server using the
primary keyword. Optionally, specify the destination
UDP port to use on the server.
create radius server
ip_addr [acct-port
port_number] [primary]
Step 2 Verify the RADIUS server configuration. get radius
Specifying the RADIUS Key
Use the RADIUS key to encrypt and authenticate all communication between the
RADIUS client and server. You must configure the same key on the client and the
RADIUS server.
The length of the key is limited to 65 characters. It can include any printable ASCII
characters except tabs.
To specify the RADIUS key, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task Command
Step 1 Specify the RADIUS key that is used to encrypt
packets that are sent to the RADIUS server.
create radius key key
Step 2 Verify the RADIUS configuration. get radius
Configuring 802.1X Authentication
The following sections describe how to configure 802.1X authentication on the switch.
IDL series User Guide
704
Enabling 802.1X globally
You must enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system.
To globally enable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task Command
Globally enable 802.1X. create dot1x system-auth-control enable
Disabling 802.1X globally
When you enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system, you can disable it
globally.
To globally disable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:
Task Command
Globally disable 802.1X. Create dot1x system-auth-control disable
Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports
After you enable 802.1X authentication globally, you can enable and initialize
802.1X authentication from the console only for individual ports.
To enable and initialize 802.1X authentication for access to the switch, perform this
task in privileged mode:
Task Command
Step 1 Enable 802.1X control on a specific port. create port dot1x mod/port
port-control auto
Step 2 Initialize 802.1X on the same port. Create port dot1x mod/port initialize
Step 3 Verify the 802.1X configuration. get port dot1x mod/port
IP DSLAM
705
Enabling Multiple Hosts
You can enable a specific port to allow multiple users. When a port is enabled for
multiple users, and a host that is connected to that port is authorized successfully,
any host (with any MAC address) is allowed to send and receive traffic on that port.
If you connect multiple hosts to that port through a hub, you can reduce the
security level on that port.
To enable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in
privileged mode:
Task Command
Enable multiple hosts on a specific port. create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host enable
Disabling Multiple Hosts
You must disable access for multiple users on any port where it is enabled.
To disable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in
privileged mode:
Task Command
Disable multiple hosts on a specific port. create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host disable
802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM
In 802.1x application, the IP DSLAM acts as the pure Ethernet packets transport
system. The 802.1x packets pass through the IP DSLAM without further operation
(see below figure)
IDL series User Guide
706
Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM
DSLAM and IP DSLAM in PPPoE application sample.
As above Figure displays, in traditional ATM-based ADSL network, the user application
information is encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC (Virtual
Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link. (In this example,
the user information (PPPoE encapsulated) is encapsulated by ATU-R using RFC-1483
Bridge-mode encapsulation format.).
All the ATM cells belong to the specified VC is concentrated by the DSLAM, and switched in
the ATM network clouds, to the defined destination (ISPs or Offices), at there the ATM cells
and PPPoE frames is resolved by the Broadband Access Server, and the user application
information is serviced.
IP DSLAM
707
In addition to traditional ATM-based ADSL network. As above Figure displays, the user
application information is still encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC
(Virtual Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link.
In the IP DSLAM, all the ATM cells belong to the specified VC are decapsulated back to the
original PPPoE encapsulated Ethernet packet (if VLAN-mode of the specified ADSL port is
disabled), or mapped to the pre-defined Ethernet-VLAN packets (if VLAN-mode of the
specified ADSL port is enabled). IP DSLAM concentrates all Ethernet-with/without
VLAN-tag packets from 24/48 ports’ ADSL and uplinks to ISP’s Ethernet-All-The-Way
network. The PPPoE frames will be resolved at Broadband Access Server (BAS), and the
user application information was serviced.
The IP DSLAM supports ADSL CPE Bridge-mode. For future FW upgrade, the IP DSLAM
can act as BRAS to process user application information directly.
IP DSLAM provides Ethernet-with/without VLAN tag to ATM-PVC mapping feature for the
ISP to isolate user’s data with security and to provide lots of service enhancement
capabilities. IP DSLAM supports 8 ATM PVC links for each CPE.

Navigation menu